Cisco Service Router Application Reference guide

Add to my manuals
866 Pages

advertisement

Cisco Service Router Application Reference guide | Manualzz

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite,

Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command

Reference Guide

Februrary 29, 2016

Cisco Systems, Inc.

www.cisco.com

Cisco has more than 200 offices worldwide.

Addresses, phone numbers, and fax numbers are listed on the Cisco website at www.cisco.com/go/offices.

THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. ALL

STATEMENTS, INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE BUT ARE PRESENTED WITHOUT

WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR APPLICATION OF ANY PRODUCTS.

THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE INFORMATION PACKET THAT

SHIPPED WITH THE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE. IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE

OR LIMITED WARRANTY, CONTACT YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY.

The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a program developed by the University of California, Berkeley (UCB) as part of UCB’s public domain version of the UNIX operating system. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1981, Regents of the University of California.

NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER WARRANTY HEREIN, ALL DOCUMENT FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” WITH

ALL FAULTS. CISCO AND THE ABOVE-NAMED SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT

LIMITATION, THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF

DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE.

IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING,

WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL, EVEN IF CISCO

OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

Cisco and the Cisco logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Cisco and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. To view a list of Cisco trademarks, go to this

URL: www.cisco.com/go/trademarks . Third-party trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (1110R)

Any Internet Protocol (IP) addresses used in this document are not intended to be actual addresses. Any examples, command display output, and figures included in the document are shown for illustrative purposes only. Any use of actual IP addresses in illustrative content is unintentional and coincidental.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

© 2004–2016 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

C H A P T E R

1

C H A P T E R

2

C O N T E N T S

Preface

xv

Document Revision History

xv

Audience

xv

Document Organization

xvi

Document Conventions

xvi

Related Documentation

xvii

Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request

xvii

Command-Line Interface Command Summary

1-1

Using VDS-IS Device Modes

1-1

Using Command-Line Processing

1-1

Using Command Modes

1-2

Using EXEC Mode

1-3

Using Global Configuration Mode

1-3

Using Interface Configuration Mode

1-4

Using Other Configuration Modes

1-4

Checking the Command Syntax

1-5

System Help

1-6

Filtering Output Using Output Modifiers

1-6

Saving Configuration Changes

1-6

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

2-1

aaa

2-23

access-lists

2-27

acquirer (EXEC)

2-30

acquirer (Global configuration)

2-33

acquisition-distribution

2-35

alarm

2-37

area nssa

2-39

area stub

2-40

asset

2-41

authsvr

2-42

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide iii

Contents

bandwidth (Global configuration)

2-45

bandwidth (interface configuration)

2-48

banner

2-50

bitrate

2-53

blink

2-56

bootstrap-node

2-57

cache

2-59

capability

2-64

cd

2-65

cdn-select

2-66

cdnfs

2-67

cdsm

2-70

clear cache

2-73

clear content

2-75

clear ip

2-77

clear ipv6

2-79

clear isis

2-80

clear logging

2-82

clear service-router

2-83

clear srp database offline

2-84

clear srp descriptor

2-85

clear srp neighbor

2-87

clear srp resource

2-90

clear srp route

2-92

clear statistics

2-94

clear transaction-logs

2-99

clear users

2-100

clear wmt

2-101

clock (EXEC)

2-102

clock (Global configuration)

2-104

cms (EXEC)

2-107

cms (Global configuration)

2-111

configure

2-114

contentmgr

2-115

content-mgr disk-info force-reset

2-118

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide iv

content-origin

2-119

copy

2-120

cpfile

2-123

debug

2-124

debug ip bgp

2-135

debug ip ospf

2-137

debug ip proximity

2-140

debug ip rib

2-141

debug isis

2-143

debug srp

2-145

delfile

2-147

deltree

2-148

device

2-149

dir

2-151

direct-server-return

2-152

disable

2-153

disk (EXEC)

2-154

disk (Global configuration)

2-159

distribution

2-163

dnslookup

2-167

domain

2-168

enable

2-169

enable password

2-170

end

2-171

exec-timeout

2-172

exit

2-173

expert-mode password

2-174

external-ip

2-175

find-pattern

2-177

flash-media-streaming

2-179

flooding

2-182

geo-location-server

2-183

gulp

2-185

help

2-188

hostname

2-189

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Contents v

Contents

install

2-190

interface

2-191

ip (Global configuration)

2-196

ip (Interface configuration)

2-202

ip access-list

2-205

ip ospf priority

2-213

ip rib route

2-214

ip router isis

2-216

ipv6

2-217

isis

2-221

is-type

2-224

kernel

2-226

key

2-227

key-string

2-228

key chain

2-229

lacp

2-231

line

2-233

lls

2-234

limit memory

2-235

location community

2-236

log-adjacency-changes

2-239

logging

2-240

log-neighbor-changes

2-244

ls

2-245

lsp-mtu

2-246

mkdir

2-247

mkfile

2-248

model

2-249

movie-streamer

2-251

mtu

2-254

multicast (Global Configuration)

2-255

multicast (EXEC Configuration)

2-258

neighbor

2-265

net

2-268

netmon

2-269

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide vi

netstatr

2-270

network area

2-271

no (Global configuration)

2-273

no (interface configuration)

2-275

ntp

2-276

ntpdate

2-278

ping

2-279

ping srp

2-280

ping6

2-281

port-channel

2-282

primary-interface

2-284

proximity algorithm bgp

2-286

proximity engine enable

2-292

pwd

2-295

radius-server

2-296

rcp

2-300

reload

2-301

rename

2-302

restore

2-303

rmdir

2-306

router bgp

2-307

router isis

2-308

router ospf

2-310

router srp

2-312

rtsp

2-313

rule

2-316

script

2-327

service

2-328

service-router

2-330

setup

2-346

show aaa

2-347

show access-lists 300

2-350

show acquirer

2-351

show alarms

2-353

show arp

2-356

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Contents vii

Contents

show authentication

2-357

show authsvr

2-358

show bandwidth

2-359

show banner

2-361

show bitrate

2-362

show cache

2-363

show cache-router

2-365

show capability

2-366

show cdn-select

2-367

show cdnfs

2-368

show clock

2-370

show cms

2-373

show content

2-375

show content-mgr

2-378

show content-origin

2-382

show debugging

2-384

show debugging srp

2-387

show device-mode

2-388

show direct-server-return

2-390

show disks

2-391

show distribution

2-396

show flash

2-409

show flash-media-streaming

2-411

show ftp

2-413

show hardware

2-414

show hosts

2-420

show interface

2-421

show inventory

2-426

show ip access-list

2-428

show ip bgp

2-430

show ip bgp all

2-432

show ip bgp community

2-433

show ip bgp ipv4 unicast

2-435

show ip bgp memory

2-436

show ip bgp neighbors

2-437 viii

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

show ip bgp nexthop-database

2-439

show ip bgp summary

2-440

show ip interface

2-441

show ip ospf

2-442

show ip ospf border-routers

2-444

show ip ospf database

2-445

show ip ospf interface

2-451

show ip ospf memory

2-453

show ip ospf neighbor

2-455

show ip ospf request-list

2-457

show ip ospf retransmission-list

2-458

show ip ospf route

2-459

show ip ospf rspf route

2-461

show ip ospf traffic

2-463

show ip proximity algorithm

2-465

show ip proximity interface

2-466

show ip proximity servers

2-467

show ip rib clients

2-468

show ip rib memory

2-469

show ip rib recursive-next-hop

2-471

show ip rib route

2-472

show ip rib unresolved-next-hop

2-474

show ip routes

2-475

show ip static route

2-477

show ipv6

2-478

show isis adjacency

2-480

show isis clns route

2-482

show isis database

2-483

show isis hostname-table

2-487

show isis interface

2-488

show isis ip route

2-491

show isis ip rspf route

2-493

show isis memory

2-495

show isis process

2-496

show isis rrm

2-497

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Contents ix

Contents

show isis spf-log

2-498

show isis srm

2-500

show isis ssn

2-501

show key chain

2-502

show lacp

2-503

show limit memory

2-505

show logging

2-506

show movie-streamer

2-508

show multicast

2-510

show ntp

2-511

show processes

2-513

show programs

2-515

show radius-server

2-521

show rcp

2-523

show rtsp

2-524

show rule

2-525

show running-config

2-527

show service-router

2-531

show services

2-537

show snmp

2-539

show srp database

2-543

show srp leafset

2-550

show srp memory

2-552

show srp multicast database

2-553

show srp neighbor

2-556

show srp process

2-559

show srp replica-set

2-560

show srp route

2-561

show srp subscribers

2-563

show ssh

2-564

show standby

2-565

show startup-config

2-566

show statistics aaa

2-569

show statistics access-lists 300

2-570

show statistics acquirer

2-571

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide x

show statistics admission

2-574

show statistics authsvr

2-576

show statistics cdn-select

2-579

show statistics cdnfs

2-580

show statistics content-mgr

2-582

show statistics distribution

2-585

show statistics flash-media-streaming

2-588

show statistics icmp

2-597

show statistics ip

2-603

show statistics isis

2-607

show statistics movie-streamer

2-609

show statistics netstat

2-612

show statistics radius

2-613

show statistics replication

2-614

show statistics service-router

2-618

show statistics services

2-624

show statistics snmp

2-625

show statistics srp

2-627

show statistics tacacs

2-628

show statistics tcp

2-629

show statistics transaction-logs

2-638

show statistics udp

2-640

show statistics web-engine

2-641

show statistics wmt

2-650

show tacacs

2-656

show tech-support

2-658

show telnet

2-664

show transaction-logging

2-665

show url-signature

2-669

show user

2-670

show users

2-671

show version

2-672

show web-engine

2-674

show wmt

2-676

shutdown (interface configuration)

2-682

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Contents xi

Contents

shutdown (EXEC)

2-683

snmp-server community

2-691

snmp-server contact

2-692

snmp-server enable traps

2-693

snmp-server group

2-695

snmp-server host

2-697

snmp-server location

2-700

snmp-server notify inform

2-701

snmp-server trap-source

2-703

snmp-server user

2-705

snmp-server view

2-707

splunk-uf-monitor

2-709

ss

2-713

sshd

2-715

streaming-interface

2-717

sysmon

2-718

sysreport

2-719

tacacs

2-720

tcpdump

2-724

tcpmon

2-729

tcp timestamp

2-731

telnet

2-732

tcp tw-recycle

2-733

tcp tw-reuse

2-734

telnet enable

2-735

terminal

2-736

test-url

2-737

top

2-741

traceroute

2-742

traceroute srp

2-745

traceroute6

2-746

transaction-log force

2-747

transaction-logs

2-749

type

2-765

type-tail

2-767

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide xii

A P P E N D I X

A

A P P E N D I X

B

I

N D E X

undebug

2-770

url-signature

2-772

username

2-776

web-engine (EXEC)

2-779

web-engine (Global configuration)

2-783

whoami

2-789

wmt

2-790

write

2-804

Acronyms

A-1

Standard Time Zones

B-1

Contents

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide xiii

Contents xiv

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Preface

This preface describes the audience, organization, and conventions of the Cisco Videoscape Distribution

Suite, Internet Streamer 4.2.1 Command Reference Guide. It also references related documentation and describes how to obtain documentation and submit a service request.

Document Revision History, page xv

Audience, page xv

Document Organization, page xvi

Document Conventions, page xvi

Related Documentation, page xvii

Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request, page xvii

Document Revision History

Table 1

August 7, 2015

July 3, 2015

March 27, 2015

Document Revision History

Date

February 29, 2016

Change Summary

Updated for VDS-IS 4.3.1

Added snmp-server trap-source Command

Updated show statistics authsvr Command with redirect field in IP Statistics and Geo Statistics

Updated for VDS-IS 4.2.1

Added CDE280 related information

Initial release

Audience

This guide is for the networking professional using Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet

Streamer (VDS-IS). Before using this guide, you should have experience working with the Cisco

VDS-IS and the concepts and terminology of Ethernet and local area networking.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide xv

Document Organization

Table 2 Document Organization

Chapter

Chapter 1, “Command-Line Interface Command

Summary”

Chapter 2, “Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite,

Internet Streamer Software Commands”

This chapter provides a complete list of Cisco

Internet Streamer commands, listed alphabetically.

Appendix A, “Acronyms”

Appendix B, “Standard Time Zones”

Description

This chapter describes how to use the CDS

1

CLI

2 to configure software features.

This appendix lists the abbreviations and acronyms used in this guide.

This appendix lists all the standard time zones that you can configure on a CDE

3

and the offset from

UTC

4

for each standard time zone.

1.

CDS = content delivery system

2.

CLI = command-line interface

3.

CDE = content delivery engine

4.

UTC = coordinated universal time

Document Conventions

This publication uses various conventions to convey instructions and information.

Command descriptions use these conventions:

• Commands and keywords are in boldface text.

Arguments for which you supply values are in italic

Square brackets ( [ ] ) means optional elements.

.

Braces ( { } ) group required choices, and vertical bars ( | ) separate the alternative elements.

Braces and vertical bars within square brackets ( [ { | } ] ) mean a required choice within an optional element.

Interactive examples use these conventions:

• Terminal sessions and system displays are in screen

font.

Information you enter is in boldface screen

font.

Nonprinting characters, such as passwords or tabs, are in angle brackets (< >).

Notes, cautions, and warnings use these conventions and symbols:

Note Means reader take note . Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to materials not contained in this manual.

xvi

Caution Means reader be careful . In this situation, you might do something that could result in equipment damage or loss of data.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Related Documentation

These documents provide complete information about the VDS-IS and are available from Cisco.com:

• Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.2.1 Software Configuration Guide

Cisco VDS Internet Streamer 3.0–3.1 Quick Start Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.2.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.2.1 API Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.2.1 Alarms and Error Messages Guide

Release Notes for Cisco Videoscape Distributions Suite, Internet Streamer 4.2.1.1

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.2.1 Software Installation Guide for non-CDEs

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Virtualization Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Hybrid Streamer Guide

Cisco Content Delivery Engine 205/220/250/420/460/470 Hardware Installation Guide

Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information for Cisco Content Delivery Engines •

• Open Sources Used in VDS-IS Release 4.2.1

You can access the software documents at the following URL: http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps7127/tsd_products_support_series_home.html

You can access the hardware documents at the following URL: http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps7126/tsd_products_support_series_home.html

These documents provide complete information about the installation and service of the C200, C210,

C220, and C240 are available from cisco.com.

• Cisco UCS C200 Installation and Service Guide http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/unified_computing/ucs/c/hw/C200M1/install/c200M1.html

• Cisco UCS C210 Installation and Service Guide http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/unified_computing/ucs/c/hw/C210M1/install/C210M1.html

• Cisco UCS C220 Installation and Service Guide http://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/td/docs/unified_computing/ucs/c/hw/C220/install/C220.html

• Cisco UCS C240 Installation and Service Guide http://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/td/docs/unified_computing/ucs/c/hw/C240/install/C240.html

The Cisco UCS C-Series Rack Servers documentation is available from cisco.com at: http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps10493/prod_installation_guides_list.html

Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request

For information on obtaining documentation, submitting a service request, and gathering additional information, see the monthly What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation , which also lists all new and revised Cisco technical documentation, at: http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/general/whatsnew/whatsnew.html

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide xvii

Subscribe to the What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation as a Really Simple Syndication (RSS) feed and set content to be delivered directly to your desktop using a reader application. The RSS feeds are a free service and Cisco currently supports RSS Version 2.0. xviii

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

C H A P T E R

1

Command-Line Interface Command Summary

This chapter provides an overview of how to use the Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet

Streamer (VDS-IS) software command-line interface (CLI), including an explanation of CLI command modes, VDS-IS devices modes, and tables that summarize the purpose of the commands in each mode.

The chapter includes the following sections:

Using VDS-IS Device Modes, page 1-1

Using Command-Line Processing, page 1-1

Using Command Modes, page 1-2

Checking the Command Syntax, page 1-5

System Help, page 1-6

Filtering Output Using Output Modifiers, page 1-6

Saving Configuration Changes, page 1-6

Note The CLI can be accessed through the console port or Telnet.

Using VDS-IS Device Modes

In the VDS-IS software, the device mode determines whether the VDS-IS device is functioning as a

Service Engine (SE), Content Delivery Service Manager (CDSM), or Service Router (SR). The commands available from a specific CLI mode are determined by the VDS-IS device mode that us in effect. Use the device mode Global configuration command to change the current device mode to another configuration. Use the show device-mode command to display the current device configuration.

To determine if a specific command is available for a specific device type, see Table 2-1 .

Using Command-Line Processing

The VDS-IS software commands are not case sensitive. You can abbreviate commands and parameters as long as they contain enough letters to be different from any other currently available commands or parameters.

You can scroll through the last 20 commands stored in the history buffer and enter or edit the command at the prompt (see

Table 1-1 ).

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

1-1

Chapter 1 Command-Line Interface Command Summary

Using Command Modes

Table 1-1

Keystroke Combination

Ctrl-A

Ctrl-B or the Left Arrow key

Ctrl-C

Ctrl-D

Ctrl-E

Ctrl-F or the Right Arrow key

Ctrl-K

Ctrl-L

Command-Line Processing Keystroke Combinations

Ctrl-N or the Down Arrow key

Ctrl-P or the Up Arrow key

Ctrl-T

Ctrl-U; Ctrl-X

Ctrl-W

Esc-B

Esc-D

Esc-F

Delete key or Backspace key

Function

Jumps to the first character of the command line.

Moves the cursor back one character.

Escapes and terminates prompts and tasks.

Deletes the character at the cursor.

Jumps to the end of the current command line.

Moves the cursor forward one character.

Deletes from the cursor to the end of the command line.

Repeats the current command line on a new line.

Enters the next command line in the history buffer.

Enters the previous command line in the history buffer.

Transposes the character at the cursor with the character to the left of the cursor.

Deletes from the cursor to the beginning of the command line.

Deletes the last word entered.

Moves the cursor back one word.

Deletes from the cursor to the end of the word.

Moves the cursor forward one word.

Erases a mistake made when entering a command; re-enter the command after using this key.

Using Command Modes

The CLI for VDS-IS Release 4.2.1 software is similar to the CLI for the Cisco IOS software. Both the

Cisco IOS software and the VDS-IS CLI are organized into different commands and configuration modes. Each mode provides access to a specific set of commands. This section describes the command modes provided by VDS-IS Release 4.2.1 software CLI, and includes the following topics:

Using EXEC Mode, page 1-3

Using Global Configuration Mode, page 1-3

Using Interface Configuration Mode, page 1-4

Using Other Configuration Modes, page 1-4

1-2

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 1 Command-Line Interface Command Summary

Using Command Modes

Using EXEC Mode

Use the EXEC mode for setting, viewing, and testing system operations. The EXEC mode is divided into two access levels, user and privileged. Use the enable and disable commands to switch between the two levels.

Access to the user-level EXEC command line requires a valid password. The user-level EXEC commands are a subset of the privileged-level EXEC commands. The user-level EXEC prompt is the host name followed by a right-angle bracket (>). The prompt for the privileged-level EXEC command line is the pound sign (# ). To execute an EXEC command, enter the command at the EXEC system prompt and press the Return key. In the following example, a user accesses the privileged-level EXEC command line from the user level:

ServiceEngine> enable

ServiceEngine#

Use the Delete or Backspace key sequences to edit commands when you enter commands at the EXEC prompt.

As a shortcut, you can abbreviate commands to the fewest letters that make them unique. For example, the letters sho can be entered for the show command.

Certain EXEC commands display multiple screens with the following prompt at the bottom of the screen:

--More--

Press the Spacebar to continue the output, or press Return to display the next line. Press any other key to return to the prompt. Also, at the

--More--

prompt, you can enter a question mark ( ?) to display the help message.

To leave EXEC mode, use the exit command at the system prompt:

ServiceEngine# exit

The EXEC commands are entered in EXEC mode.

Using Global Configuration Mode

Use Global configuration mode for setting, viewing, and testing the configuration of Internet Streamer

VDS-IS software features for the entire device. To enter this mode, enter the configure command from privileged EXEC mode. You must be in Global configuration mode to enter Global configuration commands:

ServiceEngine# configure

ServiceEngine(config)#

To exit Global configuration mode, use the end Global configuration command:

ServiceEngine(config)# end

You can also exit Global configuration mode by entering the exit command or by pressing Ctrl-Z .

Global configuration commands are entered in Global configuration mode.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

1-3

Chapter 1 Command-Line Interface Command Summary

Using Command Modes

Using Interface Configuration Mode

Use the interface configuration mode for setting, viewing, and testing the configuration of VDS-IS software features on a specific interface. To enter this mode, enter the interface command from the

Global configuration mode. The following example demonstrates how to enter interface configuration mode:

ServiceEngine# configure

ServiceEngine(config)# interface ?

GigabitEthernet Select a gigabit ethernet interface to configure

PortChannel Ethernet Channel of interfaces

Standby Standby groups

To exit interface configuration mode, enter exit to return to Global configuration mode:

ServiceEngine(config-if)# exit

ServiceEngine(config)#

The interface configuration commands are entered in interface configuration mode.

Using Other Configuration Modes

The CLI provides several other configuration modes that make it easier to configure specific features, including the configuration modes described in

Table 1-2

.

Table 1-2 Commands Used to Access Configuration Modes for Specific Features

Configuration Mode

Standard access control list (ACL) configuration mode

Extended ACL configuration mode

Internet Content Adaptation Protocol (ICAP) service configuration mode

Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) configuration mode

Service Routing Protocol (SRP) configuration mode

Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) configuration mode

Intermediate System -to-Intermediate System

(IS-IS) configuration mode

Command to Enter from Global Configuration Mode ip access-list standard ip access-list extended icap service router ospf router srp router bgp router isis

To work with these configuration modes, enter the appropriate command from the Global configuration mode prompt. The CLI can enter a new configuration mode where all subsequent commands apply to the current entry. To return to Global configuration mode, enter the exit command.

For further information about these configuration modes and the commands permitted in each one, see

Chapter 2, “Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands.”

1-4

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 1 Command-Line Interface Command Summary

Checking the Command Syntax

Checking the Command Syntax

The user interface provides error isolation in the form of an error indicator, a caret symbol (^).

The ^ symbol appears at the point in the command string where you have entered an incorrect command, keyword, or argument.

For example, if you want to set the clock, use context-sensitive help to check the syntax for setting the clock.

An example of a mistake is as follows:

ServiceEngine# clock ?

read-calendar Read the calendar and update system clock set Set the time and date update-calendar Update the calendar with system clock

The help output shows that the set keyword is required. Check the syntax for entering the time:

ServiceEngine# clock set ?

<0-23>: Current Time (hh:mm:ss)

Enter the current time in a 24-hour format with hours, minutes, and seconds separated by colons:

ServiceEngine# clock set 13:32:00

% Incomplete command.

The system indicates that you need to provide additional arguments to complete the command. Press the

Up Arrow to automatically repeat the previous command entry. Then add a space and question mark (?) to display the additional arguments:

ServiceEngine# clock set 13:32:00 ?

<1-31> Day of the month

January Month of the year

February

March

. . .

Enter the day and month as prompted, and use the question mark for additional instructions:

ServiceEngine# clock set 13:32:00 12 April ?

<1993-2035> Year

Now you can complete the command entry by entering the year:

ServiceEngine# clock set 13:32:00 12 April 00

^

%Invalid input detected at '^' marker.

ServiceEngine#

The caret symbol (^) and help response indicate an error with the 00 entry. To display the correct syntax, press Ctrl-P or the Up Arrow . You can also re-enter the command string, and then enter a space character, a question mark, and press Enter :

ServiceEngine# clock set 13:32:00 12 April ?

<1993-2035> Year

ServiceEngine# clock set 13:32:00 12 April

Enter the year using the correct syntax and press Return to execute the command:

ServiceEngine# clock set 13:32:00 12 April 2009

Sun Aor 12 13:32:00 UTC 2009

Restarting acquisition and distribution

ServiceEngine#

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

1-5

Chapter 1 Command-Line Interface Command Summary

System Help

System Help

You can obtain help when you enter commands by using the following methods:

• For a brief description of the context-sensitive help system, enter help .

To list all commands for a command mode, enter a question mark ( ?

) at the system prompt.

To obtain a list of commands that start with a particular character set, enter an abbreviated command immediately followed by a question mark ( ?

):

ServiceEngine# cl?

clear clock

• To list the command keywords or arguments, enter a space and a question mark ( ?

) after the command:

ServiceEngine# clock ?

read-calendarRead the calendar and update system clock setSet the time and date update-calendarUpdate the calendar with system clock

Filtering Output Using Output Modifiers

Many commands produce lengthy output that may use several screens to display. Using output modifiers, you can filter this output to show only the information that you want to see.

The following three output modifiers are available:

• begin regular-expression—Displays the first line in which a match of the regular expression is found and all lines that follow.

• count regular-expression—Counts the line number of the regular expression.

exclude regular-expression—Displays all lines except those in which a match of the regular expression is found.

• include regular-expression—Displays all lines in which a match of the regular expression is found

To use one of these output modifiers, type the command followed by the pipe symbol (|), the modifier, and the regular expression that you want to search for or filter. A regular expression is a case-sensitive alphanumeric pattern. It can be a single character or number, a phrase, or a more complex string.

Saving Configuration Changes

To avoid losing new configurations, save them to NVRAM using the copy or write commands, as shown in the following examples:

ServiceEngine# copy running-config startup-config or

ServiceEngine# write

See the command description for the copy running-config startup-config command for more information about the running and saved configuration modes.

1-6

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

C H A P T E R

2

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet

Streamer Software Commands

This chapter contains an alphabetical listing of all the commands in Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite,

Internet Streamer (VDS-IS) software. The software CLI is organized into the following command

modes:

EXEC mode—For setting, viewing, and testing system operations. It is divided into two access levels, user and privileged. To use the privileged access level, enter the enable command at the user access level prompt and then enter the privileged EXEC password when you see the password prompt.

Global configuration (config) mode—For setting, viewing, and testing the configuration of Internet

Streamer VDS-IS software features for the entire device. To use this mode, enter the configure command from privileged EXEC mode.

Interface configuration (config-if) mode—For setting, viewing, and testing the configuration of a specific interface. To use this mode, enter the interface command from Global configuration mode.

Other configuration modes—Several configuration modes are available from the Global configuration mode for managing specific features. The commands used to access these modes are

marked with a footnote in Table 2-1 .

See

Chapter 1, “Using Command Modes,”

for a complete discussion of using CLI command modes.

Table 2-1

summarizes the commands and indicates the command mode for each command. The same command may have different effects when entered in a different command mode, and for this reason,

they are listed and documented separately. In Table 2-1 , when the first occurrence is entered in EXEC

mode, the second occurrence is entered in Global configuration mode. When the first occurrence is entered in Global configuration mode, the second occurrence is entered in interface configuration mode.

The VDS-IS software device mode determines whether the VDS-IS device is functioning as a Service

Engine (SE), Content Delivery System Manager (CDSM), or Service Router (SR). The commands available from a specific CLI mode are determined by the VDS-IS device mode in effect.

Table 2-1 also

indicates the device mode for each command. All indicates that the command is available for every device mode.

Note When viewing this guide online, click the name of the command in the left column of the table to jump to the command page, which provides the command syntax, examples, and usage guidelines.

Note See

Appendix A, “Acronyms” for an expansion of all acronyms used in this publication.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-1

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-1 CLI Commands

Command

aaa

Sets the specified interface bandwidth to 10, 100, or 1000 Mbps.

Configures the EXEC, login, and

MOTD

3

banners.

Interface configuration

Global configuration

Device Mode

All

access-lists

acquirer (EXEC)

Configures the access control list entries.

Configures the content acquirer.

Global configuration

Privileged-level

EXEC

Global configuration

SE

SE

acquirer (Global configuration)

Enables authentication when the acquirer obtains content through a proxy server.

acquisition-distribution

Starts and stops the acquisition and distribution database cleanup process and the content acquisition and distribution process.

alarm

Configures alarms.

area nssa

area stub

asset

authsvr

bandwidth (Global configuration)

Privileged-level

EXEC

SE

SE

Configures an area as an NSSA

1

.

Defines an area as a stub area.

Configures the CISCO-ENTITY-

ASSET-MIB.

Enables and configures the

Authorization server.

Sets the allowable bandwidth usage and its duration for the Movie

Streamer and WMT

2

streaming media.

Global configuration

OSPF configuration

All

SR

OSPF configuration SR

Global configuration

Global configuration

Global configuration

All

SE

SE

bandwidth (interface configuration)

banner

Description

Specifies accounting, authentication and authorization methods.

CLI Mode

Global configuration

All

All

bitrate

blink

bootstrap-node

cache

capability

cd

Configures the maximum pacing bit rate for the Movie Streamer and configures WMT bit-rate settings.

Identifies physical devices by blinking their LED(s).

Global configuration

SE

Privileged-level

EXEC

All

SRP configuration SR Configures a bootstrap node IP address.

Specifies the cache commands.

Global configuration

Modifies the capability configuration. Global configuration

Changes the directory.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

SE

SE

All

2-2

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-1 CLI Commands (continued)

Command

cdn-select

cdnfs

cdsm

clear cache

clear content

Description

Enables the CDN Selector for third-party service selection.

Manages the Internet Streamer

CDNFS

4

.

Configures the CDSM IP address and primary or standby role settings.

Clears the HTTP object cache.

Clears the URL content.

CLI Mode

Global

Configuration

Privileged-level

EXEC

Global configuration

Privileged-level

EXEC

Privileged-level

EXEC

clear ip

clear ipv6

clear isis

clear logging

clear service-router

clear srp database offline

clear srp descriptor

clear srp neighbor

Clears the IP configuration.

Clears the IPv6 configuration.

Privileged-level

EXEC

Privileged-level

EXEC

Clears the IS-IS Routing for IP.

Clears the syslog messages saved in the disk file.

Clears the Service Router.

Privileged-level

EXEC

Privileged-level

EXEC

Clears the SRP database while it is offline.

Privileged-level

EXEC

Privileged-level

EXEC

Deletes a single descriptor or all descriptors from the service routing layer.

Removes a neighbor Proximity Engine from the neighbor list of the local

Proximity Engine.

Privileged-level

EXEC

Privileged-level

EXEC

clear srp resource

clear srp route

clear statistics

clear transaction-logs

Clears and archives the working

clear users

clear wmt

Deletes a resource from a descriptor in the service routing layer.

Privileged-level

EXEC

Deletes a single route entry from the

DHT routing table of the local

Proximity Engine.

Clears the statistics.

Privileged-level

EXEC transaction logs.

Clears the connections (login) of authenticated users.

Clears the WMT streams.

Privileged-level

EXEC

Privileged-level

EXEC

Privileged-level

EXEC

Privileged-level

EXEC

SR

SR

SR

All

All

SR

All

Device Mode

SR

SE

All

SE, SR

SE, SR

SR

SR

SR

All

SE, SR

All

SE

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-3

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-1 CLI Commands (continued)

Command

clock (EXEC)

clock (Global configuration)

cms (EXEC)

cms (Global configuration)

configure

6

contentmgr

content-mgr disk-info force-reset

content-origin

copy

cpfile

debug

debug ip bgp

debug ip ospf

debug ip proximity

debug ip rib

debug isis

debug srp

delfile

Description

Manages the system clock.

Sets the summer daylight saving time of day and time zone.

Configures the CMS

5

-embedded database parameters.

Schedules the maintenance and enables the Centralized Management

System on a given node.

Enters configuration mode from privileged EXEC mode.

Configures the Content Manager.

CLI Mode

Privileged-level

EXEC

Global configuration

Privileged-level

EXEC

Global configuration

Device Mode

All

All

All

All

Forces the Content Manager to reset the disk share memory information.

Privileged-level

EXEC

Global configuration

All

SE

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

SE

Supports multiple origin servers within a content origin.

Copies the configuration or image files to and from the CD-ROM, flash memory, disk, or remote hosts.

Copies a file.

Global configuration

Privileged-level

EXEC

Configures the debugging options.

SE

All

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Privileged-level

EXEC

All

All

SR Displays information related to the

BGP process.

Displays information related to the

OSPF process.

Debugs the transport layer of proximity process.

Turns on proximity debugging information.

Privileged-level

EXEC

Privileged-level

EXEC

Privileged-level

EXEC

Privileged-level

EXEC

SR

SR

SR

Displays information related to the

IS-IS process.

Privileged-level

EXEC

Turns on SRP debugging information. Privileged-level

EXEC

Deletes a file.

SR

SR

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

All

2-4

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-1 CLI Commands (continued)

Command

deltree

device

dir

direct-server-return

disable

disk (EXEC)

disk (Global configuration)

distribution

dnslookup

Description

Deletes a directory and its subdirectories.

CLI Mode

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Configures the mode of operation on a device.

Global configuration

Displays the list of files in a directory. User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Enables a VIP for direct server return. Global configuration

Turns off the privileged EXEC commands.

Privileged-level

EXEC

Allocates the disks among the CDNFS and sysfs file systems.

Privileged-level

EXEC

Configures how the disk errors should be handled.

Global configuration

Reschedules and refreshes the content redistribution through multicast for all delivery services or a specified delivery service ID or name.

Resolves a host or domain name to an

IP address.

Privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Device Mode

All

All

All

SE, SR

All

All

All

SE

All

domain

enable

6

enable password

external-ip

find-pattern

Sets the domain ID for the SRP.

Accesses the privileged EXEC commands.

Changes the enable password.

end

exec-timeout

Exits configuration and privileged

EXEC modes.

Configures the length of time that an inactive Telnet or SSH

7

session remains open.

exit

Exits from interface, Global configuration, or privileged EXEC modes.

expert-mode password

Sets the expert-mode password.

SRP configuration SR

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

All

Global configuration

Global configuration

Global configuration

All

Configures up to a maximum of eight external IP addresses.

Searches for a particular pattern in a file.

Global configuration

Global configuration

Privileged-level

EXEC

All

All

All

All

All

All

All

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-5

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-1 CLI Commands (continued)

Command Description

flash-media-streaming

Enables and configures Flash Media

Streaming.

flooding

Sets the flooding threshold for SRP multicast.

geo-location-server

gulp

help

hostname

install

interface

6

ip (Global configuration)

ip (Interface configuration)

ip access-list

6

Redirects requests to different CDNs based on the geographic location of the client.

Captures lossless gigabit packets and writes them to disk.

Obtains online help for the command-line interface.

CLI Mode

Global configuration

Configures the device network name.

Global configuration

Installs a new version of the caching application.

Privileged-level

EXEC

Configures a Gigabit Ethernet or port channel interface. Provides access to interface configuration mode.

Configures the Internet Protocol.

Configures the interface Internet

Protocol.

Creates and modifies the access lists for controlling access to interfaces or applications. Provides access to ACL configuration mode.

Global configuration

Device Mode

SE, SR

SRP configuration SR

Global configuration

Privileged-level

EXEC

Global configuration and user-level EXEC

Global configuration

Global configuration

Interface configuration

SR

SE

All

All

All

All

All

All

All

ip ospf priority

SR

ip rib route

ip router isis

ipv6

isis

Sets the router priority, which helps determine the designated router for this network.

Configures unicast static routes for the

Proximity Engine.

Specifies the interfaces to be used for routing IS-IS.

Interface configuration mode under OSPF configuration

Global configuration

Specifies the default gateway’s IPv6 address.

Configures IS-IS routing for IP.

Interface configuration mode under IS-IS configuration mode

Global configuration

Interface configuration mode under IS-IS configuration

SR

SR

SE

SR

2-6

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-1 CLI Commands (continued)

Command

is-type

kernel

key

key-string

key chain

lacp

line

8

Description CLI Mode Device Mode

Configures a Proximity Engine to act as a Level 1 (intra-area) router, as both a Level 1 router and a Level 2

(interarea) router, or as an inter-area router only.

IS-IS configuration SR

Configures the kernel.

Global configuration

All

Creates a key ID and enters into key ID configuration submode.

Key chain submode SR

SR Creates a key string to be used for authentication.

Key ID configuration submode

Creates a key chain and enters into key chain configuration submode.

Global configuration

SR

Turns on LACP.

Specifies the terminal line settings.

Interface configuration

Global configuration

All

All

lls

limit memory

location community

Displays the files in a long-list format. User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Configures the memory limit that is associated with a content manager, flash media streaming server, movie streamer, web engine, or the service-router,

Global configuration

All

SR, SR

Configures the community values that are associated with a Proximity

Engine.

BGP configuration SR

log-adjacency-changes

Configures the router to send a syslog message when an IS-IS neighbor goes up or down.

logging

Configures syslog

9

BGP, IS-IS and

OSPF configuration

log-neighbor-changes

Enables logging of BGP neighbor resets.

SR configuration

BGP configuration SR

ls

lsp-mtu

Lists the files and subdirectories in a directory.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

All

IS-IS configuration SR

mkdir

Sets the maximum transmission unit

MTU

10

size of IS-IS LSPs.

Makes a directory.

All User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-7

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-1

Command

mkfile

model

movie-streamer

multicast (Global

Configuration)

multicast (EXEC

Configuration)

mtu

neighbor

net

netmon

netstatr

network area

no (Global configuration)

no (interface configuration)

ntp

ntpdate

ping

ping srp

ping6

CLI Commands (continued)

Description

Makes a file (for testing).

CLI Mode

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Device Mode

All

Changes the CDE250 platform model number after a remanufacturing or rescue process.

Enables and configures the Movie

Streamer server.

Configures multicast options.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Global configuration

All

SE

Generate multicast packets and tests connectivity through multicast routers.

Sets the interface maximum transmission unit packet size.

Global configuration

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Interface configuration

SE

SE, CDSM

All

Configures the BGP neighbors.

Configures an IS-IS NET

11

for a

CLNS

12

routing process.

Displays the transmit and receive activity on an interface.

Displays the rate of change of netstat statistics.

Defines the interfaces on which OSPF runs and defines the area ID for those interfaces.

BGP configuration

IS-IS configuration

SR

SR

Privileged-level

EXEC

Privileged-level

EXEC

SE

SE

OSPF configuration SR

Negates a Global configuration command or sets its defaults.

Negates an interface command or sets its defaults.

Global configuration

Interface configuration

Configures the Network Time Protocol server.

Sets the NTP software clock.

Global configuration

Privileged-level

EXEC

Sends the echo packets.

Pings the SRP ring.

Pings the IPv6 address.

All

All

All

All

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

All

SR

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

SE

2-8

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-1

Command

port-channel

proximity algorithm bgp

proximity engine enable

pwd

radius-server

rcp

reload

rename

restore

rmdir

router bgp

router isis

router ospf

router srp

rtsp

rule

script

service

CLI Commands (continued)

primary-interface

Description

Configures the port channel load balancing options.

Configures a primary interface for the

VDS-IS network to be a Gigabit

Ethernet or port channel interface.

Global configuration

Enables a BGP proximity algorithm option for the Proximity Engine.

Enables the Proximity Engine.

Global configuration

Displays the present working directory.

Global

Configuration

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Configures the RADIUS authentication.

Enables RCP.

Halts a device and performs a cold restart.

Renames a file.

CLI Mode

Global configuration

Global configuration

Global configuration

Privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Restores a device to its manufactured default status.

Removes a directory.

Privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Configures a BGP routing process.

Global configuration

Enables the IS-IS routing protocol and specifies an IS-IS process.

Global configuration

Enables the OSPF

13

routing process.

Global configuration

Enters SRP configuration mode.

Configures the Real-Time Streaming

Protocol-related parameters.

Sets the rules by which the SE filters

HTTP, HTTPS, and RTSP traffic.

Global configuration

Global configuration

Global configuration

Checks the errors in a script or executes a script.

Specifies the type of service.

Privileged-level

EXEC

Privileged-level

EXEC

Device Mode

All

All

SR

SR

All

All

All

All

All

All

All

SR

SR

SR

SR

SE

SE

All

All

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-9

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-1 CLI Commands (continued)

Command

service-router

show acquirer

show alarms

Description

Configures service routing.

setup

show aaa

Configures the basic configuration settings and a set of commonly used caching services.

Displays the accounting, authentication, and authorization configuration.

show access-lists 300

Displays the access control list configuration.

CLI Mode

Global configuration

Privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Device Mode

All

All

All

Displays the acquirer delivery service information and progress for a specified delivery service number or name.

Displays information on various types of alarms, their status, and history.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

SE

SE

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

All

show arp

Displays the Address Resolution

Protocol entries.

show authentication

show authsvr

Displays the authentication configuration.

Displays the Authorization Server status.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

All

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

All

SE

show bandwidth

show banner

show bitrate

show cache

show cache-router

Displays the bandwidth allocated to a particular device.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

SE, SR

Displays information on various types of banners.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

All

Displays the SE bit-rate configuration. User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Displays a list of cached contents.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Displays cache-route information for various Protocol Engines.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

SE, SR

SE

SE

2-10

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-1

Command

show capability

show cdn-select

show cdnfs

show clock

show cms

show content

show content-mgr

show content-origin

show debugging

show debugging srp

show device-mode

show direct-server-return

show disks

CLI Commands (continued)

show distribution

Description

Displays information for the Cap-X profile ID.

Displays the status of the CDN

Selector.

Displays the VDS-IS network file system information.

CLI Mode

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Displays the system clock.

Displays the Centralized Management

System protocol, embedded database content, maintenance status, and other information.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Displays all content entries in the

VDS-IS.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Displays all content management information in the VDS-IS.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Displays information about the NAS

14 mount.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Displays the state of each debugging option.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Displays the debug flags that are turned on for the SRP.

Displays the configured or current mode of a CDSM, SE, or SR device.

Privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Displays the Direct Server return information.

Displays the disk configurations.

Displays the distribution information for a specified delivery service.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Device Mode

SE

SR

CDSM, SE

All

All

SE

SE

SE

All

SR

All

SE, SR

All

SE

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-11

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-1 CLI Commands (continued)

Command

show flash

show flash-media-streaming

show ftp

show hardware

show hosts

Description

Displays the flash memory information.

Displays the Flash Media Streaming information.

Displays the caching configuration of the FTP

15

.

Displays the system hardware information.

Displays the IP domain name, name servers, IP addresses, and host table.

CLI Mode

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Device Mode

All

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

SE, SR

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

All

Privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

All

All

show interface

show inventory

show ip access-list

show ip bgp

show ip bgp all

show ip bgp community

Displays the hardware interface information.

Displays the system inventory information.

Displays the information about access lists that are defined and applied to specific interfaces or applications.

Displays the contents of a particular host in the BGP routing table.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

All

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Privileged-level

EXEC

All

All

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

SR

Displays the contents of the BGP routing table.

Displays BGP routes that match a specified BGP community string.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

SR

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

SR

show ip bgp ipv4 unicast

show ip bgp memory

Displays information relating to all

IPV4 unicast routes in the BGP routing table.

Displays memory usage information of the running BGP daemon.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

SR

SR

show ip bgp neighbors

Displays information about the TCP and BGP connections to neighbors.

show ip bgp nexthop-database

Displays the next-hop database information in the BGP routing table.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

SR

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

SR

2-12

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-1 CLI Commands (continued)

Command

show ip interface

show ip ospf

show ip ospf border-routers

show ip ospf database

Description

show ip bgp summary

Displays the status of all BGP connections.

Displays the IP interface state and its address and mask for all interfaces.

Displays general information about

OSPF routing processes.

Displays general information about

OSPF border routers.

Displays information specific to the

OSPF database for a specific router.

CLI Mode

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

show ip ospf interface

show ip ospf memory

Displays OSPF-related interface information.

Displays memory usage of the OSPF process.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

show ip ospf neighbor

Displays OSPF neighbor information.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

show ip ospf request-list

Displays a list of all LSAs

16

requested by a router.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

show ip ospf retransmission-list

Displays a list of all LSAs waiting to be re-sent.

show ip ospf route

Displays the OSPF RSPF route for

OSPF routes.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

show ip ospf rspf route

Displays OSPF RSPF

17

from specific routers.

show ip ospf traffic

Displays OSPF traffic statistics.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

show ip proximity algorithm

Displays the proximity algorithm options currently in use by this

Proximity Engine.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Device Mode

SR

SR

SR

SR

SR

SR

SR

SR

SR

SR

SR

SR

SR

SR

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-13

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-1

Command

show ip proximity interface

show ip proximity servers

show ip rib clients

show ip rib memory

show ip rib recursive-next-hop

show ip rib route

show ip rib unresolved-next-hop

show ip routes

show ip static route

show ipv6

show isis hostname-table

CLI Commands (continued)

show isis adjacency

show isis clns route

show isis database

Description

Displays the proximity interface information currently in use by this

Proximity Engine.

Displays the interface addresses and hostnames of the proximity servers currently in use by this Proximity

Engine.

Displays details of all the routing protocol instances that are clients of the RIB.

Displays the memory usage information of the RIB.

Displays IP recursive next-hop information from the RIB.

Displays IP RIB route information.

Displays unresolved next-hop information from the RIB.

CLI Mode

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Device Mode

SR

SR

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

SR

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

SR

SR

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

SR

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

SR

Displays the IP routing table.

Privileged-level

EXEC

Displays IP static route information.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Displays IPv6 information.

All

SR

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

All

Displays IS-IS adjacencies.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

SR

Displays one or all the destinations to which the router knows how to route

CLNS packets.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Displays the IS-IS link-state database. User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Displays the router-name-to-system-ID mapping table entries for an IS-IS router.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

SR

SR

SR

2-14

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-1 CLI Commands (continued)

Command

show isis interface

Description

Displays information about the IS-IS interfaces.

show isis ip route

Displays the Intermediate IS-IS RSPF route for IS-IS learned routes.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

show isis ip rspf route

Displays the Intermediate IS-IS RSPF route for IS-IS learned routes.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

show isis memory

Displays memory usage information for an IS-IS instance.

show isis process

Displays summary information about an IS-IS instance.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

show isis rrm

Displays IS-IS RRM

18

information.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

show isis spf-log

CLI Mode

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

show isis srm

show isis ssn

show key chain

show lacp

Displays how often and why the router has run a full SPF

19

calculation.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Displays SRM

20

information for an

IS-IS process.

Displays SSN

21

information for an

IS-IS process.

Privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Displays the key chains in the system. User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Displays LACP information.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

show limit memory

show logging

display the service memory limitation information.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Displays the system logging configuration.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

show movie-streamer

Displays the Movie Streamer configuration.

show multicast

Displays whether or not the multicast sender and receiver are enabled.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Device Mode

SR

SR

SR

SR

SR

SR

SR

SR

SR

SR

All

All

All

SE

SE

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-15

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-1

Command

show ntp

show processes

show programs

show rcp

show rtsp

show rule

show services

show snmp

show srp leafset

CLI Commands (continued)

show radius-server

show running-config

show service-router

show srp database

show srp memory

show srp multicast database

show srp neighbor

Description

Displays the Network Time Protocol configuration status.

Displays the process status.

Displays the scheduled programs.

Displays the RADIUS server information.

Displays RCP information

Displays the RTSP configurations.

Displays the Rules Template configuration information.

Displays the current operating configuration.

Displays the Service Router configuration.

CLI Mode

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Device Mode

All

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

All

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

SE

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

All

All

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

SE

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

SE

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

All

All

Displays the services-related information.

Displays the SNMP parameters.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

All

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

All

Displays the descriptor-related information saved in the descriptor database.

Displays SRP leafset information.

Privileged-level

EXEC

Displays SRP memory usage information.

Displays multicast database information for an SRP process.

Privileged-level

EXEC

Privileged-level

EXEC

Privileged-level

EXEC

Displays SRP neighbor information.

Privileged-level

EXEC

SR

SR

SR

SR

SR

2-16

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-1 CLI Commands (continued)

Command

show srp process

show srp replica-set

show srp route

show srp subscribers

show ssh

show standby

show startup-config

Description

Displays the basic configurations for

SRP.

Displays the replica-set information for a Proximity Engine.

Displays route information for a

Proximity Engine to its neighbor nodes on the same DHT network.

CLI Mode

Privileged-level

EXEC

Privileged-level

EXEC

Privileged-level

EXEC

Displays SRP multicast group subscriber information.

Displays the Secure Shell status and configuration.

Privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Displays the information related to the standby interface.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Displays the startup configuration.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

show statistics aaa

show statistics access-lists 300

Displays accounting, authentication, and authorization statistics.

Displays the access control list statistics.

show statistics acquirer

show statistics admission

Displays the SE acquirer delivery service statistics.

Displays admission control statistics.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

show statistics authsvr

Displays the Authentication Server statistics.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

show statistics cdn-select

Displays the statistics for the CDN

Selector.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

show statistics cdnfs

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Displays the SE Internet Streamer

VDS-IS network file system statistics.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

show statistics content-mgr

Displays the Content Manager statistics.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Device Mode

SR

SR

SR

SR

All

All

All

All

SE

SE

SE, CDSM

SE

SR

SE

SE

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-17

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-1 CLI Commands (continued)

Command

show statistics distribution

show statistics flash-media-streaming

show statistics icmp

show statistics ip

show statistics isis

show statistics movie-streamer

show statistics netstat

Description

Displays the simplified statistics for content distribution components.

Displays the statistics for Flash Media

Streaming.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

SE

Displays the Internet Control Message

Protocol statistics.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

All

Displays the Internet Protocol statistics.

Displays IS-IS traffic counters.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

All

SR

Displays statistics for the Movie

Streamer.

CLI Mode

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Device Mode

SE

Displays the Internet socket connection statistics.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

SE

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

All

show statistics radius

show statistics replication

show statistics service-router

Displays the RADIUS authentication statistics.

Displays the delivery service replication status and related statistical data.

Displays the Service Router statistics. User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

show statistics services

Displays the services statistics.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

All

CDSM, SR

SR

All

show statistics snmp

show statistics srp

Displays the SNMP statistics.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Displays SRP statistics information.

Privileged-level

EXEC

All

SR

show statistics tacacs

show statistics tcp

Displays the Service Engine

TACACS+ authentication and authorization statistics.

Displays the Transmission Control

Protocol statistics.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

All

All

2-18

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-1

Command

show statistics transaction-logs

show statistics udp

show statistics web-engine

show statistics wmt

show tacacs

show tech-support

show telnet

show transaction-logging

show url-signature

show user

show users

show version

show wmt

shutdown (interface configuration)

CLI Commands (continued)

show web-engine

Description

Displays the transaction log export statistics.

Displays the User Datagram Protocol statistics.

Displays the Web Engine statistics.

Displays the Windows Media

Technologies statistics.

Displays TACACS+ authentication protocol configuration information.

Displays the system information for

Cisco technical support.

Displays the Telnet services configuration.

Displays the transaction logging information.

Displays the URL signature information.

CLI Mode

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Displays the user identification number and username information.

Displays the specified users.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Displays the software version.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Displays the Web Engine information. User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Displays the WMT configuration.

Shuts down the specified interface.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Interface configuration

Device Mode

SE

All

SE

SE

All

All

All

SE

SE

All

All

All

SE

SE

All

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-19

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-1

Command

shutdown (EXEC)

snmp-server community

snmp-server contact

snmp-server enable traps

snmp-server group

snmp-server host

snmp-server location

snmp-server notify inform

snmp-server trap-source

snmp-server user

snmp-server view

splunk-uf-monitor

ss

sshd

sysreport

tacacs

tcpdump

tcpmon

tcp timestamp

CLI Commands (continued)

streaming-interface

Description

Shuts down the device (stops all applications and operating system).

Configures the community access string to permit access to the SNMP.

Specifies the text for the MIB object sysContact.

CLI Mode

Privileged-level

EXEC

Global configuration

Global configuration

Enables the SNMP traps.

Global configuration

Defines a user security model group.

Global configuration

Specifies the hosts to receive SNMP traps.

Specifies the path for the MIB object sysLocation.

Configures the SSH service parameters.

Configures the streaming interface.

Global configuration

Global configuration

Configures the SNMP inform request. Global configuration

Configures the SNMP trap source.

Global configuration

Defines a user who can access the

SNMP engine.

Defines an SNMPv2

22

MIB view.

Global configuration

Global configuration

Configure Splunk Universal

Forwarder monitoring,

Dumps socket statistics.

Global configuration

Privileged-level

EXEC

Global configuration

Global configuration

Saves the sysreport to a user-specified file.

Configures TACACS+ server parameters.

Privileged-level

EXEC

Global configuration

Dumps the TCP traffic on the network. Privileged-level

EXEC

Searches all TCP connections.

Privileged-level

EXEC

Enables and disables TCP timestamp.

Global configuration

All

All

All

All

SE

All

All

All

All

SE, SR

SE

All

All

All

Al

Device Mode

All

All

All

All

All

2-20

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-1

Command

telnet telnet telnet

telnet enable

terminal

test-url

top

traceroute

traceroute srp

traceroute6

transaction-logs

type

type-tail

undebug

url-signature

CLI Commands (continued)

transaction-log force

Description

Starts the Telnet client.

Starts the Telnet client.

Starts the Telnet client.

CLI Mode

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Enables the Telnet services.

Global configuration

Sets the terminal output commands.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Tests the accessibility of a URL using

FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Displays a dynamic real-time view of a running VDS-IS.

Privileged-level

EXEC

Traces the route to a remote host.

Traces the route of the SRP ring.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Traces the route to a remote

IPv6-enabled host.

Forces archiving of the working log file to make a transaction log file.

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Privileged-level

EXEC

Configures and enables the transaction logging parameters.

Displays a file.

Global configuration

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Displays the last several lines of a file. User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Disables debugging functions.

Configures the URL signature.

Privileged-level

EXEC

Global configuration

Device Mode

All

All

All

All

All

SE, SR

All

All

SR

SE, SR

All

SE

All

All

All

SE

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-21

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-1 CLI Commands (continued)

Command

username

web-engine (EXEC)

web-engine (Global configuration)

whoami

wmt

Description

Establishes the username authentication.

Configures the Web Engine.

Configures the Web Engine caching parameters and disables revalidation.

Displays the current user’s name.

Configures the WMT.

CLI Mode

Global configuration

User-level EXEC

Device Mode

All

Global configuration

User-level EXEC and privileged-level

EXEC

Global configuration

Privileged-level

EXEC

SE

SE

All

SE

All

write

Writes or erases the startup configurations to NVRAM or to a terminal session, or writes the MIB persistence configuration to disk.

1.

NSSA = not-so-stubby area

2.

WMT = Windows Media Technologies

3.

MOTD = message-of-the-day

4.

CDNFS = CDS network file system

5.

CMS = centralized management system

6.

Commands used to access configuration modes.

7.

SSH = secure shell

8.

Link Aggregation Control Protocol

9.

syslog = system logging

10. MTU = maximum transmission unit

11. NET = network entity title

12. CLNS = Connectionless Network Service

13. OSPF = Open Shortest Path First

14. Network-attached Storage

15. FTP = File Transfer Protocol

16. LSAs = link-state advertisements

17. RSPF = reverse shortest path firs t

18. RRM = received routing message

19. SPF = Shortest Path First

20. SRM = send routing message

21. SSN = send sequence number

22. SNMPv2 = SNMP Version 2

2-22

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

aaa

aaa

To specify accounting, authentication, and authorization methods, use the aaa command in global configuration mode. To selectively disable options, use the no form of this command.

aaa { accounting { commands { 0 { start-stop tacacs + | stop-only tacacs+ } | 15 { start-stop tacacs

+ | stop-only tacacs+ }} | exec { start-stop tacacs + | stop-only tacacs+ } | system { start-stop tacacs + | stop-only tacacs+ }} | authentication { enable { primary | secondary | tertiary } | radius { primary | secondary | tertiary } | tacacs+ { primary | secondary | tertiary }} | login

{ fail-over server-unreachable | local { primary | secondary | tertiary } | radius { primary | secondary | tertiary } | tacacs+ { primary | secondary | tertiary }} | authorization

{ commands { 0 tacacs+ [ if-authenticated ] | 15 tacacs+ [ if-authenticated ]} | config-commands | console | exec { local { primary | secondary | tertiary } | radius { primary

| secondary | tertiary } | tacacs+ { primary | secondary | tertiary }}}} no aaa { accounting { commands { 0 { start-stop tacacs + | stop-only tacacs+ } | 15 { start-stop tacacs + | stop-only tacacs+ }} | exec { start-stop tacacs + | stop-only tacacs+ } | system

{ start-stop tacacs + | stop-only tacacs+ }} | authentication { enable { enable { primary | secondary | tertiary } | radius { primary | secondary | tertiary } | tacacs+ { primary | secondary | tertiary }} | login { fail-over server-unreachable | local { primary | secondary | tertiary } | radius { primary | secondary | tertiary } | tacacs+ { primary | secondary | tertiary }} | authorization { commands { 0 tacacs+ [ if-authenticated ] | 15 tacacs+

[ if-authenticated ]} | config-commands | console | exec { local { primary | secondary | tertiary } | radius { primary | secondary | tertiary } | tacacs+ { primary | secondary | tertiary }}}}

Syntax Description accounting commands

0 start-stop tacacs+ stop-only

15 exec system authentication enable enable primary secondary tertiary radius tacacs+ login fail-over server-unreachable

Sets the Accounting configurations parameters.

Configures exec (shell) commands.

Enables level for normal user.

Records start and stop without waiting.

Uses Tacacs+ hosts for accounting.

Records stop when service terminates.

Enables level for super user.

Starts an exec (shell).

Configures System events.

Sets the Authentication configurations parameters.

Sets authentication for enable.

Uses enable password for authentication.

Sets authentication method as primary.

Sets authentication method as secondary.

Sets authentication method as tertiary.

Uses Radius hosts for authentication.

Uses Tacacs+ hosts for authentication.

Sets authentication for logins.

Specifies a condition to switch to a local authentication scheme.

Fail-over if server is unreachable.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-23

aaa local radius tacacs+ authorization commands

0 tacacs+

15 config-commands console local primary secondary tertiary radius tacacs+

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Uses local username authentication.

Uses Radius hosts for authentication.

Uses Tacacs+ hosts for authentication.

Sets the Authorization configurations parameters.

Configures exec (shell) commands.

Enables level for normal user.

Uses Tacacs+ hosts for authorization.

Enables level for super user.

Sets configuration mode commands.

Sets all commands on the console line.

Uses local username authorization.

Sets authorization method as primary.

Sets authorization method as secondary.

Sets authorization method as tertiary.

Uses Radius hosts for authorization.

Uses Tacacs+ hosts for authorization Tacacs+ hosts for authorization.

Defaults aaa authorization config-commands : disabled

Command Modes Global configuration

Usage Guidelines The aaa accounting commands command enables accounting using TACACS+ for normal and supper users.

The aaa accounting exec command enables accounting records for user EXEC terminal sessions on the

Tacacs+ server, including username, date, start, and stop times.

The aaa accounting system command enables accounting of the system events, such as system reboot,

NIC interface up or down, accounting configuration enabled or disabled, and using TACACS+.

The aaa authentication login command enables authentication using TACACS+ or the RADIUS server to determine if the user has access permission on the SE. The local authentication uses the local database for authentication, if configured. This can be enabled to provide a fallback in case of TACACS+ or

Radius server failure.

If there are multi-authentication methods configured, the SE tries to authenticating the user through all configured methods, one by one, until one of them succeeds. The authentication order complies with the priority specified (primary, secondary, then tertiary). If the primary is empty, the secondary is considered as primary, and so on.

If the configured TACACS+ or Radius server is unreachable, use the aaa authentication login fail-over server-unreachable command to switch off the TACACS+ or Radius server, and enable fail-over to use the local password file for authentication.

The aaa authentication enable command enables authentication using TACACS+ or the RADIUS server to determine if the normal user can enter the privileged exec mode. Alternatively, the enable authentication method uses the local database (the enable password) for authentication.

2-24

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands aaa

The aaa authorization command enables authorization using the TACACS+ server to determine if the specified user can execute commands or not. In case the configured TACACS+ server is unreachable, the if-authenticated option can switch off the TACACS+ server and authorization is granted to anyone who is authenticated.

Note The following commands bypass authorization and accounting:

CTRL+C, CTRL+Z, exit, end, and all of configuration commands for entering submode, for example, interface GigabitEthernet 1/0.

The aaa authorization config-commands command reestablishes the default created when the aaa authorization commands command was issued.

If the aaa authorization commands level method command is enabled, all commands, including configuration commands, are authorized using the method specified for the specified user. To bypass the configuration commands, using the no aaa authorization config-commands command stops the network access server from attempting configuration command authorization.

After the no form of this command is entered, AAA authorization of configuration commands is completely disabled. Take care before entering the no form of this command because it potentially reduces the amount of administrative control on configuration commands.

Use the aaa authorization config-commands command if, after using the no form of this command, you need to reestablish the default set by the aaa authorization commands level method command.

Note This command is disabled by default. You get the same result if you (1) do not configure this command, or (2) configure the no aaa authorization config-commands .

The aaa authorization console command applies authorization to a console. To disable the authorization, use the no form of this command.

The no aaa authorization console command is the default, and the authorization that is configured on the console line always succeeds. If you do not want the default, you need to configure the aaa authorization console command.

The aaa authorization exec command enables authorization using the TACACS+ or RADIUS server to determine if the user can startup an exec (shell). The local authentication uses the local database for authorization, if configured. This can be enabled to provide a fallback in case the TACACS+ or Radius server fails.

If you are trying to disable the aaa authorization exec command, at least one authorization method must be selected (local is the default). At least one authentication method must be selected for login.

Note As long as the login authentication fail-over is enabled, it is applied to the exec authorization as well. In other words, the local database is used for authorization as well if the remote severs is unreachable.

Examples The following configures accounting commands for a normal user using Tacacs+ hosts:

ServiceEngine(config)# aaa accounting commands 0 start-stop tacacs+

The following example enables/disables authentication for login:

ServiceEngine(config)# aaa authentication login

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-25

aaa

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

The following example applies authorization to a console:

ServiceEngine(config)# aaa authorization console

Command Description enable password Changes the password.

show aaa show statistics aaa

Shows the AAA configuration for a different service.

Shows the AAA statistics.

2-26

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands access-lists

access-lists

To configure access control list (ACL) entries, use the access-lists command in Global configuration mode. To remove access control list entries, use the no form of this command.

access-lists { 300 { deny groupname { any [ position number ] | groupname [ position number ]}} |

{ permit groupname { any [ position number ] | groupname [ position number ]}} | enable } no access-lists { 300 { deny groupname { any [ position number ] | groupname [ position number }}

| { permit groupname { any [ position number ] | groupname [ position number ]}} | enable }

Syntax Description 300 deny groupname any position number groupname permit enable

Specifies the group name-based access control list (ACL).

Specifies the rejection action.

Defines which groups are granted or denied access to content that is served by this SE.

Specifies any group name.

(Optional) Specifies the position of the ACL record within the access list.

(Optional) Position number within the ACL. The range is from 1 to

4294967294.

Name of the group that is permitted or denied from accessing the Internet using an SE.

Specifies the permission action.

Enables the ACL.

Defaults None

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines You can configure group authorization using an ACL only after a user has been authenticated against an

LDAP HTTP-request Authentication Server. The use of this list configures group privileges when members of the group are accessing content provided by an SE. You can use the ACL to allow the users who belong to certain groups or to prevent them from viewing specific content. This authorization feature offers more granular access control by specifying that access is only allowed to specific groups.

Use the access-lists enable Global configuration command to enable the use of the ACL.

Use the access-lists 300 command to permit or deny a group from accessing the Internet using an SE.

For instance, use the access-lists 300 deny groupname marketing command to prevent any user from the marketing group from accessing content through an SE.

At least one login authentication method, such as local, TACACS+, or RADIUS, must be enabled.

Note We recommend that you configure the local login authentication method as the primary method.

The ACL contains the following feature enhancements and limitations:

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-27

access-lists

Examples

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

A user can belong to several groups.

A user can belong to an unlimited number of groups within group name strings.

A group name strin g is a case-sensitive string with mixed-case alphanumeric characters.

Each unique group name string cannot exceed 128 characters.

Note If the unique group name string is longer than 128 characters, the group is ignored.

Group names in a group name string are separated by a comma.

Total string of individual group names cannot exceed 750 characters.

For Windows-based user groups, append the domain name in front of the group name in the form domain or group as follows:

For Windows NT-based user groups, use the domain NetBIOS name.

Wildcards

The access-list command does not use a netmask; it uses a wildcard bitmask. The source and destination

IP and wildcard usage is as follows:

• source_ip —Number of the network or host from which the packet is being sent. There are three alternative ways to specify the source:

– Use a 32-bit quantity in four-part dotted decimal format.

Use the any keyword => source and source-wildcard of 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255.

Use the host keyword => specific source and source_wildcard equal 0.0.0.0.

source-wildcard —Wildcard bits to be applied to source. Each wildcard bit set to 0 indicates the corresponding bit position in the source. Each wildcard bit set to 1 indicates that both a 0 bit and a

1 bit in the corresponding position of the IP address of the packet is considered a match to this access list entry.

To specify the source wildcard, use a 32-bit quantity in four-part dotted decimal format. Place 1s in the bit positions you want to ignore.

Note Wildcard bits set to 1 need not be contiguous in the source wildcard. For example, a source wildcard of 0.255.0.64 would be valid.

The following example shows how to display the configuration of the ACL by using the show access-lists 300 command:

ServiceEngine# show access-lists 300

Access Control List Configuration

---------------------------------

Access Control List is enabled

Groupname-based List (300)

1. permit groupname techpubs

2. permit groupname acme1

3. permit groupname engineering

4. permit groupname sales

5. permit groupname marketing

6. deny groupname any

2-28

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands access-lists

The following example shows how to display statistical information for the ACL by using the show statistics access-lists 300 command:

ServiceEngine# show statistics access-lists 300

Access Control Lists Statistics

-----------------------------------------

Groupname and username-based List (300)

Number of requests: 1

Number of deny responses: 0

Number of permit responses: 1

The following example shows how to reset the statistical information for the ACL by using the clear statistics access-lists 300 command:

ServiceEngine# clear statistics access-lists 300

ServiceEngine(config)# access-lists 300 permit groupname acme1 position 2

Related

Command Description show access-lists 300 show statistics access-list 300

Displays the ACL configuration.

Displays the ACL statistics.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-29

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands acquirer (EXEC)

acquirer (EXEC)

To start or stop content acquisition on a specified acquirer delivery service, use the acquirer command in EXEC configuration mode. You can also use this command to verify and correct the

Last-Modified-Time attribute in content acquired using the VDS-IS software.

acquirer { check-time-for-old-content [ delivery-service-id delivery-service-num | delivery-service-name delivery-service-name ] | [ correct [ delivery-service-id delivery-service-num | delivery-service-name delivery-service-name ]] | start-delivery-service

{ delivery-service-id delivery-service-num | delivery-service-name delivery-service-name } | stop-delivery-service { delivery-service-id delivery-service-num | delivery-service-name delivery-service-name } | test-url url [ use-http-proxy url | use-smb-options smb-options ]}

Syntax Description check-time-for-old-content Checks the content for the Last-Modified-Time attributes in the local time format.

delivery-service-id delivery-service-num

(Optional) Sets the delivery service number identifier.

(Optional) Delivery service number. The range is from 0 to 4294967295.

delivery-service-name delivery-service-name correct

(Optional) Sets the delivery service name descriptor.

(Optional) Delivery service name.

(Optional) Changes the Last-Modified-Time attributes in the local time format to the Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) format.

Starts the content acquisition.

start-delivery-service stop-delivery-service test-url url

Stops the content acquisition.

Tests the accessibility of a URL, using HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, or SMB.

URL to be tested.

use-http-proxy url

Note For the SMB protocol, use the Uniform Naming Convention

(UNC) path, for example, //host/share/file.

(Optional) Specifies the HTTP proxy. The connectivity of the URL

(content request over HTTP) through the HTTP proxy server (SE) is tested. Use this option only when the HTTP protocol is used.

(Optional) HTTP proxy URL. Use one of the following formats to specify the HTTP proxy URL: http://proxyIpAddress:proxyPort use-smb-options smb-options http://proxyUser:proxypasswd@proxyIpAddress:proxyPort

(Optional) Specifies the username, password, port, and domain for the

SMB URL.

(Optional) Parameters to be specified when an SMB URL is used. Use the following format to specify these parameters: username=xxx,password=xxx,port=xxx,workgroup=xxx

Note All the comma-separated key=value pairs are optional and need to be specified only if the SMB host requires them.

Defaults If you do not specify the delivery service, this command applies to all delivery services assigned to the

Content Acquirer.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-30

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

acquirer (EXEC)

Usage Guidelines The acquirer is a software agent that gathers delivery service content before it is distributed to the receiver SEs in an VDS-IS network. The acquirer maintains a task list, which it updates after receiving a notification of changes in its delivery service configuration.

The acquirer stores the Last-Modified-Time attribute in the local time format. Content acquired using earlier software releases has a Last-Modified-Time attribute that is incorrect if used with later versions of the VDS-IS software, which use GMT format.

Correct the Last-Modified-Time attributes for content acquired with earlier releases by entering the following command from the privileged EXEC prompt: acquirer check-time-for-old-content correct [ delivery-service-id delivery-service-num delivery-service-name delivery-service-name ]

This command changes the Last-Modified-Time attributes for content in all delivery services assigned to the Content Acquirer unless you specify the delivery service ID or name.

SEs identify changes in the Last-Modified-Time attribute and download content only when changes have occurred.

Use the acquirer start-delivery-service command to immediately start acquisition tasks for the selected delivery service. Use the acquirer stop-delivery-service command to immediately stop all acquisition tasks for the selected delivery service.

Use the acquirer test-url url command in EXEC configuration mode to test whether a URL is accessible or not. The actual content is dumped into the /dev/null path.

Examples The following example shows how the acquirer starts acquiring content on delivery service 86:

ServiceEngine# acquirer start-delivery-service delivery-service-id 86

ServiceEngine# acquirer start-delivery-service delivery-service-name corporate

The following example shows how the acquirer stops acquiring content on delivery service 86:

ServiceEngine# acquirer stop-delivery-service delivery-service-id 86

ServiceEngine# acquirer stop-delivery-service delivery-service-name corporate

The following example shows how the acquirer test-url command is used to test a URL:

ServiceEngine# acquirer test-url http://172.16.150.26

--05:16:41-- http://10.107.150.26

=> `/dev/null'

Connecting to 10.107.150.26:80... connected.

HTTP request sent, awaiting response... 200 OK

Length: 1,722 [ text/html

]

100%

[

====================================>

]

1,722 1.64M/s ETA 00:00

02:45:40 (1.64 MB/s) - `/dev/null' saved [ 1722/1722

]

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-31

acquirer (EXEC)

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Command Description show acquirer Displays the acquirer delivery service information and progress for a specified delivery service number or name.

show statistics acquirer Displays the SE acquirer delivery service statistics.

2-32

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands acquirer (Global configuration)

acquirer (Global configuration)

To provide authentication when the acquirer obtains content through a proxy server, use the acquirer command in Global configuration mode. To disable acquirer proxy authentication, use the no form of this command.

acquirer proxy authentication { outgoing { hostname | ip-address } port-num } username | password password } no acquirer proxy authentication { outgoing { hostname | ip-address } port-num } username | password password }

Syntax Description proxy authentication outgoing hostname ip-address port-num username password password

Configures parameters for outgoing proxy mode requests for content acquisition.

Enables authentication so that the acquirer can obtain content through a proxy server.

Enables authentication for a nontransparent proxy server.

Hostname of a nontransparent proxy server.

IP address of a nontransparent proxy server.

Port number of a nontransparent proxy server. The range is from 1 to

65535.

Username for authentication using a maximum of 256 characters.

Allows the use of a password for authentication.

Password for authentication using a maximum of 256 characters.

Defaults None

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines Use the acquirer proxy authentication outgoing Global configuration command to configure authentication when you enable content acquisition through a proxy server. First configure the proxy host and the port using the http proxy outgoing host Global configuration command. The maximum number of outgoing proxies allowed is eight. When you remove an outgoing proxy using the no http outgoing proxy command, the authentication information associated with that proxy is automatically removed.

Use the acquirer proxy authentication transparent command for transparent caches in the VDS-IS network that require authentication.

The acquirer supports a proxy with basic authentication. Content acquisition through a proxy server is supported only for HTTP and not for HTTPS or FTP. Also, authentication is only supported for a single proxy server in a chain, so if multiple proxy servers in a chain require authentication, the request fails.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-33

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands acquirer (Global configuration)

Acquisition through a proxy server can be configured when the Content Acquirer cannot directly access the origin server because the origin server is set up to allow access only by a specified proxy server.

When a proxy server is configured for Content Acquirer content acquisition, the acquirer contacts the proxy server instead of the origin server, and all requests to that origin server go through the proxy server.

Note Content acquisition through a proxy server is only supported for HTTP requests. It is not supported for

HTTPS, FTP, MMS, or MMS-over-HTTP requests.

There are three ways to configure the proxy server: through the CDSM GUI. If you need to configure the SE to use the proxy for both caching and prepositioned content, use the CLI to configure the proxy.

The CLI command is a Global configuration command that configures the entire SE to use the proxy. If only the acquirer portion of the SE needs to use the proxy for acquiring the prepositioned content, use the manifest file or specify the outgoing proxy. When you configure the proxy server in the manifest file, you are configuring the acquirer to use the proxy to fetch the content for a particular delivery service.

Note Proxy configurations in the manifest file take precedence over proxy configurations in the CLI. A noProxy attribute configuration in the manifest file takes precedence over the other proxy server configurations in the manifest file.

You can also configure a proxy for fetching the manifest file by using the CDSM GUI (the Creating New

Delivery Service or Modifying Delivery Service window). When you configure a proxy server in the

CDSM GUI, the proxy configuration is valid only for acquiring the manifest file and not for acquiring the delivery service content. Requests for the manifest file go through the proxy server, and requests for the content go directly to the origin server.

Tip Before configuring a proxy server, verify that the Content Acquirer is able to ping the proxy server. To check whether the proxy server is accepting incoming HTTP traffic at the configured port, use the acquirer test-url http: // proxyIP : proxyport command in Global configuration mode in the Content

Acquirer CLI, where the URL in the command is the URL of the proxy server being tested. If the proxy is not servicing the configured port, the message “ failed: Connection refused.

Examples The following example shows the authentication configuration for a transparent proxy server with basic authentication:

ServiceEngine(config)# acquirer proxy authentication transparent 192.168.1.1 8080 myname

Related

Command Description http proxy outgoing show acquirer

Configures an SE to direct all HTTP miss traffic to a parent cache.

Displays the acquirer delivery service information and progress for a specified delivery service number or name.

2-34

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands acquisition-distribution

acquisition-distribution

To start or stop the content acquisition and distribution process, use the acquisition-distribution command in EXEC configuration mode.

acquisition-distribution { database-cleanup { start | stop } | start | stop }

Syntax Description database-cleanup start stop start stop

Cleans up the acquisition and distribution database to maintain consistency with the file system.

Starts the cleanup of the acquisition and distribution database.

Stops the cleanup of the acquisition and distribution database.

Starts the acquisition and distribution process.

Stops the acquisition and distribution process.

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines When you use the acquisition-distribution database-cleanup command, the acquisition and distribution database is checked to ensure that all prepositioned content is available in Cisco Network

File System (CDNFS). If any prepositioned content is found to be missing from CDNFS, the content is replicated to all SEs in the VDS-IS network. Content Acquirers assigned to a delivery service acquire the content directly from the origin server and replicate the content through the delivery service either by unicast or multicast transmission to other SEs in the delivery service. Receiver SEs obtain the content from forwarder SEs either by unicast or multicast. In the case of a disk00 failure, when the database is stored on disk00 in an internal file system (/state), the recovery of the acquisition and distribution database is done automatically. You should run the acquisition and distribution database cleanup if a failure occurs or if you have to replace a disk drive other than disk00.

Examples The following example shows how to start the acquisition and distribution database cleanup process:

ServiceEngine# acquisition-distribution database-cleanup start

The following example shows how to start the acquisition and distribution process:

ServiceEngine# acquisition-distribution start

The following example shows how to stop the acquisition and distribution process:

ServiceEngine# acquisition-distribution stop

Command Description cdnfs cleanup Cleans up the content of deleted channels from the acquisition and distribution database.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-35

acquisition-distribution show acquirer show distribution

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Displays the acquirer delivery service information and progress for a specified delivery service number or name.

Displays the distribution information for a specified delivery service.

2-36

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

alarm

alarm

To configure alarms, use the alarm command in Global configuration mode. To disable alarms, use the no form of this command.

alarm { admin-shutdown-alarm enable | overload-detect { clear 1-999 [ raise 10-1000 ] | enable | raise 10-1000 [ clear 1-999 ]}} no alarm { admin-shutdown-alarm enable | overload-detect { clear 1-999 [ raise 10-1000 ] | enable | raise 10-1000 [ clear 1-999 ]}}

Syntax Description admin-shutdown-alarm Generates a linkdown alarm when an interface shuts down.

enable Enables admin shutdown alarm overload detection.

overload-detect clear

Specifies alarm overload configuration.

Specifies the threshold below which the alarm overload state on an SE is cleared and the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) traps and alarm notifications to the Centralized Management System (CMS) resume.

1-999 raise

10-1000 enable

Note The alarm overload-detect clear command value must be less than the alarm overload-detect raise value.

Number of alarms per second that ends an alarm overload condition.

(Optional) Specifies the threshold at which the CDE enters an alarm overload state and SNMP traps and alarm notifications to CMS are suspended.

Number of alarms per second that triggers an alarm overload.

Enables the detection of alarm overload situations.

Defaults admin-shutdown-alarm : disabled raise : 10 alarms per second clear : 1 alarm per second

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines The alarm admin-shutdown-alarm command must be enabled for an admin-shutdown alarm to take effect. If an admin-shutdown alarm occurs, disabling this option does not clear the outstanding alarm properly. There are two ways to avoid this situation:

• Clear the outstanding admin-shutdown alarm first before disabling this option.

• Disable this option and reboot, which clears this alarm.

When multiple applications running on an SE experience problems at the same time, numerous alarms are set off simultaneously, and an SE may stop responding. Use the alarm overload-detect command to set an overload limit for the incoming alarms from the node Health Manager. If the number of alarms exceeds the maximum number of alarms allowed, an SE enters an alarm overload state until the number of alarms drops down to the number defined in the clear .

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-37

alarm

Examples

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

When an SE is in the alarm overload state, the following events occur:

Alarm overload notification is sent to SNMP and the CMS. The communicated to SNMP and the CMS.

SNMP traps and CMS notifications for subsequent alarm raise and clear operations are suspended.

Alarm overload clear notification is sent.

clear and raise values are also

SE remains in the alarm overload state until the rate of incoming alarms decreases to the clear value.

Note In the alarm overload state, applications continue to raise alarms and the alarms are recorded within an SE. The show alarms and show alarms history command in EXEC configuration modes display all the alarms even in the alarm overload state.

The following example shows how to generate a linkdown alarm when an interface shuts down:

ServiceEngine(config)# alarm admin-shutdown-alarm enable

The following example shows how to enable the detection of alarm overload:

ServiceEngine(config)# alarm overload-detect enable

The following example shows how to set the threshold for triggering the alarm overload at 100 alarms per second:

ServiceEngine(config)# alarm overload-detect raise 100

The following example shows how to set the level for clearing the alarm overload at 10 alarms per second:

ServiceEngine(config)# alarm overload-detect clear 10

Related

Command Description show alarms show alarm status

Displays information on various types of alarms, their status, and history.

Displays the status of various alarms and alarm overload settings.

2-38

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

area nssa

area nssa

To configure an area as a not-so-stubby area (NSSA), use the area nssa router configuration command.

To remove the NSSA distinction from the area, use the no form of this command.

area area-id nssa no area area-id nssa

Syntax Description area-id Identifier of the area for which authentication is to be enabled. The identifier can be specified as either a decimal value or an IP address (ID range is from 0 to 4294967295).

Command Default No NSSA area is defined.

Command Modes OSPF configuration (config-ospf) mode.

Usage Guidelines This command is used to configure an area as a NSSA. The area ID range is given as 0 to 4294967295, but area 0 cannot be configured as an NSSA area.

Examples In the following example area 1 is configured as an NSSA area:

ServiceRouter(config)# router ospf

ServiceRouter(config-ospf)# network 192.168.20.0 0.0.0.255 area 1

ServiceRouter(config-ospf)# area 1 nssa

ServiceRouter(config-ospf)#

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-39

area stub

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

area stub

To define an area as a stub area, use the area stub router configuration command. To disable this function, use the no form of this command area area-id stub no area area-id stub

Syntax Description area-id Identifier for the stub area. The identifier can be specified as either a decimal value or an IP address (ID range is from 0 to 4294967295).

Command Default No stub area is defined.

Command Modes OSPF configuration (config-ospf) mode.

Usage Guidelines This command is used to define an area as a stub area. The area ID range is given as 0 to 4294967295, but area 0 cannot be configured as a stub area.

Examples The following example shows how to configure area 1 as a stub area:

ServiceRouter(config)# router ospf

ServiceRouter(config-ospf)# network 192.168.20.0 0.0.0.255 area 1

ServiceRouter(config-ospf)# area 1 stub

ServiceRouter(config-ospf)#

2-40

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

asset

asset

To configure the CISCO-ENTITY-ASSET-MIB, use the asset command in Global configuration mode.

To remove the asset tag name, use the no form of this command.

asset tag name no asset tag name

Syntax Description tag name

Sets the asset tag.

Asset tag name string.

Defaults None

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Examples The following example shows how to configure a tag name for the asset tag string:

ServiceEngine(config)# asset tag entitymib

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-41

authsvr

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

authsvr

To enable and configure the Authorization server, use the authsvr command in Global configuration mode. To disable the Authorization server, use the no form of this command.

authsvr { enable | location-server { cache-timeout num | enable | primary ip addr port num [ service-name name ] [ retry num ] [ timeout num ] | secondary ip addr port num [ service-name name ] [ retry num ] [ timeout num ] | server-type [ maxmind-restful-hosted [ http | https

] service name | quova-restful-gds | quova-restful-hosted [ http [ api-key key | shared-secret secret ] ] ] } | unknown-server allow } no authsvr { enable | location-server { cache-timeout num | enable | primary ip addr port num [ service-name name ] [ retry num ] [ timeout num ] | secondary ip addr port num [ service-name name ] [ retry num ] [ timeout num ] | server-type [ maxmind-restful-hosted [ http | https

] service name | quova-restful-gds | quova-restful-hosted [ http [ api-key key | shared-secret secret ] ] ] } | unknown-server allow }

Syntax Description enable location-server cache-timeout num enable primary ip addr port num secondary

Enables the Authorization server.

Configures the geo location server IP address and port.

Configures the location server cache timeout.

Location server cache timeout in seconds. The range is from 1 to 864000.

Enable geo location based blocking.

Configures the primary geo location server IP address and port.

IP address of the primary geo location server.

Port number of the primary geo location server.

Configures the secondary geo location server IP address and port.

ip addr port num

IP address of the secondary geo location server.

Port number of the secondary geo location server.

server-type Configure geo location server type maxmind-restful-hosted Configure Maxmind hosted server http https quova-restful-gds quova-restful-hosted

Configure HTTP server

Configure HTTPS server

Configure Quova GDS server

Configure Quova hosted server api-key key unknown-server allow

Configure API key

API key (256 characters maximum)

Configures the Authorization server unknown server or domain.

Allows requests for an unknown server or domain.

Defaults authsvr : enabled cache-timeout : 691200 seconds or 8 days.

unknown-server : blocked

2-42

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

authsvr

Usage Guidelines Changing the primary or secondary Geo-Location server configuration requires a restart of the authsvr for the configuration change to take effect. To restart the authsvr, disable it by entering the no authsvr enable and then re-enable it by entering the authsvr enable command.

The no authsvr unknown-server allow command causes all blocked requests to increment the authsvr block statistic.

Examples The following example shows how to enable the Authorization server:

ServiceEngine(config)# authsvr enable

Authserver is enabled

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-43

authsvr

Related Commands Command debug authsvr debug authsvr error debug authsvr trace show authsvr show statistics authsvr

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Description

Debugs the Autnentication Server.

Sets the debug level to error.

Sets the debug level to trace.

Display the status of the Authorization server.

Displays the Authentication Server statistics.

2-44

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands bandwidth (Global configuration)

bandwidth (Global configuration)

To set an allowable bandwidth usage limit and its duration for Cisco Streaming Engine Windows Media

Technology (WMT) streaming media, use the bandwidth command in Global configuration mode. To remove individual options, use the no form of this command.

bandwidth {{movie-streamer {incoming bandwidth | outgoing bandwidth }{default | max-bandwidth | start-time day hour end-time day hour }} | wmt {{incoming bandwidth | outgoing bandwidth }{default | max-bandwidth | start-time day hour end-time day hour } }} no bandwidth {{movie-streamer {incoming bandwidth | outgoing bandwidth }{default | max-bandwidth | start-time day hour end-time day hour }} | wmt {{incoming bandwidth | outgoing bandwidth }{default | max-bandwidth | start-time day hour end-time day hour } }}

Syntax Description movie-streamer incoming bandwidth outgoing default max-bandwidth start-time day hour end-time wmt

Configures the maximum pacing bit rate, in kilobits per second (kbps), for the Movie Streamer.

Configures the duration of allowable incoming bandwidth settings for

WMT.

Bandwidth size for the Movie Streamer, in kbps. The range is from 0 to

2147483647.

Configures the duration of allowable outgoing bandwidth settings for

WMT.

Specifies the default value for bandwidth if the scheduled bandwidth is not configured.

Specifies the maximum value of bandwidth, in kbps.

Specifies the start time for this bandwidth setting.

Day of the week.

Time to start (hh:mm). The range is from 00 to 23:00 to 59.

Specifies the end time for this bandwidth setting.

Configures the duration of allowable bandwidth settings for WMT. For more information, see the

“Configuring Incoming and Outgoing WMT

Bandwidth” section on page 2-46 .

Defaults None

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines With the various types of traffic originating from a device, every type of traffic, such as streaming media,

HTTP, and metadata, consumes network resources. Use the bandwidth command to limit the amount of network bandwidth used by the WMT streaming media.

The content services bandwidth includes the bandwidth allocation for WMT. WMT bandwidth settings apply to WMT streaming of live, cached, and prepositioned content.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-45

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands bandwidth (Global configuration)

For each type of bandwidth, you can specify the amount of bandwidth to be used for a particular time period. This type is called scheduled bandwidth . The default bandwidth is the amount of bandwidth associated with each content service type when there is no scheduled bandwidth. In centrally managed deployments (the SEs are registered with a CDSM), if the SE is assigned to a device group and no default bandwidth has been configured for the SE itself, the device group default bandwidth settings are applied.

However, if the default bandwidth has been configured for the SE, then that setting overrides the device group settings. If the SE is a member of multiple device groups, the most recently updated default bandwidth settings are applied.

The maximum bandwidth specifies the upper limit for the allowable bandwidth. The total bandwidth configured for all content services must not exceed the bandwidth limits specified for any SE platform model in the VDS-IS network. In addition, the license keys configured for WMT further restrict the maximum bandwidth available for each SE model.

Configuring Incoming and Outgoing WMT Bandwidth

The bandwidth between the WMT proxy server (the SE) and the WMT client is called the WMT outgoing bandwidth .

The bandwidth between the WMT proxy and the origin streaming server is called the incoming bandwidth . Because the bandwidth from the edge to the outside IP WAN is limited, you must specify a per session limit (the maximum bit rate per request) for each service that is running on the SE and that consumes the incoming bandwidth (for example, the WMT streaming service), and an aggregate limit

(the maximum incoming bandwidth.) You need to control the outgoing bandwidth based on the WMT license that is configured on the SE.

The bandwidth wmt outgoing and bandwidth incoming commands enable you to specify a WMT incoming and an outgoing bandwidth as follows:

• Use the bandwidth wmt outgoing kbits command in Global configuration mode to specify the outgoing WMT bandwidth in kbps. This command sets the maximum bandwidth for the WMT content that can delivered to a client that is requesting WMT content. The range of values is between

0 and 2,147,483,647 kbps.

If the specified outgoing bandwidth is above the limit specified by the WMT license, then a warning message is displayed. However, the specified outgoing bandwidth setting is applied to the SE because the outgoing bandwidth may be configured before the WMT licenses are enabled or an enabled WMT license may be changed to a higher value at a later time.

Use the bandwidth wmt incoming kbits command in Global configuration mode to specify the incoming WMT bandwidth in kbps. This command sets the maximum bandwidth for the WMT content that can delivered to the SE from the origin streaming server or another SE in the case of a cache miss. The specified bit rate is the maximum incoming WMT per session bit rate. The range of values is between 0 and 2,147,483,647 kbps. The incoming bandwidth applies to VoD content from the origin server for a cache miss.

2-46

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands bandwidth (Global configuration)

Command Description bandwidth (interface configuration) Sets the specified interface bandwidth to 10, 100, or 1000

Mbps.

interface Configures a Gigabit Ethernet or port channel interface.

Provides access to interface configuration mode.

show bandwidth show interface show running-config show startup-config

Displays the bandwidth allocated to a particular device.

Displays the hardware interface information.

Displays the current operating configuration.

Displays the startup configuration.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-47

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands bandwidth (interface configuration)

bandwidth (interface configuration)

To configure an interface bandwidth, use the bandwidth command in interface configuration mode. To restore default values, use the no form of this command.

bandwidth { 10 | 100 | 1000 } no bandwidth { 10 | 100 | 1000 }

Syntax Description 10

100

1000

Sets the bandwidth to 10 megabits per second (Mbps).

Sets the bandwidth to 100 Mbps.

Sets the bandwidth to 1000 Mbps. This option is not available on all ports.

Defaults None

Command Modes Interface configuration (config-if) mode.

Usage Guidelines The bandwidth is specified in Mbps. The 1000 Mbps option is not available on all ports. On an SE model that has an optical Gigabit Ethernet interface, you cannot change the bandwidth of this interface.

Therefore, Gigabit Ethernet interfaces run only at 1000 Mbps. For newer models of the SE that have a

Gigabit Ethernet interface over copper, this restriction does not apply; you can configure these Gigabit

Ethernet interfaces to run at 10, 100, or 1000 Mbps.

You can configure the Gigabit Ethernet interface settings (bandwidth, and duplex settings) if the

Gigabit-over-copper-interface is up or down. If the interface is up, it applies the specific interface settings. If the interface is down, the specified settings are stored and then applied when the interface is brought up. For example, you can specify any of the following commands for a

Gigabit-over-copper-interface, which is currently down, and have these settings automatically applied when the interface is brought up:

ServiceEngine(config-if)# bandwidth 10

ServiceEngine(config-if)# bandwidth 100

ServiceEngine(config-if)# bandwidth 1000

You cannot configure the Gigabit Ethernet interface settings on an optical Gigabit Ethernet interface.

Examples The following example shows how to set an interface bandwidth to 10 Mbps:

ServiceEngine(config-if)# bandwidth 10

The following example shows how to restore default bandwidth values on an interface:

ServiceEngine(config-if)# no bandwidth

2-48

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands bandwidth (interface configuration)

Related Commands Command Description interface Configures a Gigabit Ethernet or port channel interface.

Provides access to interface configuration mode.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-49

banner

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

banner

Syntax Description

To configure the EXEC, login, and message-of-the-day (MOTD) banners, use the banner command in

Global configuration mode. To disable the banner feature, use the no form of this command.

banner { enable | exec { message line | message_text } | login { message line | message_text } | motd

{ message line | message_text }} no banner { enable | exec [ message ] | login [ message ] | motd [ message ]} enable exec message line message_text login message line message_text motd message line message_text

Enables banner support on the SE.

Configures an EXEC banner.

Specifies a message to be displayed when an EXEC process is created.

EXEC message text on a single line. The SE translates the \n portion of the message to a new line when the EXEC banner is displayed to the user.

EXEC message text on one or more lines. Press the Return key or enter delimiting characters (\n) to specify an EXEC message to appear on a new line. Supports up to a maximum of 980 characters, including new line characters (\n). Enter a period (.) at the beginning of a new line to save the message and return to the prompt for the Global configuration mode.

Note The EXEC banner content is obtained from the command- line input that the user enters after being prompted for the input.

Configures a login banner.

Specifies a message to be displayed before the username and password login prompts.

Login message text on a single line. The SE translates the \n portion of the message to a new line when the login banner is displayed to the user.

Login message text on one or more lines. Press the Return key or enter delimiting characters (\n) to specify a login message to appear on a new line. Supports up to a maximum of 980 characters, including new line characters (\n). Enter a period (.) at the beginning of a new line to save the message and return to the prompt for the Global configuration mode.

Note The login banner content is obtained from the command-line input that the user enters after being prompted for the input.

Configures an MOTD banner.

Specifies an MOTD message.

MOTD message text on a single line. The SE translates the \n portion of the message to a new line when the MOTD banner is displayed to the user.

MOTD message text on one or more lines. Press the Return key or enter delimiting characters (\n) to specify an MOTD message to appear on a new line. Supports up to a maximum of 980 characters, including new-line characters (\n). Enter a period (.) at the beginning of a new line to save the message and return to the prompt for the Global configuration mode.

Note The MOTD banner content is obtained from the command line input that the user enters after being prompted for the input.

2-50

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Defaults Banner support is disabled by default.

banner

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines You can configure the following three types of banners in any VDS-IS software device mode:

• MOTD banner sets the message of the day. This message is the first message that is displayed when a login is attempted.

Login banner is displayed after the MOTD banner but before the actual login prompt appears.

EXEC banner is displayed after the EXEC CLI shell has started.

Note All these banners are effective on a console, Telnet, or a Secure Shell (SSH) Version 2 session.

After you configure the banners, enter the banner enable command to enable banner support on the SE.

Enter the show banner command in EXEC configuration mode to display information about the configured banners.

Note When you run an SSH Version 1 client and log in to the SE, the MOTD and login banners are not displayed. You need to use SSH Version 2 to display the banners when you log in to the SE.

Examples The following example shows how to enable banner support on the SE:

ServiceEngine(config)# banner enable

The following example shows how to use the banner motd message command to configure the MOTD banner. In this example, the MOTD message consists of a single line of text.

ServiceEngine(config)# banner motd message This is an Internet Streamer CDS 2.3 device

The following example shows how to use the banner motd message global command to configure a

MOTD message that is longer than a single line. In this case, the SE translates the \n portion of the message to a new line when the MOTD message is displayed to the user.

ServiceEngine(config)# banner motd message "This is the motd message.

\nThis is an Internet Streamer CDS 2.3 device\n"

The following example shows how to use the banner login message command to configure a MOTD message that is longer than a single line. In this case, SE A translates the \n portion of the message to a new line in the login message that is displayed to the user.

ServiceEngine(config)# banner login message "This is login banner.

\nUse your password to login\n"

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-51

banner

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

The following example shows how to use the banner exec command to configure an interactive banner.

The banner exec command is similar to the banner motd message commands except that for the banner exec command, the banner content is obtained from the command-line input that the user enters after being prompted for the input.

ServiceEngine(config)# banner exec

Please type your MOTD messages below and end it with '.' at beginning of line:

(plain text only, no longer than 980 bytes including newline)

This is the EXEC banner.\nUse your Internet Streamer CDS username and password to log in to this SE.\n

.

Message has 99 characters.

ServiceEngine(config)#

Assume that the SE has been configured with the MOTD, login, and EXEC banners as shown in the previous examples. When a user uses an SSH session to log in to the SE, the user sees a login session that includes a MOTD banner and a login banner that asks the user to enter a login password as follows:

This is the motd banner.

This is an Internet Streamer CDS 2.3 device

This is login banner.

Use your password to login.

Cisco SE admin@ce's password:

After the user enters a valid login password, the EXEC banner is displayed, and the user is asked to enter the VDS-IS username and password as follows:

Last login: Fri Oct 1 14:54:03 2004 from client

System Initialization Finished.

This is the EXEC banner.

Use your Internet Streamer CDS username and password to log in to this SE.

After the user enters a valid VDS-IS username and password, the SE CLI is displayed. The CLI prompt varies depending on the privilege level of the login account. In the following example, because the user entered a username and password that had administrative privileges (privilege level of 15), the EXEC configuration mode CLI prompt is displayed:

ServiceEngine#

Related Commands Command show banner

Description

Enables banner support on the SE.

2-52

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

bitrate

bitrate

To configure the maximum pacing bit rate for large files for the Movie Streamer and to separately configure WMT bit-rate settings, use the bitrate command in Global configuration mode. To remove the bit-rate settings, use the no form of this command.

bitrate {movie-streamer {incoming bitrate | outgoing bitrate } | wmt {incoming bitrate | outgoing bitrate }} no bitrate {movie-streamer {incoming bitrate | outgoing bitrate } | wmt {incoming bitrate | outgoing bitrate }}

Syntax Description movie-streamer bitrate wmt incoming bitrate outgoing bitrate

Configures the maximum pacing bit rate, in kbps, for the Movie Streamer.

Bit rate in kbps. The range is from 1 to 2147483647.

Configures the bit rate, in kbps, for large files sent using the WMT protocol.

Sets the incoming bit-rate settings.

Incoming bit rate, in kbps. The range is from 0 to 2147483647.

Sets the outgoing bit-rate settings.

Outgoing bit rate, in kbps. The range is from 0 to 2147483647.

Defaults movie-streamer bitrate : 1500 kbps wmt incoming bitrate : 0 (no limit) wmt outgoing bitrate : 0 (no limit)

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines The WMT proxy has the ability to cache on-demand media files when the user requests these files for the first time. All subsequent requests for the same file are served by the WMT proxy using the RTSP protocol. The WMT proxy can also live-split a broadcast, which causes only a single unicast stream to be requested from the origin server in response to multiple client requests for the stream.

The bit rate between the proxy and the origin server is called the incoming bit rate . Use the bitrate command to limit the maximum bit rate per session for large files. The bitrate wmt incoming and bitrate wmt outgoing commands enable you to specify a WMT incoming and outgoing per session bit rate as follows:

• Use the bitrate wmt incoming bitrate command to specify the maximum incoming streaming bit rate per session that can be delivered to the WMT proxy server (the SE) from the origin streaming server or another SE in the case of a cache miss. The specified bit rate is the maximum incoming

WMT per session bit rate. The range of values is between 0 and 2,147,483,647 kbps. The default value is 0 (no bit-rate limit).

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-53

bitrate

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

• Use the bitrate wmt outgoing bitrate command to set the maximum outgoing streaming bit rate per session that can delivered to a client requesting WMT content. The specified bit rate is the maximum outgoing WMT per session bit rate). The range of values is between 0 and 2,147,483,647 kbps. The default value is 0 (no bit-rate limit). The outgoing bandwidth applies to VoD content from the WMT proxy server on the SE in the case of a cache miss.

Note The aggregate bandwidth used by all concurrent users is still limited by the default device bandwidth or by the limit configured using the bandwidth command.

Variable WMT Bit Rates

A content provider can create streaming media files at different bit rates to ensure that different clients who have different connections—for example, modem, DSL, or LAN—can choose a particular bit rate.

The WMT caching proxy can cache multiple bit-rate files or variable bit-rate (VBR) files, and based on the bit rate specified by the client, it serves the appropriate stream. Another advantage of creating variable bit-rate files is that you only need to specify a single URL for the delivery of streaming media.

Note In the case of multiple bit-rate files, the SE that is acting as the WMT proxy server retrieves only the bit rate that the client has requested.

Examples The following example shows how to configure an incoming bit rate for the Movie Streamer:

ServiceEngine(config)# bitrate movie-streamer incoming 100

The following example shows how to configure an incoming bit rate for a file sent using WMT. Use the show wmt command to verify that the incoming bit rate has been modified.

ServiceEngine(config)# bitrate wmt incoming 300000

ServiceEngine(config)# exit

ServiceEngine# show wmt

--------- WMT Server Configurations -----------------

WMT is enabled

WMT disallowed client protocols: none

WMT bandwidth platform limit: 1000000 Kbits/sec

WMT outgoing bandwidth configured is 500000 Kbits/sec

WMT incoming bandwidth configured is 500000 Kbits/sec

WMT max sessions configured: 14000

WMT max sessions platform limit: 14000

WMT max sessions enforced: 14000 sessions

WMT max outgoing bit rate allowed per stream has no limit

WMT max incoming bit rate allowed per stream has no limit

WMT cache is enabled

WMT cache max-obj-size: 25600 MB

WMT cache revalidate for each request is not enabled

WMT cache age-multiplier: 30%

WMT cache min-ttl: 60 minutes

WMT cache max-ttl: 1 days

WMT debug client ip not set

WMT debug server ip not set

WMT accelerate live-split is enabled

WMT accelerate proxy-cache is enabled

WMT accelerate VOD is enabled

WMT fast-start is enabled

WMT fast-start max. bandwidth per player is 3500 (Kbps)

WMT fast-cache is enabled

WMT fast-cache acceleration factor is 5

2-54

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

WMT maximum data packet MTU (TCP) enforced is 1472 bytes

WMT maximum data packet MTU (UDP) is 1500 bytes

WMT client idle timeout is 60 seconds

WMT forward logs is enabled

WMT server inactivity-timeout is 65535

WMT Transaction Log format is Windows Media Services 4.1 logging

RTSP Gateway incoming port 554

--------- WMT HTTP Configurations -------------------

WMT http extensions allowed: asf none nsc wma wmv nsclog

--------- WMT Proxy Configurations ------------------

Outgoing Proxy-Mode:

--------------------

MMS-over-HTTP Proxy-Mode: is not configured.

RTSP Proxy-Mode: is not configured. ServiceEngine#

Related Commands Command Description show wmt Displays the WMT configuration.

bitrate

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-55

blink

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

blink

To identify physical devices by blinking their LED(s), use the blink command in EXEC configuration mode.

blink { disk name | interface {GigabitEthernet slot/port_num | TenGigabitEthernet slot/port_num }}

Syntax Description disk name interface

GigabitEthernet slot/port_num

TenGigabitEthernet

Flash disk LED for 3s.

disk name (format is disk00).

Flash network interface port LED for 3s.

Selects a Gigabit Ethernet interface.

Slot and port number for the selected interface. The slot range is from 1 to

14; the port range is from 0 to 0. The slot number and port number are separated with a forward slash character (/).

Selects a Ten Gigabit Ethernet interface.

Command Default None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The blink disk command submits IO to a disk, do not use this command in systems with live traffic.

Examples The following example shows how to blink a disk:

ServiceRouter# blink disk disk00

Blinking disk00 LED for 3 seconds

The following example shows how to blink a GigabitEthernet interface:

ServiceRouter# blink interface gigabitEthernet 1/0

Blinking eth0 LED for 3 seconds

2-56

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands bootstrap-node

bootstrap-node

To configure a bootstrap node IP address, use the bootstrap-node Service Routing Protocol (SRP) configuration command. To remove a bootstrap node address, use the no or default form of the command. bootstrap-node ip-address

[ no | default ] bootstrap-node ip-address

Syntax Description ip-address Valid IP address for the bootstrap node. IP addresses 0.0.0.0 and

255.255.255.255 are not valid addresses for a bootstrap node.

Command Default No bootstrap node address is configured.

Command Modes SRP configuration (config-srp) mode.

Usage Guidelines This command is used to set bootstrap nodes for an SRP. A Proximity Engine specifies one or more bootstrap nodes to join a DHT network. In a DHT network, the domain ID of the bootstrap nodes and the Proximity Engine must the same.

The first Proximity Engine in the network, which acts as the bootstrap node for others, does not have to configure the bootstrap node address itself. This is the only exception to configuring bootstrap nodes.

All other nodes need to configure a bootstrap node address before they can join any network.

The no and default forms of the command remove a given bootstrap node from the list of available bootstrap nodes of a Proximity Engine. The port number for bootstrap node is 9000. The show srp process command lists configured bootstrap nodes.

A Proximity Engine cannot be its own bootstrap node. A maximum 25 bootstrap nodes are allowed.

Examples The following example shows how to configure a bootstrap node address with the bootstrap-node command:

ServiceRouter# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

ServiceRouter(config)# router srp

ServiceRouter(config-srp)# bootstrap-node 192.168.6.91

ServiceRouter(config-srp)# end

ServiceRouter#

The following example shows how the show srp process command displays configured bootstrap nodes:

ServiceRouter# show srp process

Process:

Domain: 0

Node Id: 6b05858ab28345e62e9e614a48e1206445ec9ca0884fa0e827c1072f5fe8c5f5

Port: 9000

Interfaces running SRP:

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-57

bootstrap-node

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

*GigabitEthernet 1/0

Database Mirroring: Disabled

# of storages requested for mirroring: 2

# of storages used for mirroring : 1

...

ServiceRouter#

Related Commands Command domain router srp show srp process

Description

Sets the domain ID for the SRP.

Enters SRP configuration mode.

Displays the basic configurations for SRP.

2-58

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

cache

cache

To restrict the maximum number of contents in the VDS-IS, use the cache command in Global configuration mode.

cache content {eviction-preferred-size {small | large} | eviction-protection {min-size-100MB

{min-duration-1hr | min-duration-2hr | min-duration-3hr | min-duration-4hr} | min-size-1GB {min-duration-1hr | min-duration-2hr | min-duration-3hr | min-duration-4hr} | min-size-4GB {min-duration-1hr | min-duration-2hr | min-duration-3hr | min-duration-4hr} | min-size-500MB {min-duration-1hr | min-duration-2hr | min-duration-3hr| min-duration-4hr}} | small-file-eviction-protection

{max-size-10MB {min-duration-10min | min-duration-15min | min-duration-30min | min-duration-5min} | max-size-1MB {min-duration-10min | min-duration-15min | min-duration-30min | min-duration-5min} | max-size-20MB {min-duration-10min | min-duration-15min | min-duration-30min | min-duration-5min} | max-size-2MB

{min-duration-10min | min-duration-15min | min-duration-30min | min-duration-5min} | max-size-4MB {min-duration-10min | min-duration-15min | min-duration-30min | min-duration-5min} | max-size-500KB {min-duration-10min | min-duration-15min | min-duration-30min | min-duration-5min}} | max-cached-entries num | max-cached-dirs num } cache content { eviction-preferred-size { small | large } | eviction-protection { min-size-100MB

{ min-duration-1hr | min-duration-2hr | min-duration-3hr | min-duration-4hr }| min-size-1GB { min-duration-1hr | min-duration-2hr | min-duration-3hr | min-duration-4hr } | min-size-4GB { min-duration-1hr | min-duration-2hr | min-duration-3hr | min-duration-4hr } | min-size-500MB { min-duration-1hr | min-duration-2hr | min-duration-3hr | min-duration-4hr }}| max-cached-entries num | max-cached-dirs num }

Syntax Description content eviction-preferred-size large small eviction-protection min-size-100MB min-duration-1hr min-duration-2hrs min-duration-3hrs min-duration-4hrs min-size-1GB min-size-4GB min-size-500MB

Configures the cached contents.

Configures cache content eviction preferred.

Selects cache content eviction preferred size (Retain smaller objects).

Selects cache content eviction preferred size (Retain larger objects).

Configures the eviction protection.

Minimum cache entry size to protect.

Minimum duration to protect the content from eviction.

Minimum duration to protect the content from eviction.

Minimum duration to protect the content from eviction.

Minimum duration to protect the content from eviction.

Minimum cache entry size to protect.

Minimum cache entry size to protect.

Minimum cache entry size to protect.

small-file-eviction-protection Configure the small file eviction protection max-size-10MB Minimum cache entry size to protect.

min-duration-10min min-duration-15min

Minimum duration to protect the content from eviction.

Minimum duration to protect the content from eviction.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-59

cache min-duration-30min min-duration-5min max-size-1MB max-size-20MB max-size-2MB max-size-4MB max-size-500KB max-cached-entries num max-cached-dirs num

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Minimum duration to protect the content from eviction.

Minimum duration to protect the content from eviction.

Minimum cache entry size to protect.

Minimum cache entry size to protect.

Minimum cache entry size to protect.

Minimum cache entry size to protect.

Minimum cache entry size to protect.

Maximum cached entries.

• The maximum cached file entries is 20 million for a platform with physical memory size less than 32GB(33,554,432KB). The default is 16 million.

• The maximum cached file entries is 50 million for a platform with physical memory size more than 32GB(33,554,432KB).

The default is 40 million.

Maximum cached directories.

• The maximum cached file directories is 1 million for a platform with physical memory size less than 32GB(33,554,432KB). The default is 800,000.

• The maximum cached file directores is 10 million for a platform with physical memory size more than 32GB(33,554,432KB).

The default is 8 million.

Defaults None

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines The Content Manager manages the caching, storage, and deletion of content.

Current priority favors small objects. The cache content eviction-preferred size command allows users to configure a preference for small or large objects in the Content Manager. Once a preference is specified, it only applies on contents made after the configurative; contents prior to configuration remain unchanged.

Addition and Deletion Processes

Previously, the VDS-IS software did not restrict adding new content to CDNFS as long as there was enough disk space for the asset. The cache content max-cached-entries command restricted the number of assets, but it was not a hard limit. New content was always added and the CDS would delete old content in an attempt to keep within the limits configured. The CDS could actually have more content than the configured limit, because the process to delete content is slower than the process to add content.

The same situation applies to disk-usage based deletion, where deletion occurs when 90 percent of the

CDNFS is used.

Content addition stops at 105 percent of the maximum object count or 95 percent of the CDNFS capacity

(disk usage). For example, if the maximum number of objects has been configured as 50 million, the

VDS-IS starts deleting content if the object count reaches 50 million, but adding content is still allowed.

2-60

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands cache

Adding content stops when the maximum number of content objects reaches 52.5 million (105 percent of 50 million), which allows time for the content deletion process to reduce the number of objects in the

VDS-IS to the configured limit. Adding content resumes only after the number of objects is 50 million or less. The same logic applies to disk usage. The deletion process starts when disk usage reaches 93 percent, adding content stops when disk usage reaches 98 percent, and adding content resumes only after the disk usage percentage reaches 95 percent or less.

Note We recommend that any CDE model that has hard-disk drives (HDDs) (instead of solid-state drives

[SDDs]), and is used to stream ABR content, be configured with a maximum of 5 million objects instead of the default value. This is because HDD-based hardware requires more seek time to access content.

The software can handle 50 million objects, but the hard-drive access time impacts the ABR streaming performance. ABR content consists of a large number of small files, which results in a lot of overhead.

For long-tail content (Windows Media Streaming, Flash Media Streaming, Movie Streamer, and progressive download), the maximum number of content objects can be configured with the default of

20 million on the HDD-based hardware models. Two of the HDD-based hardware models are the

CDE220-2G2 and CDE250-2M0.

If adding content has been stopped because either the content count reached 105 percent of the limit or the disk usage reached 98 percent of capacity, the un-writable flag is set in the share memory and when the protocol engine calls create, FastCAL library looks into the share memory and denies the creation request. The protocol engine performs a bypass or cut-through operation.

The show cdnfs usage command shows the current status of whether the content is able to be cached or not. Following is an example of the output:

ServiceEngine# show cdnfs usage

Total number of CDNFS entries : 2522634

Total space : 4656.3 GB

Total bytes available : 4626.0 GB

Total cache size : 2.4 GB

Total cached entries : 2522634

Cache-content mgr status : Cachable

Units: 1KB = 1024B; 1MB = 1024KB; 1GB = 1024MB

If the maximum object count is reached, the following is displayed:

Cache-content mgr status: Not cacheable on the following disk(s): [/disk00-06]

[/disk01-06] [/disk02-01]

105% of max obj count reached : [/disk00-06] [/disk01-06] [/disk02-01]

If the disk usage reaches more than 98 percent, the following is displayed:

Cache-content mgr status: Not cacheable on the following disk(s): [/disk01-06]

[/disk02-01]

98% of disk usage reached: [/disk01-06] [/disk02-01]

Eviction Protection

The Content Manager provides configurable eviction protection for some content. The Content Manager eviction algorithm is triggered when the disk usage reaches 93 percent or when the cached object count reaches the configured maximum object count. The eviction algorithm assigns a priority number to each content object based on an algorithm similar to the greedy-dual-size-frequency (GDSF) algorithm. The priority number is based on the size and usage of the object. Small objects are given preference over large objects; that is, they are less likely to be deleted.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-61

cache

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

To protect incoming large objects from getting a low priority and being deleted, use the cache content eviction-protection global configure command. The cache content eviction-protection command allows you to set the minimum content size (100 MB, 500 MB, 1 GB, and 4 GB) and the minimum age

(1-4 hours for 100 MB size, 1, 4, 8, or 24 hours for all other sizes) of the content object to be protected from deletion. For example, to set the eviction protection for content objects larger than 100 MB that were ingested in the last two hours, you would enter the following command:

ServiceEngine(config)# cache content eviction-protection min-size-100MB min-duration-2hrs

If the content object being cached is larger than the configured size, it is inserted into a protection table along with the current time stamp. If the difference between the object’s time stamp and the current time is greater than the configured time duration, the object is removed from the protection table. If the eviction algorithm is triggered, before it selects an object for deletion, it first looks at the protection table, and if the object is found, it is skipped for that iteration. The clear-cache-content command also checks the protection table before deleting an object. The clear-cache-all command does not check the eviction protection table; cache content is just deleted. As for relative cache content, content in the protection table might still be deleted if the relative content that is not protected is deleted. The eviction protection is disabled by default.

If the Content Manager eviction algorithm is not able to find any content to delete, a syslog message is sent to notify the administrator to revisit the configuration. Changing the settings of the cache content eviction-protection command only affect the content that are currently in the protection table and any new content that is added. Any object that is removed from the protection table prior to the configuration change is not brought back into the protection table.

Reloading the SE or entering the no cache content eviction-protection min-size-xx duration-xx command removes all entries in the eviction protection table.

Note Changing the time on the SE affects the Content Manager eviction process. If the time is set forward, content is deleted sooner than expected. If the time is set back, content is protected longer.

The show cache content command displays the eviction protection status and the number of elements in the eviction protection table.

Examples The following example shows how to configure the cache content:

ServiceEngine# cache content max-cached-entries 1000

The show cdnfs usage command shows the current status of whether the content is able to be cached or not. Following is an example of the output:

# show cdnfs usage

Total number of CDNFS entries : 2522634

Total space : 4656.3 GB

Total bytes available : 4626.0 GB

Total cache size : 2.4 GB

Total cached entries : 2522634

Cache-content mgr status : Cachable

Units: 1KB = 1024B; 1MB = 1024KB; 1GB = 1024MB

If the maximum object count is reached, the following is displayed:

Cache-content mgr status : caching paused[ max count 105% of configured reached ]

If the disk usage reaches more than 95 percent, the following is displayed:

Cache-content mgr status : caching paused[ disk max 95% of disk usage reached ]

2-62

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands cache

Note When the VDS-IS is started or the cache Content Manager is restarted, it performs a scan of the entire

CDNFS. During this period, the deletion starts at 94 percent (not 90 percent) and adding content stops at 95 percent.

Related Commands Command Description show cache Displays a list of cached contents.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-63

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands capability

capability

To modify the capability configuration, use the capability command in Global configuration mode. To disable capability, use the no form of this command.

capability config profile number [ add attrib { capability-url url | user-agent name } | description ] no capability config

Syntax Description config profile number add attrib capability-url url user-agent name description

Enters the capability exchange submode.

Populates the profile database.

The profile ID. The range is from 1 to 65535.

(Optional) Adds the capability attributes.

Adds the capability attributes.

Specifies the capability URL.

The capability URL string.

Specifies the user-agent.

The user-agent name.

(Optional) Specifies the profile description.

Defaults None

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Command Description show capability Displays information for the Cap-X profile ID.

2-64

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

cd

cd

To change from one directory to another directory, use the cd command in EXEC configuration mode.

cd directoryname

Syntax Description directoryname Directory name.

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines Use this command to maneuver between directories and for file management. The directory name becomes the default prefix for all relative paths. Relative paths do not begin with a slash (/). Absolute paths begin with a slash (/).

Examples The following example shows how to use a relative path:

ServiceEngine(config)# cd local1

The following example shows how to use an absolute path:

ServiceEngine(config)# cd /local1

Related Commands Command Description deltree dir lls ls mkdir pwd

Deletes a directory and its subdirectories.

Displays the files in a long list format.

Displays the files in a long list format.

Lists the files and subdirectories in a directory.

Makes a directory.

Displays the present working directory.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-65

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands cdn-select

cdn-select

To enable the CDN Selector for third-party service selection, use the cdn-select command in Global configuration mode. To disable the CDN Selector, use the no form of this command.

cdn-select enable no cdn-select enable

Syntax Description enable Enables the CDN Selector.

Defaults None

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines The cdn-select command enables the CDN Selector, which provides a method to do third-party service selection based on parameters like content type and geographic location.

Examples The following example shows how to enable the CDN Selector:

ServiceRouter(config)# cdn-select enable

ServiceRouter(config)#

The following example shows how to disable the CDN Selector:

ServiceRouter(config)# no cdn-select enable

ServiceRouter(config)#

Related Commands Command Description geo-location-server show cdn-select show statistics cdn-select

Redirects requests to different Content Delivery Networks based on the geographic location of the client.

Displays the status of the CDN Selector.

Displays the statistics for the CDN Selector.

2-66

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

cdnfs

To browse the VDS-IS network file system (CDNFS), use the cdnfs browse command in EXEC configuration mode.

cdnfs { browse | cleanup { info | start force | stop }} cdnfs

Syntax Description browse cleanup info start force stop

Browses the CDNFS directories and files.

Cleans up the unwanted entries in the CDNFS.

Summary information of the garbage entries. No cleanup.

Starts the CDNFS garbage collection.

Forces removing objections that are in transient states.

Stops the CDNFS garbage collection.

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The VDS-IS CDNFS stores the prepositioned VDS-IS network content to be delivered by all supported protocols.

Use the cdnfs browse command to browse the CDNFS directories and files. It does not display cached content for the Web Engine or Flash Media Streaming. It only caches content for Windows Media

Streaming and Movie Streamer, and displays prefetched content. To display cached content, use the show cache content command.

ServiceEngine# cdnfs browse

------ CDNFS interactive browsing -----dir, ls: list directory contents cd,chdir: change current working directory info: display attributes of a file more: page through a file cat: display a file exit,quit: quit CDNFS browse shell

/>dir

www.gidtest.com/

/>cd www.gidtest.com

/www.gidtest.com/>dir

764 Bytes index.html

/www.gidtest.com/>info index.html

CDNFS File Attributes:

Status 3 (Ready)

File Size 764 Bytes

Start Time null

End Time null

Last-modified Time Sun Sep 9 01:46:40 2001

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-67

cdnfs

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Internal path to data file:

/disk06-00/d/www.gidtest.com/05/05d201b7ca6fdd41d491eaec7cfc6f14.0.data.html

note: data file actual last-modified time: Tue Feb 15 00:47:35 2005

/www.gidtest.com/>

Because the CDNFS is empty in this example, the ls command does not show any results. Typically, if the CDNFS contains information, it lists the websites as directories, and file attributes and content could be viewed using these subcommands.

The cdnfs cleanup command, which is used to cleanup unwanted entries in CDNFS, is deprecated in

Release 2.6. in the following manner. When an SE is removed from a delivery service, the Content

Manager removes all cache content for that delivery service. All prefetched content for that delivery service is removed by the Acquisition and Distribution process. However, if the Acquisition and

Distribution process fails because of an SE being offline or for any other reason, then the cdnfs cleanup command is still required to remove the prefetched content.

In certain cases, the Acquirer is not notified by the Centralized Management System (CMS) about deleted channels, and it fails to clear all unified name space (UNS) content. In such cases, the cdnfs cleanup command can be used to clean up all UNS content associated with deleted channels.

Note You can use the cdnfs cleanup start command to clean up the orphan content. The orphan content is content that is not associated with any channel to which the SE is subscribed.

The cdnfs database recover command must be run when the cdnfs_db_corrupt alarm is raised. This alarm is raised when the Total Cached entries is more than Total CDNFS entries in the output for the show cdnfs usage command:

ServiceEngine# show cdnfs usage

Total number of CDNFS entries : 202

Total space : 5037.9 GB

Total bytes available : 5019.5 GB

Total cache size : 21.0 GB

Total cached entries : 218

Cache-content mgr status : Cachable

Units: 1KB = 1024B; 1MB = 1024KB; 1GB = 1024MB

This occurs generally when an internal bookkeeping file is corrupted. With the server in the offloading status, enter the cdnfs database recover command to remove this inconsistency, then reload the server.

Examples The following example shows the output of the cdnfs cleanup info command:

ServiceEngine# cdnfs cleanup info

Gathering cleanup information. This may take some time....

(Use Ctrl+C or 'cdnfs cleanup stop' to interrupt)

..............................

Summary of garbage resource entries found

-------------------------------------------

Number of entries : 605

Size of entries (KB) : 60820911

The following example shows the output for the cdnfs database recover command:

ServiceEngine# cdnfs database recover

CDNFS database inconsistency issue found.

CDNFS database recovery operation would impact existing and new client sessions.

2-68

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Recovering database would need device in offloaded state.

Do you want to recover the CDNFS database now (y/n)?

y

Recovering CDNFS database. It may take few minutes.

Please wait...

CDNFS database recovery is complete. Please reload the device now.

ServiceEngine# reload

Proceed with reload? [confirm] yes

Shutting down all services, will timeout in 15 minutes.

reload in progress...

Related Commands Command Description show cdnfs Displays the VDS-IS network file system information.

show statistics cdnfs Displays the SE VDS-IS network file system statistics.

cdnfs

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-69

cdsm

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

cdsm

Syntax Description ip hostname ip-address role primary standby ui port port-num

To configure the Content Delivery System (CDSM) IP address to be used for the SEs or SRs, or to configure the role and GUI parameters on a CDSM device, use the cdsm command in Global configuration mode. To negate these actions, use the no form of this command.

cdsm { ip { hostname | ip-address | role { primary | standby } | ui port port-num }} no cdsm { ip | role { primary | standby } | ui port }

Configures the CDSM hostname or IP address.

Hostname of the CDSM.

IP address of the CDSM.

Configures the CDSM role to either primary or standby (available only from the CDSM CLI).

Configures the CDSM to be the primary CDSM.

Configures the CDSM to be the standby CDSM.

Configures the CDSM GUI port address (available only from the CDSM

CLI).

Configures the CDSM GUI port.

Port number. The range is from 1 to 65535.

Defaults None

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines You can use the cdsm ui port command to change the CDSM GUI port from the standard number 8443 as follows:

CDSM(config)# cdsm ui port 35535

Note The role and ui options are only available on CDSM devices. Changing the CDSM GUI port number automatically restarts the Centralized Management System (CMS) service if this has been enabled.

The cdsm ip command associates the device with the CDSM so that the device can be approved as a part of the network.

After the device is configured with the CDSM IP address, it presents a self-signed security certificate and other essential information, such as its IP address or hostname, disk space allocation, and so forth, to the CDSM.

2-70

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands cdsm

Configuring Devices Inside a NAT

In an VDS-IS network, there are two methods for a device registered with the CDSM (SEs, SRs, or standby CDSM) to obtain configuration information from the primary CDSM. The primary method is for the device to periodically poll the primary CDSM on port 443 to request a configuration update. You cannot configure this port number. The backup method is when the CDSM pushes configuration updates to a registered device as soon as possible by issuing a notification to the registered device on port 443.

This method allows changes to take effect in a timelier manner. You cannot configure this port number even when the backup method is being used. VDS-IS networks do not work reliably if devices registered with the CDSM are unable to poll the CDSM for configuration updates. Similarly, when a receiver SE requests content and content metadata from a forwarder SE, it contacts the forwarder SE on port 443.

All the above methods become complex in the presence of Network Address Translation (NAT) firewalls. When a device (SEs at the edge of the network, SRs, and primary or standby CDSMs) is inside a NAT firewall, those devices that are inside the same NAT use one IP address (the inside local IP address) to access the device and those devices that are outside the NAT use a different IP address (the inside global IP address) to access the device. A centrally managed device advertises only its inside local

IP address to the CDSM. All other devices inside the NAT use the inside local IP address to contact the centrally managed device that resides inside the NAT. A device that is not inside the same NAT as the centrally managed device is not able to contact it without special configuration.

If the primary CDSM is inside a NAT, you can allow a device outside the NAT to poll it for getUpdate requests by configuring a static translation (inside global IP address) for the CDSM’s inside local IP address on its NAT, and using this address, rather than the CDSM’s inside local IP address, in the cdsm ip ip-address command when you register the device to the CDSM. If the SE or SR is inside a NAT and the CDSM is outside the NAT, you can allow the SE or SR to poll for getUpdate requests by configuring a static translation (inside global IP address) for the SE or SIR’s inside local address on its NAT and specifying this address in the Use IP Address field under the NAT Configuration heading in the Device

Activation window.

Note Static translation establishes a one-to-one mapping between your inside local address and an inside global address. Static translation is useful when a host on the inside must be accessible by a fixed address from the outside.

Standby CDSMs

The VDS-IS software implements a standby CDSM. This process allows you to maintain a copy of the

VDS-IS network configuration. If the primary CDSM fails, the standby can be used to replace the primary.

For interoperability, when a standby CDSM is used, it must be at the same software version as the primary CDSM to maintain the full CDSM configuration. Otherwise, the standby CDSM detects this status and does not process any configuration updates that it receives from the primary CDSM until the problem is corrected.

Note We recommend that you upgrade your standby CDSM first and then upgrade your primary CDSM. We also recommend that you create a database backup on your primary CDSM and copy the database backup file to a safe place before you upgrade the software.

Switching a CDSM from Warm Standby to Primary

If your primary CDSM becomes inoperable for some reason, you can manually reconfigure one of your warm standby CDSMs to be the primary CDSM. Configure the new role by using the Global configuration cdsm role primary command as follows:

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-71

cdsm

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

ServiceEngine# configure

ServiceEngine(config)# cdsm role primary

This command changes the role from standby to primary and restarts the management service to recognize the change.

Note Check the status of recent updates from the primary CDSM. Use the show cms info command in EXEC configuration mode and check the time of the last update. To be current, the update time should be between 1 and 5 minutes old. You are verifying that the standby CDSM has fully replicated the primary

CDSM configuration. If the update time is not current, check whether there is a connectivity problem or if the primary CDSM is down. Fix the problem, if necessary, and wait until the configuration has replicated as indicated by the time of the last update. Make sure that both CDSMs have the same

Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) configured.

If you switch a warm standby CDSM to primary while your primary CDSM is still online and active, both CDSMs detect each other, automatically shut themselves down, and disable management services.

The CDSMs are switched to halted, which is automatically saved in flash memory.

Examples The following example shows how to configure an IP address and a primary role for a CDSM:

CDSM(config)# cdsm ip 10.1.1.1

CDSM(config)# cdsm role primary

The following example shows how to configure a new GUI port to access the CDSM GUI:

CDSM(config)# cdsm ui port 8550

The following example shows how to configure the CDSM as the standby CDSM:

CDSM(config)# cdsm role standby

Switching CDSM to standby will cause all configuration settings made on this CDSM

to be lost.

Please confirm you want to continue [ no ] ?yes

Restarting CMS services

The following example shows how to configure the standby CDSM with the IP address of the primary

CDSM by using the cdsm ip ip-address command. This command associates the device with the primary

CDSM so that it can be approved as a part of the network.

CDSM# cdsm ip 10.1.1.1

2-72

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands clear cache

clear cache

To clear the HTTP object cache use the clear command in EXEC configuration mode.

clear cache [all | content <1-1000000> disk-volume word | flash-media-streaming | url word rate num ]

Syntax Description all content

1-1000000 disk-volume word flash-media-streaming url word rate num

(Optional) Clears all cached objects.

(Optional) Clears cached content.

Free space, in Mbytes.

Disk Volume.

Specifies the disk volume to clear cached content.

Clears the Flash Media Streaming edge server cached content and DVR cached content.

Clear cached objects by URL.

The original URL(s) (grouped by wildcard) for content object(s) to delete.

Specify the max content deletion rate

Per disk content deletion rate in tps, 200 by default.

Defaults Cached content is 1000 Mbytes if not specified.

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The clear cache command removes all cached contents from the currently mounted cache volumes.

Objects being read or written are removed when they stop being busy.

The clear cache all command requests the Content Manager to delete all cache contents. Only one clear cache all command can be executed at a time, and the Control-C option is not allowed with this command. During the clear cache all operation, the show cache content and show cdnfs usage outputs display a line about running the clear cache all command, and the progress is displayed in the output of these commands.

Caution The clear cache all command is irreversible, and all cached content is erased. Cisco does not recommend using this command on production systems.

When the clear cache content command is executed, by default, the command evicts 1000MB of content from all disks in the SE. For example, if the SE has 12 disks, then 1000MB/12 = ~83MB content is evicted from each disk. In this case, all content in the SE is 450MB content; therefore, each disk results in a minimum content of 450MB. This causes 450MB * 12 = 5400MB to be evicted. Each disk maintains its own eviction tree, so to avoid this issue, evict each disk separately.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-73

clear cache

Examples

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

The following example shows how to clear all cached contents:

ServiceEngine# clear cache all

This operation tries to free up all cached contents. Proceed? [yes|NO] yes

Clear cache all operation will stop CMGRSlowScan process running

Starting clear cache all operation, 100 contents will be deleted.

Clear cache all progress: done[100], total[100], progress[100.00%][####################]

Clear cache all finished, duration[3], tps[33.33].

Related Commands Command cache content show cache content show cdnfs usage

Description

Configures the cached contents.

Displays a list of cached contents.

Displays Content Delivery Network (CDN) current usage.

2-74

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands clear content

clear content

To clear the content of a Uniform Resource Locator (URL), use the clear content command in EXEC configuration mode.

clear content { last-folder-url url | url url } last-folder-url url url url

Clears all content with a relative diskpath from the given URL without a filename.

The valid URL without the filename. Protocol is ignored.

Clears cached content with its original URL.

The URL for the content object to delete.

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The clear content url command requests the Fast Content Abstraction Layer (FastCAL) API to delete the content of the specified URL and inform the Content Manager to remove it from its internal data structure.

Examples The following example shows how to clear the content URL:

1.

Verify the URL that is to be deleted from the SE.

ServiceEngine# show cache

Max-cached-entries is set as 10000000

Number of cal cached assets: 10

------------------------------------------------

Priority Size URL

------------------------------------------------

1.87390e+01 64000 http://7.1.200.200/file-1961503

1.87390e+01 64000 http://7.1.200.200/file-1961548

1.87390e+01 64000 http://7.1.200.200/file-1961450

1.87390e+01 64000 http://7.1.200.200/file-1961495

1.87390e+01 64000 http://7.1.200.200/file-1961540

1.87390e+01 64000 http://7.1.200.200/file-1961399

1.87390e+01 64000 http://7.1.200.200/file-1961349

1.87390e+01 64000 http://7.1.200.200/file-1961395

1.87390e+01 64000 http://7.1.200.200/file-1961302

1.87390e+01 64000 http://7.1.200.200/file-1961575

ServiceRouter#

2.

Clear the URL content from that SE:

ServiceEngine# clear content url http://7.1.200.200/file-1961503

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-75

clear content

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

3.

Verify the content is removed from SE:

ServiceEngine# show cache

Max-cached-entries is set as 10000000

Number of cal cached assets: 10

------------------------------------------------

Priority Size URL

------------------------------------------------

1.87390e+01 64000 http://7.1.200.200/file-1961548

1.87390e+01 64000 http://7.1.200.200/file-1961450

1.87390e+01 64000 http://7.1.200.200/file-1961495

1.87390e+01 64000 http://7.1.200.200/file-1961540

1.87390e+01 64000 http://7.1.200.200/file-1961399

1.87390e+01 64000 http://7.1.200.200/file-1961349

1.87390e+01 64000 http://7.1.200.200/file-1961395

1.87390e+01 64000 http://7.1.200.200/file-1961302

1.87390e+01 64000 http://7.1.200.200/file-1961575

1.87390e+01 64000 http://7.1.200.200/file-1961529

ServiceEngine#

This example shows how to delete all the contents matching the last-folder-url:

ServiceEngine# clear content last-folder-url http://172.XX.XX.XXX/vod

This operation tries to free up all content which matches last-folder-url.

Proceed?[yes|NO] yes

Content to be deleted:

url: [http://172.XX.XX.XXX/vod/rab1.flv]

url: [http://172.XX.XX.XXX/vod/rab2.flv]

url: [http://172.XX.XX.XXX/vod/119M.flv]

2-76

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

clear ip

clear ip

To clear the IP configuration, use the clear ip command in EXEC configuration mode.

On the SE: clear ip access-list counters [ standard_acl-num | extended_acl_num | acl-name ]

On the SR: clear ip { access-list counters [ standard_acl-num | extended_acl_num | acl-name ] | bgp {ip address | all} | ospf {neighbor {all | GigabitEthernet slot/port num | PortChannel num } | rspf route [ router-id } | traffic} {SR-Mode}

Defaults access-list counters standard_acl_num extended_acl_num acl-name bgp all ip-address ospf neighbor all

GigabitEthernet slot/port num

PortChannel num rspf route router-id traffic

1.

BGP = Border Gateway Protocol

2.

OSPF = Open Shortest Path First

Clears the IP access list statistical information.

Clears the IP access list counters.

(Optional) Counters for the specified access list, identified using a numeric identifier. The range is from 1 to 99.

(Optional) Counters for the specified access list, identified using a numeric identifier. The range is from 100 to 199

(Optional) Counters for the specified access list, identified using an alphanumeric identifier up to 30 characters, beginning with a letter.

Clears the BGP

1

neighbors.

Specifies that all current BGP sessions are reset.

Specifies that only the identified BGP neighbor is reset.

Clears the OSPF 2 tables.

Neighbor statistics per interface.

Clears all neighbors.

Selects a GigabitEthernet interface.

Slot and port number for the selected interface. The slot range is 1 to

14, and the port is 0. The slot number and port number are separated with a forward slash character (/).

Selects the Ethernet Channel of interfaces.

Specifies the Ethernet Channel interface number. The range is from 1 to 4.

OSPF rspf.

Internal OSPF rspf routes.

(Optional) Specifies the ID of a router for clear routing information.

OSPF traffic counters.

None

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-77

clear ip

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines Use the clear ip bgp command whenever any of the following changes occur:

• Additions or changes to the BGP-related access lists

Changes to BGP-related weights

Changes to BGP-related distribution lists

Changes to BGP-related route maps

Examples The clear ip bgp all command is used to clear all routes in the local routing table. In the following example, the Proximity Engine has only one neighbor, 192.168.86.3:

ServiceRouter# clear ip bgp all

ServiceRouter# show ip bgp summary

BGP router identifier 3.2.5.4, local AS number 1

BGP table version is 3626, IPv4 Unicast config peers 3, capable peers 2

2 network entries and 2 paths using 216 bytes of memory

BGP attribute entries [2/168], BGP AS path entries [3/14]

BGP community entries [2/8], BGP clusterlist entries [0/0]

BGP Location Communities:

Location Communities value: 1:1-2:2 target 1:1-2:2 weight 4

Neighbor V AS MsgRcvd MsgSent TblVer InQ OutQ Up/Down State/PfxRcd

3.1.5.13 4 10 12787 8819 0 0 0 00:00:03 Closing

3.1.5.103 4 3 2036 2035 3626 0 0 1d09h 1

37.0.0.7 4 2 2036 2035 3626 0 0 1d09h 1

ServiceRouter#

The following example shows how to clear OSPF of all neighbors:

ServiceRouter# clear ip ospf neighbor all

ServiceRouter#

The following example shows how to clear OSPF of all neighbors in the GigabitEthernet 1/0 interface:

ServiceRouter# clear ip ospf neighbor GigabitEthernet 1/0

ServiceRouter#

The following example shows how to clear OSPF RSPF information for all routers:

ServiceRouter# clear ip ospf rspf route

ServiceRouter#

The following example shows how to clear OSPF RSPF information for the router with the ID 172.

20.168.41:

ServiceRouter# clear ip ospf rspf route 172.20.168.41

ServiceRouter#

Related

Command show ip bgp summary

Description

Displays the status of all BGP connections.

2-78

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

clear ipv6

To clear the IPv6 ACL counters, use the clear ipv6 command in EXEC configuration mode.

clear ipv6 access-list counters [ standard_acl-num | extended_acl_num | acl_name ] clear ipv6

Syntax Description access-list counters standard_acl_num extended_acl_num acl-name

Clears the IP access list statistical information.

Clears the IP access list counters.

(Optional) Counters for the specified access list, identified using a numeric identifier. The range is from 1 to 99.

(Optional) Counters for the specified access list, identified using a numeric identifier. The range is from 100 to 199

(Optional) Counters for the specified access list, identified using an alphanumeric identifier up to 30 characters, beginning with a letter.

Defaults No

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Examples

Related Commands

The following example shows how to clear IPv6 ACL counters:

ServiceRouter# clear ipv6 access-list counters 99

ServiceRouter#

Command ipv6 show ipv6 traceroute6

Description

Specifies the default gateway’s IPv6 address.

Displays the IPv6 information.

Traces the route to a remote IPv6-enabled host.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-79

clear isis

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

clear isis

To clear IS-IS Routing for an IP, use the clear isis command in EXEC configuration mode.

clear isis { adjacency { all | GigabitEthernet slot/port num | PortChannel num } | ip rspf route

[ LSP-ID ]}

Syntax Description adjacency all

GigabitEthernet slot/port num

PortChannel num ip rspf route

LSP_ID

1.

SPF = Shortest Path First

2.

LSP = link-state packet

Clears the IS-IS adjacency information.

Clears IS-IS adjacencies on all interfaces.

Selects a GigabitEthernet interface.

Slot and port number for the selected interface. The slot range is 1 to

14; the port is 0. The slot number and port number are separated with a forward slash character (/).

Selects the Ethernet Channel of interfaces.

Specifies the Ethernet Channel interface number. The range is from 1 to 4.

IS-IS IP information.

IS-IS Reverse SPF

1

routing information.

Specifies the IS-IS route.

(Optional) Clears information for LSPs

2

ID in the form of xxxx.xxxx.xxxx.xxxx or name.

Defaults If no LSP ID is specified in the clear isis ip rspf route command, IS-IS RSPF information is cleared for all LSP IDs.

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The clear isis ip rspf route command is used to clear IS-IS RSPF routing information. IS-IS RSPF routing information is displayed only with the show isis ip rspf route command when a new proximity request has been received.

Examples The following is sample output from the show isis adjacency command before and after running the clear isis adjacency command:

ServiceRouter# show isis adjacency

IS-IS adjacency database:

System ID SNPA Level State Hold Time Interface

0200.c0a8.5401 0000.a1e8.e019 1 UP 00:00:21 GigabitEthernet 3/0

7301-7-core 001d.a1e9.c41b 1 UP 00:00:08 GigabitEthernet 3/0

7301-7-core 001d.a1e9.c41b 2 UP 00:00:08 GigabitEthernet 3/0

2-80

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands clear isis

ServiceRouter#

ServiceRouter# clear isis adjacency all

ServiceRouter# show isis adjacency

IS-IS adjacency database:

System ID SNPA Level State Hold Time Interface

7301-7-core 001d.a1e9.c41b 1 UP 00:00:09 GigabitEthernet 3/0

7301-7-core 001d.a1e9.c41b 2 UP 00:00:09 GigabitEthernet 3/0

ServiceRouter#

The following is a sample from the show isis ip rspf route command before and after running the show isis ip rspf route command:

ServiceRouter# show isis ip rspf route

LSP ID SPF Time Cache Hit Level Age Max range

0200.c0a8.0a01.00-00 3d22h 0 1 3d22h 10

ServiceRouters# clear isis ip rspf route

ServiceRouter# show isis ip rspf route

LSP ID SPF Time Cache Hit Level Age Max range

Related Commands Command show isis adjacency show isis ip rspf route

Description

Displays IS-IS adjacencies.

Displays the Intermediate IS-IS RSPF route for IS-IS learned routes.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-81

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands clear logging

clear logging

To clear the syslog messages saved in the disk file, use the clear logging command in EXEC configuration mode.

clear logging

Syntax Description This command has no keywords or arguments.

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The clear logging command removes all current entries from the syslog.txt file, but does not make an archive of the file. It puts a “Syslog cleared” message in the syslog.txt file to indicate that the syslog has been cleared, as shown in the following example:

Feb 14 12:17:18 ServiceEngine# exec_clear_logging:Syslog cleared

Examples The following example shows how to clear the syslogs:

ServiceRouter# clear logging

U11-CDE220-2#

2-82

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands clear service-router

clear service-router

To clear the proximity-based routing proximity cache , use the clear service-router command in EXEC configuration mode.

clear service-router proximity-based-routing proximity-cache proximity-based-routing Clears proximity-based routing.

proximity-cache Clears proximity cache.

Defaults Clears the cache for all proximity ratings.

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines When an SR receives a redirect request from a client network 1 with proximity-based routing enabled, the SR queries the proximity server for the proximity rating of the SEs. The ratings returned from the proximity server are cached, and the default timeout for the cache is 1800 seconds . If there is any network or proximity rating change within this period, the SR does not know as it redirects based on the ratings cached for that network. The clear service-router command is used to force clear cache.

Examples The following example shows how to clear the Service Router.

ServiceRouter# clear service-router proximity-based-routing proximity-cache

ServiceRouter#

Command show service-router

Description

Shows the cache timeout period.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-83

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands clear srp database offline

clear srp database offline

To clear the SRP database while it is offline, use the clear srp database offline command in privileged

EXEC mode. clear srp database offline

Syntax Description This command has no keywords or arguments.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes Privileged EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The clear srp database offline command is used to clear the SRP database while it is offline.

Note You must turn off SRP before executing this command by entering the no router srp command.

Examples The following example shows how to clear the SRP database offline:

ServiceRouter# clear srp database offline

Clearing database offline

ServiceRouter#

Related Commands Command show srp database

Description

Displays the descriptor-related information saved in the descriptor database. show srp multicast database Displays multicast database information.

2-84

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands clear srp descriptor

clear srp descriptor

To delete either a single descriptor or all descriptors from the service routing layer, use the clear srp descriptor command in privileged EXEC mode. clear srp descriptor key

Syntax Description key The DHT key in hexadecimal format for the descriptor to be deleted. A valid

DHT key has 1 to 64 hexadecimal digits.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes Privileged EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The clear srp descriptor command is used to delete a single descriptor in the descriptor database. The delete operation deletes the descriptor at the descriptor root node (which may not necessarily be the local

Proximity Engine). Therefore, the descriptor is deleted from the entire network.

Note Deleting a group descriptor also causes the deletion of the group from the network (not just the group’s descriptor).

A valid DHT key must be specified in key to identify the descriptor that is deleted. Keys with less than

64 hexadecimal characters are appended with zeroes.

Deleting a nonexistent descriptor or a descriptor that does not appear in the descriptor database of the

Proximity Engine results in an error message stating that the DHT key does not exist.

Examples The following example shows how use the clear srp descriptor command to delete a descriptor with key 123. After the deletion, the show srp database command is used to verify that the descriptor has been deleted.

ServiceRouter# clear srp descriptor 123

ServiceRouter# show srp database 123

Getting database entry for

123

Entity key:

1230000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000

Entity was DELETED on (47b4269b599afa86) Thu Feb 14 11:31:39 2008

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-85

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands clear srp descriptor

Related Commands Command show srp database

Description

Displays the descriptor-related information saved in the descriptor database. show srp multicast database Displays multicast database information.

2-86

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands clear srp neighbor

clear srp neighbor

To remove a neighbor Proximity Engine from the neighbor list of the local Proximity Engine, use the clear srp neighbor command in privileged EXEC mode. clear srp neighbor key

Syntax Description key The DHT key in hexadecimal format for the node to be removed from the neighbor list. A valid DHT key has 1 to 64 hexadecimal digits.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes Privileged EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The clear srp neighbor command is used to delete a single neighbor in the service routing layer from the local Proximity Engine neighbor list. After a small interval, the neighbor list is refreshed and the deleted neighbor may be included in the neighbor list again if it is still a neighbor of the local Proximity

Engine in the service routing layer.

A valid DHT key should be specified in key to identify the neighbor. Keys with less than 64 hexadecimal characters are appended with zeroes.

If you attempt to delete a neighbor that does not appear in the neighbor list of the local Proximity Engine, clear srp neighbor displays an error message stating that the neighbor could not be found.

Examples The following example shows how to use Proximity Engine sn-sj85 with one neighbor sn-sj81 as seen in the following show srp neighbor command output. The neighbor sn-sj81 is also in the leafset of sn-sj85 as can be seen in the show srp leafset output. All commands are issued from Proximity Engine sn-sj85.

ServiceRouter# show srp neighbor

Codes: T - local node, L - leafset, P - primary, S - secondary, B - backup

I - Intransitive, D - delay, H - hold time

Number of neighbors in the database: 1

PL 8886822171add71887d54107c266d814b605eaa0d5cc9b54b9160a137f4355d1

via sn-sj81 [ 172.20.168.81 ] :9000, D=0.389864 ms,

H=00:00:09

ServiceRouter# show srp leafset

Codes: T - local node, L - leafset, P - primary, S - secondary, B - backup

I - Intransitive, W - wrapped

Leafset count: total 3, left 1, right 1

PL 8886822171add71887d54107c266d814b605eaa0d5cc9b54b9160a137f4355d1

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-87

clear srp neighbor

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

via sn-sj81 [ 172.20.168.81 ] :9000, 0.389864 ms, 00:00:08

T 9f752f56f347ca8fcc40a4e09b645f9b4c9b71c73401083f4c04920b30215b0a

via sn-sj85 [ 172.20.168.85, 192.168.20.85, 192.168.86.85 ] :9000

WPL 8886822171add71887d54107c266d814b605eaa0d5cc9b54b9160a137f4355d1

via sn-sj81 [ 172.20.168.81 ] :9000, 0.389864 ms, 00:00:08

The clear srp neighbor command is used to remove sn-sj81 from the neighbor list.

ServiceRouter# clear srp neighbor sn-sj81:9000

Clearing neighbor sn-sj81:9000

Neighbor is found and cleared

Finally, the show srp neighbor and show srp leafset commands are issued again and show the following:

• Output from show srp neighbor s hows that the neighbor sn-sj81 is in the intransitive state (I). The intransitive state means node sn-sj85 cannot reach node sn-sj81.

ServiceRouter# show srp neighbor

Codes: T - local node, L - leafset, P - primary, S - secondary, B - backup

I - Intransitive, D - delay, H - hold time

Number of neighbors in the database: 1

I 8886822171add71887d54107c266d814b605eaa0d5cc9b54b9160a137f4355d1

via sn-sj81 [ 172.20.168.81 ] :9000, D=0.000 ms,

H=00:00:07

• Output from show srp leafset s hows that there are no leafset entries (PL or WPL) for the Proximity

Engine sn-sj85.

ServiceRouter# show srp leafset

Codes: T - local node, L - leafset, P - primary, S - secondary, B - backup

I - Intransitive, W - wrapped

Leafset count: total 1, left 0, right 0

T 9f752f56f347ca8fcc40a4e09b645f9b4c9b71c73401083f4c04920b30215b0a

via sn-sj85 [ 172.20.168.85, 192.168.20.85, 192.168.86.85 ] :9000

ServiceRouter# #

The following example shows how to use the clear srp resource command to delete a resource having resource ID 456 from a descriptor with the key 123. The show srp database command is used to verify that the resource exists before the delete operation and that it has been deleted after the delete operation.

ServiceRouter# show srp database 123

Getting database entry for

123

Entity key:

1230000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000

Entity rec type: 101 Entity total length: 175

Entity type: 38b73479 Entity flags: 0

--------------- Element 0 (main)-----------------

Element ID: main

2-88

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Element total len 49 ID len: 0

Delete Time: 47b426ca5c706042

Flags 0

Last Update: Thu Feb 14 11:38:59 2008 (47b42853902a02b6)

Expiration : Sat Mar 15 11:38:59 2008 (47dbb553902a0000)

Element data len: 9

Element data: mycontent

--------------- Element 1 (comp)-----------------

Element ID: "456"(343536)

Element total len 54 ID len: 3

Last Update: Thu Feb 14 11:39:27 2008 (47b4286f0ad1055a)

Expiration : Sat Mar 15 11:39:27 2008 (47dbb56f0ad10000)

Element data len: 11

Element data: newResource

ServiceRouter# clear srp resource 123 456

ServiceRouter# show srp database 123

Getting database entry for

123

Entity key:

1230000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000

Entity rec type: 101 Entity total length: 113

Entity type: 38b73479 Entity flags: 0

--------------- Element 0 (main)-----------------

Element ID: main

Element total len 49 ID len: 0

Delete Time: 47b426ca5c706042

Flags 0

Last Update: Thu Feb 14 11:38:59 2008 (47b42853902a02b6)

Expiration : Sat Mar 15 11:38:59 2008 (47dbb553902a0000)

Element data len: 9

Element data: mycontent

ServiceRouter#

Related Commands Command show srp leafset show srp neighbors

Description

Displays SRP leafset information.

Displays SRP neighbor information. clear srp neighbor

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-89

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands clear srp resource

clear srp resource

To delete a resource from a descriptor in the service routing layer, use the clear srp resource command in privileged EXEC mode. clear srp resource key

Syntax Description key The DHT key in hexadecimal format for the descriptor from which the resource are deleted. A valid DHT key has 1 to 64 hexadecimal digits.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes Privileged EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The clear srp resource command is used to delete a resource from a descriptor in the service routing layer. Resources can be added to and deleted from any descriptor that exists in the descriptor database.

A valid DHT key must be specified in key to identify the descriptor from which a resource is deleted.

Keys with less than 64 hexadecimal characters are appended with zeroes. If you attempt to delete a resource from a nonexistent descriptor, clear srp resource displays an error stating that the DHT key does not exist. Deleting a nonexistent resource has no impact, and no error warning is generated.

Examples The following example shows how to use clear srp resource to delete a resource, newResource, having resource ID 456 from a descriptor with the key 123. The show srp database command is used to verify that the resource exists before the delete operation and that it has been deleted after the delete operation.

ServiceRouter# show srp database 123

Getting database entry for

123

Entity key:

1230000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000

Entity rec type: 101 Entity total length: 175

Entity type: 38b73479 Entity flags: 0

--------------- Element 0 (main)-----------------

Element ID: main

Element total len 49 ID len: 0

Delete Time: 47b426ca5c706042

Flags 0

Last Update: Thu Feb 14 11:38:59 2008 (47b42853902a02b6)

Expiration : Sat Mar 15 11:38:59 2008 (47dbb553902a0000)

Element data len: 9

Element data: mycontent

--------------- Element 1 (comp)-----------------

Element ID: "456"(343536)

Element total len 54 ID len: 3

Last Update: Thu Feb 14 11:39:27 2008 (47b4286f0ad1055a)

Expiration : Sat Mar 15 11:39:27 2008 (47dbb56f0ad10000)

2-90

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Element data len: 11

Element data: newResource

ServiceRouter# clear srp resource 123 456

ServiceRouter# show srp database 123

Getting database entry for

123

Entity key:

1230000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000

Entity rec type: 101 Entity total length: 113

Entity type: 38b73479 Entity flags: 0

--------------- Element 0 (main)-----------------

Element ID: main

Element total len 49 ID len: 0

Delete Time: 47b426ca5c706042

Flags 0

Last Update: Thu Feb 14 11:38:59 2008 (47b42853902a02b6)

Expiration : Sat Mar 15 11:38:59 2008 (47dbb553902a0000)

Element data len: 9

Element data: mycontent

ServiceRouter#

Related Commands Command clear srp descriptor show srp database clear srp resource

Description

Deletes a single descriptor or all descriptors from the service routing layer

Displays the descriptor-related information saved in the descriptor database.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-91

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands clear srp route

clear srp route

To delete a single route entry from the DHT routing table of the local Proximity Engine, use the clear srp route command in privileged EXEC mode. clear srp route prefix / length

Syntax Description prefix length

The prefix of the DHT key of the route entry to delete.

The length of the prefix (in multiples of 4).

Command Defaults None

Command Modes Privileged EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The clear srp route command deletes a single routing table entry from the local DHT routing table.

Similar to other routing protocols, the DHT routing table entries consist of a prefix and length that index the DHT ID of the next-hop Proximity Engine. A valid DHT key prefix (1 to 64 hexadecimal characters) and valid prefix length (multiples of four) must be supplied to identify the neighbor to be deleted.

The clear srp route command provides a manual way to delete routing table entries. After a small interval, the DHT routing table is refreshed and the deleted next-hop Proximity Engine may be included in the DHT routing table again if it is still a viable neighbor.

The clear srp route command can be used to test the presence and persistence of neighbors. Deleting a routing entry that does not exist results in an error message.

Examples In the following example, Proximity Engine sn-sj85 has four routing table entries. The example shows how to use the clear srp route command to clear the routing table entry that has 8/4 as its prefix / length .

The show srp route command is used to verify the deletion of the route.

ServiceRouter# show srp route

Codes: T - local node, L - leafset, P - primary, S - secondary, B - backup

I - Intransitive

PL 8/4 via 8886822171add71887d54107c266d814b605eaa0d5cc9b54b9160a137f4355d1

sn-sj81 [ 172.20.168.81 ] :9000, 0.389525 ms, 00:00:08

PL a/4 via ad3a659121442210a68b79348e9a42eaebfb229f388afb2628fa871f26bc750c

sn-sj67 [ 172.20.168.67, 192.168.20.41, 192.168.20.44, 192.168.22.41, 192.168

.22.42 ] :9000, 1.825903 ms, 00:00:09

PL b/4 via b5ca21563f5b938e46e2cb8f33a148ae00a1f6666f2a5eb735b7ed90c012c882

sn-sj82 [ 172.20.168.82 ] :9000, 0.333920 ms, 00:00:08

PL d/4 via d2fc632c53c9ff1de8683e265386b09502791aedd65f28025fe7f64ad8cab2d9

sn-sj87 [ 172.20.168.87 ] :9000, 0.642357 ms, 00:00:09

ServiceRouter# clear srp route 8/4

Clearing entry 8/4

The entry is found and cleared

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-92

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands clear srp route

ServiceRouter# show srp route

Codes: T - local node, L - leafset, P - primary, S - secondary, B - backup

I - Intransitive

PL a/4 via ad3a659121442210a68b79348e9a42eaebfb229f388afb2628fa871f26bc750c

sn-sj67 [ 172.20.168.67, 192.168.20.41, 192.168.20.44, 192.168.22.41, 192.168

.22.42 ] :9000, 1.846593 ms, 00:00:09

PL b/4 via b5ca21563f5b938e46e2cb8f33a148ae00a1f6666f2a5eb735b7ed90c012c882

sn-sj82 [ 172.20.168.82 ] :9000, 0.333920 ms, 00:00:09

PL d/4 via d2fc632c53c9ff1de8683e265386b09502791aedd65f28025fe7f64ad8cab2d9

sn-sj87 [ 172.20.168.87 ] :9000, 0.572056 ms, 00:00:09

ServiceRouter#

Related Commands Command show srp route

Description

Displays route information for a Proximity Engine to its neighbor nodes on the same DHT network.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-93

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands clear statistics

clear statistics

To clear the statistics, use the clear s tatistics command in EXEC configuration mode.

On the SE: clear statistics { aaa | access-lists 300 | all | authentication | authsvr { all | delivery-service-id | global } | distribution { all | mcast-data-receiver | mcast-data-sender | mcast-fx-receiver | mcast-fx-sender| metadata-receiver | metadata-sender | unicast-data-receiver | unicast-data-sender } | flash-media-streaming | history | icap | icmp | ip | movie-streamer | radius | rule { action action-type | all | pattern { 1-512 | all } | rtsp } | running | snmp | tacacs

| tcp | transaction-logs | udp | web-engine [ force ] | wmt }

On the SR: clear statistics { aaa | all | authentication | history | http requests | icmp | ip [ ospf | proximity

{ rib | server }] | isis [ GigabitEthernet slot/port num | PortChannel num ] | radius | running | service-registry | service-router | snmp | srp | tacacs | tcp | udp }

Syntax Description aaa access-lists

300 all authentication authsvr all delivery-service-id global distribution all mcast-receiver mcast-sender mcast-fx-receiver mcast-fx-sender metadata-receiver metadata-sender

Clears AAA statistics.

Clears the ACL statistics.

Clears the group name-based ACL.

Clears all statistics.

Clears the authentication statistics.

Clears the Authorization Server statistics.

Clears global and delivery service-based statistics.

Clears Authentication Server statistics for the delivery service

Clears Authentication Server global statistics.

Clears the distribution statistics.

Clears the distribution statistics for every component.

Clears the distribution statistics for the mcast receiver.

Note This command is only available on VDS-IS Release 3.1.1.

Clears the distribution statistics for the mcast sender.

Note This command is only available on VDS-IS Release 3.1.1.

Clear statistics for Multicast Fx Receiver.

Note The clear mcast-fx-receiver command restarts the receiver server.

Clear statistics for Multicast Fx Sender.

Note The clear mcast-fx-sender command restarts the sender server.

Clears the distribution statistics for the metadata receiver.

Note This command is only available on VDS-IS Release 3.1.1.

Clears the distribution statistics for the metadata sender.

Note This command is only available on VDS-IS Release 3.1.1.

2-94

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands unicast-data-receiver unicast-data-sender flash-media-streaming history icap icmp ip ospf proximity rib server isis

GigabitEthernet slot/port num

PortChannel num movie-streamer radius rule action action-type all pattern

1-512 all rtsp running snmp clear statistics

Clears the distribution statistics for the unicast data receiver.

Note This command is only available on VDS-IS Release 3.1.1.

Clears the distribution statistics for the unicast data sender.

This command is only available on VDS-IS Release 3.1.1.

Clears the Flash Media Streaming statistics.

Clears the statistics history.

Clears the ICAP

1

statistics.

Clears the ICMP statistics.

Clears the IP statistics.

Clears the OSPF statistics.

Clears the proximity statistics.

Clears the RIB proximity statistics.

Clears the Proximity Server statistics.

Clears counters for an IS-IS instance.

(Optional) Selects a GigabitEthernet interface.

Slot and port number for the selected interface. The slot range is 0 to

14; the port is 0. The slot number and port number are separated with a forward slash character (/).

(Optional) Selects the Ethernet Channel of interfaces.

Specifies the Ethernet Channel interface number. The range is from 1 to 4.

Clears the Movie Streamer statistics.

Clears the RADIUS statistics.

Clears the rules statistics.

Clears the statistics of all the rules with the same action.

Specifies one of the following actions: allow block generate-url-signature no-cache redirect rewrite use-icap-service validate-url-signature

Clears the statistics of all the rules.

Clears the statistics of the pattern lists.

Pattern list number.

Clears the statistics for all the pattern lists.

Clears the statistics for the configured RTSP rules (rules configured for

RTSP requests from RealMedia players [the RTSP rules] and rules configured for RTSP requests from Windows Media 9 players [the

WMT-RTSP rules]).

Clears the running statistics.

Clears the SNMP statistics.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-95

clear statistics

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands srp tacacs tcp transaction-logs udp web-engine force web-engine force wmt

1.

ICAP = Internet Content Adaptation Protocol

Resets to zero all statistics counters kept by the local DHT service

Clears the TACACS+ statistics.

Clears the TCP statistics.

Clears the transaction log export statistics.

Clears the UDP statistics.

Clears the Web Engine statistics.

Clears the Web Engine detail statistics.

Clears Web Engine statistics.

(Optional) Clears Web Engine detail statistics.

Clears all WMT statistics.

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The clear statistics command clears all statistical counters from the parameters given. Use this command to monitor fresh statistical data for some or all features without losing cached objects or configurations.

This command is used to reset to zero proximity statistics related to the Proximity Engine components that are used for the proximity function. Use the show statistics ip proximity command to display proximity statistics.

The DHT service keeps several counters, such as the number of requests and responses for DHT lookups.

These counters can be displayed using the show statistics srp command.

The clear statistics web-engine and clear statistics all commands clear only normal statistics, not the

Web Engine statistics details. To clear all Web Engine statistics, use the clear statistics web-engine force command.

The clear stats authsvr delivery-service-id command only clears the authsvr delivery-service specific statistics. It does not clear global statistics. If you want to clear the global statistics, you must use the clear statistics authsvr al l or clear statistics authsvr global commands.

Note The clear statistics web-engine and clear statistics all commands clear only normal statistics, not the

Web Engine statistics details. To clear all Web Engine statistics, use the clear statistics web-engine force command. We do not recommend using the clear statistics web-engine force command, but if it is used, restart the Web Engine service by entering the web-engine stop and web-engine start commands.

Examples The following example shows how to clear proximity statistics with the clear statistics ip proximity command:

ServiceRouter# clear statistics ip proximity server

ServiceRouter# show statistics ip proximity server

2-96

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands clear statistics

Proximity server: Requests received = 0

Proximity server: Responses sent = 0

Proximity server: Faults sent = 0

ServiceRouter#

ServiceRouter# show statistics ip proximity rib

Total number of proximity requests received from applications: 0

Total number of proximity replies sent to applications: 0

Proximity msg exchanges between urib and routing protocols:

Sent Prox Req Received Prox Resp isis-p1 0 0 ospf-p1 0 0 isis-p1-te 0 0 ospf-p1-te 0 0 bgp-123 0 0 mbgp-123 0 0

Local proximity requests from applications: 0

Invalid proximity requests from applications: 0

PSA non-rankable proximity requests from applications: 0

Failed proximity requests to routing protocols: 0

Failed PSA lookups: 0

Failed PTA lookups: 0

ServiceRouter#

The following is sample output from the show statistics isis command before and after running clear statistics isis command:

ServiceRouter# show statistics isis

IS-IS statistics:

PDU Received Sent RcvAuthErr OtherRcvErr

LAN-IIH 51 14 0 0

P2P-IIH 0 0 0 0

CSNP 67 0 0 0

PSNP 0 0 0 0

PDU Received Flooded RcvAuthErr OtherRcvErr ReTransmit

LSP 69 4 0 0 0

DIS elections: 10

SPF calculations: 82

LSPs sourced: 0

LSPs refreshed: 8

LSPs purged: 0

ServiceRouter#

ServiceRouter# clear statistics isis *

ServiceRouter# show statistics isis

IS-IS statistics:

PDU Received Sent RcvAuthErr OtherRcvErr

LAN-IIH 1 0 0 0

P2P-IIH 0 0 0 0

CSNP 4 0 0 0

PSNP 0 0 0 0

PDU Received Flooded RcvAuthErr OtherRcvErr ReTransmit

LSP 1 0 0 0 0

DIS elections: 0

SPF calculations: 1

LSPs sourced: 0

LSPs refreshed: 0

LSPs purged: 0

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-97

clear statistics

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

ServiceRouter#

The following example shows the use of the clear statistics srp command. The show statistics srp command is used to verify that the SRP counters have been reset to zero:

ServiceRouter# show statistics srp

Sent Received Neighbors

Join request 0 22 1

Join response 22 0 0

LS exchange request 309 310 0

LS exchange response 310 309 0

Route exchange request 65 0 0

Route exchange response 0 64 0

Ping request 410 412 1

Ping response 412 410 0

Lookup request 34 867 3

Lookup response 867 34 0

Ping traceroute request 0 0 0

Ping traceroute response 0 0 0

ServiceRouter# clear statistics srp

Clearing all statistics counters

ServiceRouter# show statistics srp

Sent Received Neighbors

Join request 0 0 0

Join response 0 0 0

LS exchange request 1 1 0

LS exchange response 1 1 0

Route exchange request 1 0 0

Route exchange response 0 1 0

Ping request 2 2 0

Ping response 2 2 0

Lookup request 0 2 0

Lookup response 2 0 0

Ping traceroute request 0 0 0

Ping traceroute response 0 0 0

ServiceRouter#

Related Commands Command show statistics

Description

Displays statistics information.

2-98

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands clear transaction-logs

clear transaction-logs

To clear and archive the working transaction log files, use the clear transaction-log command in EXEC configuration mode.

clear transaction-logs

Syntax Description This command has no keywords or arguments.

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The clear transaction-log command causes the transaction log to be archived immediately to the SE hard disk. This command has the same effect as the transaction-log force archive command.

Examples The following example shows that the clear transaction-log command forces the working transaction log file to be archived:

ServiceEngine# clear transaction-log

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-99

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands clear users

clear users

To clear the connections (login) of authenticated users, use the clear users command in EXEC configuration mode.

clear users administrative

Syntax Description administrative Clears the connections of administrative users who have been authenticated through a remote login service.

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The clear users administrative command clears the connections for all administrative users who are authenticated through a remote login service, such as TACACS. This command does not affect an administrative user who is authenticated through the local database.

Examples The following example shows how to clear the connections of the authenticated users:

ServiceRouter# clear users administrative

ServiceRouter#

2-100

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

clear wmt

To clear the WMT streams, use the clear wmt command in EXEC configuration mode.

clear wmt { encoder-alarm-msg msg | stream-id num [ stale-stat ]} clear wmt

Syntax Description encoder-alarm-msg msg stream-id

1-999999 stale-stat

Detailed alarm message of the Encoder Alarm to be cleared.

Detailed alarm message.

Clears the WMT streams that have the specified WMT stream ID. Also stops the SE’s WMT process that is associated with the specified stream

ID.

WMT stream ID to clear.

Stale statistic of the WMT stream to be cleared.

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Examples The following example shows how to clear a WMT stream for a stream ID of 22689:

ServiceEngine# clear wmt stream-id 22689

ServiceEngine#

Related Commands Command Description show statistics wmt show wmt

Displays the WMT statistics.

Displays WMT bandwidth and proxy mode configuration.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-101

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands clock (EXEC)

clock (EXEC)

To set or clear clock functions or update the calendar, use the clock command in EXEC configuration mode.

clock { read-calendar | set time day month year | update-calendar }

Syntax Description read-calendar set time day month year update-calendar

Reads the calendar and updates the system clock.

Sets the time and date.

Current time in hh:mm:ss format (hh: 00 to 23; mm: 00 to 59; ss: 00 to 59).

Day of the month. The range is from 1 to 31.

Month of the year (January, February, March, April, May, June, July,

August, September, October, November, December).

Year. The range is from 1993 to 2035.

Updates the calendar with the system clock.

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines If you have an outside source on your network that provides time services (such as a Network Time

Protocol [NTP] server), you do not have to set the system clock manually. Enter the local time when setting the clock. The SE calculates the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) based on the time zone set by the clock timezone command.

Note We strongly recommend that you configure the SE for the NTP by using the ntp command. See the

“ntp” section on page 2-276 for more details.

Note If you change the local time on the device, you must change the BIOS clock time as well; otherwise, the timestamps on the error logs are not synchronized. Changing the BIOS clock is required because the kernel does not handle time zones.

Two clocks exist in the system: the software clock and the hardware clock. The software uses the software clock. The hardware clock is used only at bootup to initialize the software clock. The calendar clock is the same as the hardware clock that runs continuously on the system, even if the system is powered off or rebooted. This clock is separate from the software clock settings that are erased when the system is powered cycled or rebooted.

The set keyword sets the software clock. If the system is synchronized by a valid outside timing mechanism, such as a NTP clock source, you do not have to set the system clock. Use this command if no other time sources are available. The time specified in this command is relative to the configured time zone.

2-102

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands clock (EXEC)

To perform a one-time update of the hardware clock (calendar) from the software clock or to copy the software clock settings to the hardware clock (calendar), use the clock update-calendar command.

Examples The following example shows how to set the software clock on the SE:

ServiceEngine# clock set 13:32:00 01 February 2000

Related

Command Description clock timezone ntp show clock detail

Sets the clock timezone.

Configures the Network Time Protocol server.

Displays the UTC and local time.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-103

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands clock (Global configuration)

clock (Global configuration)

To set the summer daylight saving time and time zone for display purposes, use the clock command in

Global configuration mode. To disable this function, use the no form of this command.

clock { summertime timezone { date startday startmonth startyear starthour endday endmonth endyear offset | recurring { 1-4 startweekday startmonth starthour endweekday endmonth endhour offset | first startweekday startmonth starthour endweekday endmonth endhour offset | last startweekday startmonth starthour endweekday endmonth endhour offset }} | timezone { timezone hoursoffset minutesoffset }} no clock { summertime timezone { date startday startmonth startyear starthour endday endmonth endyear offset | recurring { 1-4 startweekday startmonth starthour endweekday endmonth endhour offset | first startweekday startmonth starthour endweekday endmonth endhour offset | last startweekday startmonth starthour endweekday endmonth endhour offset }} | timezone { timezone hoursoffset minutesoffset }}

Syntax Description summertime timezone date startday startmonth startyear starthour endday endmonth endyear endhour offset recurring

1-4 first last startweekday startmonth starthour endweekday endmonth endhour offset timezone timezone

Configures the summer or daylight saving time.

Name of the summer time zone.

Configures the absolute summer time.

Date to start. The range is from 1 to 31.

Month to start. The range is from January through December.

Year to start. The range is from 1993–2032.

Hour to start in (hh:mm) format. The range is from 0 to 23.

Date to end. The range is from 1 to 31.

Month to end. The range is from January through December.

Year to end. The range is from 1993–2032.

Hour to end in (hh:mm) format. The range is from 0 to 23.

Minutes offset (see

Table B-1 ) from Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)

The range is from 0 to 59.

Configures the recurring summer time.

Configures the starting week number. The range is from 1 to 4.

Configures the summer time to recur beginning the first week of the month.

Configures the summer time to recur beginning the last week of the month.

Day of the week to start. The range is from Monday to Friday.

Month to start. The range is from January through December.

Hour to start in hh:mm format. The range is from 0 to 23.

Weekday to end. The range is from Monday to Friday

Month to end. The range is from January through December.

Hour to end in hour:minute (hh:mm) format. The range is from 0 to 23.

Minutes offset (see

Table B-1 ) from UTC. The range is from 0 to 59.

Configures the standard time zone.

Name of the time zone.

2-104

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands hoursoffset minutesoffset clock (Global configuration)

Hours offset (see

Table B-1

) from UTC. The range is from –23 to +23.

Minutes offset (see

Table B-1

) from UTC. The range is from 0 to 59.

Defaults None

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines To set and display the local and UTC current time of day without an NTP server, use the clock timezone command with the clock set command. The clock timezone parameter specifies the difference between

UTC and local time, which is set with the clock set command in EXEC configuration mode. The UTC and local time are displayed with the show clock detail command in EXEC configuration mode.

Use the clock timezone offset command to specify a time zone, where timezone is the desired time zone entry from

Table B-1

and 0 0 is the offset (ahead or behind) Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) in hours and minutes. UTC was formerly known as Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).

SE(config)# clock timezone timezone 0 0

Note The time zone entry is case sensitive and must be specified in the exact notation listed in the time zone table as shown in

Appendix B, “Standard Time Zones.” When you use a time zone entry from Table B-1 ,

the system is automatically adjusted for daylight saving time.

Note If you change the local time on the device, you must change the BIOS clock time as well; otherwise, the timestamps on the error logs are not synchronized. Changing the BIOS clock is required because the kernel does not handle time zones.

The offset (ahead or behind) UTC in hours, as displayed in

Table B-1

, is in effect during winter time.

During summer time or daylight saving time, the offset may be different from the values in the table and are calculated and displayed accordingly by the system clock.

Note An accurate clock and timezone setting is required for the correct operation of the HTTP proxy caches.

Examples The following example shows how to specify the local time zone as Pacific Standard Time with an offset of 8 hours behind UTC:

ServiceEngine(config)# clock timezone PST -8

Custom Timezone: PST will be used.

The following example shows how to configure a standard time zone on the SE:

ServiceEngine(config)# clock timezone US/Pacific 0 0

Resetting offset from 0 hour(s) 0 minute(s) to -8 hour(s) 0 minute(s)

Standard Timezone: US/Pacific will be used.

ServiceEngine(config)#

The following example negates the time zone setting on the SE:

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-105

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands clock (Global configuration)

ServiceEngine(config)# no clock timezone

The following example shows how to configure daylight saving time:

ServiceEngine(config)# clock summertime PDT date 10 October 2001 23:59 29 April 2002 23:59

60

Command Description clock To set the summer daylight saving time and time zone for display purposes.

show clock detail Displays the UTC and local time.

2-106

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands cms (EXEC)

cms (EXEC)

To configure the Centralized Management System (CMS) embedded database parameters, use the cms command in EXEC configuration mode.

cms { config-sync | database { backup | create | delete | downgrade [ script filename ] | maintenance { full | regular } | restore filename | validate } | deregister [ force ] | recover

{ identity word }}

Syntax Description config-sync database backup create delete downgrade script filename maintenance full regular restore filename validate deregister force recover identity word

Sets the node to synchronize configuration with the CDSM.

Creates, backs up, deletes, restores, or validates the CMS-embedded database management tables or files.

Backs up the database management tables.

Creates the embedded database management tables.

Deletes the embedded database files.

Downgrades the CMS database.

(Optional) Downgrades the CMS database by applying a downgrade script.

Downgraded script filename.

Cleans and reindexes the embedded database tables.

Specifies a full maintenance routine for the embedded database tables.

Specifies a regular maintenance routine for the embedded database tables.

Restores the database management tables using the backup local filename.

Database local backup filename.

Validates the database files.

Removes the registration of the CMS proto device.

(Optional) Forces the removal of the node registration.

Recovers the identity of an VDS-IS network device.

Specifies the identity of the recovered device.

Identity of the recovered device.

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The VDS-IS network is a collection of SR, SE, and CDSM nodes. One primary CDSM retains the

VDS-IS network settings and provides other VDS-IS network nodes with updates. Communication between nodes occurs over secure channels using the Secure Shell Layer (SSL) protocol, where each node on the VDS-IS network uses a Rivest, Shamir, Adelman (RSA) certificate-key pair to communicate with other nodes.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-107

cms (EXEC)

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Use the cms config-sync command to enable registered SRs, SEs, and standby CDSM to contact the primary CDSM immediately for a getUpdate (get configuration poll) request before the default polling interval of 5 minutes. For example, when a node is registered with the primary CDSM and activated, it appears as Pending in the CDSM GUI until it sends a getUpdate request. The cms config-sync command causes the registered node to send a getUpdate request at once, and the status of the node changes as

Online.

Use the cms database create command to initialize the CMS database. Before a node can join a VDS-IS network, it must first be registered and then activated. The cms enable command automatically registers the node in the database management tables and enables the CMS. The node sends its attribute information to the CDSM over the SSL protocol and then stores the new node information. The CDSM accepts these node registration requests without admission control and replies with registration confirmation and other pertinent security information required for getting updates. Activate the node using the CDSM GUI.

Once the node is activated, it automatically receives configuration updates and the necessary security

RSA certificate-key pair from the CDSM. This security key allows the node to communicate with any other node in the VDS-IS network. The cms deregister command removes the node from the VDS-IS network by deleting registration information and database tables.

Note The cms deregister command cleans up the database automatically. You do not need to use the cms database delete command. If the deregistration fails, the best practice is to resolve any issues that caused the deregistration failure; for example, the Service Engine is the Content Acquirer of a delivery service and cannot be deleted or deactivated. Assign a different SE as the Content Acquirer in each delivery service where this SE is assigned as the Content Acquirer and try the cms deregister command again.

To back up the existing management database for the CDSM, use the cms database backup command.

For database backups, specify the following items:

Location, password, and user ID

Dump format in PostgreSQL plain text syntax

The naming convention for backup files includes the time stamp.

When you use the cms recover identity word command when recovering lost registration information, or replacing a failed node with a new node that has the same registration information, specify the device recovery key that you configured in the Modifying Config Property, System.device.recovery.key window of the CDSM GUI.

Use the lcm command to configure local or central management (LCM) on an VDS-IS network device.

The LCM feature allows settings configured using the device CLI or GUI to be stored as part of the

VDS-IS network-wide configuration data (enable or disable).

When you enter the cms lcm enable command, the CMS process running on SEs, SRs, and the standby

CDSM detects the configuration changes that you made on these devices using CLIs and sends the changes to the primary CDSM.

When you enter the cms lcm disable command, the CMS process running on SEs, SRs, and the standby

CDSM does not send the CLI changes to the primary CDSM. Settings configured using the device CLIs are not sent to the primary CDSM.

If LCM is disabled, the settings configured through the CDSM GUI overwrite the settings configured from the SE or SR; however, this rule applies only to those local device settings that have been overwritten by the CDSM when you have configured the local device settings. If you (as the local CLI user) change the local device settings after the particular configuration has been overwritten by the

CDSM, the local device configuration is applicable until the CDSM requests a full-device statistics

2-108

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands cms (EXEC) update from the SE or SR (clicking the Force full database update button from the Device Home window of the CDSM GUI triggers a full update). When the CDSM requests a full update from the device, the CDSM settings overwrite the local device settings.

The cms deregister force command should be used only as the last option, because the CDSM does not know about the device being removed. When executing the cms deregister force command, take note of any messages stating that the deregistration failed and make sure to resolve them before reregistering the device with the same CDSM or registering the device to another CDSM. The cms deregister force command forces the deregistration to continue.

Examples The following example shows how to back up the database management tables:

CDSM# cms database backup creating backup file with label `backup' backup file local1/CDS-db-9-22-2002-17-36.dump is ready. use `copy' commands to move the backup file to a remote host.

The following example shows how to validate the database management tables:

CDSM# cms database validate

Management tables are valid

In the following example, the CMS deregistration process has problems deregistering the SE, but it proceeds to deregister it from the CMS database when the force option is used:

ServiceEngine# cms deregister force

Deregistration requires management service to be stopped.

You will have to manually start it. Stopping management service on this node...

This operation needs to restart http proxy and streaming proxies/servers (if running) for memory reconfiguration. Proceed? [ no ] yes management services stopped

Thu Jun 26 13:17:34 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: creating 24 messages

Thu Jun 26 13:17:34 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: creating 12 dispatchers

Thu Jun 26 13:17:34 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: sending eDeRegistration message to CDSM

10.107.192.168

...

ServiceEngine#

The following example shows the use of the cms recover identity command when the recovery request matches the SE record, and the CDSM updates the existing record and sends a registration response to the requesting SE:

ServiceEngine# cms recover identity default

Registering this node as Service Engine...

Sending identity recovery request with key default

Thu Jun 26 12:54:42 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: creating 24 messages

Thu Jun 26 12:54:42 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: creating 12 dispatchers

Thu Jun 26 12:54:42 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: Sending registration message to CDSM

10.107.192.168

Thu Jun 26 12:54:44 UTC 2003 [ W ] main: Unable to load device info file in TestServer

Thu Jun 26 12:54:44 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: Connecting storeSetup for SE.

Thu Jun 26 12:54:44 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: Instantiating AStore

'com.cisco.unicorn.schema.PSqlStore'...

Thu Jun 26 12:54:45 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: Successfully connected to database

Thu Jun 26 12:54:45 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: Registering object factories for persistent store...

Thu Jun 26 12:54:51 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: Dropped Sequence IDSET.

Thu Jun 26 12:54:51 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: Successfully removed old management tables

Thu Jun 26 12:54:51 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: Registering object factories for persistent store...

.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-109

cms (EXEC)

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

.

.

Thu Jun 26 12:54:54 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: Created Table FILE_CDSM.

Thu Jun 26 12:54:55 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: Created SYS_MESS_TIME_IDX index.

Thu Jun 26 12:54:55 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: Created SYS_MESS_NODE_IDX index.

Thu Jun 26 12:54:55 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: No Consistency check for store.

Thu Jun 26 12:54:55 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: Successfully created management tables

Thu Jun 26 12:54:55 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: Registering object factories for persistent store...

Thu Jun 26 12:54:55 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: AStore Loading store data...

Thu Jun 26 12:54:56 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: ExtExpiresRecord Loaded 0 Expires records.

Thu Jun 26 12:54:56 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: Skipping Construction RdToClusterMappings on non-CDSM node.

Thu Jun 26 12:54:56 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: AStore Done Loading. 327

Thu Jun 26 12:54:56 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: Created SYS_MESS_TIME_IDX index.

Thu Jun 26 12:54:56 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: Created SYS_MESS_NODE_IDX index.

Thu Jun 26 12:54:56 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: No Consistency check for store.

Thu Jun 26 12:54:56 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: Successfully initialized management tables

Node successfully registered with id 103

Registration complete.

ServiceEngine#

The following example shows the use of the cms recover identity command when the hostname of the

SE does not match the hostname configured in the CDSM GUI:

ServiceEngine# cms recover identity default

Registering this node as Service Engine...

Sending identity recovery request with key default

Thu Jun 26 13:16:09 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: creating 24 messages

Thu Jun 26 13:16:09 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: creating 12 dispatchers

Thu Jun 26 13:16:09 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: Sending registration message to CDSM

10.107.192.168

There are no SE devices in CDN register: Registration failed.

ServiceEngine#

Related Commands Command cms enable show cms

Description

Enables the CMS.

Displays the CMS protocol, embedded database content, maintenance status, and other information.

2-110

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands cms (Global configuration)

cms (Global configuration)

To schedule maintenance and enable the Centralized Management System (CMS) on a given node, use the cms command in Global configuration mode. To negate these actions, use the no form of this command.

cms { database maintenance { full { enable | schedule weekday at time } | regular { enable | schedule weekday at time }} | enable | rpc timeout { connection 5-1800 | incoming-wait

10-600 | transfer 10-7200 }} no cms { database maintenance { full { enable | schedule weekday at time } | regular { enable | schedule weekday at time }} | enable | rpc timeout { connection 5-1800 | incoming-wait

10-600 | transfer 10-7200 }}

Syntax Description database maintenance Configures the embedded database, clean, or reindex maintenance routine.

full Configures the full maintenance routine and cleans the embedded database tables.

enable Enables the full maintenance routine to be performed on the embedded database tables.

schedule weekday

Sets the schedule for performing the maintenance routine.

Day of the week to start the maintenance routine.

at time regular enable rpc timeout connection

5-1800 incoming-wait

10-600 transfer

10-7200 every-day—Every day

Fri—every Friday

Mon—every Monday

Sat—every Saturday

Sun—every Sunday

Thu—every Thursday

Tue—every Tuesday

Wed—every Wednesday

Sets the maintenance schedule time of day to start the maintenance routine.

Time of day to start the maintenance routine. The range is from 0 to 23:0 to

59 in hh:mm format.

Configures the regular maintenance routine and reindexes the embedded database tables.

Enables the node CMS process.

Configures the timeout values for remote procedure call connections.

Specifies the maximum time to wait for when making a connection.

Timeout period, in seconds. The default for the CDSM is 30; the default for the SE and the SR is 180.

Specifies the maximum time to wait for a client response.

Timeout period, in seconds. The default is 30.

Specifies the maximum time to allow a connection to remain open.

Timeout period, in seconds. The default is 300.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-111

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands cms (Global configuration)

Defaults database maintenance regular : enabled database maintenance full : enabled connection : 30 seconds for CDSM; 180 seconds for the SE and the SR incoming wait : 30 seconds transfer : 300 seconds

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines Use the cms database maintenance command to schedule routine, full-maintenance cleaning

(vacuuming) or a regular maintenance reindexing of the embedded database. The full maintenance routine runs only when the disk is more than 90 percent full and runs only once a week. Cleaning the tables returns reusable space to the database system.

The cms enable command automatically registers the node in the database management tables and enables the CMS process. The no cms enable command stops only the management services on the device and does not disable a primary sender. You can use the cms deregister command to remove a primary or backup sender SE from the VDS-IS network and to disable communication between two multicast senders.

Examples The following example shows how to schedule a regular (reindexing) maintenance routine to start every

Friday at 11:00 p.m.:

ServiceEngine(config)# cms database maintenance regular schedule Fri at 23:00

The following example shows how to enable the CMS process on an SE:

ServiceEngine(config)# cms enable

This operation needs to restart http proxy and streaming proxies/servers (if running) for memory reconfiguration. Proceed? [ no ] yes

Registering this node as Service Engine...

Thu Jun 26 13:18:24 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: creating 24 messages

Thu Jun 26 13:18:25 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: creating 12 dispatchers

Thu Jun 26 13:18:25 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: Sending registration message to CDSM

10.107.192.168

Thu Jun 26 13:18:27 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: Connecting storeSetup for SE.

Thu Jun 26 13:18:27 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: Instantiating AStore

'com.cisco.unicorn.schema.PSqlStore'...

Thu Jun 26 13:18:28 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: Successfully connected to database

Thu Jun 26 13:18:28 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: Registering object factories for persistent store...

Thu Jun 26 13:18:35 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: Dropped Sequence IDSET.

Thu Jun 26 13:18:35 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: Dropped Sequence GENSET.

.

.

Thu Jun 26 13:18:35 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: Dropped Table USER_TO_DOMAIN.

.

Thu Jun 26 13:18:39 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: Created Table FILE_CDSM.

Thu Jun 26 13:18:40 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: Created SYS_MESS_TIME_IDX index.

Thu Jun 26 13:18:40 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: Created SYS_MESS_NODE_IDX index.

Thu Jun 26 13:18:40 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: No Consistency check for store.

Thu Jun 26 13:18:40 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: Successfully created management tables

Thu Jun 26 13:18:40 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: Registering object factories for persistent store...

2-112

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands cms (Global configuration)

Thu Jun 26 13:18:40 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: AStore Loading store data...

Thu Jun 26 13:18:41 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: ExtExpiresRecord Loaded 0 Expires records.

Thu Jun 26 13:18:41 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: Skipping Construction RdToClusterMappings on non-CDSM node.

Thu Jun 26 13:18:41 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: AStore Done Loading. 336

Thu Jun 26 13:18:41 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: Created SYS_MESS_TIME_IDX index.

Thu Jun 26 13:18:41 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: Created SYS_MESS_NODE_IDX index.

Thu Jun 26 13:18:41 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: No Consistency check for store.

Thu Jun 26 13:18:41 UTC 2003 [ I ] main: Successfully initialized management tables

Node successfully registered with id 28940

Registration complete.

Warning: The device will now be managed by the CDSM. Any configuration changes made via CLI on this device will be overwritten if they conflict with settings on the

CDSM.

Please preserve running configuration using 'copy running-config startup-config'.

Otherwise management service will not be started on reload and node will be shown

'offline' in CDSM UI.

management services enabled

ServiceEngine(config)#

Related

Command Description cms database show cms

Creates, backs up, deletes, restores, or validates the

CMS-embedded database management tables or files.

Displays the CMS protocol, embedded database content, maintenance status, and other information.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-113

configure

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

configure

To enter Global configuration mode, use the configure command in EXEC configuration mode.

configure

To exit Global configuration mode, use the end or exit commands. In addition, you can press Ctrl-Z to exit from Global configuration mode.

Syntax Description This command has no keywords or arguments.

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Examples The following example shows how to enable Global configuration mode:

ServiceEngine# configure

ServiceEngine(config)#

Command Description end Exits configuration and privileged EXEC configuration modes.

exit Exits from interface, Global configuration, or privileged

EXEC configuration modes.

show running-config show startup-config

Displays the current operating configuration.

Displays the startup configuration.

2-114

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands contentmgr

contentmgr

To configure the Content Manager, use the contentmgr command in Global configuration mode. To remove the configuration, use the no form of this command.

contentmgr {delivery-service cache-content purge-on-delete num | disk-bucket-fail-threshold num

| hitcnt-decay-half-life num | slowscan-time time | slowscan-rate num | transaction-logs-disable | rollback} no contentmgr {delivery-service cache-content purge-on-delete num | disk-bucket-fail-threshold num | hitcnt-decay-half-life num | slowscan-time time | slowscan-rate num | transaction-logs-disable

| rollback}

Syntax Description delivery-service Configures the Content Manager delivery service.

cache-content purge-on-delete num

Note This command was introduced in the 2.6.3 software release.

Configures the Content Manager delivery service cache content.

Configures the Content Manager delivery service cache content purge on delete.

Purge after minutes (0 to 1440). disk-bucket-fail-thresho ld num slowscan-time time slowscan-rate time hitcnt-decay-half-life

Note 0 means not deleting.

Configures threshold percentage of disk failures per bucket, to raise alarm.

Threshold percentage (1 to 100).

Schedule the primary start time of CMGRSlowScan every-day (the default is 00:00)

Time of day to run CMGRSlowscan in local time (hh:mm).

Configure CMGRSlowScan rate

Pacing scanning in between objects (unit: us)

Configure half life decay period for cache hit count updates.

num Half life decay for cache content hit count updates (1 to 30).

transaction-logs-disable Disable transaction-logs written in the device.

rollback Rollback Content Manager.

Defaults purge-on-delete: 5 minutes disk-bucket-fail-threshold : default is 30 percent.

hitcnt-decay-half-life : default is 14 days.

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines As part of FastCAL, the Content Manager module replaces the Ucache process in VDS-IS 2.6 Release software. The Content Manager keeps track of all the files in CDNFS, and maintains all content popularity information and stores it in a snapshot file.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-115

contentmgr

Examples

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

The contentmgr disk-bucket-fail-threshold command monitors the percentage of disks failed in a particular disk bucket. A minor alarm would be raised if the percentage disk failure crosses the configured threshold value.

A disk bucket is a logical unit in FastCAL module, where all the disks on an SE are distributed equally among each disk bucket. The number of disk buckets can be 1, 3, or 4 depending on the platform.

For example:

• A CDE220 with 12 hard-disks (disk00 to disk11):

– This hardware has 3 disk-buckets.

Each disk-bucket has 4 disks in it (sequentially allocated).

The allocation of disks is as follows: disk-bucket00 | disk-bucket01 | disk-bucket02

--------------|-----------------|--------------disk00 | disk01 | disk02 disk03 | disk04 | disk05

– disk06 | disk07 | disk08 disk09 | disk10 | disk11

The Number of Disk buckets for each platform type is as as follows:

2S6 = 4

2M1 = 3

2M0 = 4

2S3I = 3

CDE220 = 3

2G2 = 3

CDE205 = 1

Use the contentmgr hitcnt-decay-half-life command to configure the time period after which cache hit count is decayed.

The Content Manager transaction logs help identify whether a content is being added, updated, deleted, or evicted. The format for Content Manager transaction logging is as follows:

ServiceEngine# tail -f /local/local1/logs/content_mgr/working.log

Use the content-mgr rollback command to downgrade the Service Engine from 4.2.1 image to the previous release image. This command evicts the cached disk content till the maxcached files count below 20,000,000 and max cached directories count below 950,000. Without executing this command before downgrading the Service Engine, all disk cached files will be lost after downgrade reload. This command could take minutes to hours depends on how many cached files are in the disk before downgrade.

The following example shows how to configure the Content Manager delivery service cache content purge on delete after 10 minutes:

ServiceEngine# delivery-service cache-content purge-on-delete 10

ServiceEngine(config)#

2-116

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands contentmgr

The following example shows how to configure the cache hit count half life to 10 days:

ServiceEngine# contentmgr hitcnt-decay-half-life 10

ServiceEngine(config)#

The following example shows how to configure the percentage of disk failures to 20 percent:

ServiceEngine# contentmgr disk-bucket-fail-threshold 20

ServiceEngine(config)#

The following example shows the disk bucket alarm:

ServiceEngine# show alarms

Critical Alarms:

----------------

None

Major Alarms:

-------------

Alarm ID Module/Submodule Instance

-------------------- -------------------- -------------------------

1 cms_clock_alarm cms

Minor Alarms:

-------------

Alarm ID Module/Submodule Instance

-------------------- -------------------- -------------------------

1 psu sysmon Power Supply

2 disk_bucket_thresh sysmon/cmgr/bucket00 Disk Bucket 00

3 disk_bucket_thresh sysmon/cmgr/bucket01 Disk Bucket 01

4 disk_failure sysmon disk05

5 disk_failure sysmon disk09

6 disk_failure sysmon disk12

Related Commands Command Description content-mgr disk-info force-reset Forces the Content Manager to reset the disk share memory information show content-mgr show statistics content-mgr

Displays all content management information.

Displays the Content Manager statistics.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-117

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands content-mgr disk-info force-reset

content-mgr disk-info force-reset

To force the Content Manager to reset the disk share memory information, use the copy command in

EXEC configuration mode.

content-mgr disk-info-force-reset

Syntax Description This command has no keywords or arguments.

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Examples The following example shows how to force the Content Manager to reset the disk share memory information:

ServiceEngine# content-mgr disk-info force-reset

Disk info force reset completed.

Related Commands Command contentmgr show content-mgr show statistics content-mgr

Description

Configures the Content Manager.

Displays all content management information.

Displays the Content Manager statistics.

2-118

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands content-origin

content-origin

To support multiple origin servers within a content origin, use the content-origin command in Global configuration mode. To remove configured content origin, use the no form of this command.

content-origin request-fqdn domain config-url url [ username username password password ] no content-origin request-fqdn domain config-url url [ username username password password ]

Syntax Description request-fqdn domain config-url url username username password password

1.

fully qualified domain name.

Configures the request FQDN 1 .

Domain of the request FQDN. Domain size range should be between 1to

255 characters.

URL of the content origin configuration file.

URL name.

Configures a username to access configuration file.

Specifies a username.

Configures a password to access configuration file.

Specifies a password.

Defaults None

Command Modes Global configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines Previously, only one origin server per content origin was allowed and the same origin server could not be shared across multiple content origins. Users had to create delivery services or content origins and different content origin domain names resolving to same IP addresses of the origin server. This created much overhead during deployment. The content-origin command supports multiple origin servers within a content origin and allows users to share single origin servers across multiple delivery service or content origins.

Examples The following example shows how to create a

ServiceEngine# content-origin request-fqdn xxx.com config-url http://171.XX.XX.XXX/cdsorigin.xml username admin password default

Related Commands Command Description show content-origin Displays information about the NAS mount.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-119

copy

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

copy

Syntax Description cdnfs disk url sysfs-filename disk ftp hostname ip-address remotefiledir remotefilename localfilename startup-config filename ftp disk hostname ip-address remotefiledir remotefilename localfilename

To copy the configuration or image data from a source to a destination, use the copy command in EXEC configuration mode.

copy cdnfs disk url sysfs-filename copy disk { ftp { hostname | ip-address } remotefiledir remotefilename localfilename | startup-config filename } copy ftp { disk { hostname | ip-address } remotefiledir remotefilename localfilename | install

{ hostname | ip-address } remotefiledir remotefilename } copy http install {{ hostname | ip-address } remotefiledir remotefilename } [ port port-num [ proxy

{ hostname | ip-address } | username username password [ proxy { hostname | ip-address } proxy_portnum ]] | proxy { hostname | ip-address } proxy_portnum | username username password [ proxy { hostname | ip-address } proxy_portnum ]] copy running-config { disk filename | startup-config } copy startup-config { disk filename | running-config } copy system-status disk filename copy tech-support { disk filename | remotefilename }

Copies a file from the CDNFS to the sysfs.

Copies a file to the disk.

URL of the CDNFS file to be copied to the sysfs.

Filename to be copied in the sysfs.

Copies a local disk file.

Copies to a file on an FTP server.

Hostname of the FTP server.

IP address of the FTP server.

Directory on the FTP server to which the local file is copied.

Name of the local file after it has been copied to the FTP server.

Name of the local file to be copied.

Copies the configuration file from the disk to startup configuration

(NVRAM).

Name of the existing configuration file.

Copies a file from an FTP server.

Copies a file to a local disk.

Hostname of the FTP server.

IP address of the FTP server.

Directory on the FTP server where the file to be copied is located.

Name of the file to be copied to the local disk.

Name of the copied file as it appears on the local disk.

2-120

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands install hostname ip-address remotefiledir remotefilename http install hostname ip-address remotefiledir remotefilename port port-num proxy hostname ip-address proxy_portnum username username running-config disk filename startup-config disk filename running-config system-status disk filename tech-support disk filename remotefilename copy

Copies the file from an FTP server and installs the software release file to the local device.

Name of the FTP server.

IP address of the FTP server.

Remote file directory.

Remote filename.

Copies the file from an HTTP server and installs the software release file on a local device.

Name of the HTTP server.

IP address of the HTTP server.

Remote file directory.

Remote filename.

(Optional) Specifies the port to connect to the HTTP server. The default is

80.

HTTP server port number. The range is from 1 to 65535.

Allows the request to be redirected to an HTTP proxy server.

Name of the HTTP server.

IP address of the HTTP server.

HTTP proxy server port number. The range is from 1 to 65535.

Specifies the username to access the HTTP proxy server.

User login name.

Copies the current system configuration.

Copies the current system configuration to a disk file.

Name of the file to be created on disk.

Copies the running configuration to the startup configuration (NVRAM).

Copies the startup configuration to a disk file.

Name of the startup configuration file to be copied to the local disk.

Copies the startup configuration to a running configuration.

Copies the system status to a disk file.

Name of the file to be created on the disk.

Copies system information for technical support.

Copies system information for technical support to a disk file.

Name of the file to be created on disk.

Remote filename of the system information file to be created on the TFTP server. Use the complete pathname.

Defaults HTTP server port: 80

Default working directory for sysfs files: /local1

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-121

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands copy

Usage Guidelines The copy cdnfs command in EXEC configuration mode copies data files from of the CDNFS to the sysfs for further processing. For example, you can use the install imagefilename command in EXEC configuration mode to provide the copied files to the command.

The copy disk ftp command copies files from a sysfs partition to an FTP server. The copy disk startup-config command copies a startup configuration file to NVRAM.

The copy ftp disk command copies a file from an FTP server to a sysfs partition.

Use the copy ftp install command to install an image file from an FTP server. Part of the image goes to the disk and part goes to the flash memory.

Use the copy http install command to install an image file from an HTTP server and install it on a local device. It transfers the image from an HTTP server to the SE using HTTP as the transport protocol and installs the software on the device. Part of the image goes to the disk and part goes to the flash memory.

You can also use this command to redirect your transfer to a different location or HTTP proxy server, by specifying the proxy hostname | ip-address option. A username and a password have to be authenticated with the remote HTTP server if the server is password protected and requires authentication before the transfer of the software release file to the SE is allowed.

Use the copy running-config command to copy the running system configuration to a sysfs partition or flash memory. The copy running-config startup-config command is equivalent to the write memory command.

The copy startup-config command copies the startup configuration file to a sysfs partition.

The copy system-status command creates a file on a sysfs partition containing hardware and software status information.

The copy tech-support tftp command copies technical support information to a a sysfs partition.

Related

Command Description install reload show running-config show startup-config write

Installs a new version of the caching application.

Halts a device and performs a cold restart.

Displays the current operating configuration.

Displays the startup configuration.

Writes or erases the startup configurations to NVRAM or to a terminal session, or writes the MIB persistence configuration to disk.

2-122

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

cpfile

To make a copy of a file, use the cpfile command in EXEC configuration mode.

cpfile oldfilename newfilename

Syntax Description oldfilename newfilename

Name of the file to be copied.

Name of the copy to be created.

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines Use this command to create a copy of a file. Only sysfs files can be copied.

Examples The following example shows how to create a copy of a file:

ServiceEngine# cpfile syslog.txt syslog.txt.save

Command Description copy dir lls ls mkfile rename rmdir

Copies the configuration or image files to and from the

CD-ROM, flash memory, disk, or remote hosts.

Displays the files in a long-list format.

Displays the files in a long-list format.

Lists the files and subdirectories in a directory.

Makes a file (for testing).

Renames a file.

Removes a directory.

cpfile

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-123

debug

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

debug

Syntax Description

To monitor and record caching application functions, use the debug command in EXEC configuration mode. To disable these functions, use the no form of this command.

debug option no debug option option

Specifies the debugger type; see the Usage Guidelines

section for valid values.

Defaults debug all : default logging level is ERROR.

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines We recommend that you use the debug command only at the direction of Cisco TAC because the SE performance is affected when you enter the debug command.

You can use the logging disk priority debug command with the debug command. This configuration causes the debugging messages to be logged in the syslog file, which is available in the /local1 directory by default. You can then download the messages from the SE, copy them to a local disk file (for example, using the copy disk ftp command), and forward the logs to Cisco TAC for further investigation.

By default, system log messages are logged to the console and you need to copy and paste the output to a file. However, this method of obtaining logs is more prone to errors than capturing all messages in the syslog.txt file. When you use system logging to a disk file instead of system logging to a console, there is no immediate feedback that debug logging is occurring, except that the syslog.txt file gets larger (you can track the lines added to the syslog.txt file by entering the type-tail syslog.txt follow command).

When you have completed downloading the system logs to a local disk, disable the debugging functions by using the undebug command (see the

“undebug” section on page 2-770

section for more details), and reset the level of logging disk priority to any other setting that you want (for example, notice priority).

Table 2-2 shows valid values for the

debug command options.

Table 2-2 debug Command Options aaa access-lists 300 dump query username username groupname groupnames debugs AAA.

Debugs the ACL.

Dumps the ACL contents.

Queries the ACL configuration.

Queries the ACL username.

Queries the ACL group name or names of groups of which the user is a member. Each group name must be separated by a comma.

2-124

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-2 debug Command Options acquirer error trace all authentication user authsvr error trace bandwidth advanced error trace buf all dmbuf dmsg cache-content all error trace cache-router error trace cdnfs cds-origin-manager error trace cli cms all bin pam parser

Debugs the acquirer.

Sets the debug level to error.

Sets the debug level to trace.

Enables all debugging.

Debugs authentication.

Debugs the user login against the system authentication.

Debugs the Autnentication Server.

Sets the debug level to error.

Sets the debug level to trace.

Debugs the bandwidth module.

Advanced bandwidth controller debug commands.

Sets the debug level to error.

Sets the debug level to trace.

Debugs the buffer manager.

Debugs all buffer manager functions.

Debugs the buffer manager dmbuf.

Debugs the buffer manager dmsg.

Debugs the caching service.

(Optional) Sets the debug level to all.

(Optional) Sets the debug level to error.

(Optional) Sets the debug level to trace.

Debugs the caching router.

Sets the debug level to error.

Sets the debug level to trace.

Debugs the CNNFS.

Debugs the Cds Origin Manager.

Sets the debug level to error.

Sets the debug level to trace.

Debugs the CLI command.

Debugs all CLI commands.

Debugs the CLI command binary program.

Debugs the CLI comand pam.

Debugs the CLI command parser.

Debugs the CMS.

debug

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-125

debug

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-2 content-mgr error trace dataserver all clientlib server dfs all api diskcache memcache rawio dhcp debug Command Options

Debugs the Content Manager.

Sets the debug level to error.

Sets the debug level to trace.

Debugs the data server.

Debuts all data server functions.

Debugs the data server client library module.

Debugs the data server module.

Debugs the DFS.

Sets the debug level to all.

Debugs the DFS application API.

Debugs the DFS in-memory disk-directory cache management.

Debugs the DFS in-memory cache.

Debugs the DFS raw disk I/O.

Debugs the DHCP.

2-126

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands debug fxd-sender error trace all error trace mcast-data-receiver error trace metadata-receiver error trace metadata-sender error trace unicast-data-receiver error trace unicast-data-sender error trace emdb level

(0-16)

Table 2-2 debug Command Options distribution fxd-receiver error trace

Debugs the distribution components.

Debugs Distribution FXD Receiver components.

Set Debug level to error.

Set Debug level to trace.

Distribution FXD Sender component debug commands

Set Debug level to error.

Set Debug level to trace.

Debugs all distribution components.

Debugs all distribution components to error level 1 (show error).

Debugs all distribution components to trace level 2 (show error and trace).

Debugs the multicast receiver distribution component.

Debugs the multicast receiver distribution component to error level 1.

Debugs the multicast receiver distribution component to trace level 2.

Debugs the metadata receiver distribution component.

Debugs the metadata receiver distribution component to error level 1.

Debugs the metadata receiver distribution component to trace level 2.

Debugs the metadata sender distribution component.

Debugs the metadata sender distribution component to error level 1.

Debugs the metadata sender distribution component to trace level 2.

Debugs the unicast receiver distribution component.

Debugs the unicast receiver distribution component to error level 1.

Debugs the unicast receiver distribution component to trace level 2.

Debugs the unicast sender distribution component.

Debugs the unicast sender distribution component to error level 1.

Debugs the unicast sender distribution component to trace level 2.

Debugs the embedded database.

(Optional) Debug level.

Debug level 0 through 16.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-127

debug

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-2 flash-media-streaming error trace httpscfgmgr error trace live-routing http service-router icap error trace all client daemon ip bgp ospf proximity all ippc rib isis adjacency all csnp dis esis event hello lsp mpls psnp spf timer debug Command Options

Debugs Flash Media Streaming.

Debugs the Flash Media Streaming log level error.

Debugs the Flash Media Streaming log level debug.

Debugs the HTTPS Configuration Manager.

Debugs the HTTPS Configuration Manager log level error.

Debugs the HTTPS Configuration Manager log level debug.

Debugs Live-routing component.

Set Live-routing debug level to error.

Set Live-routing debug level to trace.

Debugs HTTP.

Debugs the HTTP Service Router.

Debugs ICAP.

Debugs both ICAP client and ICAP daemon processing.

Debugs the ICAP client (caching proxy) processing.

Debugs the ICAP daemon processing.

Debugs Internet Protocol.

Debugs Border Gateway Protocol.

Debugs OSPF events.

Proximity debug commands.

All Proximity debugging information.

Proximity IPPC debugs.

Debugs IP routing table events.

Debugs IS-IS Routing for IP.

Debugs IS-IS adjacency information.

Debugs all IS-IS debugging.

Debugs IS-IS Complete Sequence Number PDU (CSNP) information.

Debugs IS-IS DIS election information.

Debugs IS-IS ESIS information.

Debugs IS-IS event information.

Debugs IS-IS hello information.

Debugs IS-IS timer LSP information.

Debugs IS-IS MPLS information.

Debugs IS-IS PSNP information.

Debugs IS-IS SPF information.

Debugs IS-IS timer information.

2-128

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands debug

Table 2-2 debug Command Options logging all malloc cache-app all caller-accounting catch-double-free check-boundaries check-free-chunks clear-on-alloc statistics dns-server all caller-accounting catch-double-free check-boundaries check-free-chunks clear-on-alloc icap statistics caller-accounting catch-double-free check-boundaries log-directory word movie-streamer error trace ntp qos rbcp policy service error trace

Debugs logging.

Debugs all logging functions.

Debug commands for memory allocation.

Debugging commands for cache application memory allocation.

Sets the debug level to all.

Collects statistics for every distinct allocation call-stack.

Alerts if application attempts to release the same memory twice.

Checks boundary over and under run scribble.

Checks if free chunks are over-written after release.

Ensures all allocations are zero-cleared.

Allocator use statistical summary.

DNS Caching Service memory allocation debugging.

Sets the debug level to all.

Collects statistics for every distinct allocation call-stack.

Alerts if application attempts to release the same memory twice.

Checks boundary over and under run scribble.

Check if free chunks are overwritten after release (when possible)

Ensure ALL allocations are zero-cleared

General allocator use statistical summary

ICAP Service memory allocation debugging.

Collects statistics for every distinct allocation call-stack.

Alerts if application attempts to release the same memory twice.

Checks boundary over and under run scribble.

Memory allocation debugging log directory.

Directory path name.

Debug commands for the Movie Streamer.

Sets the debug level to error.

Sets the debug level to trace.

Debugs NTP.

Debug commands for the QoS component.

Debug commands for the policy service.

Sets the debug level to error.

Sets the debug level to trace.

Debugs the RBCP (Router Blade Configuration Protocol) functions.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-129

debug

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-2 debug Command Options rpc detail rtsp trace gateway error trace rule action all pattern service-router servicemonitor session-manager critical error trace snmp agent all cli main mib traps

Displays the remote procedure call (RPC) logs.

Displays the RPC logs of priority detail level or higher.

Displays the RPC logs of priority trace level or higher.

Debugs the RTSP functions.

Debugs the RTSP gateway.

Debugs the RTSP gateway to level 1 (show error).

Debugs the RTSP gateway to level 2 (show error and trace).

Debugs the Rules Template.

Debugs the rule action.

Debugs all rule functions.

Debugs the rule pattern.

Debug commands for the Service Router.

Debug commands for the service monitor.

Session manager debug commands.

Sets the debug level to critical.

Sets the debug level to error.

Sets the debug level to trace.

Debugs SNMP.

SNMP agent debug.

Debugs all SNMP functions.

Debugs the SNMP CLI.

Debugs the SNMP main.

Debugs the SNMP MIB.

Debugs the SNMP traps.

2-130

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-2 debug Command Options srp multicast neighbor packet private replica route session srhp-packet standby all stats startup sync all collection computation history all api configuration database error frag function host interface internal ippc ippc-dump key leafset lock

Debugs the Service Routing Protocols.

Debugs all SRP.

Debugs the SRP API.

Debugs the SRP configuration.

Debugs the SRP database.

Debugs the SRP error.

Debug SRP frag defragmentation.

Debugs the SRP host.

Debugs the SRP internal.

Debugs SRP interface.

Debugs the SRP ippc (inter process command).

Debugs the SRP ippc (pkt) dump.

Debugs the SRP key.

Debugs the SRP leafset.

Debugs the SRP lock.

Debugs the SRP multicast.

Debugs the SRP neighbor.

Debugs the SRP packet.

Debugs the SRP private.

Debugs the SRP replica.

Debugs the SRP route.

Debugs the SRP session.

Debugs the SRP srhp packet.

Debugs the SRP startup.

Debugs the SRP sync.

Debugs standby functions.

(Optional) Debugs all standby functions.

Debugs the statistics.

Debugs all statistics functions.

Debugs the statistics collection.

Debugs the statistics computation.

Debugs the statistics history.

debug

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-131

debug

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-2 svc all ippc svc translog ven all archive export error trace uns all error trace webengine error trace wi desci desc err ippc xml registry err if debug Command Options

Debugs the Service Registration Daemon and Descriptor

Interpreter.

Debugs all SVCREG and Descriptor Interpreter Library (DESCI).

DESCI debug commands.

Debugs DESCI desc.

DESCI internal error.

Debugs DESCI ippc (inter process comm).

Debugs DESCI xml.

Service Registry Daemon (SVCREG) debug commands.

SVCREG internal error.

Debugs SVCREG interface.

Debugs SVCREG ippc (inter process comm).

Debugs SVCREG svc.

Debugs SVCREG ven.

Debugs the transaction logging.

Debugs all transaction logging.

Debugs the transaction log archive.

Debugs the transaction log FTP export.

Translog level Error.

Translog level Trace.

Unified naming service debug commands.

(Optional) Sets the debug level to all.

(Optional) Sets the debug level to error.

(Optional) Sets the debug level to trace.

WebEngine debug commands.

Sets the debug level to error.

Sets the debug level to trace.

Debugs the web interface.

2-132

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands debug

Table 2-2 wmt error client-ip server-ip trace debug Command Options client-ip server-ip cl-ip-address sv-ip-address cl-ip-address sv-ip-address

Debugs the WMT component.

Debugs the WMT level 1 functionality. For more information, see the

“Using WMT Error Logging” section on page 2-134

.

(Optional) Debugs the request from a specific client IP address to level 1 (show error).

(Optional) Debugs the request to a specific server IP address to level 1 (show error).

Debugs the WMT level 2 functionality.

(Optional) Debugs the request from a specific client IP address to level 2 (show error and trace).

(Optional) Debugs the request to a specific server IP address to level 2 (show error and trace).

Debugging Keywords

All modules have debug error as the default level if they support the error keyword; however, when you execute the show debug command, the error does not display.

Some modules have two debugging keywords ( error and trace ), but you cannot enable both at the same time. See the table above to identify commands with only the error and trace keywords.

Some modules have the all keyword through which you can enable both the error and trace keywords at the same time. This results in debug set to everything . See

Table 2-2

to identify commands with the all keyword.

Note When debugging is set to trace level, it uses a lot of the CPU on the SE to handle error log writing. When writing the trace-level error logs reaches 100 percent of the CPU usage, 504 timeout error messages start to occur. Therefore, trace-level error logging should not be enabled in production systems.

Debugging the Authsvr

Table 2-3

shows the authsvr debugging commands and provides the corresponding log and error display information.

Table 2-3 Debug Authsvr Command Chart

Command undebug authsvr trace undebug authsvr error undebug all debug all no debug all

Debug Log Levels Printed error log error log error log error log error log

Show Debugging

Debug Authsvr error is on.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-133

debug

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-3 Debug Authsvr Command Chart

Command debug authsvr error debug authsvr trace no debug authsvr trace no debug authsvr error

Debug Log Levels Printed error log trace error log error log error log

Show Debugging

Debug Authsvr error is on.

Debug Authsvr trace is on.

Debugging Cdnfs

You can use the debug cdnfs command to monitor the lookup and serving of prepositioned files. If prepositioned files are available in CDNFS but are not served properly, you can use the debug cdnfs command.

Using WMT Error Logging

Error logs are in the same format and location as syslogs. The WMT log messages are logged to

/local1/errorlog/wmt_errorlog.current.

You can configure the SE for WMT error logging by using the debug wmt error command in EXEC configuration mode. This command debugs WMT level 1 functionality.

Logging WMT Client Disconnects

When a WMT client is disconnected abruptly, the reasons for the client disconnect (for example, the request was blocked by the rules, the maximum incoming or outgoing bit-rate limit was reached, the maximum incoming or outgoing bandwidth limit was reached) are logged in VDS-IS software error logs.

The client information includes the client IP address, the server IP address, the requested URL, the client protocol, the version of the client media player, the number of packets that the client received, and the number of packets that the server sent.

Command Description logging Configures system logging (syslog).

show debugging undebug

Displays the state of each debugging option.

Disables the debugging functions (see also debug ).

2-134

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands debug ip bgp

debug ip bgp

To display information relating to the BGP process, use the debug ip bgp command in privileged EXEC configuration mode. To disable the display of BGP information, use the undebug form of this command. debug ip bgp {A.B.C.D. | all | brib | dampening |events | internal | io | keepalives | list | packets

| rib | updates} undebug ip bgp {A.B.C.D. | all | brib | dampening |events | internal | io | keepalives | list | packets

| rib | updates}

Syntax Description A.B.C.D. all brib dampening events internal io keepalives list packets rib updates

Displays the BGP neighbor IP address.

Displays all BGP debugging information.

Displays the BGP BRIB.

Displays the BGP dampening.

Displays BGP events.

Displays BGP internal information.

Displays BGP IO information.

Displays BGP keepalives.

Displays the BGP list.

Displays the BGP packets.

Displays the BGP RIB.

Displays BGP updates.

Command Default Debugging of the keepalives is turned on upon the start of the BGP daemon.

Command Modes Privileged EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines This command turns on BGP debugging information. When debug ip bgp is turned on, the performance of the Proximity Engine may be impacted slightly.

Examples The following example shows sample output displayed before and after running the debug ip bgp all command:

ServiceRouter# show debugging ip bgp

Debugs Enabled: Keepalives

ServiceRouter# debug ip bgp all

BGP all information debug is on

ServiceRouter# show debugging ip bgp

Debugs Enabled: Events Internal RIB BRIB Updates Keepalives Packets IO List

ServiceRouter#

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-135

debug ip bgp

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

When the undebug ip bgp all command is run, the following output is displayed:

ServiceRouter# undebug ip bgp all

BGP all information debug is off

Command Description show debugging ip bgp Displays the debugging flags that have been set for BGP.

2-136

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands debug ip ospf

debug ip ospf

To display information related to OSPF process, use the debug ip ospf command in privileged EXEC configuration mode. To disable the display of OSPF information, use the undebug form of this command. debug ip ospf { adjacency [ detail | terse ] | all [ detail | terse ] | database [ detail | terse ] | database-timers | events [ detail | terse ] | flooding [ detail | terse ] | hello | lsa-generation

[ detail | terse ] | packets | retransmission | spf [ detail | terse ] | spf-trigger [ detail ] } undebug ip ospf { adjacency [ detail | terse ] | all [ detail | terse ] | database [ detail | terse ] | database-timers | events [ detail | terse ] | flooding [ detail | terse ] | hello | lsa-generation

[ detail | terse ] | packets | retransmission | spf [ detail | terse ] | spf-trigger [ detail ] }

Syntax Description adjacency detail terse all database database-timers events flooding hello lsa-generation packets retransmission spf spf-trigger

1.

LSDB = link-state database

2.

LSAs = link-state advertisement

Specifies the adjacency events.

Displays detailed neighbor events.

Displays only major events.

All OSPF debugging.

OSPF LSDB

1

changes.

OSPF LSDB timers.

OSPF related events.

LSAs

2

flooding.

Hello packet and DR elections.

Local OSPF LSA generation.

OSPF packets.

OSPF retransmission events.

SPF calculation.

Show SPF triggers

Command Default Display of information related to the OSPF process is disabled.

Command Modes Privileged EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines When debug ip ospf is turned on, the performance of the Proximity Engine may be impacted slightly.

Examples Add the detail or terse keywords to each of the following commands to enable detailed or major events respectively.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-137

debug ip ospf

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

The following example shows how to enable neighbor adjacency events:

ServiceRouter# debug ip ospf adjacency

ServiceRouter#

The following example shows how to enable all OSPF debugging:

ServiceRouter# debug ip ospf all

ServiceRouter#

The following example shows how to enable debugging for OSPF LSDB changes:

ServiceRouter# debug ip ospf database

ServiceRouter#

The following example shows how to enable debugging for OSPF LSDB timers:

ServiceRouter# debug ip ospf database-timers

ServiceRouter#

The following example shows how to enable debugging for OSPF-related events:

ServiceRouter# debug ip ospf events

ServiceRouter#

The following example shows how to enable debugging for LSA flooding events:

ServiceRouter# debug ip ospf flooding

ServiceRouter#

The following example shows how to enable debugging for hello packets and DR elections:

ServiceRouter# debug ip ospf hello

ServiceRouter#

The following example shows how to enable debugging for local OSPF LSA generation events:

ServiceRouter# debug ip ospf lsa-generation

ServiceRouter#

The following example shows how to enable debugging for of OSPF packets:

ServiceRouter# debug ip ospf packets

ServiceRouter#

The following example shows how to enable debugging for OSPF retransmission events:

ServiceRouter# debug ip ospf retransmission

ServiceRouter#

The following example shows how to enable debugging for SPF calculations:

ServiceRouter# debug ip ospf spf

ServiceRouter#

The following example shows how to enable debugging for SPF triggers:

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-138

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

ServiceRouter# debug ip ospf spf-trigger

ServiceRouter# debug ip ospf

Related

Command Description show debugging ip ospf Displays the state of each debugging option for the OSPF process.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-139

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands debug ip proximity

debug ip proximity

To debug the transport layer of proximity process in an SR, use the debug ip proximity command in privileged EXEC mode. To disable the display of RIB information, use the no form of this command. debug ip proximity { all | ippc { connection | execute | message | response | send }} no debug ip proximity { all | ippc { connection | execute | message | response | send }}

Syntax Description all ippc connection execute message response send

Enables all proximity debugging.

Enables proximity transport logic.

E nables transport connection debugging.

E nables request execution debugging.

E nables message creation debugging.

E nables received message debugging.

E nables sent message debugging.

Command Default None

Command Modes Privileged EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The debug ip proximity command enables debugging of the transport layer of the proximity process in an SR to troubleshoot problems with proximity request and response.

Examples The following example shows how to :

ServiceRouter# debug ip proximity all

ServiceRouter#

Command Description show debugging ip proximity Displays the debug options that are enabled for the proximity process.

2-140

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands debug ip rib

debug ip rib

To display RIB information, use the debug ip rib command in privileged EXEC mode. To disable the display of RIB information, use the no form of this command. debug ip rib [ add-route | all | delete-route | detail | mod-route | proximity | rnh | summary ] no debug ip rib [ add-route | all | delete-route | detail | mod-route | proximity | rnh | summary ]

Syntax Description add-route all delete-route detail mod-route proximity rnh summary

Adds route events.

Displays all IP routing table events.

Deletes route events.

Enables detailed debugging for IP routing.

Modifies route events.

Turns on proximity debugging information.

Turns on recursive next hop events.

Displays a one-line summary of URIB I/O events.

Command Default None

Command Modes Privileged EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines This command is used to display debug information related to the routing information base (RIB).

Examples The following example shows how to display the RIB information:

ServiceRouter# debug ip rib

ServiceRouter#

The following example shows how to add routes:

ServiceRouter# debug ip rib add-route

ServiceRouter#

The following example shows how to turn on all IP routing table events:

ServiceRouter# debug ip rib all

ServiceRouter#

The following example shows how to remove routes:

ServiceRouter# debug ip rib delete-route

ServiceRouter#

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-141

debug ip rib

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

The following example shows how to enable detailed debugging for IP routing:

ServiceRouter# debug ip rib detail

ServiceRouter#

The following example shows how to modify IP routing events:

ServiceRouter# debug ip rib mod-route

ServiceRouter#

The following example shows how to turn on proximity debugging information:

ServiceRouter# debug ip rib proximity

URIB proximity routing information debug is on

ServiceRouter#

The following example shows how to enable recursive next hop events:

ServiceRouter# debug ip rib rnh

ServiceRouter#

The following example shows how to display a one-line summary or URIB I/O events:

ServiceRouter# debug ip rib summary

ServiceRouter#

Command Description show debugging ip rib Displays the debug options that are enabled for the RIB process.

2-142

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands debug isis

debug isis

To display information related to IS-IS process, use the debug isis command in privileged EXEC configuration mode. To disable the display of IS-IS information, use the undebug form of this command. debug isis [ adjacency | all | csnp | dis | esis | event | hello | lsp | mpls | psnp | route-map | spf | timer ] undebug isis [ adjacency | all | csnp | dis | esis | event | hello | lsp | mpls | psnp | route-map | spf | timer ]

Syntax Description adjacency all csnp dis esis event hello lsp mpls psnp route-map spf timer

Displays IS adjacency information.

Displays all IS-IS debugging information.

Displays IS-IS CSNP information.

Displays IS-IS DIS election information.

Displays IS-IS ESIS information.

Displays IS-IS event information.

Displays IS-IS hello information.

Displays IS-IS LSP information.

Displays IS-IS MPLS information.

Displays IS-IS PSNP information.

Displays IS-IS route-map policy information.

Displays IS-IS SPF information.

Displays IS-IS timer information.

Command Default Display of debugging information is disabled.

Command Modes Privileged EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines When debug isis is turned on, the performance of the Proximity Engine may be impacted slightly.

Examples The following example shows how to turn on the debug information for the interaction between IS-IS and the RPM API library:

ServiceRouter# debug isis route-map

ServiceRouter#

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-143

debug isis

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Command Description show debugging isis Displays the debug options that are enabled for the IS-IS process.

2-144

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

debug srp

debug srp

To turn on SRP debugging information, use the debug srp command in Privileged EXEC configuration mode. To turn off the debugging information, use the no form of this command.

debug srp option no debug srp option

Syntax Description option Specifies the category of SRP debugging information to turn on. See

Table 2-4

for a list of option values.

Command Default None

Command Modes Privileged EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines

Table 2-4

This command turns on SRP debugging information logging either in the trace file or log file.

The log file for SRP is /local/local1/errorlog/srp_log.current. The option argument to the debug srp command specifies a keyword indicating the category of SRP debugging information logging to turn on.

Table 2-4

lists the values that can be specified in the option argument.

Each debugging information message includes a tag that indicates the debugging category. For example, the SRP API debug messages include the tag SRP_DEBUG_API.

Table 2-4

lists the tags that are used for each category of debugging information.

To turn off SRP debugging information, use the undebug srp command in privileged EXEC configuration mode.

debug SRP Options

Option Tag all api not applicable

SRP_DEBUG_API configuration SRP_DEBUG_CONFIG database SRP_DEBUG_DATABASE error SRP_DEBUG_ERROR function host ippc internal ippc-dump

SRP_DEBUG_FUNC

SRP_DEBUG_HOST

SRP_DEBUG_INT_DUMP

SRP_DEBUG_IPPC

SRP_DEBUG_IPPC_DUMP

Description

Turns on all categories of SRP debugging information.

Turns on SRP API debugging information.

Turns on SRP configuration debugging information.

Turns on SRP database debugging information.

Turns on SRP error debugging information. Usually, thread creation errors, no memory, key not found, and so forth are reported by this log information.

Turns on SRP function debugging information.

Turns on SRP host debugging information.

Turns on SRP internal debugging information.

Turns on SRP inter-process procedure (IPPC) call debugging information.

Turns on SRP complete IPPC packet debugging information.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-145

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands debug srp

Table 2-4 debug SRP Options (continued)

Option Tag key leafset lock multicast neighbor packet private

SRP_DEBUG_KEY

SRP_DEBUG_LEAFSET

SRP_DEBUG_LOCK

SRP_DEBUG_MCAST

SRP_DEBUG_NEIGHBOR

SRP_DEBUG_PACKET

SRP_DEBUG_PRIVATE

Description

Turns on SRP key-related debugging information.

Turns on SRP leafset debugging information.

Turns on SRP lock and unlock debugging information.

Turns on SRP multicast debugging information.

Turns on SRP neighbor debugging information.

Turns on SRP packet debugging information (for example, packet type, key, and so forth).

Turns on SRP debugging information related to private variables and operations.

replica route

SRP_DEBUG_REPLICA

SRP_DEBUG_ROUTE

Turns on SRP replica debugging information.

Turns on SRP route debugging information.

session SRP_DEBUG_SESSION Turns on SRP session debugging information.

srhp-packet SRP_DEBUG_SRHP_PACKET Turns on SRP service routing host packet (SRHP) debugging information.

startup sync

SRP_DEBUG_STARTUP

SRP_DEBUG_SYNC

Turns on SRP startup debugging information.

Turns on SRP debugging information related to synchronization among peers.

Examples The following example shows how to use the debug srp command to turn on SRP host and neighbor debugging information logging:

ServiceRouter# debug srp host

ServiceRouter# debug srp neighbor

Related Commands Command Description show debugging srp Displays the debug flags that are turned on for the SRP.

undebug srp Turns off SRP debugging information.

2-146

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

delfile

To delete a file, use the delfile command in EXEC configuration mode.

delfile filename

Syntax Description filename Name of the file to delete.

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines Use this command to remove a file from a sysfs partition.

Examples The following example shows how to delete a file:

ServiceEngine# delfile /local1/tempfile

Command Description cpfile deltree mkdir mkfile rmdir

Copies a file.

Deletes a directory and its subdirectories.

Creates a directory.

Creates a file (for testing).

Removes a directory.

delfile

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-147

deltree

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

deltree

Syntax Description

To remove a directory with its subdirectories and files, use the deltree command in EXEC configuration mode.

deltree directory directory Name of the directory tree to delete.

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines Use this command to remove a directory and all files within the directory from the SE sysfs file system.

Do not remove files or directories required for proper SE functioning.

Examples The following example shows how to delete a directory from the /local1 directory:

ServiceEngine# deltree /local1/testdir

Command Description delfile mkdir mkfile rmdir

Deletes a file.

Creates a directory.

Creates a file (for testing).

Removes a directory.

2-148

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

device

device

To configure the mode of operation on a device as a CDSM, SE or SR, use the device command in Global configuration mode. To reset the mode of operation on a device, use the no form of this command.

device mode { content-delivery-system-manager | service-engine | service-router } no device mode { content-delivery-system-manager | service-engine | service-router }

Syntax Description mode content-delivery-systemmanager service-engine service-router

Sets the mode of operation of a device to CDSM, SE or SR.

Configures the device operation mode as a CDSM.

Configures the device operation mode as an SE.

Configures the device operation mode as an SR.

Defaults The default device operation mode is SE.

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines A CDSM is the content management and device management station of an VDS-IS network that allows you to specify what content is to be distributed, and where the content should be distributed. If an SR is deployed in the VDS-IS network, the SR redirects the client based on redirecting policy. An SE is the device that serves content to the clients. There are typically many SEs deployed in an VDS-IS network, each serving a local set of clients. IP/TV brings movie-quality video over enterprise networks to the desktop of the VDS-IS network user.

Because different device modes require disk space to be used in different ways, disk space must also be configured when the device mode changes from being an SE or SR to CDSM (or the other way around).

You must reboot the device before the configuration changes to the device mode take effect.

Disks must be configured before device configuration is changed. Use the disk configure command to configure the disk before reconfiguring the device to the SE or SR mode. Disk configuration changes using the disk configure command takes effect after the next device reboot.

To enable VDS-IS network-related applications and services, use the cms enable command. Use the no form of this command to disable the VDS-IS network.

All VDS-IS devices ship from the factory as SEs. Before configuring network settings for CDSMs and

SRs using the CLI, change the device from an SE to the proper device mode.

Configuring the device mode is not a supported option on all hardware models. However, you can configure some hardware models to operate as any one of the four content networking device types.

Devices that can be reconfigured using the device mode command are shipped from the factory by default as SEs.

To change the device mode of your SE, you must also configure the disk space allocations, as required by the different device modes, and reboot the device for the new configuration to take effect.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-149

device

Examples

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

When you change the device mode of an SE to an SR or CDSM, you may need to reconfigure the system file system (sysfs). However, SRs and CDSMs do not require any disk space other than sysfs. When you change the device mode to an SR or a CDSM, disk configuration changes are not required because the device already has some space allotted for sysfs. sysfs disk space is always preconfigured on a factory-fresh VDS-IS network device.

If you are changing the device mode of an SR or a CDSM back to an SE, configure disk space allocations for the caching, pre-positioning (CDNFS) and system use (sysfs) file systems that are used on the SE.

You can configure disk space allocations either before or after you change the device mode to an SE.

The following examples show the configuration from the default mode, SE, to the CDSM, SR, and SE modes:

ServiceEngine(config)# device mode content-delivery-system-manager

CDSM(config)# device mode service-router

ServiceRouter(config)# device mode service-engine

Related

Command Description show device-mode Displays the configured or current mode of a CDSM, SE, or

SR device.

2-150

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

dir

To view a long list of files in a directory, use the dir command in EXEC configuration mode.

dir [ directory ] dir

Syntax Description directory (Optional) Name of the directory to list.

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines Use this command to view a detailed list of files contained within the working directory, including names, sizes, and time created. The equivalent command is lls .

Examples The following example shows how to view a list of files in a directory:

ServiceEngine# dir size time of last change name

-------------- ------------------------- -----------

3931934 Tue Sep 19 10:41:32 2000 errlog-cache-20000918-164015

431 Mon Sep 18 16:57:40 2000 ii.cfg

431 Mon Sep 18 17:27:46 2000 ii4.cfg

431 Mon Sep 18 16:54:50 2000 iii.cfg

1453 Tue Sep 19 10:34:03 2000 syslog.txt

1024 Tue Sep 19 10:41:31 2000 <DIR> testdir

Command Description lls ls

Displays the files in a long list format.

Lists the files and subdirectories in a directory.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-151

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands direct-server-return

direct-server-return

To enable a VIP for direct server return, use the direct-server-return command in Global configuration mode. To disable direct server return, use the no form of this command.

direct-server-return vip ip_address no direct-server-return vip ip_address

Syntax Description vip ip_address

Specifies the VIP for direct-server-return.

VIP for direct-server-return.

Defaults None

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines Direct Server Return (DSR) is a method used by load balancer servers in a load balancing configuration.

DSR responds directly to the client, bypassing the load balancer in the response path.

Table 2-5 shows

the Direct Server Return flow.

Table 2-5 Direct Server Return Flow

Step Process

Step 1 Client to load balancer

Step 2 Load balancer to SR

Step 3 SR to client

Source IP Destination IP Destination MAC

171.71.50.140

170.1.1.45

00:30:48:C3:C7:C5

171.71.50.140

170.1.1.45

170.1.1.45

171.71.50.140

00:14:5E:83:6E:7E

Default Gateway MAC

Examples

Note When issuing the direct-server-return vip command on an SE, the DSR VIP IP address cannot be the same as the Origin Server FQDN (OFQDN).

The following example shows how to enable direct server return:

ServiceEngine(config)# direct-server-return vip 1.1.1.1

ServiceEngine(config)#

Command Description show direct-server-return Displays the Direct Server Return information.

2-152

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

disable

disable

To turn off privileged command in EXEC configuration mode, use the disable command in EXEC configuration mode.

disable

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The disable command places you in the user-level EXEC shell. To turn privileged EXEC configuration mode back on, use the enable command.

Examples The following example shows how to enter the user-level EXEC configuration mode:

ServiceEngine# disable

ServiceEngine>

Command Description enable Accesses the privileged EXEC commands.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-153

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands disk (EXEC)

disk (EXEC)

To configure disks and allocate disk space for devices that are using the CDS software, use the disk command in EXEC configuration mode.

disk { erase diskname | mark diskname { bad | good } | policy apply | recover-cdnfs-volumes | recover-system-volumes | repair diskname sector sector_address_in_decimal | unuse diskname }

Syntax Description erase diskname mark diskname bad good policy apply recover-cdnfs-volumes

Erases drive (DANGEROUS).

Name of the disk to be erased (disk00, disk01, and so on).

Marks a disk drive as good or bad.

Name of the disk to be marked (disk01, disk02, and so on).

Marks the disk drive as bad.

Marks the disk drive as good.

Applies disk policy management.

Invokes the disk policy manager for a disk.

Erases all CDNFS volumes and reboots.

recover-system-volumes Erases all SYSTEM and SYSFS volumes.

repair Repairs the drive.

diskname sector

Name of the disk to be repaired (disk00, disk01, and so on).

Repairs an uncorrectable sector.

sector_address_in_decimal Name of the sector address in decimal.

unuse Stops applications from using a disk drive.

diskname Name of the disk to be stopped for application use (disk01, disk02, and so on).

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The disk space in the CDS software is allocated on a per-file system basis, rather than on a per-disk basis.

Note For details on the VDS-IS software disk storage and configuration requirements for SEs, see the Cisco

Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.2.1 Software Configuration Guide .

The CDNFS amounts are reported by the actual usable amounts of storage for applications. Because of the internal file system overhead of approximately 3 percent, the reported amounts may be smaller than what you configured.

2-154

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

To view disk details, use the show disk details command.

disk (EXEC)

Note The show disk details command shows the amount of disk space that is allocated to system use. This detail is not shown by using the show disk current command.

To show the space allocation in each individual file system type, use the show statistics cdnfs command.

After upgrading, the disk space allocation remains the same as previously configured.

Remapping of Bad Sectors on Disk Drives

The disk erase command in EXEC configuration mode performs a low-level format of the SCSI or SATA disks. This command erases all the content on the disk.

If a disk drive continues to report a failure after you have used the disk erase command, you must replace the disk drive.

Caution Be careful when using the disk erase command because this command causes all content on the specified disk to be deleted. For CDE280, do not use this command on disk24 because it contains a very important partition.

Note SCSI and SATA drives can be reformatted.

Erasing Disk Drives

The disk erase command replaced the disk reformat command. This command erases all the content on the disk. The sequence to erase a disk with the disk erase and then use the disk policy apply commands. If a disk drive continues to report a failure after you have used the disk erase command, you must replace the disk drive.

Caution Be careful when using the disk erase command because this command causes all content on the specified disk to be deleted.

Disk Hot Swapping

A new disk is recognized and the RAID is rebuilt when the device is rebooted. After inserting the new disk, enter the disk policy apply command to force the VDS-IS software to detect the new disk and rebuild the RAID.

Note RAID is not supported for generic hardware (UCS servers). These systems have a single un-RAIDed system disk. Any disk replacement requires that the system first be taken off-line.

The disk policy's design, when adding new disks, is to always favor safety. If when a new disk is added, the disk manager detects “degraded” or “bad” system volumes, the new disk is used to repair the system volumes. Thus, the disk manager always strives to have two disks allocated to the system volumes. If when a new disk is added, the system volumes are “normal” or “syncing,” the new disk is added to the cdnfs volume.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-155

disk (EXEC)

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Note •

For the CDE220-2S3i,and the CDE220-2S3, because the system disks are internal drives, if the system disk is “bad,” the CDE should be replaced.

For CDE280, if the system disk disk24 is bad, replace the CDE, and do not use the "disk mark disk24 good". However, if you use the same, the system will erase the boot partition and will not boot up the CDE.

Repairing a Disk

The disk repair command re pairs the bad sector, including the proximal sectors. All data on the drive is lost, but the sectors are repaired and available for data storage again. This command provides equivalent functionality as the repair-disk utility. The disk repair command takes approximately three hours to complete per disk; after the repair disk command completes, reboot the SE to ensure all VDS-IS software services are functioning correctly.

Caution The device should be offline before running the disk repair command. Because this command involves complex steps, we recommend you contact Cisco Technical Support before running this command.

The disk repair command not only repairs the bad sectors, but reformats the entire drive, so all data on the drive is lost. The difference between the disk repair command and the disk erase command is that the disk erase command only re-initializes the file system and does not repair bad sectors.

For CDE280, do not use this command on disk24 because it contains a very important partition.

A minor alarm is set when an LSE is detected. After the sector is repaired with the disk repair command, the alarm is turned off.

Minor Alarms:

-------------

Alarm ID Module/Submodule Instance

-------------------- -------------------- -------------------------

1 badsector sysmon disk11

May 19 20:40:38.213 UTC, Equipment Alarm, #000003, 1000:445011

"Device: /dev/sdl, 1 Currently unreadable (pending) sectors"

Stopping Applications from Using a Disk Drive

The disk unuse command in EXEC configuration mode allows you to stop applications from using a specific disk drive (for example, disk01) without having to reboot the device.

Note When executing the disk unuse command, any applications using the disk will be terminated. Take the devie off-line before executing this command.

The disk unuse command has the following behavior:

Cannot be used with system disk if the state of RAID-1 is not “Normal”.

Cannot be used with the CDNFS disk, which contains the “/uns-symlink-tree” directory.

Can be used with any disk except as in scenario 1 and 2 above.

Examples The following example shows how to repair the sector 4660 on disk 02:

2-156

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands disk (EXEC)

ServiceEngine# disk repair disk02 sector 4660

Note A system disk cannot be unused in a non-RAID system (generic/ucs). For CDE280, running the disk unuse command on disk24 will cause other commands not to run.

The following examples show usage of the disk unuse command and the resultant actions:

ServiceEngine# disk unuse disk00 disk00 has key CDNFS data and can not be unused!

ServiceEngine# disk unuse disk01

This will restart applications currently using disk01 and unmount all partitions on disk01.

Do you want to continue? (Yes/No): yes

[WARNING] CDNFS and RAID SYSTEM partitions detected on disk01

To safely remove a RAID SYSTEM disk, the entire drive must be erased. This operation has little effect on the RAID-ed SYSTEM volumes, as their data can be resynced. However, because the drive also contains non-RAID CDNFS data, it will result in loss of all CDNFS data for this drive!

Unuse disk01, erasing all CDNFS data? (Yes/No): yes disk01 is now unused.

All partitions on disk01 have been erased.

ServiceEngine# disk unuse disk02

This will restart applications currently using disk02 and unmount all partitions on disk02.

Do you want to continue? (Yes/No): yes disk02 is now unused

The following example shows how to view disk details:

ServiceEngine# show disk details disk00: Normal (h02 c00 i00 l00 - mptsas) 476940MB(465.8GB) disk00/01: SYSTEM 5120MB(5.0GB) mounted internally disk00/02: SYSTEM 2560MB(2.5GB) mounted internally disk00/04: SYSTEM 1536MB(1.5GB) mounted internally disk00/05: SYSFS 32767MB(32.0GB) mounted at /local1 disk00/06: CDNFS 434948MB(424.8GB) mounted internally disk01: Normal (h02 c00 i01 l00 - mptsas) 476940MB(465.8GB)

Unallocated: 476940MB(465.8GB) disk02: Normal (h02 c00 i02 l00 - mptsas) 476940MB(465.8GB) disk02/01: CDNFS 476932MB(465.8GB) mounted internally

The following example shows how to display the current disk space configuration:

ServiceEngine# show disk current

Local disks:

SYSFS 32.0GB 0.7%

CDNFS 4616.0GB 99.3%

The following examples show how to view space allocation in each file system type:

ServiceEngine# show statistics cdnfs

CDNFS Statistics:

------------------

Volume on :

size of physical filesystem: 444740904 KB

space assigned for CDNFS purposes: 444740904 KB

number of CDNFS entries: 40 entries

space reserved for CDNFS entries: 436011947 KB

available space for new entries: 8728957 KB

physical filesystem space in use: 435593864 KB

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-157

disk (EXEC)

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

physical filesystem space free: 9147040 KB

physical filesystem percentage in use: 98 %

Volume on :

size of physical filesystem: 444740904 KB

space assigned for CDNFS purposes: 444740904 KB

number of CDNFS entries: 43 entries

space reserved for CDNFS entries: 436011384 KB

available space for new entries: 8729520 KB

physical filesystem space in use: 435593720 KB

physical filesystem space free: 9147184 KB

physical filesystem percentage in use: 98 %

Volume on :

size of physical filesystem: 488244924 KB

space assigned for CDNFS purposes: 488244924 KB

number of CDNFS entries: 48 entries

space reserved for CDNFS entries: 479612533 KB

available space for new entries: 8632391 KB

physical filesystem space in use: 479152708 KB

physical filesystem space free: 9092216 KB

physical filesystem percentage in use: 99 %

The following example shows how to erase all CDNFS volumes and reboot the SE:

ServiceEngine# disk recover-cdnfs-volumes

This will erase all CDNFS volumes.

Any applications using CDNFS, including streaming applications, will be killed and the system will be rebooted.

Please make sure you have offloaded the SE on the CDSM GUI so the SR is no longer sending traffic to this SE.

Are you sure you want to proceed? [no] yes Are you really sure you want to proceed to recover and reload? [yes/no] yes

Stopping all services (this may take several minutes) ...

diskman will now recover CDNFS volumes...

CDNFS recovery complete, rebooting now...

Related Commands Command disk (Global configuration mode) show cdnfs show disk show disk details show statistics

Description

Configures how the disk errors should be handled.

Displays the VDS-IS network file system information.

Displays the disk configurations.

Displays more detailed SMART disk monitoring information.

Displays statistics by module.

2-158

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands disk (Global configuration)

disk (Global configuration)

To configure how disk errors should be handled and to define a disk device error-handling threshold, use the disk command in Global configuration mode. To remove the device error-handling options, use the no form of this command.

disk error-handling { bad-sectors-mon-period minutes | reload | threshold { alarm-bad-sectors bad-sectors | alarm-remapped-sectors remapped-sectors | bad-sectors bad-sectors | errors errors}} no disk error-handling {bad-sectors-mon-period minutes | reload | threshold {alarm-bad-sectors bad-sectors | alarm-remapped-sectors remapped-sectors | bad-sectors bad-sectors | errors errors}}

Syntax Description error-handling bad-sectors-monperiod minutes reload threshold alarm-bad-sectors bad-sectors alarm-remappedsectors remapped-sectors bad-sectors bad-sectors errors errors

Configures disk error handling.

Active bad sectors monitoring period (minutes).

Default value is 1440 minutes (24 hours); 0 disables sector monitoring. The range is from 0 to 525600.

Whether to reload system if SYSFS disk(s) have problems.

Configure disk error handling thresholds.

Configures the bad sector alarm threshold.

Number of bad sectors allowed before the disk is marked as bad. The range is from 0 to 100. The default value is 15. The value 0 means that the disk should never be marked as bad.

Configure SMARTinfo remapped sectors alarm threshold (hard drives only).

Number of remapped sectors before alarm is triggered. Default value is 128

(hard drives only). The range is from 0 to 8192.

Configure number of allowed (Active) bad sectors before disk is marked bad.

Note Only applies to bad sectors detected since system boot.

Number of bad sectors allowed before disk is marked bad. Default value is

30; 0 means the disk is never mark bad. The range is from 0 to 100.

Configure number of allowed disk errors before marking disk bad.

Note Only applies to disk or sector errors detected since system boot.

The number of disk errors allowed before the disk is marked bad. Default value is 500; 0 means never mark disk bad. The range is from 0-100000.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-159

disk (Global configuration)

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Defaults Bad sector minutes: 1440

Bad sectors alarm : 15

Remapped sectors: 128

Disk bad sectors: 30

Errors : 500

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines To operate properly, the SE must have critical disk drives. A critical disk drive is the first disk drive that also contains the first sysfs (system file system) partition. It is referred to as disk00. Disk00 is not guaranteed to be the system drive or the 'key' CDNFS drive. For example, the system drives on a 2S6 are internal (disk24 and disk25), and the 'key' CDNSF disk is typically disk00, although it can move to other disks as a result of a missing or bad disk00.

The sysfs partition is used to store log files, including transaction logs, system logs (syslogs), and internal debugging logs. It can also be used to store image files and configuration files on an SE.

Note A critical drive is a disk drive that is either disk00 or a disk drive that contains the first sysfs partition.

Smaller single disk drive SEs have only one critical disk drive. Higher-end SEs that have more than one disk drive may have more than one critical disk drive.

When an SE is booted and a critical disk drive is not detected at system startup time, the VDS-IS system on the SE runs at a degraded state. On a generic UCS system the boot partition resides on the system disk (single disk, no RAID). In the event that this disk dies, the system is unbootable. If one of the critical disk drives goes bad at run time, the VDS-IS system applications can malfunction, hang, or crash, or the

VDS-IS system can hang or crash. Monitor the critical disk drives on an SE and report any disk drive errors to Cisco TAC.

In a RAIDed system, if a single system disk fails, the system handles the failure seamlessly (apart from any would be CDNFS partitions). If the 'key' CDNFS disk, typically the lowest numbered disk containing CDNFS, fails the system enters an bad state and must be rebooted. In a non-RAID system, if the system disk fails, the system is no longer boots.

With a VDS-IS system, a disk device error is defined as any of the following events:

Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI) or Integrated Drive Electronics (IDE) device error is printed by a Linux kernel.

Disk device access by an application (for example, an open(2), read(2), or write(2) system call) fails with an EIO error code.

• Disk device that existed at startup time is not accessible at run time.

The disk status is recorded in flash (nonvolatile storage). When an error on an SE disk device occurs, a message is written to the system log (syslog) if the sysfs partition is still intact, and an SNMP trap is generated if SNMP is configured on the SE.

In addition to tracking the state of critical disk drives, you can define a disk device error-handling threshold on the SE. If the number of disk device errors reaches the specified threshold, the corresponding disk device is automatically marked as bad.

2-160

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands disk (Global configuration)

If the specified threshold is exceeded, the SE either records this event or reboots. If the automatic reload feature is enabled and this threshold is exceeded, then the VDS-IS system automatically reboots the SE.

For more information about specifying this threshold, see the

“Specifying the Disk Error-Handling

Threshold” section on page 2-161 .

You can remap bad (but unused) sectors on a SCSI drive and SATA drives using the disk repair command.

Disk Latent Sector Error Handling

Latent Sector Errors (LSE) are when a particular disk sector cannot be read from or written to, or when there is an uncorrectable ECC error. Any data previously stored in the sector is lost. There is also a high probability that sectors in close proximity to the known bad sector have as yet undetected errors, and therefore are included in the repair process.

The syslog file shows the following disk I/O error message and smartd error message when there are disk sector errors:

Apr 28 21:00:26 U11-CDE220-2 kernel: %SE-SYS-4-900000: end_request: I/O error, dev sdd, sector

4660

Apr 28 21:00:26 U11-CDE220-2 kernel: %SE-SYS-3-900000: Buffer I/O error on device sdd, logical block 582

Apr 28 21:04:54 U11-CDE220-2 smartd[7396]: %SE-UNKNOWN-6-899999: Device: /dev/sdd,

SMART Prefailure Attribute: 1 Raw_Read_Error_Rate changed from 75 to 73

Apr 28 21:04:54 U11-CDE220-2 smartd[7396]: %SE-UNKNOWN-6-899999: Device: /dev/sdd,

SMART Usage Attribute: 187 Reported_Uncorrect changed from 99 to 97

Apr 28 21:04:54 U11-CDE220-2 smartd[7396]: %SE-UNKNOWN-2-899999: Device: /dev/sdd, ATA error count increased from 1 to 3

Specifying the Disk Error-Handling Threshold

You can configure a disk error-handling threshold to determine how many disk errors or bad sectors can be detected before the disk drive is automatically marked as bad.

The disk error-handling threshold bad-sectors command determines how many bad sectors can be detected before the disk drive is automatically marked as bad. By default, this threshold is set to 15. To change the default threshold, use the disk error-handling threshold bad-sectors command. Specify 0 if you never want the disk drive to be marked as bad.

If the bad disk drive is a critical disk drive, and the automatic reload feature ( disk error-handling reload command) is enabled, then the VDS-IS software marks the disk drive as bad and the SE is automatically reloaded. After the SE is reloaded, a syslog message and an SNMP trap are generated.

The disk error-handling threshold errors command determines how many disk errors can be detected before the disk drive is automatically marked as bad. By default, this threshold is set to 500. To change the default threshold, use the disk error-handling threshold errors command. Specify 0 if you never want the disk drive to be marked as bad.

By default, the automatic reload feature is disabled on an SE. To enable the automatic reload feature, use the disk error-handling reload command. After enabling the automatic reload feature, use the no disk error-handling reload command to disable it.

Examples The following example shows that five disk drive errors for a particular disk drive (for example, disk00) are allowed before the disk drive is automatically marked as bad:

ServiceEngine(config)# disk error-handling threshold errors 5

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-161

disk (Global configuration)

Related Commands Command disk (EXEC mode) show disk show disk details

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Description

Allocates the disks among the CDNFS and sysfs file systems.

Displays the disk configurations.

Displays currently effective configurations with more details.

2-162

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands distribution

distribution

To reschedule and refresh content redistribution for a specified delivery service ID or name, use the distribution command in EXEC configuration mode.

distribution { failover { delivery-service-id delivery_service_num | delivery-service-name delivery_service_name } [ force ] | fallback { delivery-service-id delivery_service_num | delivery-service-name delivery_service_name } | multicast { resend { all [ on-demand-only ]| delivery-service-id delivery_service_num [ object url | on-demand-only ]| delivery-service-name delivery_service_name [ object url | on-demand-only ] | send-nack-now | stop { all | delivery-service-id delivery_service_num [ object url ] | delivery-service-name delivery_service_name [ object url ]} | primary-ip-fallback

{ forwarder-id forwarder_num | forwarder-name forwarder_name } | refresh { meta-data delivery-service-id delivery_service_num | object object_url }}

Syntax Description failover Triggers the root or forwarder SE to fail over and make this SE the temporary Content Acquirer.

delivery-service-id Specifies the delivery service ID to be used.

delivery_service_num Delivery service number. The range is from 0 to 4294967295.

delivery-service-name Specifies the delivery service name descriptor to be used.

name Delivery service name.

force (Optional) Forces a failover regardless of whether the root or forwarder SE is active.

Forces the temporary Content Acquirer to become a receiver SE.

fallback multicast resend

Resends or stops multicast distribution.

Resends multicast distribution delivery service.

all on-demand-only

Stops multicast distribution for all delivery services.

(Optional) Triggers a resend only on demand of content NAK for the delivery service.

object url send-nack-now

(Optional) Specifies the URL of object to be stopped.

Object URL.

Generates a NACK for uncompleted objects and sends it to the multicast sender immediately.

stop primary-ip-fallback

Stops multicast distribution delivery service.

Triggers the downstream receiver SEs to contact a forwarder using the forwarder’s primary IP address. For more information, see the

“distribution primary-ip-fallback Command” section on page 2-164 .

Specifies the forwarder SE ID that is contacted by the receiver SE.

forwarder-id forwarder_num forwarder-name name refresh meta-data delivery-service-id

Forwarder SE ID.

Specifies the name of the forwarder SE that is contacted by the receiver SE.

Forwarder SE name.

Forces the redistribution of content to be refreshed on every SE.

Forces the redistribution of metadata to be refreshed on every SE.

Specifies the delivery service ID to be used in the distribution.

delivery_service_num Delivery service number. The range is from 0 to 4294967295.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-163

distribution

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Forces the distribution of objects to be refreshed on every SE.

Specifies the object URL that needs to be refreshed on every SE.

object object_url

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines Note This command is only available on VDS-IS Release 3.1.1.

When the Content Acquirer fails, use the distribution failover command in EXEC configuration mode on an SE that is going to be the temporary Content Acquirer to trigger an immediate failover to the temporary Content Acquirer if you do not want to wait for the automatic failover process to occur. When you enter this command, the current SE becomes the temporary Content Acquirer if its forwarder is an inactive Content Acquirer. If the Content Acquirer has not failed, a failover to the temporary Content

Acquirer does not occur if you use the distribution failover command in EXEC configuration mode.

Use the distribution failover force command to force a failover even if the Content Acquirer is active.

Use the distribution fallback command on an SE that is currently the temporary Content Acquirer to cause it to become a receiver SE.

Use the distribution refresh meta-data { delivery-service-id delivery_service_num } command to request that the metadata receiver repeat a previous request for all the content metadata for the specified delivery service from its forwarder SE. This method allows you to start over if the metadata receiver fails to replicate some metadata properly. The content metadata (machine-readable information that describes the characteristics of the content) must be distributed to a receiver first before the content can be replicated. The content metadata helps to define what content to retrieve, how content is retrieved, how recently the content has been updated, how the content is to be prepositioned (for example, expiration time), and so forth. The metadata is always distributed using unicast. The content can also be replicated using unicast.

Use the distribution refresh object object_url command to reissue a request for unicast distribution of the specified object. This command lets you obtain a new copy of an object if there is a corrupted copy on the SE. After you enter this command, if the distribution is unicast, the unicast receiver reissues the request to its forwarder SE. The old content on the SE is removed and a new copy is replicated.

NACK Interval Multiplier

To identify missing content and trigger a resend of a file, receiver SEs send a negative acknowledgement

(NACK) message to the sender SE. NACK messages generated by many receiver SEs could generate more traffic than the sender can handle. You can adjust the average interval between NACKs by configuring a NACK interval multiplier for an individual receiver SE. This value (an integer between 0.1 to 10) adjusts the default average NACK interval (the default is 20 minutes) by the value configured as the interval multiplier. For example, if you set the NACK interval multiplier to 3, the interval between

NACKs becomes 20 minutes x 3, or 60 minutes. This adjustment can be made as needed by choosing

Devices > Devices > Prepositioning > Distribution in the CDSM GUI. distribution primary-ip-fallback Command

When downstream receiver SEs at the edge of the network try to access a forwarder SE that is inside a

NAT firewall, those receiver SEs that are inside the same NAT use one IP address (called the inside local

IP address ) to access the forwarder, but other receiver SEs that are outside the NAT need to use a

2-164

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands distribution different forwarder’s IP address (called the inside global IP address or NAT address ) to access the forwarder. A forwarder SE registers the IP address configured on its primary interface with the CDSM, and the CDSM uses the primary IP address for communication with devices in the VDS-IS network. If the registered primary IP address is the inside local IP address and the forwarder is behind a NAT firewall, a receiver that is not inside the same NAT as the forwarder cannot contact it without special configuration. All other receivers inside the NAT use the inside local IP address to contact the forwarder that resides inside the NAT.

VDS-IS supports NAT for unicast distribution (see the “NAT Firewall” section on page 2-165 for more

information). When the receiver SE polls its forwarder from an upstream location for the content metadata or content, the receiver first connects to the forwarder using the forwarder’s primary IP address. If it fails and the NAT address of the forwarder has been configured, then the unicast receiver tries to poll the forwarder using the forwarder’s NAT address. If the receiver polls the forwarder successfully using the NAT address, the receiver continues to use the forwarder’s NAT address during the subsequent polling intervals with the same forwarder. The unicast receiver retries to connect to the forwarder using the forwarder’s primary IP address only after one hour. Even if the unicast receiver is able to poll the forwarder using the forwarder’s primary IP address, it would take one hour for the receiver to fall back to the forwarder's primary IP address automatically. You can use the distribution primary-ip-fallback command to enable the receiver that is using the NAT address of the forwarder to fall back to the primary IP address immediately, if you are certain that the forwarder’s primary IP address is working.

NAT Firewall

NAT enables private IP internetworks that use nonregistered IP addresses to connect to the Internet. NAT is configured on the firewall at the border of a stub domain (referred to as the inside network) and a public network such as the Internet (referred to as the outside network). NAT translates the internal local addresses to globally unique IP addresses before sending packets to the outside network. You can configure NAT to advertise only one address for the entire network to the outside world. This configuration provides additional security, effectively hiding the entire internal network from the world behind that address. NAT has the dual functionality of security and address conservation and is typically implemented in remote access environments.

In the inside network’s domain, hosts have addresses in the one address space. While on the outside, they appear to have addresses in another address space when NAT is configured. The first address space is referred to as the local address space while the second is referred to as the global address space.

Hosts in outside networks can be subject to translation and can have local and global addresses.

NAT uses the following definitions:

Inside local address—The IP address that is assigned to a host on the inside network. The address is probably not a legitimate IP address assigned by the Network Information Center (NIC) or service provider.

Inside global address—A legitimate IP address (assigned by the NIC or service provider) that represents one or more inside local IP addresses to the outside world.

Outside local address—The IP address of an outside host as it appears to the inside network. Not necessarily a legitimate address, it was allocated from an address space routable on the inside.

Outside global address—The IP address assigned to a host on the outside network by the host’s owner. The address was allocated from a globally routable address or network space.

Multicasting Content

Use the distribution multicast command to resend or stop metadata transfer. It is important to note that content metadata must be distributed to a receiver before the content itself can be replicated via either multicast or unicast. The meta data is sent to receiver only by unicast. Content metadata specifies what

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-165

distribution

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands content to distribute, how the content will be distributed, how the content has been updated, how the content is to be pre-positioned. A multicast receiver rejects a multicast sender’s advertisement of a file if the proper content metadata has not arrived yet.

Multicast transmission happens on an SE if the following conditions are met:

• The SE is capable of sending multicast.

The SE belongs to a multicast-enabled delivery service.

The SE has an IP multicast address assigned to that delivery service.

Then, the multicast replicator on the SE multicasts out every file of that delivery service to the assigned addresses.

Command Description clear Clears the HTTP object cache, the hardware interface, statistics, archive working transaction logs, and other settings.

show distribution show statistics distribution

Displays the distribution information for a specified delivery service.

Displays the simplified statistics for content distribution components.

2-166

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands dnslookup

dnslookup

To resolve a host or domain name to an IP address, use the dnslookup command in EXEC configuration mode.

dnslookup line

Syntax Description line Domain name of host on the network.

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The dnslookup command accepts IPv6 address. If an IPv6 address is specified in the dnslookup command, the server replies to a query including the IPv6 address and the IPv6 address displays in the output of the and tcpdump and netstat commands and all logs.

Examples The following examples show that the dnslookup command is used to resolve the hostname myhost to

IP address 172.31.69.11, cisco.com

to IP address 192.168.219.25, and an IP address used as a hostname to 10.0.11.0:

ServiceEngine# dnslookup myhost official hostname: myhost.cisco.com

address: 172.31.69.11

ServiceEngine# dnslookup cisco.com

official hostname: cisco.com

address: 192.168.219.25

ServiceEngine# dnslookup 10.0.11.0

official hostname: 10.0.11.0

address: 10.0.11.0

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-167

domain

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

domain

Syntax Description

To set the domain ID for the SRP, use the domain SRP configuration command. To remove a domain

ID, use the no or default form of the command. domain [ id ]

[ no | default ] domain [ id ] id (Optional) A positive 32-bit integer for the domain.

Command Default If the no domain command is used, the domain ID is 0.

Command Modes SRP configuration (config-srp) mode.

Usage Guidelines This command is used to set the domain ID for an SRP. All Proximity Engines running SRP routing with the same domain ID form a single network if the nodes are found through a bootstrap node. By changing a Proximity Engine’s domain, the Proximity Engine leaves its current network.

The no and default forms of the command replace current domain ID with the default domain ID, which is 0.

Examples The following example shows how to configure a domain ID with domain .

ServiceRouter# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

ServiceRouter(config)# router srp

ServiceRouter(config-srp)# domain 100

ServiceRouter(config-srp)# end

ServiceRouter#

The following example illustrates how show srp process command displays the configured domain ID.

ServiceRouter# show srp process

Process:

Domain: 100

Node Id: 2a2db308fd3dc172940a7902a4db7c16c98c3a32e1b048005bce1e832b6d056f

Host name: sn-sj88

Port: 9000

Interfaces running SRP:

*GigabitEthernet 1/0, GigabitEthernet 2/0, GigabitEthernet 3/0

Related Commands Command Description bootstrap-node Configures a bootstrap node IP address.

router srp show srp process

Enters SRP configuration mode.

Displays the basic configurations for SRP.

2-168

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

enable

enable

To access privileged commands in EXEC configuration modes, use the enable command in EXEC configuration mode.

enable

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines To access privileged EXEC configuration mode from EXEC configuration mode, use the enable command. The disable command takes you from privileged EXEC configuration mode to user EXEC configuration mode.

Examples The following example shows how to access privileged EXEC configuration mode:

ServiceEngine> enable

ServiceEngine#

Command Description disable Turns off the privileged EXEC commands.

exit Exits from interface, Global configuration, or privileged

EXEC configuration modes.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-169

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands enable password

enable password

To change the enable password, which is used if aaa authentication enable enable is configured, use the enable password command in Global configuration mode.

enable password

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Defaults None

Command Modes Global configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The enable password changes the enable password, which is used if aaa authentication enable enable is configured.

Examples The following example shows how to access privileged EXEC configuration mode:

ServiceEngine> enable password

ServiceEngine#

Command Description aaa authentication enable enable Enables authentication.

2-170

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

end

To exit Global configuration mode, use the end command in Global configuration mode.

end

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

end

Defaults None

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines Use the end command to exit Global configuration mode after completing any changes to the running configuration. To save new configurations to NVRAM, use the write command.

In addition, you can press Ctrl-Z to exit Global configuration mode.

Examples The following example shows how to exit Global configuration mode:

ServiceEngine(config)# end

ServiceEngine#

Related

Command Description exit Exits from interface, Global configuration, or privileged

EXEC configuration modes.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-171

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands exec-timeout

exec-timeout

To configure the length of time that an inactive Telnet or Secure Shell (SSH) session remains open, use the exec-timeout command in Global configuration mode. To revert to the default value, use the no form of this command.

exec-timeout timeout no exec-timeout

Syntax Description timeout Timeout in minutes. The range is from 0–44640. The default is 15.

Defaults The default is 15 minutes.

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines A Telnet or SSH session with the SE can remain open and inactive for the interval of time specified by the exec-timeout command. When the exec-timeout interval elapses, the SE automatically closes the

Telnet or SSH session.

Configuring a timeout interval of 0 minutes by entering the exec-timeout 0 command is equivalent to disabling the session-timeout feature.

Examples The following example shows how to configure a timeout of 100 minutes:

ServiceEngine(config)# exec-timeout 100

The following example negates the configured timeout of 100 minutes and reverts to the default value of

15 minutes:

ServiceEngine(config)# no exec-timeout

Command Description sshd telnet enable

Configures the SSH service parameters.

Enables the Telnet services.

2-172

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

exit

To access commands in EXEC configuration mode shell from the global, interface, and debug configuration command shells, use the exit command.

exit exit

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC, Global configuration (config), and interface configuration (config-if) modes.

Usage Guidelines Use the exit command in any configuration mode to return to EXEC configuration mode. Using this command is equivalent to pressing the Ctrl-Z key or entering the end command.

The exit command issued in the user-level EXEC shell terminates the console or Telnet session. You can also use the exit command to exit other configuration modes that are available from the Global configuration mode for managing specific features (see the commands marked with a footnote in

Table 2-1

).

Examples The following example shows how to exit the Global configuration mode and return to the privileged-level EXEC configuration mode:

ServiceEngine(config)# exit

ServiceEngine#

The following example shows how to exit the privileged-level EXEC configuration mode and return to the user-level EXEC configuration mode:

ServiceEngine# exit

ServiceEngine>

Command Description end Exits configuration and privileged EXEC configuration modes.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-173

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands expert-mode password

expert-mode password

To set the customer configurable password, use the expert-mode password command in Global configuration mode.

expert-mode password [ encrypted ] password

Syntax Description encrypted password

(Optional) Encrypts the password.

The encrypted password.

Defaults None

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines This is a customer configurable password for allowing to enter engineering mode for troubleshooting purposes. The function prompts the user for the current admin password to verify that the user attempting to set the expert-mode password is authorized to do so. If the user is authenticated, the user is prompted twice to enter the new expert-mode password. The new expert-mode password is encrypted prior to being persisted.

Examples The following example shows how to configure four external NAT IP addresses:

ServiceEngine(config)# expert-mode password encrypted xxxx

New Expert Mode Password: xxxx

Confirm New Expert Mode Password: xxxx

Password successfully changed

2-174

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands external-ip

external-ip

To configure up to eight external Network Address Translation (NAT) IP addresses, use the external-ip command in Global configuration mode. To remove the NAT IP addresses, use the no form of this command.

external-ip ip_addresses no external-ip ip_addresses

Syntax Description ip_addresses A maximum of eight external or NAT IP addresses can be configured.

Defaults None

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines Use this command to configure up to eight Network Address Translation IP addresses to allow the router to translate up to eight internal addresses to registered unique addresses and translate external registered addresses to addresses that are unique to the private network. If the IP address of the RTSP gateway has not been configured on the SE, then the external IP address is configured as the IP address of the RTSP gateway.

In a VDS-IS network, there are two methods for a device registered with the CDSM (SEs, SRs, or the standby CDSM) to obtain configuration information from the primary CDSM. The primary method is for the device to periodically poll the primary CDSM on port 443 to request a configuration update. You cannot configure this port number. The backup method is when the CDSM pushes configuration updates to a registered device as soon as possible by issuing a notification to the registered device on port 443.

This method allows changes to take effect in a timelier manner. You cannot configure this port number even when the backup method is being used. VDS-IS networks do not work reliably if devices registered with the CDSM are unable to poll the CDSM for configuration updates. When a receiver SE requests the content and content metadata from a forwarder SE, it contacts the forwarder SE on port 443.

When a device (SEs at the edge of the network, SRs, and primary or standby CDSMs) is inside a NAT firewall, those devices that are inside the same NAT use one IP address (the inside local IP address) to access the device and those devices that are outside the NAT use a different IP address (the NAT IP address or inside global IP address) to access the device. A centrally managed device advertises only its inside local IP address to the CDSM. All other devices inside the NAT use the inside local IP address to contact the centrally managed device that resides inside the NAT. A device that is not inside the same

NAT as the centrally managed device cannot contact it without a special configuration.

If the primary CDSM is inside a NAT, you can allow a device outside the NAT to poll it for getUpdate requests by configuring a static translation (NAT IP address or inside global IP address) for the CDSM’s inside local IP address on its NAT, and using this address, rather than the CDSM’s inside local IP address in the cdsm ip ip_address command when you register the device to the CDSM. If an SE or SR is inside a NAT and the CDSM is outside the NAT, you can allow the SE or SR to poll for getUpdate requests by configuring a static translation (NAT IP address or inside global IP address) for the SE or SR’s inside local address on its NAT.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-175

external-ip

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Note Static translation establishes a one-to-one mapping between your inside local address and an inside global address. Static translation is useful when a host on the inside must be accessible by a fixed address from the outside.

Examples The following example shows how to configure four external NAT IP addresses:

ServiceEngine(config)# external-ip 192.168.43.1 192.168.43.2 192.168.43.3 192.168.43.4

2-176

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands find-pattern

find-pattern

To search for a particular pattern in a file, use the find-pattern command in EXEC configuration mode.

find-pattern { binary filename | case { binary filename | count filename | lineno filename | match filename | nomatch filename | recursive filename } | count filename | lineno filename | match filename | nomatch filename | recursive filename }

Syntax Description binary filename case count lineno match nomatch recursive

Does not suppress the binary output.

Filename.

Matches the case-sensitive pattern.

Prints the number of matching lines.

Prints the line number with output.

Prints the matching lines.

Prints the nonmatching lines.

Searches a directory recursively.

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines Use this command to search for a particular regular expression pattern in a file.

Examples The following example shows how to search a file recursively for a case-sensitive pattern:

ServiceEngine# find-pattern case recursive admin removed_core

-rw------- 1 admin root 95600640 Oct 12 10:27 /local/local1/core_dir/c ore.2.2.1.b5.eh.2796

-rw------- 1 admin root 97054720 Jan 11 11:31 /local/local1/core_dir/c ore.cache.5.3.0.b131.cnbuild.14086

-rw------- 1 admin root 96845824 Jan 11 11:32 /local/local1/core_dir/c ore.cache.5.3.0.b131.cnbuild.14823

-rw------- 1 admin root 101580800 Jan 11 12:01 /local/local1/core_dir/ core.cache.5.3.0.b131.cnbuild.15134

-rw------- 1 admin root 96759808 Jan 11 12:59 /local/local1/core_dir/c ore.cache.5.3.0.b131.cnbuild.20016

-rw------- 1 admin root 97124352 Jan 11 13:26 /local/local1/core_dir/c ore.cache.5.3.0.b131.cnbuild.30249

-rw------- 1 admin root 98328576 Jan 11 11:27 /local/local1/core_dir/c ore.cache.5.3.0.b131.cnbuild.8095

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-177

find-pattern

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

The following example searches a file for a pattern and prints the matching lines:

ServiceEngine# find-pattern match 10 removed_core

Tue Oct 12 10:30:03 UTC 2004

-rw------- 1 admin root 95600640 Oct 12 10:27 /local/local1/core_dir/c ore.5.2.1.b5.eh.2796

-rw------- 1 admin root 101580800 Jan 11 12:01 /local/local1/core_dir/ core.cache.5.3.0.b131.cnbuild.15134

The following example searches a file for a pattern and prints the number of matching lines:

ServiceEngine# find-pattern count 10 removed_core

3

Related

Command Description cd dir lls ls

Changes the directory.

Displays the list of files in a directory.

Displays the files in a long list format.

Lists the files and subdirectories in a directory.

2-178

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands flash-media-streaming

flash-media-streaming

To enable and configure Flash Media Streaming, use the flash-media-streaming command in Global configuration mode. To disable Flash Media Streaming, use the no form of this command.

On the SE: flash-media-streaming { admin-api [ ip { allow ip_address }] | application-virtual-path vod map mapping string | enable | ignore-query-string enable | max-bandwidth number | max-sessions number | monitoring enable | rollover-threshold number }} no flash-media-streaming { admin-api [ ip { allow ip address }] | application-virtual-path vod map mapping_string | enable | ignore-query-string enable | max-bandwidth number | max-sessions number | monitoring enable | rollover-threshold number }}

On the SR: flash-media-streaming { application-virtual-path vod map mapping string | enable | monitoring enable } no flash-media-streaming { application-virtual-path vod map mapping string | enable | monitoring enable }

Syntax Description admin-api ip allow ip_address application-virtualpath vod map mapping_string enable ignore-query-string enable max-bandwidth number max-sessions number monitoring enable rollover-threshold number

Allows accessing admin API from the IP.

Allows an IP Address.

Allows an IP Address.

IP Address or hostname (input maximum 32 of partial or full IP address or hostname, such as 10.60, 10.60.1.133, or foo.com).

Configures the virtual-path for applications.

Configures the virtual-path for VOD applications.

Maps to a directory.

Mapping string.

Enables Flash Media Streaming.

Configures Flash Media Streaming to ignore query strings in requests.

Enables ignoring query string in requests.

Configures max bandwidth for Flash Media Streaming.

Max bandwidth number Kbps. The range is from 1000 to 8000000).

Configures maximum sessions for Flash Media Streaming.

Maximum sessions number. The range is from 1 to 15000.

Configures Flash Media Streaming monitoring.

Enables monitoring.

Configures threshold for Flash Media Streaming to rollover.

The threshold number. The range is from 0 to 10000. 0 means turn off rollover.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-179

flash-media-streaming

Defaults

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

The ignore- query-string is disabled.

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines Flash Media Streaming needs an application name (vod, live or dvrcast) as part of a client’s request. In the case of a VOD application, the origin server should have a first level directory of vod for dynamic ingestion. For example, in a Flash Media Streaming VOD cache miss case, the request from the client should be rtmp://cdnsecure.bbc.co.uk/vod/iplayerstreaming/secure_auth/scifi.flv, and the origin server should have http://cdnsecure.bbc.co.uk/vod/iplayerstreaming/secure_auth/scifi.flv. However, this restricts customer deployments when vod is the only folder name they can use. Therefore, an application-virtual-path vod command is available so customers can map to whichever folder they want on the origin server.

For VOD streams, all RTMP calls in the SWF file must be in the following format: rtmp://rfqdn/vod/path/foo.flv

In this format, rfqdn is the routing domain name of the Service Router, vod is the required directory, and path is the directory path to the content file that conforms to the standard URL specification.

If you are unable to store the VOD content in the required “vod” directory on your origin server, you can create a VOD virtual path for all RTMP requests. All client requests for RTMPcalls still use the rtmp://rfqdn/vod/path/foo.flv format for VOD streams, but the SE replaces the “vod” directory with the string specified in the flash-media-streaming application-virtual-path vod map command.

Use the flash-media-streaming application-virtual-path vod map < mapping_string > command on each SE participating in a Flash Media Streaming delivery service. The mapping string variable accepts all alpha-numeric characters and the slash (/) character, and can be from 1 to 128 characters. For example, to map the “vod” directory to “media” for the go-tv-stream.com origin server, use the flash-media-streaming application-virtual-path vod map media command. If comedy.flv is the content being requested, the RTMP call in the SWF file would be rtmp://go-tv-stream.com/vod/ comedy.flv. The SE would replace the “vod” directory and request http://go-tv-stream.com/media/ comedy.flv from the upstream SE or origin server. If just the slash (/) character is used to replace the

“vod” directory, the SE request would be http://go-tv-stream.com/comedy.flv.

Ignore Query String

Previously, if an RTMP request had a query string in the URL for VOD, the Web Engine could decide whether or not to cache the content based on the Web Engine configuration. However, if the query string in the RTMP URL included the end user and not the stream name, every request would have a different

URL because every user has a different query string. This leads to the same content getting cached multiple times.

The flash-media-streaming ignore-query-string enable command tells Flash Media Streaming to remove the query string before forwarding the request to the Web Engine in the case of VOD, or before forwarding the request to the forwarder SE in the case of live streaming.

If URL signature verification is required, the sign verification is performed before the query string check is invoked. The URL signing and validation, which adds its own query string to the URL, continues to work independently of this enhancement.

2-180

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands flash-media-streaming

When the flash-media-streaming ignore-query-string enable command is entered, for every request in which the query string has been ignored, a message is written to the FMS error log, and the Query

String Bypassed counter is incremented in the output of the show statistics flash-media-streaming command. The FMS access log on the edge SE contains the original URL before the query string was removed.

The flash-media-streaming ignore-query-string enable command affects every VOD and live streaming request and is not applicable to proxy-style requests.

Examples The following example shows how to map a vod folder:

ServiceEngine(config)# flash-media-streaming application-virtual-path vod map media

This means mapping vod folder to media. When client request cache-miss case: rtmp://Tem4.se.cdsfms.com/vod/foo.flv is mapped to rtmp://Temp4.se.cdsfms.com/media/foo.flv

ServiceEngine(config)# flash-media-streaming application-virtual-path vod map /

This means mapping vod folder to /.

When client request cache-miss case: rtmp://Tem4.se.cdsfms.com/vod/abc/foo.flv is mapped to rtmp://Temp4.se.cdsfms.com/abc/foo.flv

When client request cache-miss case: rtmp://Tem4.se.cdsfms.com/vod/bar/foo.flv is mapped to rtmp://Temp4.se.cdsfms.com/bar/foo.flv.

Related Commands

Command Description show flash-media-streaming Displays the Flash Media Streaming information.

show statistics flash-media-streaming

Displays the statistics for Flash Media Streaming.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-181

flooding

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

flooding

Syntax Description

To set the flooding threshold for SRP multicast, use the flooding threshold SRP configuration command. To restore the default flooding threshold, use the no or default form of the command. flooding threshold value

[ no | default ] flooding threshold value threshold value

Configures the flooding threshold.

A positive integer for the flooding threshold.

Command Default If no flooding command is issued, the default threshold is 50.

Command Modes SRP configuration (config-srp) mode.

Usage Guidelines This command is used to set the flooding threshold for SRP multicasting.

SRP protocol uses flooding to send multicast messages for a multicast group if the number of subscribers of the group is equal or more than the value specified in flooding . An effective threshold value may improve protocol message overhead. The threshold value depends on the number of nodes in your DHT network. In general, the threshold value should be greater than half and smaller than 3/4 of the total number of DHT nodes in the network.

The no or default forms of the command replace the current flooding threshold value with the default flooding threshold value (50).

Examples The following example shows how use the flooding command to set a flooding threshold value of 45.

ServiceRouter(config)# router srp

ServiceRouter(config-srp)# flooding threshold 45

ServiceRouter(config-srp)# end

ServiceRouter#

Related Commands Command Description router srp Enters SRP configuration mode.

2-182

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands geo-location-server

geo-location-server

To redirect requests to different Content Delivery Networks based on the geographic location of the client, use the geo-location-server command in Global configuration mode. To cancel the request, use the no form of this command.

geo-location-server { primary ip addr port num [ service-name name ] [ retry num ] [ timeout num

] | secondary ip addr port num [ service-name name ] [ retry num ] [ timeout num ] } | server-type { maxmind-restful-hosted [ http | https ] service name | license-key key | quova-restful-gds | quova-restful-hosted [ http [ api-key key | shared-secret secret ] ] }} no geo-location-server { primary ip addr port num [ service-name name ] [ retry num ] [ timeout num ] | secondary ip addr port num [ service-name name ] [ retry num ] [ timeout num ] } | server-type { maxmind-restful-hosted [ http | https ] service name | license-key key | quova-restful-gds | quova-restful-hosted [ http [ api-key key | shared-secret secret ] ] }}

Syntax Description primary secondary ip_address port_num server-type maxmind-restful-hosted http https quova-restful-gds quova-restful-hosted api-key key

Configures the primary geo location server IP address and port.

Configure secondary geo location server IP address and port.

IP address of the geo location server.

Port number of the geo location server.

Configure geo location server type

Configure Maxmind hosted server

Configure HTTP server

Configure HTTPS server

Configure Quova GDS server

Configure Quova hosted server

Configure API key

API key (256 characters maximum)

Defaults None

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines Use the geo-location-server command to redirect requests to different CDNs based on the geographic location of the client. You can configure requests from different countries to be redirected to different third party services.

Note A Quova server is mandatory to support this feature.

Examples The following example shows how to configure a primary geo-location-server:

ServiceRouter# geo-location-server primary 171.71.51.140 7000

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-183

geo-location-server

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Related Commands Command cdn-select show cdn-select show statistics cdn-select

Description

Enables the CDN Selector for third-party service selection.

Displays the status of the CDN Selector.

Displays the statistics for the CDN Selector.

2-184

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

gulp

gulp

To capture lossless gigabit packets and write them to disk, use the gulp command in EXEC configuration mode. gulp line line (Optional) Specifies gulp options, enter -h to get help.

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The gulp utility captures lossless gigabit packets and writes them to disk, as well as captures packets remotely. The gulp utility has the ability to read directly from the network.

To view the list of options, enter gulp --h .

ServiceEngine# gulp --help

Usage: /ruby/bin/gulp [--help | options]

--help prints this usage summary

supported options include:

-d decapsulate Cisco ERSPAN GRE packets (sets -f value)

-f "..." specify a pcap filter - see manpage and -d

-i eth#|- specify ethernet capture interface or '-' for stdin

-s # specify packet capture "snapshot" length limit

-r # specify ring buffer size in megabytes (1-1024)

-c just buffer stdin to stdout (works with arbitrary data)

-x request exclusive lock (to be the only instance running)

-X run even when locking would forbid it

-v print program version and exit

-Vx...x display packet loss and buffer use - see manpage

-p # specify full/empty polling interval in microseconds

-q suppress buffer full warnings

-z # specify write blocksize (power of 2, default 65536) for long-term capture

-o dir redirect pcap output to a collection of files in dir

-C # limit each pcap file in -o dir to # times the (-r #) size

-W # overwrite pcap files in -o dir rather than start #+1

-B check if select(2) would ever have blocked on write

-Y avoid writes which would block

Table 2-6

lists the gulp options and provides a description of each.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-185

gulp

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-6 gulp Options

Option

-d

-f

-i

-r

-c

-s

-x eth#

#

#

Description

Decapsulates packets from a Cisco Encapsulated Remote SPAN Port (ERSPAN). Sets the pcap filter expression to “proto gre” and strips off Cisco GRE headers (50 bytes) from the packets captured. (If used with -f option note that arguments are processed left to right).

Specify a pcap filter expression. This may be useful to select one from many GRE streams if using -d, or if not using -d, because filtering out packets in the kernel is more efficient than passing them first through the gulp utility and then filtering them out.

Specify the network interface to read from. The default is eth1 or the value of the environment variable $CAP_IFACE, if present. Specifying a hyphen (-) as the interface reads a pcap file from the standard input instead. (If you forget the -d option during a live capture, you can decapsulate offline this way.)

Specify a ring buffer size (in megabytes). Values from 1–1024 are permitted. The default is 100. If possible, the ring buffer is locked into RAM.

Copy and buffer bytes from stdin to stdout—do not read packets from the network and do not assume anything about the format of the data. This may be useful to improve the real-time performance of another application.

Specify packet capture snapshot length. By default, complete packets are captured. For efficiency, captured packets can be truncated to a given length during the capture process, which reduces capture overhead and pcap file sizes. (If used with the -d option, it specifies the length after decapsulation.)

Use file locking to request (by way of exclusive lock) that this is the only instance of the gulp utility running. If other instances are already running, they must be stopped before the gulp utility can start with this option.

-X Override an exclusive lock (-x option) and run anyway. An instance of gulp started this way holds a shared lock if no exclusive locks were broken; otherwise, it holds no locks at all (causing a subsequent attempt to get an exclusive lock to succeed).

Print program version and exit.

-v

-V xxxxxxxx If the string of Xs is wide enough (10 or more), it is overwritten twice per second with a brief capture status update consisting of one digit followed by two percentages. The digit is the number of decimal digits in the actual count of lost packets (0 indicates no drops). The two percentages are the current and maximum ring buffer utilization. The updated argument string can be seen with the ps -x option (or equivalent).

-p

-q

-z

#

#

If the string of Xs is too short to hold the information above, a more verbose status line is written, twice per second, to standard error instead. The first method is probably more useful to occasionally check on long captures and the second is more convenient while experimenting and setting up a capture.

Specify the thread polling interval (in microseconds). The reader and writer threads poll at this interval when the ring buffer is full or empty. Polling (even frequently) on modern hardware consumes immeasurably few resources. The default interval is 1000.

Suppress warnings about the ring buffer being full. If input is not from a live capture, no data is lost when the ring buffer fills so the warning can be safely suppressed. If stdin is actually a file, warning suppression happens automatically.

Specify output write block size. Any power of two between 4096 and 65536. The default is 65536.

2-186

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-6

Option

-o dir

-C #

-W #

-B

-Y gulp gulp Options (continued)

Description

Redirects pcap output into a collection of files in the specified directory. Pcap files are named pcap###, where ### starts at 000 and increments. The directory must exist and be writable by the user running the gulp utility.

When using the -o option, start a new pcap file when the old one reaches about # times the size of the ring buffer. The default value is 10 and the default ring buffer size is

100MB; so by default, pcap files grow to about 1000 MB before a new one is started.

Since some programs read an entire pcap file into memory when using it, splitting the output into chunks can be helpful.

Specifies a maximum number of pcap files to create before overwriting them. The default is to never overwrite them. This option allows capturing to occur indefinitely with finite disk space.

This option enables the code to check before each write whether the write would block.

When the gulp utility exits, it announces whether any writes would have been blocked.

This option writes which ones would be blocked, but are deferred until they are not blocked.

Examples The following example shows how to get a basic capture on eth1 with a pcap filter:

ServiceEngine# gulp -i eth1 -f "..." > pcapfile

The ellipsis (...) refers to the Berkeley Packet Filter (pcap) expressions, such as “host foo.”

The following example shows how to get a capture of the 10 most recent files of a 200 MB ring buffer to 1000 MB files:

ServiceEngine# gulp -i eth1 -r 200 -C 10 -W 10 -o pcapdir

Command Description netmon Displays the transmit and receive activity on an interface.

netstatr ss tcpmon

Displays the rate of change of netstat statistics.

Dumps socket statistics.

Searches all TCP connections.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-187

help

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

help

To obtain online help for the command-line interface, use the help command in EXEC and Global configuration modes. help

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration and Global configuration (config) modes.

Usage Guidelines You can get help at any point in a command by entering a question mark ( ?) . If nothing matches, the help list is empty, and you must back up until entering a ?

shows the available options.

Two styles of help are provided:

• Full help is available when you are ready to enter a command argument (for example, show ?

). In addition, full help describes each possible argument.

• Partial help is provided when you enter an abbreviated command and you want to know what arguments match the input (for example, show stat?

).

Examples The following example shows the output of the help command in EXEC configuration mode:

ServiceEngine# help

Help may be requested at any point in a command by entering a question mark '?'. If nothing matches, the help list will be empty and you must backup until entering a '?' shows the available options.

Two styles of help are provided:

1. Full help is available when you are ready to enter a command argument (e.g. 'show ?') and describes each possible argument.

2. Partial help is provided when an abbreviated argument is entered and you want to know what arguments match the input (e.g. 'show stat?'.)

2-188

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

hostname

hostname

To configure the device’s network hostname, use the hostname command in Global configuration mode.

To reset the hostname to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

hostname name no hostname

Syntax Description name New hostname for the device; the name is case sensitive. The name may be from 1 to 30 alphanumeric characters.

Defaults The default hostname is the SE model number.

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines Use this command to configure the hostname for the SE. The hostname is used for the command prompts and default configuration filenames. This name is also used by content routing and conforms to the following rules:

• It can use only alphanumeric characters and hyphens (-).

Maximum length is 30 characters.

Following characters are considered invalid and cannot be used when naming a device: @, # , $,%,

^, &, *, (), | , \””/, <>.

Examples The following example changes the hostname to Sandbox:

ServiceEngine(config)# hostname Sandbox

Sandbox(config)#

The following example removes the hostname:

ServiceEngine(config)# no hostname

NO-HOSTNAME(config)#

Related Commands Command Description dnslookup Resolves a host or domain name to an IP address.

ip show hosts

Configures the IP.

Displays the IP domain name, name servers, IP addresses, and host table.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-189

install

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

install

Syntax Description

To install the VDS-IS software image, use the install command in EXEC configuration mode.

install imagefile_name imagefile_name Name of the .bin file that you want to install.

Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The install command loads the system image into flash memory and the disk.

To install a system image, copy the image file to the sysfs directory local1 or local2. Before entering the install command, change the present working directory to the directory where the system image resides.

When the install command is executed, the image file is expanded. The expanded files overwrite the existing files in the SE. The newly installed version takes effect after the system image is reloaded.

Note The install command does not accept .pax files. Files should be of the .bin type (for example,

CDS-2.2.1.7-K9.bin). Also, if the release being installed does not require a new system image, then it may not be necessary to write to flash memory. If the newer version has changes that require a new system image to be installed, then the install command may result in a write to flash memory.

Examples The following example shows how to install a .bin file on the SE:

ServiceEngine# install CDS-2.2.1.7-K9.bin

Command Description copy ftp install Installs an image file from an FTP server onto a local device.

copy http install reload

Installs an image file from an HTTP server onto a local device.

Halts a device and performs a cold restart.

2-190

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

interface

interface

To configure a Gigabit Ethernet or port channel interface, use the interface command in Global configuration mode. To disable selected options, restore default values, or enable a shutdown interface, use the no form of this command. interface { GigabitEthernet slot/port_num [ autosense | bandwidth { 10 | 100 | 1000 } | channel-group group_interface | description line | full-duplex | half-duplex | ip

{ access-group { access_list_num { in | out } | name } | address { ip_address_netmask | range low_num high_num netmask } | ipv6 { access-group { access_list_num { in | out }| access_list_name { in | out }} | address { range low_num high_num netmask { prefix | subnet_mask } | ip_addr/mask } | mtu mtu_size | shutdown | standby num [ priority num ] | tx-queue-limit queue_length ] | PortChannel num [ autosense | bandwidth { 10 | 100 | 1000 } | description line | full-duplex | half-duplex | ip line | ipv6 line | lacp | shutdown | standby num

[ priority num] | Standby group_number [ description line | errors error_num | ip address

{ ip_address_netmask | range low_num high_num netmask }| ipv6 address { range low_num high_num netmask { prefix | subnet_mask } | ip_addr/mask } | shutdown ] | TenGigabitEthernet slot/port_num [ autosense | bandwidth { 10 | 100 | 1000 } channel-group group_interface | description line | full-duplex | half-duplex | ip { access-group { access_list_num { in | out } | name } | address { ip_address_netmask | range low_num high_num netmask } | ipv6

{ acccess-group { access_list_num { in | out }| access_list_name { in | out }} | address { range low_num high_num netmask { prefix | subnet_mask } | ip_addr/mask } | mtu mtu_size | shutdown

| standby num [ priority num ] | tx-queue-limit queue_length ] no interface { GigabitEthernet slot/port_num [ autosense | bandwidth { 10 | 100 | 1000 } | channel-group group_interface | description line | full-duplex | half-duplex | ip

{ access-group { access_list_num { in | out } | name } | address { ip_address_netmask | range low_num high_num netmask } | ipv6 { access-group { access_list_num { in | out }| access_list_name { in | out }} | address { range low_num high_num netmask { prefix | subnet_mask } | ip_addr/mask } | mtu mtu_size | shutdown | standby num [ priority num ] | tx-queue-limit queue_length ] | PortChannel num [ autosense | bandwidth { 10 | 100 | 1000 } | description line | full-duplex | half-duplex | ip line | ipv6 line | lacp | shutdown | standby num

[ priority num] | Standby group_number [ description line | errors error_num | ip address

{ ip_address_netmask | range low_num high_num netmask }| ipv6 address { range low_num high_num netmask { prefix | subnet_mask } | ip_addr/mask } | shutdown ] | TenGigabitEthernet slot/port_num [ autosense | bandwidth { 10 | 100 | 1000 } channel-group group_interface | description line | full-duplex | half-duplex | ip { access-group { access_list_num { in | out } | name } | address { ip_address_netmask | range low_num high_num netmask } | ipv6

{ acccess-group { access_list_num { in | out }| access_list_name { in | out }} | address { range low_num high_num netmask { prefix | subnet_mask } | ip_addr/mask } | mtu mtu_size | shutdown

| standby num [ priority num ] | tx-queue-limit queue_length ]

Syntax Description GigabitEthernet slot / port_num autosense bandwidth

10

100

Selects a Gigabit Ethernet interface to configure.

Slot and port number for the selected interface. The slot range is from 1 to

14; the port range is from 0 to 0. The slot number and port number are separated with a forward slash character (/).

(Optional) Specifies interface autosense.

(Optional) Configures the interface bandwidth.

Specifies the interface bandwidth as 10 Mbits per second.

Specifies the interface bandwidth as 100 Mbits per second.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-191

interface

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

1000 channel-group group_interface description line full-duplex half-duplex ip access-group acccess_list_num in out name address ip_address netmask range low_num high_num netmask ipv6 access-group ip_access_list in out access-list-name address range low-num high-num prefix

Specifies the interface bandwidth as 1000 Mbits per second.

(Optional) Configures the EtherChannel group.

EtherChannel group to which the interface belongs. The range is 1 to 4.

(Optional) Specifies interface specific description.

Text describing this interface

(Optional) Specifies full-duplex.

(Optional) Specifies half-duplex.

(Optional) Interface Internet Protocol configuration commands.

Specifies access control for packets.

IP access list (standard or extended).

Specifies inbound packets.

Specifies outbound packets.

Specifies the access-list name.

Sets the IP address of the interface.

IP address of the interface

Netmask of the interface.

IP address range.

IP address low range of the interface.

IP address low range of the interface.

Netmask of the interface.

(Optional) Interface IPv6 configuration commands.

Specifies access control for packets.

IP access list (standard or extended).

Inbound packets.

Outbound packets.

Specifies an access list name.

Specifies the IPv6 address of the interface.

Specifies the IPv6 address range.

Specifies the IPv6 address low range of the interface.

Specifies the IPv6 address high range of the interface.

Interface prefix. The range is from 1 to 128.

ip_addr/netmask mtu mtu_size shutdown

IPv6 address/netmask of the interface in format X:X:X:X::X/<0-128>.

Sets the interface Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU).

MTU size in bytes. The range is 576 to 9216.

(Optional) Shuts down the specific portchannel interface.

standby interface_group_num

(Optional) Standby interface configuration commands.

Group number for the selected interface. The range is from 1 to 4.

priority Sets the priority of the interface. Default value is 100.

standby_group_priority Set the priority of the interface for the standby group. The range is from 0 to 4294967295.

tx-queue-limit Sets the interface maximum Transmission Queue Length.

2-192

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands interface queue_length

PortChannel num lacp

Standby standby_group_num description line errors error_num

Sets the limit on the transmission queue length. The range is from 1000 to

80000.

Selects the Ethernet Channel of interfaces to be configured.

Sets the Ethernet Channel interface number. The range is from 1 to 4.

Specifies Link Aggregation Control Protocol.

Specifies a standby group number.

Standby group number. The range is from 1 to 4.

(Optional) Standby interface description.

Text describing this interface.

Sets the maximum number of errors allowed on this interface.

Maximum number of errors allowed on this interface for the standby group. The range is from 1 to 2147483647.

ip address

Sets the IP address of the standby group.

Sets the IP address of the interface.

standby_group_ip_addr IP address of the standby group.

standby_group_ netmask range

Netmask of the standby group.

Sets the IP address range of the standby group.

low_range high_range interface_netmask

TenGigabitEthernet

IP address low range of an interface.

IP address high range of an interface.

Netmask of the interface.

Selects a ten Gigabit Ethernet interface to configure.

Defaults Standby priority: 100.

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines String to Be Set as Cookie Port Channel (EtherChannel) Interface

EtherChannel for VDS-IS supports the grouping of up to four same- network interfaces into one virtual interface. This grouping allows the setting or removing of a virtual interface that consists of two Gigabit

Ethernet interfaces. EtherChannel also provides interoperability with Cisco routers, switches, and other networking devices or hosts supporting EtherChannel, load balancing, and automatic failure detection and recovery based on current link status of each interface.

You can use the Gigabit Ethernet ports to form an EtherChannel. A physical interface can be added to an EtherChannel subject to the device configuration.

Configuring Multiple IP Addresses

The Multiple Logical IP Addresses feature supports up to 24 unique IP addresses within the same subnet for the same interface.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-193

interface

Examples

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

When you configure multiple IP addresses on an SE using either the range option or using individual commands, the show running-config output displays all the IP addresses individually. The netmask value is unique for each interface, so under a single interface you cannot have multiple IP addresses with different netmask values.

Configuring IPv6

When configuring an IPv6 address on the interface, if < ipv6addr > is specified, it must be in the form of hexadecimal using16-bit values between colons (X:X:X:X::X). Optionally, a double colon may be used when consecutive 16-bit values are denoted as zero.

To configure the IPv6 access list on an interface, first configure the Access List using the access-list enable command; < in | out > means apply for inbound or outbound packets.

interface {< GigabitEthernet | Portchannel | Standby | TenGigabitEthernet >} ipv6 access-group < access_ list_number | access_list_name > < in | out >

The following example shows how to create an EtherChannel. The port channel is port channel 2 and is assigned an IP address of 10.10.10.10 and a netmask of 255.0.0.0:

ServiceEngine# configure

ServiceEngine(config)# interface PortChannel 2

ServiceEngine(config-if)# exit

The following example how to remove an EtherChannel:

ServiceEngine(config)# interface PortChannel 2

ServiceEngine(config-if)# exit

ServiceEngine(config)# no interface PortChannel 2

The following example shows a sample output of the show running-config command in EXEC configuration mode:

.

.

ServiceEngine# show running-config

.

interface GigabitEthernet 0/0 description This is an interface to the WAN ip address 192.168.1.200 255.255.255.0

bandwidth 100 exit

.

.

The following example shows the sample output of the show interface command:

ServiceEngine# show interface GigabitEthernet 1/0

Description: This is the interface to the lab type: Ethernet

The following example shows how to create standby groups on SEs:

ServiceEngine(config)# interface GigabitEthernet 1/0 standby 2 priority 300

ServiceEngine(config)# interface GigabitEthernet 2/0 standby 2 priority 200

ServiceEngine(config)# interface GigabitEthernet 3/0 standby 2 priority 100

ServiceEngine(config)# interface standby 2 errors 10000

The following example shows how to configure multiple IP addresses using a range command:

ServiceEngine(config)# interface PortChannel 2

ServiceEngine(config-if)# ip address range 2.2.2.3 2.2.2.6 255.255.255.0

2-194

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands interface

The following example shows a sample output of the show running-config command in EXEC configuration mode after configuring multiple IP addresses:

ServiceEngine# show running-config

.

interface PortChannel 4

ip address 2.2.2.3 255.255.255.0

ip address 2.2.2.4 255.255.255.0

ip address 2.2.2.5 255.255.255.0

ip address 2.2.2.6 255.255.255.0

exit

Related Commands Command Description show interface Displays the hardware interface information.

show running-config show startup-config

Displays the current operating configuration.

Displays the startup configuration.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-195

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands ip (Global configuration)

ip (Global configuration)

To change initial network device configuration settings, use the ip command in Global configuration mode. To delete or disable these settings, use the no form of this command.

ip { access-list (see

“ip access-list” section on page 205 ) |

default-gateway ip_address [ gateway_ip_addr ] | domain-name name1 name2 name3 | name-server ip_addresses | path-mtu-discovery enable

| route dest_IP_addr dest_netmask default_gateway [ interface source_IP_addr ]} no ip { access-list | default-gateway ip_address [ gateway_ip_addr ] | domain-name name1 name2 name3 | name-server ip_addresses | path-mtu-discovery enable | route dest_IP_addr dest_netmask default_gateway [ interface source_IP_addr ]}

Syntax Description access-list default-gateway ip_address gateway_ip_addr domain-name name1 through name3 name-server ip_addresses path-mtu-discovery enable route dest_IP_addr dest_netmask default_gateway interface source_IP_addr

Specifies the access list.

Specifies the default gateway (if not routing IP).

IP address of the default gateway.

(Optional) Gateway IP address (maximum of 14).

Specifies domain names.

Domain name (up to three can be specified).

Specifies the address of the name server.

IP addresses of the domain server (up to a maximum of eight).

Configures RFC 1191 Path Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) discovery.

Enables Path MTU discovery.

Specifies the net route.

Destination route address.

Netmask address.

Gateway address.

Configures source policy routing to route outgoing traffic using the same interface where the request was received.

IP address of the interface configured for source policy routing.

Defaults None

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines To define a default gateway, use the ip default-gateway command. Only one default gateway can be configured. To remove the IP default gateway, use the no form of this command. The SE uses the default gateway to route IP packets when there is no specific route found to the destination.

To define a default domain name, use the ip domain-name command. To remove the IP default domain name, use the no form of this command. Up to three domain names can be entered. If a request arrives without a domain name appended in its hostname, the proxy tries to resolve the hostname by appending name1 , name2 , and name3 in that order until one of these names succeeds.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-196

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands ip (Global configuration)

The SE appends the configured domain name to any IP hostname that does not contain a domain name.

The appended name is resolved by the DNS server and then added to the host table. The SE must have at least one domain name server specified for hostname resolution to work correctly.

To specify the address of one or more name servers to use for name and address resolution, use the ip name-server ip_addresses command. To disable IP name servers, use the no form of this command.

For proper resolution of the hostname to the IP address or the IP address to the hostname, the SE uses

DNS servers. Use the ip name-server command to point the SE to a specific DNS server. You can configure up to eight servers.

Path MTU autodiscovery discovers the MTU and automatically sets the correct value. Use the ip path-mtu-discovery enable command to start this autodiscovery utility. By default, this feature is enabled. When this feature is disabled, the sending device uses a packet size that is smaller than

576 bytes and the next hop MTU. Existing connections are not affected when this feature is turned on or off.

The VDS-IS software supports IP Path MTU Discovery, as defined in RFC 1191. When enabled, Path

MTU Discovery discovers the largest IP packet size allowable between the various links along the forwarding path and automatically sets the correct value for the packet size. By using the largest MTU that the links bear, the sending device can minimize the number of packets that it must send.

Note IP Path MTU Discovery is useful when a link in a network goes down, forcing the use of another, different MTU-sized link. IP Path MTU Discovery is also useful when a connection is first being established and the sender has no information at all about the intervening links.

IP Path MTU Discovery is started by the sending device. If a server does not support IP Path MTU

Discovery, the receiving device has no mechanism available to avoid fragmenting datagrams generated by the server.

Use the ip route command to add a specific static route for a network or host. Any IP packet designated for the specified destination uses the configured route.

To configure static IP routing, use the ip route command. To remove the route, use the no form of this command. Do not use the ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

command to configure the default gateway; use the ip default-gateway command instead.

Source Policy Routes

To configure source policy routing, use the ip route command with the interface option. By using source policy routing, the reply packet to a client leaves the SE on the same interface where the request came in. Source policy routing tables are automatically instantiated based on the interface subnets defined on the system. The policy routes are added automatically to the policy routing tables based on the nexthop gateway of the routes in the main routing table.

When configuring multiple IP address you must configure a default gateway in the same subnet. You can configure multiple gateways (up to 14) .

The CDE220-2S3i supports multiple IP addresses, which includes specifying the default gateway and IP routes. The IP routes, source policy routes, were added to ensure incoming traffic would go out the same interface it came in on. An IP route was added using the interface keyword and has the following syntax: ip route <dest_IP_addr> <dest_netmask> <default_gateway> interface <source_IP_addr>

In the following example, all destination traffic (IP address of 0.0.0.0 and netmask of 0.0.0.0) sent from the source interface, 8.1.0.2, uses the default gateway, 8.1.0.1. This is a default policy route.

ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 8.1.0.1 interface 8.1.0.2

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-197

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands ip (Global configuration)

A non-default policy route defines a specific destination (IP address and netmask). The following ip route command is an example of a non-default policy route: ip route 10.1.1.0 255.255.255.0 <gateway> interface <source_IP_addr>

When upgrading to VDS-IS Release 2.5.9 software, any source policy routes configured using the

VDS-IS Release 2.5.7 software interface keyword are rejected and are not displayed when the show running-config command is used. However, because you had to define the default gateway for all the interfaces as part of the multi-port support feature, the equivalent source policy route is automatically generated in the routing table. The following example shows the output for the show ip route command after upgrading to VDS-IS Release 2.5.9 software with the default source policy routes highlighted in bold and the non-default policy routes highlighted in italics:

ServiceEngine# show ip route

Destination Gateway Netmask

---------------- ---------------- ----------------

172.22.28.0 8.1.0.1 255.255.255.128

6.21.1.0 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.0

8.2.1.0 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.0

8.2.2.0 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.0

171.70.77.0 8.1.0.1 255.255.255.0

8.1.0.0 0.0.0.0 255.255.0.0

0.0.0.0 8.1.0.1 0.0.0.0

0.0.0.0 8.2.1.1 0.0.0.0

0.0.0.0 8.2.2.1 0.0.0.0

Source policy routing table for interface 8.1.0.0/16

172.22.28.0 8.1.0.1 255.255.255.128

171.70.77.0 8.1.0.1 255.255.255.0

8.1.0.0 0.0.0.0 255.255.0.0

0.0.0.0 8.1.0.1 0.0.0.0

Source policy routing table for interface 8.2.1.0/24

8.2.1.0 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.0

0.0.0.0 8.2.1.1 0.0.0.0

Source policy routing table for interface 8.2.2.0/24

8.2.2.0 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.0

0.0.0.0 8.2.2.1 0.0.0.0

If you have a default source policy route where the gateway is not defined as a default gateway, then you must add it after upgrading to VDS-IS Release 2.5.9 software. For example, if you had a source policy route with a gateway of 6.23.1.1 for a source interface of 6.23.1.12, and you did not specify the gateway as one of the default gateways, you would need to add it.

If you have a non-default source policy route, then you must add it as a regular static route (without the obsoleted interface keyword) after upgrading to VDS-IS Release 2.5.9 software. This route is then added to the main routing table as well as the policy routing table.

Differentiated Services

The differentiated services (DiffServ) architecture is based on a simple model where traffic entering a network is classified and possibly conditioned at the boundaries of the network. The class of traffic is then identified with a differentiated services (DS) code point or bit marking in the IP header. Within the core of the network, packets are forwarded according to the per-hop behavior associated with the DS code point.

DiffServ describes a set of end-to-end QoS (Quality of Service) capabilities. End-to-end QoS is the ability of the network to deliver service required by specific network traffic from one end of the network to another. QoS in the VDS-IS software supports differentiated services.

2-198

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands ip (Global configuration)

With differentiated services, the network tries to deliver a particular kind of service based on the QoS specified by each packet. The network uses the QoS specification to classify, mark, shape, and police traffic, and to perform intelligent queueing.

Differentiated services is used for several mission-critical applications and for providing end-to-end

QoS. Typically, differentiated services is appropriate for aggregate flows because it performs a relatively coarse level of traffic classification.

DS Field Definition

A replacement header field, called the DS field , is defined by differentiated services. The DS field supersedes the existing definitions of the IPv4 ToS octet (RFC 791) and the IPv6 traffic class octet. A currently unused (CU) 2-bit field is reserved for explicit congestion notification (ECN). The value of the

CU bits is ignored by DS-compliant interfaces when determining the PHB to apply to a received packet.

Per-Hop Behaviors

RFC 2475 defines PHB as the externally observable forwarding behavior applied at a

DiffServ-compliant node to a DiffServ Behavior Aggregate (BA).

A PHB refers to the packet scheduling, queueing, policing, or shaping behavior of a node on any given packet belonging to a BA, as configured by a service level agreement (SLA) or a policy map.

There are four available standard PHBs:

Default PHB (as defined in RFC 2474)

Class-Selector PHB (as defined in RFC 2474)

Assured Forwarding (AFny) PHB (as defined in RFC 2597)

Expedited Forwarding (EF) PHB (as defined in RFC 2598)

The following sections describe the PHBs.

Assured Forwarding PHB

Assured Forwarding PHB is nearly equivalent to Controlled Load Service, which is available in the integrated services model. AFny PHB defines a method by which BAs can be given different forwarding assurances.

For example, network traffic can be divided into the following classes:

Gold—Traffic in this category is allocated 50 percent of the available bandwidth.

Silver—Traffic in this category is allocated 30 percent of the available bandwidth.

• Bronze—Traffic in this category is allocated 20 percent of the available bandwidth.

The AFny PHB defines four AF classes: AF1, AF2, AF3, and AF4. Each class is assigned a specific amount of buffer space and interface bandwidth according to the SLA with the service provider or policy map.

Within each AF class, you can specify three drop precedence (dP) values: 1, 2, and 3. Assured

Forwarding PHB can be expressed as shown in the following example: AFny. In this example, n represents the AF class number (1, 2, or 3) and y represents the dP value (1, 2, or 3) within the AFn class.

In instances of network traffic congestion, if packets in a particular AF class (for example, AF1) need to be dropped, packets in the AF1 class are dropped according to the following guideline:

dP(AFny) >= dP(AFnz) >= dP(AFnx) where dP (AFny) is the probability that packets of the AFny class are dropped and y denotes the dP within an AFn class.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-199

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands ip (Global configuration)

In the following example, packets in the AF13 class are dropped before packets in the AF12 class, which in turn are dropped before packets in the AF11 class:

dP(AF13) >= dP (AF12) >= dP(AF11)

The dP method penalizes traffic flows within a particular BA that exceed the assigned bandwidth.

Packets on these offending flows could be re-marked by a policer to a higher drop precedence.

Expedited Forwarding PHB

Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP), a component of the integrated services model, provides a guaranteed bandwidth service. Applications, such as Voice over IP (VoIP), video, and online trading programs, require this type of service. The EF PHB, a key ingredient of DiffServ, supplies this kind of service by providing low loss, low latency, low jitter, and assured bandwidth service.

You can implement EF by using priority queueing (PQ) and rate limiting on the class (or BA). When implemented in a DiffServ network, EF PHB provides a virtual leased line or premium service. For optimal efficiency, however, you should reserve EF PHB for only the most critical applications because, in instances of traffic congestion, it is not feasible to treat all or most traffic as high priority.

EF PHB is suited for applications such as VoIP that require low bandwidth, guaranteed bandwidth, low delay, and low jitter.

IP Precedence for ToS

IP precedence allows you to specify the class of service (CoS) for a packet. You use the three precedence bits in the IPv4 header’s type of service (ToS) field for this purpose.

Using the ToS bits, you can define up to six classes of service. Other features configured throughout the network can then use these bits to determine how to treat the packet. These other QoS features can assign appropriate traffic-handling policies including congestion management strategy and bandwidth allocation. For example, although IP precedence is not a queueing method, queueing methods such as weighted fair queueing (WFQ) and Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED) can use the IP precedence setting of the packet to prioritize traffic.

By setting precedence levels on incoming traffic and using them with the VDS-IS software QoS queueing features, you can create differentiated service. You can use features, such as policy-based routing (PBR) and Committed Access Rate (CAR), to set the precedence based on an extended access list classification. For example, you can assign the precedence based on the application or user or by destination and source subnetwork.

So that each subsequent network element can provide service based on the determined policy, IP precedence is usually deployed as close to the edge of the network or the administrative domain as possible. IP precedence is an edge function that allows core or backbone QoS features, such as WRED, to forward traffic based on CoS. You can also set IP precedence in the host or network client, but this setting can be overridden by the service provisioning policy of the domain within the network.

The following QoS features can use the IP precedence field to determine how traffic is treated:

• Distributed-WRED

WFQ

CAR

How the IP Precedence Bits Are Used to Classify Packets

You use the three IP precedence bits in the ToS field of the IP header to specify a CoS assignment for each packet. You can partition traffic into up to six classes—the remaining two classes are reserved for internal network use—and then use policy maps and extended ACLs to define network policies in terms of congestion handling and bandwidth allocation for each class.

2-200

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands ip (Global configuration)

Each precedence corresponds to a name. These names, which continue to evolve, are defined in

RFC 791. The numbers and their corresponding names, are listed from least to most important.

IP precedence allows you to define your own classification mechanism. For example, you might want to assign the precedence based on an application or an access router. IP precedence bit settings 96 and 112 are reserved for network control information, such as routing updates.

The IP precedence field occupies the three most significant bits of the ToS byte. Only the three IP precedence bits reflect the priority or importance of the packet, not the full value of the ToS byte.

Examples The following example shows how to configure a default gateway for the SE:

ServiceEngine(config)# ip default-gateway 192.168.7.18

The following example disables the default gateway:

ServiceEngine(config)# no ip default-gateway

The following example shows how to configure a static IP route for the SE:

ServiceEngine(config)# ip route 172.16.227.128 255.255.255.0 172.16.227.250

The following example negates the static IP route:

ServiceEngine(config)# no ip route 172.16.227.128 255.255.255.0 172.16.227.250

The following example shows how to configure a default domain name for the SE:

ServiceEngine(config)# ip domain-name cisco.com

The following example negates the default domain name:

ServiceEngine(config)# no ip domain-name

The following example shows how to configure a name server for the SE:

ServiceEngine(config)# ip name-server 10.11.12.13

The following example disables the name server:

ServiceEngine(config)# no ip name-server 10.11.12.13

The following example shows how to configure source policy routing for the SE interface assigned with the IP address 192.168.1.5:

ServiceEngine(config)# ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 192.168.1.1 interface 192.168.1.5

Related

Command Description ip (Interface configuration) show ip routes

Configures the interface Internet Protocol.

Displays the IP routing table.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-201

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands ip (Interface configuration)

ip (Interface configuration)

To configure the interface Internet Protocol, use the interface command in interface configuration mode.

To delete or disable these settings, use the no form of this command. ip { access-group { num { in | out } { name { in | out } | address { ip_addr netmask | range

{ ip_addr_low ip_addr_high netmask }} no ip { access-group { num { in | out } { name { in | out } | address { ip_addr netmask | range

{ ip_addr_low ip_addr_high netmask }}

Syntax Description access-group num in out name in out address ip-addr netmask range ip_addr_low ip_addr_high netmask

Specifies access control for incoming or outgoing packets.

Specifies an IP access list by number, in standard or extended form. The range is from 1-199.

Configures the IP access list that apply to inbound packets.

Configures the IP access list that apply to outbound packets.

Name of the access list.

Configures the access list name inbound packets.

Configures the access list name outbound packets.

Set the IP address of an interface.

IP address of the interface.

Netmask of the interface.

Specifies the IP address range.

IP address low range of an interface.

IP address high range of an interface.

Netmask of the interface.

Defaults None

Command Modes Interface configuration (config-if) mode.

Usage Guidelines You can configure multiple IP addresses for Gigabit Ethernet, port channel and Standby interfaces in the

SEs. With multiple IP support, the SEs can stream the content under a specific IP while having another stream with different source IP address under the same interface.

The ip command configures up to 24 unique IP addresses within the same subnet for the same Gigabit

Ethernet, port channel and Standby interface. You can add and delete IP addresses for each interface without affecting other configured IP addresses.

Note All IP addresses configured in the same interface must be in the same subnet.

2-202

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands ip (Interface configuration)

The ip range command adds and deletes an IP address range per interface without affecting other configured IP addresses, and it notifies the SR and CDSM on the added and deleted IP address. The IP address can only be deleted when it is already disassociated from the delivery service. If the delivery service’s IP address has been updated, for example from 10.1.1.1 to 10.1.1.5, the service is not interrupted. The new stream uses the new IP address.

Examples Configuring an IP Address Range

The following example shows how to configure an IP address in a range:

ServiceEngine(config)# interface PortChannel 1

ServiceEngine(config-if)# ip address 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.0

ServiceEngine(config-if)# ip address range 2.2.2.3 2.2.2.10 255.255.255.0

ServiceEngine(config-if)# ip address range 2.2.2.12 2.2.2.20 255.255.255.0

If the user configures an IP address range but one or more of the IP addresses in the range matched with an already configured IP address, the configuration is still accepted. For example, if interface

PortChannel 1 has the following configuration: interface PortChannel 1 ip address 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.0

ip address 2.2.2.3 255.255.255.0

ip address 2.2.2.5 255.255.255.0

ip address 2.2.2.12 255.255.255.0

The following configuration is accepted and the IP address in the range (not the same subnet) is rejected:

ServiceEngine# configure terminal

ServiceEngine(config)# interface PortChannel 1

ServiceEngine(config-if)# ip address range 2.2.2.3 2.2.2.4 255.255.255.0

ServiceEngine(config-if)# end

If the interface PortChannel 1 has the following configuration: interface PortChannel 1 ip address 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.0

ip address 2.2.2.5 255.255.255.0

ip address 2.2.2.12 255.255.255.0

And you enter the following commands:

ServiceEngine# configure terminal

ServiceEngine(config)# interface PortChannel 1

ServiceEngine(config-if)# ip address range 2.2.3.9 2.2.3.15 255.255.255.0

ServiceEngine(config-if)# end

It is an invalid IP address range and an incompatible netmask.

Configuring an IP Address

The following example shows how to configure an individual IP address:

ServiceEngine(config)# interface PortChannel 1

ServiceEngine(config-if)# ip address 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.0

ServiceEngine(config-if)# ip address 2.2.2.3 255.255.255.0

ServiceEngine(config-if)# ip address 2.2.2.10 255.255.255.0

Removing an IP Address

The following example shows how to remove an IP address range configuration:

ServiceEngine(config)# interface PortChannel 1

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-203

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands ip (Interface configuration)

ServiceEngine(config-if)# no ip address range 2.2.2.3 2.2.2.10 255.255.255.0

The following example shows how to remove an IP address configuration:

ServiceEngine(config)# interface PortChannel 1

ServiceEngine(config-if)# no ip address 2.2.2.3 255.255.255.

Command Description interface (Global configuration) Configures a Gigabit Ethernet or port channel interface.

show interface show running-config

Displays the hardware interface information.

Displays the current operating configuration.

2-204

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands ip access-list

ip access-list

To create and modify access lists for controlling access to interfaces or applications, use the ip access-list standard or ip access-list extended command in Global configuration modes. To remove access control lists, use the no form of this command.

ip access-list { extended { acl _ name | acl_num { delete num | deny { num { ip address | any | host } | gre { ip address | any | host } | icmp { ip address | any | host } | ip { ip address | any | host } | tcp

{ ip address | any | host } | udp { ip address | any | host }} | insert { num { deny | permit } | list

{ start_line_num | end_line_num } | move { old_line_num | new_line_num } | permit { num { ip address | any | host } | gre { ip address | any | host } | icmp { ip address | any | host } | ip { ip address

| any | host } | tcp { ip address | any | host } | udp { ip address | any | host }}} | { standard { acl_num

| acl_name { delete num | deny { num { ip address | any | host } | gre { ip address | any | host } | icmp { ip address | any | host } | ip { ip address | any | host } | tcp { ip address | any | host } | udp

{ ip address | any | host }} | insert { num { deny | permit } | list { start_line_num | end_line_num }

| move { old_line_num | new_line_num } | permit { ip address | any | host }}}} no ip access-list { extended { acl _ name | acl_num { delete num | deny { num { ip address | any | host }

| gre { ip address | any | host } | icmp { ip address | any | host } | ip { ip address | any | host } | tcp

{ ip address | any | host } | udp { ip address | any | host }} | insert { num { deny | permit } | list

{ start_line_num | end_line_num } | move { old_line_num | new_line_num } | permit { num { ip address | any | host } | gre { ip address | any | host } | icmp { ip address | any | host } | ip { ip address

| any | host } | tcp { ip address | any | host } | udp { ip address | any | host }}} | { standard { acl_num

| acl_name { delete num | deny { num { ip address | any | host } | gre { ip address | any | host } | icmp { ip address | any | host } | ip { ip address | any | host } | tcp { ip address | any | host } | udp

{ ip address | any | host }} | insert { num { deny | permit } | list { start_line_num | end_line_num }

| move { old_line_num | new_line_num } | permit { ip address | any | host }}}}

Syntax Description standard acl_num acl_name delete num deny num ip address any host gre icmp ip tcp

Enables the standard ACL configuration mode.

Access list to which all commands entered from access list configuration mode apply, using a numeric identifier. For standard access lists, the valid range is 1 to 99; for extended access lists, the valid range is 100 to 199.

Access list to which all commands entered from ACL configuration mode apply, using an alphanumeric string of up to 30 characters, beginning with a letter.

(Optional) Deletes the specified entry.

(Optional) Position of condition to delete. The range is from 1 to 500.

(Optional) Causes packets that match the specified conditions to be dropped.

IP Protocol Number.

Source IP address.

Any source host.

A single host address.

Specifies GRE Tunneling by Cisco.

Specifies Internet Control Message Protocol.

Specifies Any IP Protocol.

Specifies Transport Control Protocol.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-205

ip access-list udp insert num deny permit list start_line_num end_line_num move old_line_num new_line_num permit extended

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Specifies User Datagram Protocol.

(Optional) Inserts the conditions following the specified line number into the access list.

Identifies the position at which to insert a new condition.

Specifies packets to deny.

Specifies packets to permit.

(Optional) Lists the specified entries (or all entries when none are specified).

(Optional) Line number from which the list begins.

(Optional) Last line number in the list.

(Optional) Moves the specified entry in the access list to a new position in the list.

Line number of the entry to move.

New position of the entry. The existing entry is moved to the following position in the access list.

(Optional) Causes packets that match the specified conditions to be accepted for further processing.

Enables the extended ACL configuration mode.

Defaults An access list drops all packets unless you configure at least one permit entry.

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines Standard ACL Configuration Mode Commands

To work with a standard access list, enter the ip access-list standard command from the Global configuration mode prompt. The CLI enters a configuration mode in which all subsequent commands apply to the current access list.

To add a line to the standard IP ACL, enter the following command. For example, choose a purpose

(permit or deny) that specifies whether a packet is to be passed or dropped, enter the source IP address, and enter the source IP wildcard address as follows:

[ insert line_num ] { deny | permit } { source_ip [ wildcard ] | host source_ip | any }

To delete a line from the standard IP ACL, enter the following command: delete line_num

To display a list of specified entries within the standard IP ACL, enter the following command: list [ start_line_num [ end_line_num ]]

To move a line to a new position within the standard IP ACL, enter the following command: move old_line_num new_line_num

2-206

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands ip access-list

To return to the CLI Global configuration mode prompt, enter the following command: exit

To negate a standard IP ACL, enter the following command: no { deny | permit } { source _ ip [ wildcard ] | host source _ ip | any }

Extended ACL Configuration Mode Commands

To work with an extended access list, enter the ip access-list extended command from the Global configuration mode prompt. The CLI enters a configuration mode in which all subsequent commands apply to the current access list.

To delete a line from the extended IP ACL, enter the following command: delete line_num

To move a line to a new position within the extended IP ACL, enter the following command: move old_line_num new_line_num

To display a list of specified entries within the standard IP ACL, enter the following command: list [ start_line_num [ end_line_num ]]

To return to the CLI Global configuration mode prompt, enter the following command: exit

To add a condition to the extended IP ACL, note that the options depend on the chosen protocol.

For IP, enter the following command to add a condition:

[ insert line_num ] { deny | permit } { gre | ip | proto_num } { source _ ip [ wildcard ] | host source _ ip | any } { dest_ip [ wildcard ] | host dest _ ip | any } no { deny | permit } { gre | ip | proto_num } { source _ ip [ wildcard ] | host source _ ip | any } { dest_ip

[ wildcard ] | host dest _ ip | any } where if you enter proto_num is 47 or 0, they represent the equivalent value for GRE or IP.

For TCP, enter the following command to add a condition:

[ insert line_num ] { deny | permit } { tcp | proto_num } { source _ ip [ wildcard ] | host source _ ip | any }

[ operator port [ port ]] { dest _ ip [ wildcard ] | host dest _ ip | any } [ operator port [ port ]]

[ established ] no { deny | permit } { tcp | proto_num } { source _ ip [ wildcard ] | host source _ ip | any } [ operator port

[ port ]] { dest _ ip [ wildcard ] | host dest _ ip | any } [ operator port [ port ]] [ established ] where proto_num can be 6, which is the equivalent value for TCP.

For UDP, enter the following command to add a condition:

[ insert line_num ] { deny | permit } { udp | proto_num } { source _ ip [ wildcard ] | host source _ ip | any } [ operator port [ port ]] { dest _ ip [ wildcard ] | host dest _ ip | any } [ operator port [ port ]]

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-207

ip access-list

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands no { deny | permit } { udp | proto_num } { source _ ip [ wildcard ] | host source _ ip | any } [ operator port

[ port ]] { dest _ ip [ wildcard ] | host dest _ ip | any } [ operator port [ port ]] where proto_num can be 17, which is the equivalent value for UDP.

For ICMP, enter the following command to add a condition:

[ insert line_num ] { deny | permit } { icmp | proto_num } { source _ ip [ wildcard ] | host source _ ip | any } { dest _ ip [ wildcard ] | host dest _ ip | any } [ icmp_type [ code ] | icmp_msg ] no { deny | permit } { icmp | proto_num } { source _ ip [ wildcard ] | host source _ ip | any } { dest _ ip

[ wildcard ] | host dest _ ip | any } [ icmp_type [ code ] | icmp_msg ] where proto_num can be 2, which is the equivalent value for ICMP.

For extended IP ACLs, the wildcard keyword is required if the host keyword is not specified. For a list of the keywords that you can use to match specific ICMP message types and codes, see

Table 2-9

. For a

list of supported UDP and TCP keywords, see Table 2-7 and Table 2-8 .

Use access lists to control access to specific applications or interfaces on an SE. An ACL consists of one or more condition entries that specify the kind of packets that the SE drops or accepts for further processing. The SE applies each entry in the order in which it occurs in the access list, which by default, is the order in which you configured the entry.

The following are some examples of how IP ACLs can be used in environments that have SEs:

SE resides on the customer premises and is managed by a service provider, and the service provider wants to secure the device for its management only.

SE is deployed anywhere within the enterprise. As with routers and switches, the administrator wants to limit Telnet and SSH access to the IT source subnets.

Application layer proxy firewall with a hardened outside interface has no ports exposed. ( Hardened means that the interface carefully restricts which ports are available for access, primarily for security reasons. With an outside interface, many types of security attacks are possible.) The SE's outside address is Internet global, and its inside address is private. The inside interface has an IP ACL to limit Telnet and SSH access to the SE.

SE is deployed as a reverse proxy in an untrusted environment. The SE administrator wants to allow only port 80 inbound traffic on the outside interface and outbound connections on the back-end interface.

Within ACL configuration mode, you can use the editing commands ( list , delete , and move ) to display the current condition entries, to delete a specific entry, or to change the order in which the entries are evaluated. To return to Global configuration mode, enter exit at the ACL configuration mode prompt.

To create an entry, use a deny or permit keyword and specify the type of packets that you want the SE to drop or to accept for further processing. By default, an access list denies everything because the list is terminated by an implicit deny any entry. You must include at least one permit entry to create a valid access list.

After creating an access list, you can include the access list in an access group using the access-group command, which determines how the access list is applied. You can also apply the access list to a specific application using the appropriate command. A reference to an access list that does not exist is the equivalent of a permit any condition statement.

To work with access lists, enter either the ip access-list standard or ip access-list extended Global configuration command. Identify the new or existing access list with a name up to 30 characters long beginning with a letter or with a number. If you use a number to identify a standard access list, it must be between 1 and 99; for an extended access list, use a number from 100 to 199. Use a standard access list for providing access to the SNMP server or to the TFTP gateway or server.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-208

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands ip access-list

After you identify the access list, the CLI enters the appropriate configuration mode and all subsequent commands apply to the specified access list. ip access-list standard Command

You typically use a standard access list to allow connections from a host with a specific IP address or from hosts on a specific network. To allow connections from a specific host, use the permit host source_ip option and replace source_ip with the IP address of the specific host.

To allow connections from a specific network, use the permit source_ip wildcard option . Replace source_ip with a network ID or the IP address of any host on the network that you want to specify.

Replace wildcard with the dotted decimal notation for a mask that is the reverse of a subnet mask, where a 0 indicates a position that must be matched and a 1 indicates a position that does not matter. For instance, the wildcard 0.0.0.255 causes the last eight bits in the source IP address to be ignored.

Therefore, the permit 192.168.1.0 0.0.0.255

entry allows access from any host on the 192.168.1.0 network. ip access-list extended Command

Use an extended access list to control connections based on the destination IP address or based on the protocol type. You can combine these conditions with information about the source IP address to create more restrictive conditions.

Table 2-7 lists the UDP keywords that you can use with extended access

lists.

Table 2-7 UDP Keywords and Port Numbers

CLI Keyword bootpc bootps domain netbios-dgm netbios-ns netbios-ss nfs ntp snmp snmptrap tftp

1.

BOOTP = bootstrap protocol

2.

DNS = Domain Name System

Description

BOOTP

1

client service

BOOTP server service

DNS

2

service

NetBIOS datagram service

NetBIOS name resolution service

NetBIOS session service

Network File System service

Network Time Protocol settings

Simple Network Management Protocol service

SNMP traps

Trivial File Transfer Protocol service

UDP Port Number

68

67

53

138

137

139

2049

123

161

162

69

Table 2-8

lists the TCP keywords that you can use with extended access lists.

Table 2-8 TCP Keywords and Port Numbers

CLI Keyword domain exec ftp

Description

Domain Name System

Remote process execution

File Transfer Protocol service

TCP Port Number

53

512

21

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-209

ip access-list

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-8

CLI Keyword ftp-data nfs rtsp ssh telnet www

TCP Keywords and Port Numbers (continued)

Description

FTP data connections (used infrequently)

Network File System service applications

Real-Time Streaming Protocol applications

Secure Shell login

Remote login using telnet

World Wide Web (HTTP) service

TCP Port Number

20

2049

554

22

23

80

Table 2-9 lists the keywords that you can use to match specific ICMP message types and codes.

Table 2-9 Keywords for ICMP Message Type and Code

Field Description administratively-prohibited Messages that are administratively prohibited from being allowed access.

alternate-address conversion-error dod-host-prohibited

Messages that specify alternate IP addresses.

Messages that denote a datagram conversion error.

Messages that signify a DoD

1

protocol Internet host denial.

dod-net-prohibited echo echo-reply general-parameter-problem host-isolated host-precedence-unreachable

Messages that specify a DoD protocol network denial.

Messages that are used to send echo packets to test basic network connectivity.

Messages that are used to send echo reply packets.

Messages that report general parameter problems.

Messages that indicate that the host is isolated.

Messages that have been received with the protocol field of the IP header set to one (ICMP) and the type field in the ICMP header set to three (Host Unreachable). This is the most common response.

Large numbers of this datagram type on the network are indicative of network difficulties or hostile actions.

host-redirect host-tos-redirect host-tos-unreachable host-unknown host-unreachable information-reply information-request mask-reply mask-request mobile-redirect

Messages that specify redirection to a host.

Messages that specify redirection to a host for type of service-based (ToS) routing.

Messages that denote that the host is unreachable for ToS-based routing.

Messages that specify that the host or source is unknown.

Messages that specify that the host is unreachable.

Messages that contain domain name replies.

Messages that contain domain name requests.

Messages that contain subnet mask replies.

Messages that contain subnet mask requests.

Messages that specify redirection to a mobile host.

2-210

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands ip access-list

Table 2-9 Keywords for ICMP Message Type and Code (continued)

Field Description net-redirect net-tos-redirect

Messages that are used for redirection to a different network.

Messages that are used for redirection to a different network for

ToS-based routing.

net-tos-unreachable net-unreachable network-unknown no-room-for-option

Messages that specify that the network is unreachable for the

ToS-based routing.

Messages that specify that the network is unreachable.

Messages that denote that the network is unknown.

option-missing

Messages that specify the requirement of a parameter, but that no room is unavailable for it.

Messages that specify the requirement of a parameter, but that parameter is not available.

packet-too-big parameter-problem port-unreachable precedence-unreachable protocol-unreachable reassembly-timeout redirect router-advertisement

Messages that specify that the ICMP packet requires fragmentation but the DF

2

bit is set.

Messages that signify parameter-related problems.

Messages that specify that the port is unreachable.

Messages that specify that host precedence is not available.

Messages that specify that the protocol is unreachable.

Messages that specify a timeout during reassembling of packets.

Messages that have been received with the protocol field of the IP header set to one (ICMP) and the type field in the ICMP header set to five (Redirect). ICMP redirect messages are used by routers to notify the hosts on the data link that a better route is available for a particular destination.

Messages that contain ICMP router discovery messages called router advertisements .

router-solicitation source-quench source-route-failed time-exceeded timestamp-reply timestamp-request traceroute

Messages that are multicast to ask for immediate updates on neighboring router interface states.

Messages that have been received with the protocol field of the IP header set to one (ICMP) and the type field in the ICMP header set to four (Source Quench). This datagram may be used in network management to provide congestion control. A source quench packet is issued when a router is beginning to lose packets because of the transmission rate of a source. The source quench is a request to the source to reduce the rate of a datagram transmission.

Messages that specify the failure of a source route.

Messages that specify information about all instances when specified times were exceeded.

Messages that contain time stamp replies.

Messages that contain time stamp requests.

Messages that specify the entire route to a network host from the source.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-211

ip access-list

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-9 Keywords for ICMP Message Type and Code (continued)

Field Description ttl-exceeded Messages that specify that ICMP packets have exceeded the

Time-To-Live configuration.

unreachable Messages that are sent when packets are denied by an access list; these packets are not dropped in the hardware but generate the

ICMP-unreachable message.

1.

DoD = department of defense

2.

DF = do not fragment

Examples The following example shows how to create an access list to allow all web traffic and to allow only a specific host administrative access using Secure Shell (SSH):

ServiceEngine(config)# ip access-list extended example

ServiceEngine(config-ext-nacl)# permit tcp any any eq www

ServiceEngine(config-ext-nacl)# permit tcp host 10.1.1.5 any eq ssh

ServiceEngine(config-ext-nacl)# exit

The following example shows how to activate the access list for an interface:

ServiceEngine(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/0

ServiceEngine(config-if)# exit

The following example shows how this configuration appears when you enter the show running-configuration command:

...

!

ip access-list extended example

permit tcp any any eq www

permit tcp host 10.1.1.5 any eq ssh

exit

. . .

Command Description clear ip access-list counters Clears the IP access list statistical information.

show ip access-list Displays the access lists that are defined and applied to specific interfaces or applications.

2-212

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands ip ospf priority

ip ospf priority

To set the router priority, which helps determine the designated router for this network; use the ip ospf priority command in interface configuration mode. To return to the default value, use the no form of this command.

ip ospf priority number_value no ip ospf priority number_value

Syntax Description number_value A number value that specifies the priority of the router (the range is 0 to 255).

Command Default Priority of 1

Command Modes Interface configuration (config-if) mode.

Usage Guidelines When two routers attached to a network both attempt to become the designated router, the one with the higher router priority takes precedence. If there is a tie, the router with the higher router ID takes precedence. A router with a router priority set to zero is ineligible to become the designated router or backup designated router. Router priority is configured only for interfaces to multi-access networks (that is, not to point-to-point networks).

Examples The following example shows how to set the router priority value to 4:

ServiceRouter(config)# router ospf

ServiceRouter(config-ospf)# interface GigabitEthernet 2/0

ServiceRouter(config-ospf-if)# ip ospf priority 4

ServiceRouter(config-ospf-if)

Command Description router ospf Enables the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing process.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-213

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands ip rib route

ip rib route

To configure unicast static routes for the Proximity Engine, use the ip rib route command in Global configuration mode. To , use the no form of the command. ip rib route destination prefix netmask { gateway ip_addr | GigabitEthernet num [ gateway ip_addr ]} no ip rib route destination prefix netmask { gateway ip_addr | GigabitEthernet num [ gateway ip_addr ]}

Syntax Description destination prefix netmask gateway ip_addr

GigabitEthernet num

Destination network prefix.

Network mask.

Gateway IP address.

Selects a GigabitEthernet interface to configure.

GigabitEthernet slot/port number.

Command Default None

Command Modes Global configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines Unicast static routes can be configured for the Proximity Engine. Static routes provide the Proximity

Engine the ability to resolve learned BGP route next hops without IGP routing information.

The show ip rib route static command displays the static routes. The show ip static route command displays the static route configured and stored in the RIB table.

The ip rib route command allows static route configuration where the next-hop resolution depends on other static route configuration, The maximum number of static routes that can be configured is 200. The maximum number of equal cost multiple path (ECMP) static routes is 16.

When the next hop cannot be resolved, the static route configuration is not rejected, but the static route is not installed in Routing Information Base (RIB). When the next hop is resolved, the static route is installed automatically.

Examples The following examples shows how to configure a static route:

ServiceRouter(config)# ip rib route 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0 20.1.1.1

ServiceRouter#

The following example shows how to configure a static route with disabled nexthop:

ServiceRouter(config)# ip rib route 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0 gigabitEthernet 2/0

ServiceRouter(config)# ip rib route 20.1.1.1 255.255.255.0 192.168.82.54

ServiceRouter(config)#

The following examples shows how to configure a static route on a GigabitEthernet interface:

ServiceRouter(config)# ip rib route 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0 gigabitethernet1/0

2-214

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands ip rib route

ServiceRouter#

The following examples shows how to configure a static route on a GigabitEthernet interface with a gateway IP address:

ServiceRouter(config)# ip rib route 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0 gigabitethernet1/0 20.1.1.1

ServiceRouter#

Command Description show ip rib route Displays IP RIB route information.

show ip static route Displays IP Static route information.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-215

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands ip router isis

ip router isis

To specify the interfaces to be used for routing IS-IS, use the ip router isis command in interface sub-configuration mode under IS-IS configuration mode. To detach the IS-IS process from an interface, use the no form of the command. ip router isis no ip router isis

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default None

Command Modes Interface configuration mode under IS-IS (config-isis-if) configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines This command is used to specify the interfaces to actively route IS-IS. Before an IS-IS routing process can be attached to an interface, you must assign a network entity title (NET) using the net command and enter the interface sub-configuration mode.

Examples The following example shows how to configure an IS-IS process to be attached and form adjacency on

Ethernet interface 1:

ServiceRouter(config)# router isis

ServiceRouter(config-isis)# net 49.0001.aaaa.aaaa.aaaa.00

ServiceRouter(config-isis)# interface GigabitEthernet 1/0

ServiceRouter(config-isis-if)# ip router isis

ServiceRouter(config-isis-if)#

Command Description router isis Enables the IS-IS routing protocol and specifies an IS-IS process.

2-216

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

ipv6

ipv6

To specify the default gateway’s IPv6 address, use the ipv6 command in Global configuration mode. To disable the IPv6 address, use the no form of this command.

ipv6 { access-list { extended {extended_ acess_list_num [ delete num | deny { protocol_num { any | host | ipv6_addr } | gre { any | host | ipv6_addr } | icmpv6 { any | host | ipv6_addr } | ip { any | host | ipv6_addr } | tcp { any | host | ipv6_addr } | udp { any | host | ipv6_addr } | insert position_num { deny { protocol_num { any | host | ipv6_addr } | gre { any | host | ipv6_addr } | icmpv6 { any | host | ipv6_addr } | ip { any | host | ipv6_addr } | tcp { any | host | ipv6_addr } | udp { any | host | ipv6_addr }} | permit { any | host | ipv6_addr }} | list [ position_start position_end ] | move { move_from move_to } | permit { protocol_num { any | host | ipv6_addr } | gre { any | host | ipv6_addr } | icmpv6 { any | host | ipv6_addr } | ip { any | host | ipv6_addr } | tcp { any | host | ipv6_addr } | udp { any | host | ipv6_addr }}] | access_list name [ delete num | deny { protocol_num { any | host | ipv6_addr } | gre { any | host | ipv6_addr } | icmpv6 { any | host | ipv6_addr } | ip { any | host | ipv6_addr } | tcp { any | host | ipv6_addr } | udp { any | host

| ipv6_addr }} | insert position_num { deny { protocol_num { any | host | ipv6_addr } | gre { any

| host | ipv6_addr } | icmpv6 { any | host | ipv6_addr } | ip { any | host | ipv6_addr } | tcp { any | host | ipv6_addr } | udp { any | host | ipv6_addr }} | permit } | list [ position_start position_end ]

| move { move_from move_to } | permit { protocol_num { any | host | ipv6_addr } | gre { any | host

| ipv6_addr } | icmpv6 { any | host | ipv6_addr } | ip { any | host | ipv6_addr } | tcp { any | host | ipv6_addr } | udp { any | host | ipv6_addr }}]} | standard { standard _ acess_list_num [ delete num | deny { any | host | ipv6_addr } | insert position_num { deny { any | host | ipv6_addr } | permit { any | host | ipv6_addr }} | list [ position_start position_end ] | move { move_from move_to } | permit { any | host | ipv6_addr } | default-gateway ip_address | route dest_ip_adder gateway_ip_addr } no ipv6 { access-list { extended {extended_ acess_list_num [ delete num | deny { protocol_num { any

| host | ipv6_addr } | gre { any | host | ipv6_addr } | icmpv6 { any | host | ipv6_addr } | ip { any | host | ipv6_addr } | tcp { any | host | ipv6_addr } | udp { any | host | ipv6_addr } | insert position_num { deny { protocol_num { any | host | ipv6_addr } | gre { any | host | ipv6_addr } | icmpv6 { any | host | ipv6_addr } | ip { any | host | ipv6_addr } | tcp { any | host | ipv6_addr } | udp { any | host | ipv6_addr }} | permit { any | host | ipv6_addr }} | list [ position_start position_end ] | move { move_from move_to } | permit { protocol_num { any | host | ipv6_addr } | gre { any | host | ipv6_addr } | icmpv6 { any | host | ipv6_addr } | ip { any | host | ipv6_addr } | tcp { any | host | ipv6_addr } | udp { any | host | ipv6_addr }}] | access_list name [ delete num | deny { protocol_num { any | host | ipv6_addr } | gre { any | host | ipv6_addr } | icmpv6 { any | host | ipv6_addr } | ip { any | host | ipv6_addr } | tcp { any | host | ipv6_addr } | udp { any | host

| ipv6_addr }} | insert position_num { deny { protocol_num { any | host | ipv6_addr } | gre { any

| host | ipv6_addr } | icmpv6 { any | host | ipv6_addr } | ip { any | host | ipv6_addr } | tcp { any | host | ipv6_addr } | udp { any | host | ipv6_addr }} | permit } | list [ position_start position_end ]

| move { move_from move_to } | permit { protocol_num { any | host | ipv6_addr } | gre { any | host

| ipv6_addr } | icmpv6 { any | host | ipv6_addr } | ip { any | host | ipv6_addr } | tcp { any | host | ipv6_addr } | udp { any | host | ipv6_addr }}]} | standard { standard _ acess_list_num [ delete num | deny { any | host | ipv6_addr } | insert position_num { deny { any | host | ipv6_addr } | permit { any | host | ipv6_addr }} | list [ position_start position_end ] | move { move_from move_to } | permit { any | host | ipv6_addr } | default-gateway ip_address | route dest_ip_adder gateway_ip_addr }

Syntax Description default-gateway ip_address

Specifies the default gateway’s IPv6 address.

IPv6 address of the default gateway.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-217

ipv6

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands access-list Named route extended

Specifies IPv6 net route.

Specifies extended IPv6 Access List.

extended_access_list_num Extended IPv6 access-list number. The range is from 100 to199.

extended_access_list_name Extended IPv6 Access-list name (maximum 30 characters).

delete num

(Optional) Deletes a condition.

Position of condition to delete. The range is from 1 to 500.

deny protocol_num any host ipv6_addr gre icmpv6 ip

(Optional) Specifies packets to reject.

An IP Protocol Number. The range is from 1 to 255.

Any source or destination host.

A single host address.

Source or Destination IPv6 address, in format X:X:X:X::X/(0-128).

Cisco’s GRE Tunneling.

Internet Control Message Protocol.

Any IP Protocol.

tcp udp insert position_num eq gt host lt

Transport Control Protocol.

User Datagram Protocol.

(Optional) Inserts a condition.

Position to insert new condition. The range is from 1 to 500.

Matches only packets on a given port number.

Matches only packet with a greater port number.

A single host address.

Matches only packets with a lower port number.

neq range list position_start

Matches only packets not on a given port.

Matches only packets in the range of port numbers.

(Optional) Lists conditions.

(Optional) Position of condition to start listing. The range is from 1 to

500.

position_end (Optional) Position of condition to end listing. The range is from 1 to

500.

(Optional) Moves a condition.

move move_from move_to permit standard

(Optional) Position to move condition from. The range is from 1 to 500.

(Optional) Position to move condition to. The range is from 1 to 500.

(Optional) Specifies packets to accept.

Specifies Standard IPv6 Access List.

standard_access_list_num Standard IPv6 access-list number. The range is from 100 to 199.

standard_access_list_name Standard IPv6 Access-list name (maximum 30 characters).

default-gateway ip_address route dest_ip_adder gateway_ip_addr

Defines the default gateway’s IPv6 address.

Default gateway IPv6 address (maximum of 14), in format X:X:X.

Specifies the IPv6 net route.

Destination IPv6 address, in format X:X:X:X::X/<0-128.

Gateway IPv6 address, in format X:X:X:X::X.

2-218

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Defaults None ipv6

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines Explosive growth in network device diversity and mobile communications, along with global adoption of networking technologies have resulted in IPv4 addresses getting exhausted. IPv4 address space has a theoretical limit of 4.3 billion addresses. IPv6 quadruples the number of network address bits from 32 bits (in IPv4) to 128 bits. This provides more than enough globally unique IP addresses for every networked device in use.

VDS-IS IPv6 ACL, a permit or deny policy for IPv6 traffic you want to filter is based on source and destination IPv6 address, plus other IPv6 protocol factors such as TCP/UDP, ICMPv6 and GRE, or specify the port number. This command mirrors IPv4:

[no] ipv6 access-list {<standard|extended>} {<name|number>}

{<permit|deny|delete|move|insert|list>} {protocol no|protocol name}[any|host|ipv6addr/prefix] {any|host|ipv6addr/prefix}

IPv6 access lists are identified by user selected names. Access lists are defined by a list of “permit” and

“deny” statements.

[no] ip name-server {<hostname|ipv6addr|ipv4addr>}

[no] ntp server {<hostname|ipv6addr|ipv4addr>}

These above configurations should support both IPv6 and IPv4 addresses.

DNS Configuration

The IPv6 address name server must be configured by using the ipv6 name-server ip-address command.

Note The Service Router acts as the authoritative DNS server, and supports IPv6 DNS extensions.

If an IPv6 address is configured on the SR for DNS, the communication between the SR and the DNS server is over the IPv6 transport. The IPv4 address of the Service Router must be configured in the DNS server, so that the Service Router can respond to both A and AAAA queries. In this case, the communication between the DNS Server and the SR is over IPv4 transport.

Service Router

Communication between the SE and SR is through the IPv4 stack, including the keep-alive message. If

IPv6 is enabled, then the keep-alive message includes the IPv6 address of the SE in the keep-alive message payload. This enables the SR to resolve the SE's IPv6 address correctly.

The SR operates as a DNS Server for the requests that belong to the delivery service to which the SR is associated. The SR is provisioned to respond to A or AAAA queries for the configured Service Routing

Domain Name (RFQDN). The query can be on either an IPv4 or IPv6 transport.

The SR accepts the HTTP, RTSP, and RTMP requests and sends back the response by way of the IPv6 transport. The SR also supports the IP-based redirection, and includes the IPv6 address of the SE in the redirect URL. If the redirect URL has the SE host name, the client sends a DNS query to the SR, and the

SR responds with the SE’s IPv4 address for the A query and the SE’s IPv6 address for the AAAA query.

The Coverage Zone file supports IPv6 and IPv4 addresses. The network and subnetwork addresses in the

Coverage Zone file support CIDR format (IP address with a prefix).

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-219

ipv6

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Note The Geo-Location servers do no support IPv6 client configuration; therefore, location-based routing only supports IPv4 addresses.

Examples The following example shows how to configure an IPv6-related address:

ServiceRouter(config)# ipv6 default-gateway fec0::100/64

When configuring a static IPv6 prefix route, specify the host ipv6 address and prefix. < next-hop > is the

IPv6 address of the next-hop to reach the destination prefix. The following example shows how to configure a static IPv6 prefix route:

ServiceRouter(config)# ipv6 route <ipv6addr/prefix> <next-hop>

Related

Command Description clear ipv6 show ipv6 traceroute6

Clears IPv6 ACL counters.

Displays the IPv6 information.

Traces the route to a remote IPv6-enabled host.

2-220

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

isis

isis

To configure IS-IS routing for IP, use the isis command in interface configuration mode under route IS-IS configuration mode. To turn off this function, use the no form of this command. isis { authentication key-chain name { level-1 | level-2 } | authentication-check { level-1 | level-2 }

| authentication-type { cleartext | md5 } | circuit-type [ level-1 | level-1-2

| level-2 ] | priority priority_value { level-1 | level-2 }} no isis { authentication key-chain name { level-1 | level-2 } | authentication-check { level-1 | level-2 } | authentication-type { cleartext | md5 } | circuit-type [ level-1 | level-1-2

| level-2 ] | priority priority_value { level-1 | level-2 }}

Syntax Description authentication key-chain name level-1

Sets hello authentication key chain.

Sets hello authentication key chain.

Authentication key chain name.

Specifies authentication key chain for level-1 IIHs.

level-2 authentication- check

Specifies authentication key chain for level-2 IIHs.

Checks authentication.

authentication-type Sets hello authentication type.

cleartext md5 circuit-type level-1 level-1-2 level-2 priority priority_value

Specifies cleartext.

Specifies HMAC-MD5.

Configures circuit type for interface.

(Optional) Configures a router for Level 1 adjacency only.

(Optional) Configures a router for Level 1 and Level 2 adjacency.

(Optional) Configures a router for Level 2 adjacency only.

Sets the priority for DIS election.

Priority setting for interfaces. The range is from 0 to 127.

Command Default A Level 1 and Level 2 adjacency is established.

Priority is set to 64 for interfaces.

Authentication-check is on.

Command Modes Interface configuration mode under IS-IS (config-isis-if) configuration.

Usage Guidelines Use the isis authentication key-chain command to specify the key chain to be used for the interface and the corresponding level. The key chain range cannot exceed 63 characters.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-221

isis

Examples

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Use the isis authentication-check command to enables or disables the checking of received packets for the interface on the corresponding level. When authentication-check is disabled, IS-IS adds authentication to the outgoing packets, but it does not check authentication on incoming packets. This feature allows smooth transition of enabling authentication without disrupting the network operation.

Use the isis authentication-type command to specify the md5 or cleartext authentication type for the interface and the corresponding level.

Use the isis circuit-type command to specify adjacency levels on a specified interface.

Use the isis priority configuration command to configure the priority of a specific interface.

The following example shows how to specify the key chain to be used for ‘GigabitEthernet 3/0’, level-1 for the IS-IS process running on that interface:

ServiceRouter(config)# router isis

ServiceRouter(config-isis)# interface GigabitEthernet 3/0

ServiceRouter(config-isis-if)# isis authentication key-chain my-key level-1

ServiceRouter(config-isis-if)#

The following example shows how to configure the authentication check of interface ‘GigabitEthernet

3/0’, level-1 for the IS-IS process running on that interface:

ServiceRouter(config)# router isis

ServiceRouter(config-isis)# interface GigabitEthernet 3/0

ServiceRouter(config-isis-if)# isis authentication-check level-1

ServiceRouter(config-isis-ifSVCREG internal error

if SVCREG interface debugs

ippc SVCREG ippc (inter process comm) debugs

svc SVCREG svc debugs

ven SVCREG ven debugs

)#

The following example shows how to configure the authentication type of interface ‘GigabitEthernet

3/0’ to be md5 level-1 for the IS-IS process running on that interface:

ServiceRouter(config)# router isis

ServiceRouter(config-isis)# interface GigabitEthernet 3/0

ServiceRouter(config-isis-if)# isis authentication-type md5 level-1

ServiceRouter(config-isis-if)#

The following example shows how to configure the circuit type of interface ‘GigabitEthernet 3/0’ to be level-1-2 for the IS-IS process running on that interface:

ServiceRouter(config)# router isis

ServiceRouter(config-isis)# interface GigabitEthernet 3/0

ServiceRouter(config-isis-if)# isis circuit-type level-1-2

ServiceRouter(config-isis-if)# end

ServiceRouter#

The following example shows how to set the priority of interface ‘GigabitEthernet 3/0’ to 100 for the

IS-IS process running on that interface:

ServiceRouter(config)# router isis

ServiceRouter(config-isis)# interface GigabitEthernet 3/0

ServiceRouter(config-isis-if)# isis priority 100

ServiceRouter(config-isis-if)# end

ServiceRouter#

2-222

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands isis

Command Description router isis Enables the IS-IS routing protocol and specifies the IS-IS process.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-223

is-type

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

is-type

To configure a Proximity Engine to act as a Level 1 (intra-area) router, as both a Level 1 router and a

Level 2 (interarea) router, or as an inter-area router only, use the is-type IS-IS configuration command.

To reset the default value, use the no form of this command. is-type [ level-1

| level-1-2

| level-2 ] no is-type [ level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2 ]

Syntax Description level-1 level-1-2 level-2

(Optional) Router performs only Level 1 (intra-area) routing. This router learns only about destinations inside its area. Level 2 (inter-area) routing is performed by the closest Level 1-2 router.

(Optional) Router performs both Level 1 and Level 2 routing. This router runs two instances of the routing process. It has one link-state packet database

(LSDB) for destinations inside the area (Level 1 routing) and runs a shortest path first (SPF) calculation to discover the area topology. It also has another

LSDB with link state packets (LSPs) of all other backbone (Level 2) routers, and runs another SPF calculation to discover the topology of the backbone, and the existence of all other areas.

(Optional) Routing process acts as a Level 2 (inter-area) router only. This router is part of the backbone, and does not communicate with Level 1-only routers in its own area.

Command Default The IS-IS routing process configured is a Level 1-2 (intra-area and inter-area) router.

Command Modes IS-IS configuration (config-isis) mode.

Usage Guidelines By default, the first instance of the IS-IS routing process that you configure using the router isis command is a Level 1-2 router.

If the network has only one area, there is no need to run both Level 1 and Level 2 routing algorithms. If

IS-IS is used for Connectionless Network Service (CLNS) routing (and there is only one area), Level 1 only must be used everywhere. If IS-IS is used for IP routing only (and there is only one area), you can run Level 2 only everywhere. Areas you add after the Level 1-2 area exists are, by default, Level 1 areas.

If the router instance has been configured for Level 1-2 (the default for the first instance of the IS-IS routing process in a Cisco device), you can remove Level 2 (inter-area) routing for the area by using the is-type command. You can also use the is-type command to configure Level 2 routing for an area, but it must be the only instance of the IS-IS routing process configured for Level 2 on the Cisco device.

Examples The following example shows how to specify an area router:

ServiceRouter(config)# router isis

ServiceRouter(config-isis)# is-type level-2

ServiceRouter(config-isis)#

2-224

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands is-type

Command Description router isis Enables the IS-IS routing protocol and specifies the IS-IS process.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-225

kernel

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

kernel

Syntax Description

To configure the kernel, use the kernel command in Global configuration mode. To disable the kernel configuration, use the no form of this command.

kernel {kdb | optimization network} no kernel {kdb | optimization network} kdb optimization network

Specifies the kernel debugger (kdb).

Enables kernel performance optimization.

Optimizes network performance.

Defaults Kdb is disabled by default.

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines Once enabled, KDB is automatically activated when kernel problems occur. Once activated, all normal functioning of the VDS-IS device is suspended until KDB is manually deactivated. The KDB prompt looks like this prompt:

[ 0 ] kdb>

To deactivate KDB, enter go at the KDB prompt. If KDB was automatically activated because of kernel problems, you must reboot to recover from the issue. If you activated KDB manually for diagnostic purposes, the system resumes normal functioning in whatever state it was when you activated KDB. In either case, if you enter reboot , the system restarts and normal operation resumes.

Examples The following example shows how to enable KDB:

ServiceEngine(config)# kernel kdb

The following example shows how to disable KDB:

ServiceEngine(config)# no kernel kdb

2-226

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

key

To create a key ID and enter into key configuration submode, use the key command in Global configuration mode. To exit key chain configuration submode, use the no form of this command.

key keyid no key keyid key

Syntax Description keyid Key identifier. The range is from 0 to 65535.

Defaults None

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines Multiple key ID’s may be configured under the same key chain. The key chain string cannot exceed 63 characters.

When IS-IS is configured to use a particular key chain for the authentication and the corresponding key chain is not configured in the system, it causes IS-IS to always reject incoming packets that require the key chain.

When a key chain has multiple keys, IS-IS should advertise the first key in the chain. For validation of received packets, it should iterate through all the keys until there is a match.

They key command is within the key chain command context, not simply the key chain itself.

Examples The following example shows how to create a key ID and enter the key configuration submode:

ServiceRouter(config)# key chain my-key

ServiceRouter(config-keychain)#

Related Commands Command Description key chain key-string show key chain

Creates a key chain and enter into key chain configuration submode.

Creates a key string to be used for authentication.

Displays the key chains in the system.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-227

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands key-string

key-string

To create a key string to be used for authentication, use the key chain command in Key ID configuration submode. To remove the key-string, use the no form of this command.

key-string keyid no key-string keyid

Syntax Description keyid The unencrypted (cleartext) user password.

Defaults None

Command Modes Key ID configuration submode.

Usage Guidelines The key-string command creates a key string to be used for authentication.

A key string is always valid upon creation.

The Proximity Engine does not support key-string expiration.

You can only create one key-string per key ID.

Key-chain string cannot exceed 63 characters.

Examples The following example shows how to specify terminal line settings:

ServiceRouter(config-keychain-key)# key-string topos123

ServiceRouter(config-keychain-key)#

Related Commands Command Description key Creates a key ID and enters into key configuration submode.

key chain show key chain

Creates a key chain and enter into key chain configuration submode.

Displays the key chains in the system.

2-228

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

key chain

key chain

To create a key chain and enter into key chain configuration submode, use the key chain command in

Global configuration mode. To exit key chain configuration submode, use the no form of this command.

key chain name no key chain name

Syntax Description name Name of the key chain.

Defaults None

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines Multiple key ID’s may be configured under the same key chain. Key chain string cannot exceed 63 characters.

When IS-IS is configured to use a particular key chain for the authentication and the corresponding key chain is not configured in the system, it results IS-IS to always reject incoming packets that requires the key chain.

When a key chain has multiple keys, IS-IS should advertise the first key in the chain. For validation of received packets, it should iterate through all the keys until there is a match.

Examples The following example shows how to create a key and enter into key ID configuration submode:

ServiceRouter(config)# key chain my-key

ServiceRouter(config-keychain)#

The following example shows a complete sample configuration for IS-IS MD5 authentication:

ServiceRouter(config)# key chain lsp-key

ServiceRouter(config-keychain)# key 1

ServiceRouter(config-keychain-key)# key-string lsp

ServiceRouter(config-keychain-key)# exit

ServiceRouter(config-keychain)# exit

ServiceRouter(config)# key chain int-key

ServiceRouter(config-keychain)# key 1

ServiceRouter(config-keychain-key)# key-string topos123

ServiceRouter(config-keychain-key)# exit

ServiceRouter(config-keychain)# exit

ServiceRouter(config)# router isis

ServiceRouter(config-isis)# net 10.1111.1111.1111.00

ServiceRouter(config-isis)# is-type level-1

ServiceRouter(config-isis)# authentication-type md5 level-1

ServiceRouter(config-isis)# authentication key-chain lsp-key level-1

ServiceRouter(config-isis)# interface giagabitethernet 1/0

ServiceRouter(config-isis-if)# isis authentication-type md5 level-1

ServiceRouter(config-isis-if)# isis authentication key-chain int-key level-1

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-229

key chain

Related Commands Command key key-string show key chain

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Description

Creates a key chain and enter s into key chain configuration submode.

Creates a key string to be used for authentication.

Displays the key chains in the system.

2-230

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

lacp

lacp

To turn on Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP), use the lacp command in Interface configuration mode. To turn off lacp, use the no form of this command.

lacp no lacp

Syntax Description This command has no keywords or arguments.

Defaults None

Command Modes Interface configuration (config-if) mode.

Usage Guidelines The port channel must be configured on both the switch and the host side before enabling LACP. Speed and duplex must be the same for both the switch and host. To configure LACP on the switch side, every interface must be configured.

For load balancing, the round robin method alone is not supported with LACP.

Examples The following example shows how to turn on LACP:

ServiceEngine(config)# interface portChannel 1

ServiceEngine(config-if)# lacp

The following example shows how to turn off LACP:

ServiceEngine(config)# interface portChannel 1

ServiceEngine(config)# no lacp

The following example shows how to configure the load balancing on a global basis:

ServiceEngine(config)# port-channel load-balance

This command can also include various load balancing methods:

• dst-ip—Destination IP Address (default) dst-mac—Destination Mac Address dst-mixed-ip-port—Destination IP Address and Layer 4 port, supported in 6500 and 7600 dst-port—Destination Layer 4 port round-robin—Round Robin src-dst-ip—Source and Destination IP Address

• src-dst-ma—Source Destination Mac Address src-dst-mixed-ip-port—Source and Destination IP Address and Layer 4 port, supported in 6500 and

7600

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-231

lacp

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

• src-dst-port—Source and Destination Layer 4 port src-mixed-ip-port—Source IP Address and Layer 4 port, supported in 6500 and 7600 src-port—Source Layer 4 port

Related Commands Command Description show interface portchannel 1 lacp Displays the LACP port channel status.

show lacp Displays LACP information.

2-232

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2 Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

line

To specify terminal line settings, use the line command in Global configuration mode. To disable terminal line settings, use the no form of this command.

line console carrier-detect no line console carrier-detect line

Syntax Description console carrier-detect

Configures the console terminal line settings.

Sets the device to check the carrier detect signal before writing to the console.

Defaults This feature is disabled by default.

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines You should enable carrier detection if you connect the SE, SR, or CDSM to a modem for receiving calls.

If you are using a null modem cable with no carrier detect pin, the device might appear unresponsive on the console until the carrier detect signal is asserted. To recover from a misconfiguration, you should reboot the device and set the 0x2000 bootflag to ignore the carrier detect setting.

Examples The following example shows how to specify terminal line settings:

ServiceEngine(config)# line console carrier-detect

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-233

lls

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

lls

Syntax Description

To view a long list of directory names, use the lls user command in user EXEC configuration mode. lls [ directory ] directory (Optional) Name of the directory for which you want a long list of files.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes User EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines This command provides detailed information about files and subdirectories stored in the present working directory (including size, date, time of creation, sysfs name, and long name of the file). This information can also be viewed with the dir command.

Examples The following example shows how to view a long list of directory names:

ServiceEngine# lls

size time of last change name

-------------- ------------------------- -----------

4096 Mon Jan 10 14:02:26 2005 <DIR> WebsenseEnterprise

4096 Mon Jan 10 14:02:26 2005 <DIR> Websense_config_backup

10203 Mon Feb 28 04:24:53 2005 WsInstallLog

4096 Wed Feb 9 00:59:48 2005 <DIR> core_dir

4096 Mon Jan 10 13:49:27 2005 <DIR> crash

382 Tue Mar 1 03:32:13 2005 crka.log

1604 Tue Feb 22 03:55:04 2005 dbupgrade.log

4096 Mon Jan 10 14:02:31 2005 <DIR> downgrade

4096 Mon Feb 28 04:17:32 2005 <DIR> errorlog

53248 Tue Mar 1 03:01:53 2005 <DIR> logs

16384 Mon Jan 10 13:49:26 2005 <DIR> lost+found

438 Tue Jan 11 05:37:57 2005 new_file.xml

8192 Tue Mar 1 00:00:00 2005 <DIR> preload_dir

4096 Tue Mar 1 03:26:00 2005 <DIR> sa

40960 Tue Mar 1 03:32:15 2005 <DIR> service_logs

4096 Tue Feb 22 03:51:25 2005 <DIR> smartfilter

384802 Mon Feb 28 03:46:00 2005 syslog.txt

16296 Mon Feb 21 04:42:12 2005 test

4096 Mon Jan 10 14:02:24 2005 <DIR> var

4096 Sat Feb 12 07:15:23 2005 <DIR> wmt_vod

Related Commands Command dir ls

Description

Displays a detailed list of files contained within the working directory, including names, sizes, and time created.

Lists the files or subdirectory names within a directory.

2-234

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands limit memory

limit memory

To configure the memory limit that is associated with a content manager, flash media streaming server, movie streamer, web engine, or the service-router, use the limit memory command in Global configuration (config) mode.

To remove memory values that are associated with content manager, flash media streaming server, movie streamer or the web engine, use the no form of this command.

On the SE: limit memory { contentmgr num | fms-server num | movie-streamer num | webengine num } no limit memory { contentmgr num | fms-server num | movie-streamer num | webengine num }

On the SR: limit memory { fms-server num | service-router num } no limit memory { fms-server num | service-router num }

Syntax Description contentmgr num fms-server movie-streamer webengine service-router

Memory limitation for contentmgr.

Number of Gigabytes. The range is from 0 to 1024.

Memory limitation for fms.

Memory limitation for movie-streamer.

Memory limitation for webengine.

Memory limitation for service-router.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Examples The following:

ServiceEngine(config)#limit memory contentmgr

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-235

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands location community

location community

To configure the community values that are associated with a Proximity Engine, use the location community command in BGP configuration (config-bgp) mode. To remove community values that are associated with a Proximity Engine, use the no form of this command.

location community community_string [ target community_string | weight num ] no location community community_string [ target community_string | weight num ]

Syntax Description community_string target weight num

Community value string associated with the Proximity Engine.

(Optional) Specifies the BGP target community.

(Optional) Specifies the location community weight.

Location community weight (the range is 1-7).

Command Defaults By default, no community values are associated with the Proximity Engine.

Command Modes BGP configuration (config-bgp) mode.

Usage Guidelines Use the location community command to configure community string values. The configuration includes all community values that represent location. When community values are configured, the

Proximity Engine creates and maintains a sorted table of communities within BGP.

The maximum number of location communities allowed for each SE is 128.

The community_string can be in one of the following forms:

• Community number, such as 100:3535 or 200:4566

• Interval of community numbers, such as 100:3000 to 100:4000 or 100:5000 to 100:6000

Use the show ip bgp summary and s how ip bgp community commands to display the community values that are configured for a Proximity Engine.

In order for the proximity function to work, one of the following is required:

• Enabled link-state protocol, such as OSPF or IS-IS for IGP proximity.

• Enabled policy routing protocol, such as BGP for best-path proximity, and one of the IGP (OSPF or

IS-IS) is required for next hop resolution.

Note All BGP routes must resolve to IGP next hops or directly connected routes.

Previously location-specific communities must be manually configured using the location community command. The location community weight command includes the weight that must be assigned to the location community. Also in this release, the order the community strings are displayed in the running-config was changed. In the old releases, community strings were displayed in the order of lengths of the strings, but now they are displayed in alphabetical order.

2-236

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands location community

Location community ranges overlaps are not allowed. Specific location communities are always allowed.

Thus if location community 5:1-5:10 is already configured, then 5:2-5:3 is not allowed, 5:2-5:7 is also not allowed. 5:5 is allowed:

ServiceRouter(config-bgp)# location community 5:1-5:10 weight 2

ServiceRouter(config-bgp)# location community 5:2-5:3

%BGP: Invalid or overlapping location community.

ServiceRouter(config-bgp)# location community 5:2-5:7

%BGP: Invalid or overlapping location community.

ServiceRouter(config-bgp) # location community 5:5

ServiceRouter(config-bgp)#

For the proximity calculation, the most specific match’s weight is taken. If there is no such match, then the weight of the range is taken. In the example above, a PTA with location-community 5:5, has weight

1 if both PSA and PTA location-community match, and a PTA with location community 5:1 has weight

2, if PSA And PTA location-community also match.

Examples The following example shows how use the location community command to configure community values for a Proximity Engine.

ServiceRouter# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

ServiceRouter(config)# router bgp 23

ServiceRouter(config-bgp)# location community 100:3535

ServiceRouter(config-bgp)# location community 100:50-100:100

The following example shows how to configure the location community weight of 2:

ServiceRouter(config)# router bgp 23

ServiceRouter(config-bgp)# location community 5:1-5:10 weight 2

The following example associates a source/PSA with a location-community community 1:1 with a target/PTA with a location community 2:2 and the weight of this association is 2. Also, the source and/or target community might be a range:

ServiceRouter(config)# router bgp 23

ServiceRouter(config-bgp)# location community 1:1 target 2:2 weight 2

The following example associates the source community 1:1 with all target communities in the range

2:0-2:10 with preference weight 2:

ServiceRouter(config)# router bgp 23

ServiceRouter(config-bgp)# location community 1:1 target 2:0-2:10 weight 2

The following example associates all source communities in the range 1:0-1:10 with target community

2:2 with preference weight 2:

ServiceRouter(config)# router bgp 23

ServiceRouter(config-bgp)# location community 1:0-1:10 target 2:2 weight 2

The following example associates all source communities in the range 1:0-1:10 with all target communities in the range 2:0-2:10 with preference weight 2. It can also be seen that a PSA with community 1:1 and a PTA with community 2:2 would satisfy all four commands above since 1:1 falls in the range 1:0-1:10 and 2:2 falls in the range 2:0-2:10. In such scenario, where multiple commands satisfy the matching criteria, the weight is based on the preference level of the commands. The preference level of the four commands above is descending in the following order:

1.

Specific source community(1:1)-specific target community(2:2)

2.

Specific source community(1:1)-range target community(2:0-2:10)

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-237

location community

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

3.

4.

Range source community(1:0-1:10)-specific target community(2:2)

Range source community(1:0-1:10)-range target community(2:0-2:10)

ServiceRouter(config)# router bgp 23

ServiceRouter(config-bgp)# location community 1:0-1:10 target 2:0-2:10 weight 2

Related Commands Command proximity algorithm bgp location-community

Description

Specifies that the community-based proximity algorithm be used.

2-238

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands log-adjacency-changes

log-adjacency-changes

To configure the router to send a syslog message when an IS-IS neighbor goes up or down, use the log-adjacency-changes router configuration command. To turn off this function, use the no form of this command. log-adjacency-changes no log-adjacency-changes

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Defaults Sending syslog messages when an IS-IS neighbor goes up or down is enabled.

Command Modes BGP (config-bgp), IS-IS (config-isis) and OSPF configuration (config-ospf) modes.

Usage Guidelines This command allows you to know about IS-IS neighbors going up or down without turning on the debug

IS-IS adjacency command. The log-adjacency-changes command provides a higher level view of changes in the peer relationship with less output. This command is enabled by default but messages are sent only when up or down (full or down) events are reported.

Examples The following example shows how to configure the router to send a syslog message when an IS-IS neighbor’s state changes:

ServiceRouter(config)# router isis

ServiceRouter(config-isis)# log-adjacency-changes

ServiceRouter(config-isis)#

Related Commands Command router isis

Description

Enables the IS-IS routing protocol and specifies an IS-IS process.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-239

logging

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

logging

To configure system logging, use the logging command in Global configuration mode. To disable logging functions, use the no form of this command.

logging { console { enable | priority loglevel } | disk { enable | filename filename | priority loglevel

| recycle size } | facility facility | host { hostname | ip_address } [ port port_num | priority loglevel | rate-limit message_rate ]} no logging { console { enable | priority loglevel } | disk { enable | filename filename | priority loglevel | recycle size } | facility facility | host { hostname | ip_address } [ port port_num | priority loglevel | rate-limit message_rate ]}

Syntax Description console enable priority loglevel alert critical debug emergency error information notice disk warning enable filename filename recycle size facility facility auth daemon kernel local0 local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local6

Sets system logging to a console.

Enables system logging to a console.

Sets which priority level messages to send to a syslog file.

I mmediate action needed. Priority 1.

I mmediate action needed. Priority 2.

Debugging messages. Priority 7.

S ystem is unusable. Priority 0.

Error conditions. Priority 3.

I nformational messages. Priority 6.

Normal but significant conditions. Priority 5.

W arning conditions. Priority 4.

Sets system logging to a disk file.

Enables system logging to a disk file.

Sets the name of the syslog file.

Specifies the name of the syslog file.

Overwrites the syslog.txt

when it surpasses the recycle size.

Size of the syslog file in bytes (100000000 to 500000000).

Sets the facility parameter for syslog messages.

Authorization system.

System daemons.

Kernel.

Local use.

Local use.

Local use.

Local use.

Local use.

Local use.

Local use.

2-240

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands local7 mail news syslog user uucp host hostname ip_address logging

Local use.

Mail system.

USENET news.

Syslog itself.

User process.

UUCP system.

Sets the system logging to a remote host.

Hostname of the remote syslog host. Specifies up to four remote syslog hosts.

Note To specify more than one syslog host, use multiple command lines; specify one host per command.

IP address of the remote syslog host. Specifies up to four remote syslog hosts.

Note To specify more than one syslog host, use multiple command lines; specify one host per command.

(Optional) Specifies the port to be used when logging to a host.

Port to be used when logging to a host. The default port is 514.

(Optional) Sets the priority level for messages when logging messages to a host. The default priority is warning.

port port_num priority loglevel alert critical debug emergency error information notice warning rate-limit message_rate

I mmediate action needed. Priority 1.

I mmediate action needed. Priority 2.

Debugging messages. Priority 7.

S ystem is unusable. Priority 0.

Error conditions. Priority 3.

I nformational messages. Priority 6.

Normal but significant conditions. Priority 5.

W arning conditions. Priority 4.

(Optional) Sets the rate limit (in messages per second) for sending messages to a host.

Rate limit (in messages per second) for sending messages to the host. (0 to

10000). Setting the rate limit to 0 disables rate limiting.

Command Defaults Logging: on

Priority of message for console: warning

Priority of message for log file: debug

Priority of message for a host: warning

Log file: /local1/syslog.txt

Log file recycle size: 10,000,000

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-241

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands logging

Usage Guidelines Use the logging command to set specific parameters of the system log file. System logging is always enabled internally on the SE. The system log file is located on the sysfs partition as /local1/syslog.txt.

This file contains the output from many of the VDS-IS components running on the SE, such as authentication entries, privilege levels, administrative details, and diagnostic output during the boot process.

To view information about events that have occurred in all devices in your VDS-IS network, you can use the system message log feature. When a problem occurs in the VDS-IS network, use the system message logs to diagnose and correct such problems.

The syslog.txt file on the CDSM contains information about events that have occurred on the CDSM and not on the registered nodes. The messages written to the syslog.txt file depend on specific parameters of the system log file that you have set using the logging Global configuration command. For example, a critical error message logged on a registered node does not appear in the syslog.txt file on the CDSM because the problem never occurred on the CDSM but occurred only on the registered node. However, such an error message is displayed in the syslog.txt file on the registered node.

A disk failure syslog message is generated every time that a failed sector is accessed. Support for filtering multiple syslog messages for a single failed sector on an IDE disk was added. Support for filtering multiple syslog messages for a single failed section for SCSI disks and SATA disks exists.

To configure the SE to send varying levels of event messages to an external syslog host, use the logging host command. Logging can be configured to send various levels of messages to the console using the logging console priority command.

The no logging disk recycle size command sets the file size to the default value. Whenever the current log file size surpasses the recycle size, the log file is rotated. The log file cycles through at most five rotations, and they are saved as [ log file name ]. [ 1-5 ] under the same directory as the original log. The rotated log file is the one configured using the logging disk filename command.

Configuring System Logging to Remote Syslog Hosts

Users can log to only a single remote syslog host Use one of the following two commands to configure a single remote syslog host for an SE:

ServiceEngine(config)# logging host hostname

ServiceEngine(config)# logging priority priority

You can configure an SE to send varying levels of messages to up to four remote syslog hosts. To accommodate this, logging host priority priority Global configuration command (shown above) is deprecated, and the logging host hostname Global configuration command is extended as follows:

ServiceEngine(config)# [no] logging host hostname [ priority priority-code | port port | rate-limit limit ] where the following is true:

• hostname is the hostname or IP address of the remote syslog host. Specify up to four remote syslog hosts. To specify more than one syslog host, use multiple command lines; specify one host per command.

• priority-code is the severity level of the message that should be sent to the specified remote syslog host. The default priority code is warning (level 4). Each syslog host can receive a different level of event messages.

Note You can achieve syslog host redundancy by configuring multiple syslog hosts on the SE and assigning the same priority code to each configured syslog host (for example, assigning a priority code of critical level 2 to syslog host 1, syslog host 2, and syslog host 3).

2-242

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands logging

• port is the destination port of the remote syslog host to which the SE is to send the messages. The default port is port 514.

rate-limit specifies the number of messages that are allowed to be sent to the remote syslog host per second. To limit bandwidth and other resource consumption, messages to the remote syslog host can be rate limited. If this limit is exceeded, messages to the specified remote syslog host are dropped.

There is no default rate limit, and by default all syslog messages are sent to all the configured syslog hosts. If the rate limit is exceeded, a message of the day (MOTD) is printed for any CLI EXEC shell login.

Mapping syslog Priority Levels to RealProxy Error Codes

The RealProxy system generates error messages and writes them to the RealProxy log file. These error messages are captured by the caching application and passed to the system log file. A one-to-one mapping exists between the RealProxy error codes and the syslog priority levels.

Examples The following example shows that the SE is configured to send messages that have a priority code of

“error” (level 3) to the console:

ServiceEngine(config)# logging console priority warnings

The following example shows that the SE is configured to disable sending of messages that have a priority code of “error” (level 3) to the console:

ServiceEngine(config)# no logging console warnings

The following example shows that the SE is configured to send messages that have a priority code of

“error” (level 3) to the remote syslog host that has an IP address of 172.31.2.160:

ServiceEngine(config)# logging host 172.31.2.160 priority error

Related Commands Command clear logging debug show logging

Description

Removes all current entries from the syslog.txt file, but does not make an archive of the file.

Monitors and records caching application functions.

Displays the system message log confirmation.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-243

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands log-neighbor-changes

log-neighbor-changes

To enable logging of BGP neighbor resets, use the log-neighbor-changes BGP configuration command.

To disable the logging of BGP neighbor changes, use the no form of this command. log-neighbor-changes no log-neighbor-changes

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Defaults If the log-neighbor-changes command is not issued, neighbor status change messages are not tracked.

One exception is a reset, which is always available as output of the show ip bgp neighbors command.

Command Modes BGP configuration (config-bgp) mode.

Usage Guidelines The log-neighbor-changes command enables logging of BGP neighbor status changes (up or down) and resets for troubleshooting network connectivity problems and measuring network stability. Unexpected neighbor resets might indicate high error rates or high packet loss in the network and should be investigated.

Using the log-neighbor-changes command to enable status change message logging does not cause a substantial performance impact, unlike, for example, enabling per BGP update debugging.

In order for the proximity function to work, one of the following is required:

Enabled link-state protocol, such as OSPF or IS-IS for IGP proximity.

Enabled policy routing protocol, such as BGP for best-path proximity, and one of the IGP (OSPF or

IS-IS) is required for next hop resolution.

Note All BGP routes must resolve to IGP next hops or directly connected routes.

Log neighbor changes help keep track of the adjacency changes. Once you enable the log-neighbor-changes command, you can monitor BGP logs to see changes and troubleshoot issues by using the type-tail errorlog/bgp_log.current command.

Examples The following example logs neighbor changes for BGP:

ServiceRouter(config)# router bgp 23

ServiceRouter(config-bgp)# log-neighbor-changes

ServiceRouter(config-bgp)#

2-244

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

ls

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

To view a list of files or subdirectory names within a directory, use the ls command in EXEC configuration mode.

ls [ directory ] ls

Syntax Description directory (Optional) Name of the directory for which you want a list of files.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines To list the filenames and subdirectories within a particular directory, use the ls directory command; to list the filenames and subdirectories of the current working directory, use the ls command. To view the present working directory, use the pwd command.

Examples

Related Commands

The following example shows how to display a list of files within the current working directory:

ServiceEngine# ls

/local1

The following example shows how to display a list of files within the /local1 directory:

ServiceEngine# ls /local1 core_dir crash errorlog logs lost+found service_logs smartfilter syslog.txt

Command dir lls pwd

Description

Displays a detailed list of files contained within the working directory, including names, sizes, and time created.

Provides detailed information about files and subdirectories stored in the present working directory, including size, date, time of creation, sysfs name, and long name of the file.

Displays the present working directory of the SE.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-245

lsp-mtu

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

lsp-mtu

Syntax Description

To set the maximum transmission unit (MTU) size of IS-IS LSPs, use the lsp-mtu IS-IS configuration command. To set the MTU to it’s default value, use the no form of this command. lsp-mtu size no lsp-mtu size size Maximum number of bytes allowed in LSPs (the range is 128 to 4352).

Command Defaults The default size is 1497 bytes.

Command Modes IS-IS configuration (config-isis) mode.

Usage Guidelines The LSP MTU size describes the amount of information that can be recorded in a single LSP. The lsp-mtu command is used to configure the maximum number of bytes allowed in an LSP. If this command is not configured, IS-IS uses the default size of 1500 bytes while sending LSPs for Gigabit

Ethernet. Use the no lsp-mtu command to configure the maximum number of bytes allowed in an LSP at the default value of 1497 bytes.

Examples The following example shows how to configure the MTU size to be 1400 bytes.

ServiceRouter(config)# router isis

ServiceRouter(config-isis)# lsp-mtu 1400

ServiceRouter(config-isis)# end

ServiceRouter#

Related Commands Command router isis

Description

Enables the IS-IS routing protocol and specifies the IS-IS process.

2-246

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

mkdir

To create a directory, use the mkdir command in EXEC configuration mode.

mkdir directory

Syntax Description directory Name of the directory to create.

mkdir

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines Use this command to create a new directory or subdirectory in the SE file system.

Examples The following example shows how to create a new directory under local1:

ServiceEngine# mkdir /local1/mydir

Related Commands Command dir lls ls pwd rmdir

Description

Displays a detailed list of files contained within the working directory, including names, sizes, and time created.

Provides detailed information about files and subdirectories stored in the present working directory, including size, date, time of creation, sysfs name, and long name of the file.

Lists the files or subdirectory names within a directory.

Displays the present working directory of the SE.

Removes a directory from the SE file system.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-247

mkfile

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

mkfile

Syntax Description

To create a new file, use the mkfile command in EXEC configuration mode.

mkfile filename filename Name of the file that you want to create.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines Use this command to create a new file in any directory of the SE.

Examples The following example shows how to create a new file:

ServiceEngine# mkfile traceinfo

Related Commands Command lls ls mkdir

Description

Provides detailed information about files and subdirectories stored in the present working directory, including size, date, time of creation, sysfs name, and long name of the file.

Lists the files or subdirectory names within a directory.

Creates a new directory or subdirectory in the SE file system.

2-248

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

model

model

To change the CDE250 or CDE280 platform model number after a remanufacturing or rescue process, use the model command in EXEC configuration mode.

model { cde250-2S10 | cde250-2S6 | cde250-2S8 | cde250-2S9 CDE280-2H1 | CDE280-2H13 |

CDE280-2H26 | CDE280-2S5 | CDE280-2S10 | CDE280-2S21 }

Syntax Description cde250-2S10 cde250-2S6 cde250-2S8 cde250-2S9 cde280-2H1 cde280-2H13 cde280-2H26 cde280-2S5 cde280-2S10 cde280-2S21

Configures this platform as CDE250-2S10.

Configures this platform as CDE250-2S6.

Configures this platform as CDE250-2S8.

Configures this platform as CDE250-2S9.

Configures this platform as CDE280-2H1

Configures this platform as CDE280-2H13

Configures this platform as CDE280-2H26

Configures this platform as CDE280-2S5

Configures this platform as CDE280-2S10

Configures this platform as CDE280-2S21

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines Use the model

command to change the CDE250 model type. Table 0-1 shows the internal and external

drives for the CDE250 models.

Table 0-1 CDE250 and CDE 280 Model Drives

CDE Variation

CDE250-2S6

CDE250-S8

CDE250-2S9

CDE250-2S10

CDE280-2H1

CDE280-2H13

CDE280-2H26

CDE280-2S5

CDE280-2S10

CDE280-2S21

Internal Drives

Intel 100GB LV SSD

Intel 100GB LV SSD

Intel 100GB LV SSD

Intel 100GB LV SSD

480G SSD x 2

480G SSD x 2

480G SSD x 2

480G SSD x 2

480G SSD x 2

480G SSD x 2

External Drives

Intel 300GB PVR SSD x 24

Intel 300GB PVR SSD x 24

Intel 300GB PVR SSD x 12

Intel 300GB PVR SSD x 24

600G HDD x 1

600G HDD x 24

1200G HDD x 24

240G SSD x 24

480G SSD x 24

960G SSD x 24

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-249

model

Examples

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

The following example shows how to change the CDE250 to model 2S9:

ServiceEngine# model CDE250-2S6

This platform is already a CDE250-2S6.

ServiceEngine#

2-250

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands movie-streamer

movie-streamer

To enable and configure the Movie Streamer server, use the movie-streamer command in Global configuration mode. To disable the Movie Streamer, use the no form of this command. movie-streamer { accelerate vod enable | advanced { client { idle-timeout num | rtp-timeout } | origin server idle-interval num } | broadcast port-list num port_num | cache { age-multiplier num | enable | max-ttl { days num | hours num | minutes num | seconds num } | reval-each-request } | enable | max-concurrent-sessions num | proxy outgoing rtsp host ip_address port_num | transport-src-address ip_address } no movie streamer { accelerate vod enable | advanced { client { idle-timeout num | rtp-timeout }

| origin server idle-interval num } | broadcast port-list num port num | cache { age-multiplier num | enable | max-ttl { days num | hours num | minutes num | seconds num } | reval-each-request } | enable | max-concurrent-sessions num | proxy outgoing rtsp host ip address port num | transport-src-address ip address }

Syntax Description accelerate vod enable advanced client idle-timeout num rtp-timeout origin-server idle-interval num broadcast port-list num port_num cache age-multiplier num enable max-ttl days num hours num minutes num seconds

Configures Movie Streamer kernel streaming acceleration.

Configures kernel streaming acceleration for VOD.

Enables kernel streaming acceleration.

Configures Movie Streamer Advanced features.

Configures advanced client features.

Sets the RTSP timeout.

Client idle timeout, in seconds. The range is from 0 to 300.

Sets the RTP timeout.

Configures the advanced origin server.

Sets the origin server idle interval.

Server idle interval, in seconds. The range is from 1 to 10.

Configures the Movie Streamer live broadcast.

Specifies a port list.

Broadcast list number. The range is from 1 to 1024.

Broadcast port number.

Configures the Movie Streamer cache.

Sets the Movie Streamer cache heuristic modifier.

Expiration time as a percentage of their age. The range is from 0 to 100.

Enables the Movie Streamer media cache.

Sets the maximum time to live for objects in the cache.

Specifies the maximum time to live units, in days.

Maximum time to live. The range is from 1 to 1825.

Specifies the maximum time to live units, in hours.

Maximum time to live. The range is from 1 to 43800.

Specifies the maximum time to live units, in minutes.

Maximum time to live. The range is from 1 to 2628000.

Specifies the maximum time to live units, in seconds.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-251

movie-streamer

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands num reval-each-request

Maximum time to live. The range is from 1 to 157680000.

Sets the scope of revalidation for the request.

enable Enables the Movie Streamer.

max-concurrent-sessions Specifies the Movie Streamer maximum concurrent sessions.

num proxy outgoing

The maximum concurrent sessions. The range is from 1 to 16000.

Configures the Movie Streamer proxy.

Configures the outgoing proxy.

rtsp host ip_address port_num transport-src-address ip_address

Configures the outgoing RTSP proxy.

Specifies the outgoing proxy server.

IP address of outgoing proxy server.

Port number of outgoing proxy server. The range is from 1 to 65535.

Specifies the source IP address to be set in transport header (useful if behind NAT).

Source IP address in transport header.

Command Defaults days : 1 hours : 72 minutes : 4320 seconds : 259200

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines The movie-streamer accelerate vod enable command enables kernel streaming acceleration for VOD.

The movie-streamer advanced client command sets the RTSP or RTP timeout value.

The movie-streamer advanced origin-server command sets the origin server idle interval value, which can determine the origin server RTP timeout value.

The Idle Timeout field and the movie-streamer advanced client idle-timeout command (as well as the movie-streamer advanced client rtp-timeout command), are only intended for performance testing when using certain testing tools that do not have full support of the RTCP receiver report. Setting these timeouts to high values causes inefficient tear-down of client connections when the streaming sessions have ended.

For typical deployments, it is preferable to leave these parameters set to their defaults. The default is 60.

The movie-streamer advanced client idle-timeout command has a range from 0 to 300, whereas the

Idle Timeout field has a range from 30 to 180. This is by design.

Examples The following example shows how to set the original server interval:

ServiceEngine(config)# movie-streamer advanced origin-server idle-interval 5

The following example shows how to set the broadcast port list:

ServiceEngine(config)# movie-streamer broadcast port-list 1 5000 5002

2-252

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands movie-streamer

The following example shows how to set the expiration time as a percentage of the age:

ServiceEngine(config)# movie-streamer cache age-multiplier 50

The following example shows how to set the content cache maximum TTL:

ServiceEngine(config)# movie-streamer cache max-ttl days 100

The following example shows how to set the maximum concurrent sessions:

ServiceEngine(config)# movie-streamer max-concurrent-sessions 7000

The following example shows how to set the outgoing proxy:

ServiceEngine(config)# movie-streamer proxy outgoing rtsp host 10.74.61.98 554

The following example shows how to set the source IP of the transport header while behind NAT:

ServiceEngine(config)# movie-streamer transport-src-address 10.74.61.99

The following example shows how to set the client timeout:

ServiceEngine(config)# movie-streamer advanced client idle-timeout 150

The following example shows how to set the RPT time out:

ServiceEngine(config)# movie-streamer advanced client rtp-timeout 150

The following example shows how to set the original server interval to 5 second:

ServiceEngine(config)# movie-streamer advanced origin-server idle-interval 5

The following example shows how to set the broadcast port list:

ServiceEngine(config)# movie-streamer broadcast port-list 1 5000 5002

The following example shows how to set the Expiration time as a percentage of their age’s 50%:

ServiceEngine(config)# movie-streamer cache age-multiplier 50

The following example shows how to set the cache content max ttl to 100 days:

ServiceEngine(config)# movie-streamer cache max-ttl days 100

The following example shows how to set the max concurrent sessions to 7000:

ServiceEngine(config)# movie-streamer max-concurrent-sessions 7000

The following example shows how to set the out going proxy:

ServiceEngine(config)# movie-streamer proxy outgoing rtsp host 10.74.61.98 554

The following example shows how to set the source the IP of the transport header while behind NAT:

ServiceEngine(config)# movie-streamer transport-src-address 10.74.61.99

Related Commands Command Description show movie-streamer Displays the Movie Streamer configuration.

show statistics movie-streamer

Displays statistics for the Movie Streamer.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-253

mtu

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

mtu

Syntax Description

To set the interface maximum transmission unit (MTU) packet size, use the mtu interface configuration command. Use the no form of this command to reset the MTU packet size.

mtu mtu_size no mtu mtu_size mtu_size MTU packet size in bytes (576 to 1500).

Command Defaults The default MTU packet size for an Ethernet interface is 1500 bytes.

Command Modes Interface configuration (config-if) mode.

Usage Guidelines The MTU is the largest size of IP datagram that can be transferred using a specific data link connection.

Use the mtu command to set the maximum packet size in bytes.

Examples The following example shows how to set the MTU packet size as 1500 bytes:

ServiceEngine(config-if)# mtu 1500

The following example shows how to reset the MTU packet size:

ServiceEngine(config-if)# no mtu 1500

Related Commands Command show interface

Description

Displays the hardware interface information.

show running-config Displays the current running configuration information on the terminal.

show startup-config Displays the startup configuration.

2-254

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands multicast (Global Configuration)

multicast (Global Configuration)

To configure multicast options, use the multicast command in Global configuration mode. To disable individual options, use the no form of this command.

multicast { client { receiver enable | sender enable } | fixed-carousel enable | max-concurrent-jobs number_jobs | priority-weight num | sender-delay delay } no multicast { client { receiver enable | sender enable } | fixed-carousel enable | max-concurrent-jobs number_jobs | priority-weight num | sender-delay delay }

Note The 3.2.3 release does not support max-concurrent-jobs

Syntax Description client receiver enable sender enable fixed-carousel enable number_jobs priority-weight num sender-delay delay

Selects multicast sender or receiver.

Configures multicast receiver.

Enables the multicast client for receiver.

Configures multicast sender.

Enables the multicast client for the sender.

Enable fixed carousel sending, regardless of receiver feedback. The intelligent carousel will be disabled, which does carousel based on receiver feedback. This configuration is applicable only to primary sender and will be removed if this SE is moved to backup sender.

Maximum number of jobs (1–50). The default is 5.

(Optional) Specifies the percentage of multicast bandwidth that is used for priority-based scheduling.

Bandwidth percentage to be used for priority-based scheduling. The range is from 0 to 100.

Sets the multicast sender delay time.

Delay time in seconds. The range is between 120 seconds to 7200 seconds.

Defaults Sender Delay : 960 seconds.

Maximum Concurrent Jobs : 5

Priority Weight : 50%

Command Modes Global configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines Note This command is only available on Cisco VDS-IS Release 3.1.1.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-255

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands multicast (Global Configuration)

In the VDS-IS, content is replicated through a channel distribution architecture. Content in channels can be transmitted by unicast pull, or if multicasting is enabled, by multicast push. Multicasting allows efficient distribution of content to multiple SEs and is useful when many end users are interested in the same content. The VDS-IS software supports Pragmatic General Multicast (PGM)-based multicast replication using either satellite or multicast-enabled terrestrial infrastructures.

Multicast delivery enables the distribution of streaming media by allowing different receiving devices on the IP multicast to receive a single stream of media content from the SE simultaneously. This method can save significant network bandwidth consumption, because a single stream is sent to many devices, rather than sending a single stream to a single device every time that this stream is requested.

This multicast delivery feature is enabled by setting up a multicast address on the SE to which different devices, configured to receive content from the same channel, can subscribe. The delivering device sends content to the multicast address set up at the SE, from which it becomes available to all subscribed receiving devices.

To take advantage of multicasting, all devices, including SEs, routers, and clients, must be multicast enabled. For this reason, multicasting is mostly used in local networks where routers can be configured for multicasting. Multicast delivery over the Internet can only be accomplished when all the devices that participate in the multicast have been enabled for multicasting.

For multicast content replication, SEs are grouped into multicast clouds. A multicast cloud consists of one sender SE, an optional backup sender SE, and at least one receiver SE in a hub and spoke topology.

All the SEs in one multicast cloud share a unique advertisement address that allows them to communicate multicast session information. The multicast cloud is then associated with one or more multicast-enabled channels.

In pull-based unicast content distribution, a unicast receiver pulls file data out of the proper forwarder

(or root SE) when a client requests the content. In multicast content distribution, the sender SE in a multicast cloud proactively pushes content into the cloud according to a preconfigured schedule.

The receiver SEs listen on the advertisement IP address for information on the content to be replicated from the sender and decide whether to accept an advertisement and whether to receive the content.

The content metadata (machine-readable information that describes the characteristics of the content) must be distributed to a receiver first before the content can be replicated. The content metadata helps to define what content to retrieve, how the content will be retrieved, how recently the content has been updated, how the content is to be pre-positioned (for example, the expiration time), and so forth. The metadata is always distributed using unicast. The content, however, can be replicated using either multicast or unicast. A multicast receiver rejects the multicast sender’s advertisement of a file if the proper content metadata has not arrived. During the content distribution process, both the content and its associated information describing the content, called the metadata, are distributed. A multicast receiver does not accept any multicast content unless it has already received the associated metadata for that particular content.

Use the multicast fixed-carousel enable command to enable fixed-carousel sending. Carousel sending, which refers to the multicast retransmission of content, allows receivers who join a multicast group after a distribution has ended or who miss some content to receive the content without requiring a unicast transmission. By default, the SE uses intelligent carousel sending, which means that the retransmission is guided by feedback from the content receivers. Late-joining receivers or receivers that missed some content send a negative acknowledgement (NACK) to the sender for any files that were not received.

Fixed-carousel sending causes the content to be sent without depending on any receiver feedback. When this feature is enabled, the SE continuously retransmits the content after waiting for the time specified by the sender-delay option. You can use the fixed-carousel option when sending the content to receivers, which do not send NACKs to the sender. This configuration is allowed only for the primary

2-256

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands multicast (Global Configuration) sender and is not supported for an SE configured as a backup sender. Use the no multicast fixed-carousel enable command to disable fixed-carousel sending and to restore the default configuration.

Use the multicast max-concurrent-jobs command option to set the maximum number of objects that can be scheduled concurrently for multicast distribution. When networks are reliable or the size of files being multicast is small, we recommend that you set the maximum number of concurrent objects to 50.

However, when networks are unreliable or the size of files being multicast is large, a smaller number of concurrent objects (for example, five) is recommended. The default maximum number of jobs is five.

The priority-weight option allows you to change the percentage of multicast bandwidth that is used for priority-based scheduling. By default, 50 percent of the bandwidth is allocated for a priority-based queue and 50 percent is allocated for a time-based, first in, first out (FIFO) queue. The time-based queue allows the system to process lower-priority traffic in a timely way even when it frequently receives large, high-priority requests.

Multicast Sender Delay

The multicast sender delay interval is the amount of time before each multicast transmission begins. A period of delay before the actual multicast transmission begins is required to allow the content metadata time to propagate to the receiver SE. The metadata contains the content file and configuration information that is necessary for the successful transmission of content files. The sender delay parameter is used to configure an extra delay before a multicast transmission can begin.

When configuring the sender delay interval, you must take into account that the content metadata must first propagate to the receiver before the multicast transmission can begin. During a multicast session, a receiver SE sends out periodic requests for files that it has not received. The sender retransmits files only as requested by the receiver SE. A multicast receiver will reject a multicast sender’s advertisement of a file if the associated content metadata has not arrived. The sender delay option allows you to configure enough time for the metadata to propagate to the receiver, and avoid having the receiver reject the multicast sender's advertisement of a file.

To configure the sender delay interval, use the multicast sender-delay global configuration command on a sender SE. The sender-delay option controls the length of time that the multicast sender must wait for its associated metadata to propagate to the multicast receivers. The default delay time value is 960 seconds, the minimum is 480 seconds, and the maximum is 7200 seconds. You can configure the duration of the delay based on your expectation or best guess of the amount of time required for the metadata to be propagated. The system takes this user-configured sender delay value and delays the multicast transmission for a period defined by the sender delay.

Note The sender delay interval cannot be configured using the CDSM GUI. You must configure the sender delay interval using the CLI of the sender SE.

Examples The following example shows how to enable the multicast client for the receiver on an SE:

ServiceEngine(config)# multicast client receiver enable

Related Commands Command multicast (EXEC configuration show multicast

Description

Generates multicast packets and test connectivity through multicast routers.

Shows whether multicast sender and receiver are enabled or disable.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-257

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands multicast (EXEC Configuration)

multicast (EXEC Configuration)

To generate multicast packets and test connectivity through multicast routers, use the multicast command in EXEC configuration mode.

multicast connectivity-test { cloud-id cloud_id [ duration duration_num [ message-length | mullticast-address multicast_addr | output-style { detail | error } | port port_num ] | packet-count packet_num ] | cloud-name name [ duration duration [ message-length | multicast-address multicast_addr | output-style { detail | error } | port port_num ] | packet-count packet_num ] | receive multicast_ip_addr interface interface_ip_addr | s end multicast_ip_addr ttl interface interface_ip_addr | streamer receiver_ip_addr

{ receiver_ip_addr | multicast-address multicast_addr [ duration duration [ FEC-size size | max-transfer-rate rate | message-length | output-style { detail | error } | port port_num ] | packet-count packet_num | time-to-live ttl ]}}

Syntax Description connectivity-test cloud-id cloud_id duration duration message-length multicast-address multicast_addr output-style detail error port port_num packet-count packet_num cloud-name cloud-name receive multicast_ip_addr interface interfrace_ip_addr

Verifies multicast connectivity between a sender and multiple receivers.

Sends Pragmatic General Multicast (PGM) packets to the multicast cloud.

Cloud ID. The range is from 0 to 4294967295.

(Optional) Configures the length of time over which PGM packets are to be sent to receiver SEs. This is the default option for multicast-address .

Number of seconds that PGM packets are sent to receiver SEs. The range is from 30 to 3600; suggested number is 180.

(Optional) Message length to send.

(Optional) Configures the multicast IP address to be used for sending PGM packets. When you use the cloud-id or cloud-name option, you can choose not to specify the multicast address. When the multicast address is not specified, the advertising IP address specified in the multicast cloud configuration is used as the multicast address.

Multicast Address to use for generating PGM Packets.

(Optional) Define the output display style.

Prints the Detailed Report.

Prints the Error Report.

(Optional) Destination port to send packets.

Destination port to send packets. Range is 1025 to 65535; suggested amount is 7000.

(Optional) Configures the number of PGM packets to be sent to receiver

SEs.

Number of PGM packets to send each receiver SE. The range is from 50 to

4096; suggested number is 100.

Sends PGM packets to the multicast cloud.

Name of the cloud.

Receives PGM packets from the multicast address.

Multicast IP address to listen for PGM Packets.

Interface to be used for Multicast.

Interface IP address.

2-258

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands send ttl streamer receiver_ip_addr

FEC-size size max-transfer-rate rate time-to-live multicast (EXEC Configuration)

Sends PGM packets to the multicast address.

Time to Live for the multicast packet. Range is from 1 to 255; suggested is

255.

Sends PGM packets to receiver SEs.

IP Address of the Receiver SE (max up to 20 Receivers) to check the multicast connectivity.

(Optional) Configures the appending of forward error correction (FEC) redundancy bytes.

Number of FEC redundancy bytes to be appended (8–128). The values must be powers of 2 (for example, 8, 16, 32, or 64). The default is 8.

(Optional) Configures the maximum bandwidth that can be used for this multicast transmission.

Maximum Transfer Rate to generate PGM Packets. The range is from 56 to

1000000; suggested is 128Kb.

(Optional) Configures the maximum number of hops permitted for PGM packets before they expire on the network. For each hop, the original specified TTL is decremented by 1. When the TTL reaches 0, PGM packets expire and are no longer forwarded through the network.

Command Defaults Duration : 180 seconds

Packet Count : 100

FEC Size: 8

Maximum Transfer Rate : 128 kbps

Port : 7000

Time-to-live : 255

Message Length : 1024

Output Style : Detail Report

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines Note This command is only available on Cisco VDS-IS Release 3.1.1.

You can use the multicast connectivity-test command to test multicast connectivity within the VDS-IS network. The multicast connectivity-test command options run pgmrategen (the PGM packet generation application) and pgmratemon (the PGM packet receiver application) in the background to test multicast connectivity. These applications use the PGM protocol, which allows a receiver to report lost data and to request retransmission from the sender. With PGM, the sender multicasts sequenced data packets, and the receivers reply with unicast negative acknowledgments (NACKs) when data packets are missing from the expected sequence. Network elements forward the NACKs to the multicast sender and confirm each hop by multicasting a NACK confirmation on the interface on which the NACK was received.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-259

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands multicast (EXEC Configuration)

Multicast Forward Error Correction

Forward error correction (FEC) is a type of data encoding that protects transmissions against errors, without requiring retransmission. The FEC number denotes the number of packets that will be encoded into one FEC transmission group. A higher FEC number means that the transmission group size is larger.

The multicast may be more error-resistant, but there will also be more computational overhead on the multicast sender and receivers. No bandwidth overhead is related to FEC.

The FEC default value is 8. If the multicast sender device is a high-end SE model, you can set this number higher to improve multicast reliability when your network connectivity has a high uniform loss rate. However, we do not recommend that you set this number beyond 64, because it may place too much of a load on all the receiver SEs.

You can also set proactive FEC using the PGM configuration file (a text file accessible from the SE CLI in the /local1/multicast-expert-config/ directory). Proactive FEC is the number of extra packets that the multicast sender proactively sends out for every FEC number of data packets. The proactive FEC default value is 0. You can set the proactive FEC number higher for better multicast reliability. For example, you can set 2 proactive packets for every 16 FEC packets at the expense of 12.5 percent traffic overhead (2 divided by 16).

Proactive FEC is an additional reliability measure above and beyond that of normal FEC. Although normal FEC does not incur bandwidth overhead, proactive FEC does use bandwidth overhead. Proactive

FEC primarily protects the multicast from uniform losses. For example, if the network has a uniform loss rate of 15 percent, then a proactive FEC of 2 extra packets for every 16 FEC packets (a 12.5 percent bandwidth overhead) cuts the effective loss rate down to 2.5 percent. Most network losses are not completely uniform. Still, during bursts, proactive FEC undercuts the effective burst loss rate. For example, if the burst loss rate is 20 percent while the average loss rate is 2 percent, with proactive FEC at 12.5 percent, the receiver SEs experience a burst loss rate of 7.5 percent and an average loss rate near

0 percent.

Testing Multicast Connectivity in VDS-IS Networks

The multicast connectivity-test command options allow you to test multicast connectivity in the

VDS-IS networks. You can specify a maximum of 20 multicast receiver SEs using this option. Use the cloud-id or cloud-name options to test multicast connectivity to receiver SEs grouped into multicast clouds in the VDS-IS network. There is no limit to the number of SEs you can have in a multicast cloud.

The cloud-id or cloud-name options initiate the following sequence of events:

1.

2.

When you specify the IP addresses of the receiver SEs, multicast cloud ID, or multicast cloud name, you initiate the multicast connectivity test.

The multicast sender initiates RPC calls to the receiver SEs, which prompt them to listen for the

PGM multicast data on the default port or the port specified in the multicast connectivity-test command.

3.

4.

5.

The SE displays the following:

– A list of receiver SEs that failed to respond to the RPC calls

– Warning messages if multicast is not enabled on any receiver SE

The multicast sender starts sending PGM packets to the specified multicast address. The receiver SE keeps updating the session statistics for each packet received.

If you interrupt the test by pressing Ctrl-C , the multicast sender sends a notification to all receiver

SEs to stop listening and displays the information obtained so far.

After the multicast session is completed or the transmission has timed out, the receiver SE sends the statistics to the multicast sender using an RPC call.

2-260

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands multicast (EXEC Configuration)

Examples

Note If the multicast receiver SE times out, it sends a “no packet received” error message to the multicast sender if it has not received any PGM packets for 60 seconds. Similarly, the multicast sender waits for 60 seconds for a response from the receiver SE before timing out.

6.

7.

The multicast sender displays the statistics obtained for the session.

The multicast sender repeats the test with the receiver SEs and generates a consolidated report.

Using the cloud-id or cloud-name Option

You can use the cloud-id or cloud-name options to test multicast connectivity in large networks where a number of SEs are grouped under multicast clouds.

Note You cannot specify values for the optional parameters FEC-size and max-transfer-rate when the cloud-id or cloud-name options are used. The values for these two parameters are taken from the multicast cloud configuration.

Use the multicast connectivity-test cloud-name command to test the multicast connectivity to the receiver SEs in the multicast cloud mcloud1.

The multicast address is not specified in this example. The VDS-IS software uses the advertisement IP address specified in the multicast cloud configuration as the multicast address. Because no values were specified for the options, the VDS-IS software uses the default values for all the optional parameters.

multicast connectivity-test send Command

To test the multicast connectivity to the receiver SEs listening to a specific multicast address, use the multicast connectivity-test send command. This command runs the pgmrategen application, which continuously sends PGM packets to the specified multicast IP address. After you enter this command, the system displays the percentage of packets that have been multicast and stops sending packets when the packets sent reaches 100 percent. Press Ctrl-C to interrupt the PGM application and return to the

EXEC prompt.

To determine the number of network elements through which the packet can pass before reaching the receiver, specify the Time To Live (TTL), which can vary between 1 and 255.

multicast connectivity-test receive Command

To receive PGM packets, use the multicast connectivity-test receive command. Entering this command runs the pgmratemon application, which listens for the PGM multicast data transmitted from a PGM sender on the specified multicast IP address. When a packet is received, the pgrmratemon application lists the packet size and bandwidth.

To test the multicast connectivity between two SEs, use the same multicast IP address for both send and receive. The pgmratemon application terminates by itself after a default period of 3 minutes and returns to the EXEC prompt. You can press Ctrl-C to terminate the pgmratemon application and return to the

EXEC prompt.

The following example shows the output of the multicast connectivity-test command for a multicast IP address of 239.1.1.1 and receiver SE IP addresses 10.43.27.2 and 10.43.27.4:

ServiceEngine# multicast connectivity-test 10.43.27.2 10.43.27.4 multicast-address

239.1.1.1

Connecting to Receiver : 10.43.27.2

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-261

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands multicast (EXEC Configuration)

Starting PGM Receiver on the SE 10.43.27.2

Connecting to Receiver : 10.43.27.4

Starting PGM Receiver on the SE 10.43.27.4

Packet Generation thread has started. It will start sending packets after PGMReceivers have been started

Time Elapsed : 180 seconds

PGM Sender has finished sending packets. Awaiting Receiver response

Will wait for 60 seconds...

Configuration

-------------

Multicast Address : 239.1.1.1

Port : 7000

Max Rate to send PGM Packets : 128 kbps

Time to live for multicast packets : 255

Forwarder Error Correction Size : 8

Detailed Report

----------------

Receiver IP : 10.43.27.2

Duration : 180 seconds

No of Packets received : 1134

Packet Length : 1024 Bytes

Minimum BW : 5.714 KBps

Maximum BW : 7 KBps

Average BW : 6.291 KBps

NAK Count : 0

Receiver IP : 10.43.27.4

Duration : 180 seconds

No of Packets received : 1134

Packet Length : 1024 Bytes

Minimum BW : 5.691 KBps

Maximum BW : 7 KBps

Average BW : 6.298 KBps

NAK Count : 0

Summary Report

--------------

Total number of receivers : 2

No: of receivers which received Packets : 2

No: of receivers which did not receive Packets : 0

No: of RPC calls failures : 0

No: of Other Errors obtained from Receivers : 0

The following example shows all the optional parameters and default values:

ServiceEngine# multicast connectivity-test 10.77.155.171 10.77.155.175 10.77.155.179 multicast-address 239.10.1.11 duration 180 FEC-size 8 max-transfer-rate 128 message-length 1024 output-style detail port 7000 time-to-live 255

The following example shows the multicast connectivity-test cloud-name command with all the optional parameters and default values:

ServiceEngine# multicast connectivity-test cloud-name mcloud1 duration 180 message-length

1024 output-style detail port 7000

The following example shows the output of the multicast connectivity-test cloud-name command for the multicast cloud Mcloud1. Because the multicast address was not specified, the VDS-IS software uses the advertisement IP address 239.1.1.1, specified in the multicast cloud configuration, as the multicast

IP address. PGM packets are sent to the two receiver SEs (IP addresses 10.43.27.2 and 10.43.27.4) that make up the multicast cloud Mcloud1.

2-262

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands multicast (EXEC Configuration)

ServiceEngine# multicast connectivity-test cloud-name Mcloud1

Connecting to Receiver : 10.43.27.2

Starting PGM Receiver on the SE 10.43.27.2

Connecting to Receiver : 10.43.27.4

Starting PGM Receiver on the SE 10.43.27.4

Packet Generation thread has started. It will start sending packets after PGMReceivers have been started

Time Elapsed : 180 seconds

PGM Sender has finished sending packets. Awaiting Receiver response

Will wait for 60 seconds...

Configuration

-------------

Multicast Address : 239.1.1.1

Port : 7000

Max Rate to send PGM Packets : 10000 kbps

Time to live for multicast packets : 255

Forwarder Error Correction Size : 16

Detailed Report

----------------

Receiver IP : 10.43.27.4

Duration : 180 seconds

No of Packets received : 1139

Packet Length : 1024 Bytes

Minimum BW : 4.903 KBps

Maximum BW : 7 KBps

Average BW : 6.296 KBps

NAK Count : 0

Receiver IP : 10.43.27.2

Duration : 180 seconds

No of Packets received : 1139

Packet Length : 1024 Bytes

Minimum BW : 5.641 KBps

Maximum BW : 7 KBps

Average BW : 6.319 KBps

NAK Count : 0

Summary Report

--------------

Total number of receivers : 2

No: of receivers which received Packets : 2

No: of receivers which did not receive Packets : 0

No: of RPC calls failures : 0

No: of Other Errors obtained from Receivers : 0

The following example shows the output of the multicast connectivity-test send command for a multicast IP address of 239.1.1.1 and TTL of 255:

ServiceEngine# multicast connectivity-test send 239.1.1.1 255

Starting pgmrategen ....

pgmrategen is already running. Exiting previous instance

Sending 1024 messages of 1024 bytes (1024 Kbytes)

PGM rate is 1024 Kbps

Progress: 99%

Total time 159.924 seconds, 6.40302 KBps, 52.4536 Kbps

The following example shows the output of the multicast connectivity-test receive command:

ServiceEngine# multicast connectivity-test receive 239.1.1.1

Starting pgmratemon ....

This SE is not configured as Multicast receiver in any cloud

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-263

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands multicast (EXEC Configuration)

Configuring this SE as Satellite mode receiver

Press ^C to abort or wait for 3 mins to exit....

Multicasting PGM multicast data to SmartPGM receivers on multicast address 239.1

Sending 1024 messages of 1024 bytes (1024 Kbytes)

PGM rate is 1024 Kbps

Progress: 99%

Total time 8.39756 seconds, 121.94 KBps, 998.934 Kbps

Exiting....

Stopping pgmratemon

ServiceEngine#

Related Commands Command multicast (Global configuration) show multicast

Description

Configure multicast options.

Displays whether or not the multicast sender and receiver are enabled.

2-264

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

neighbor

neighbor

To configure BGP neighbors, use the neighbor BGP configuration command. To return to the default, use the no form of this command.

neighbor ip_address { ebgp-multihop TTL | password word | remote-as as_number | timers keepalive_timer hold_timer } no ip_address { ebgp-multihop TTL | password word | remote-as as_number | timers keepalive_timer hold_timer }

Syntax Description ip_address ebgp-multihop

TTL password word remote-as as_number timers keepalive_timer hold_timer

IP address of the neighbor.

Sets the Time-to-Live (TTL) value for the EBGP multihop scenarios.

Time-to-Live value. The range is from 1 to 255.

Specifies the BGP neighbor password.

BGP MD5 password.

Specifies the Remote Autonomous Systems (AS) number.

Autonomous system to which the neighbor belongs.

Configures keepalive and hold timers.

Keepalive timer interval, in seconds. The range is from 0 to 3600.

Hold timer interval, in seconds. The range is from 0 to 3600.

Command Defaults •

There are no BGP or multi protocol BGP neighbor peers.

Default TTL value is 1 for all neighbors.

Keepalive timer interval is set to 60 seconds, and the hold timer interval is set to 180 seconds.

Command Modes BGP configuration (config-bgp) mode.

Usage Guidelines Use the neighbor ebgp-multihop BGP configuration command to set the TTL value for the EBGP multihop scenarios.

Specifying a neighbor with an autonomous system number that matches the autonomous system number specified in the router bgp Global configuration command identifies the neighbor as internal to the local autonomous system. Otherwise, the neighbor is considered as external.

Use the neighbor remote-as command to add a neighbor to the BGP, or multi protocol BGP table, before setting the TTL value for the neighbor.

By default, neighbors that are defined using the neighbor remote-as command in router configuration mode exchange only unicast address prefixes.

Use the neighbor remote-as command before setting the TTL value.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-265

neighbor

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

In order for the proximity function to work, one of the following is required:

Enabled link-state protocol, such as OSPF or IS-IS for IGP proximity.

Enabled policy routing protocol, such as BGP for best-path proximity, and one of the IGP (OSPF or

IS-IS) is required for next hop resolution.

Note All BGP routes must resolve to IGP next hops or directly connected routes.

Examples The following example shows that a router at the address 192.168.86.3 is a neighbor in autonomous system number 23, and has a ebgp-multihop TTL value of 3:

ServiceRouter(config)# router bgp 23

ServiceRouter(config-bgp)# neighbor 192.168.86.3 remote-as 23

ServiceRouter(config-bgp)# neighbor 192.168.86.3 ebgp-multihop 3

ServiceRouter(config-bgp)#

The following example shows how to specify that a router at the address 192.168.86.3 is a neighbor in autonomous system number 23:

ServiceRouter(config)# router bgp 23

ServiceRouter(config-bgp)# neighbor 192.168.86.3 remote-as 23

ServiceRouter(config-bgp)#

The following example shows that a router at the address 192.168.86.3 is a neighbor in autonomous system number 23, and its keepalive timer interval and hold timer interval are set to be 100 seconds and

200 seconds, respectively.

ServiceRouter(config)# router bgp 23

ServiceRouter(config-bgp)# neighbor 192.168.86.3 remote-as 23

ServiceRouter(config-bgp)# neighbor 192.168.86.3 timers 100 200

ServiceRouter(config-bgp)#

To confirm that timers are updated correctly, use the show ip bgp neighbors command. The following example output shows that the keepalive interval has been changed to 100 seconds and the hold timer has been changed to 200 seconds:

ServiceRouter> show ip bgp neighbors

BGP neighbor is 192.168.86.3, remote AS 23, ibgp link, Peer index 1

BGP version 4, remote router ID 192.168.86.3

BGP state = Established, up for 1d05h

Peer is directly attached, interface GigabitEthernet 2/0

Last read 0.868226, hold time = 200, keepalive interval is 100 seconds

Last written 00:00:09, keepalive timer expiry due 00:01:30

Received 78444 messages, 0 notifications, 0 bytes in queue

Sent 1788 messages, 0 notifications, 0 bytes in queue

Connections established 1; dropped 0

Last reset by us never, due to process restart

Last reset by peer never, due to process restart

Neighbor capabilities:

Dynamic capability: advertised (mp, refresh, gr)

Dynamic capability (old): advertised

Route refresh capability (new): advertised received

Route refresh capability (old): advertised received

Address family IPv4 Unicast: advertised received

For address family: IPv4 Unicast

BGP table version 1, neighbor version 810749

8518 accepted paths consume 613296 bytes of memory

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-266

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

0 sent paths

Local host: 192.168.86.47, Local port: 58920

Foreign host: 192.168.86.3, Foreign port: 179

fd = 35

ServiceRouter>

Related Commands Command router bgp

Description

Configures a BGP routing process.

neighbor

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-267

net

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

net

To configure an IS-IS network entity title (NET) for a Connectionless Network Service (CLNS) routing process, use the net IS-IS configuration command. To remove a NET, use the no form of this command. net network_entity_title no net network_entity_title

Syntax Description network_entity_title NET that specifies the area address and the system ID for a CLNS routing process. Either an address or a name may be specified.

Command Defaults No NET is configured and the CLNS process does not start without a NET.

Command Modes IS-IS configuration (config-isis) mode.

Usage Guidelines Under most circumstances, one and only one NET must be configured.

A NET is a network service access point (NSAP) where the last byte is always zero. On a Proximity

Engine running IS-IS, a NET can be 8 to 20 bytes. The last byte is always the n-selector and must be zero.

The six bytes directly in front of the n-selector are the system ID. The system ID length is a fixed size and cannot be changed. The system ID must be unique throughout each area (Level 1) and throughout the backbone (Level 2).

All bytes in front of the system ID are the area ID.

Even when IS-IS is used to perform IP routing only (that is, no CLNS routing enabled), a NET must still be configured to define the router system ID and area ID.

• Area ID must match the area ID of the IS-IS router that the Proximity Engine is pairing with.

• System ID is unique for each Proximity Engine.

Examples The following example shows how to use the net command to configure a router with system ID

0001.0c11.1111.00 and area ID 47.0004.004d.0001:

ServiceRouter(config)# router isis

ServiceRouter(config-isis)# net 47.0004.004d.0001.0001.0c11.1111.00

ServiceRouter(config-isis)#

Related Commands Command router isis

Description

Enables the IS-IS routing protocol and specifies an IS-IS process.

2-268

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

netmon

netmon

To display the transmit and receive activity on an interface, use the netmon command in EXEC configuration mode.

netmon line

Syntax Description line netmon options, -h to get help.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The netmon utility displays the transmit and receive activity on each interface in megabits per second

(Mbps), bytes per second (Bps), and packets per second (pps).

Examples The following example shows how to display the netmon list of options:

ServiceEngine# netmon -h

Usage: netmon [<loop-time-in-seconds>] [<iterations>]

(runs forever if iterations not specified)

Related Commands Command Description gulp Captures lossless gigabit packets and writes them to disk.

netstatr ss tcpmon

Displays the rate of change of netstat statistics.

Dumps socket statistics.

Searches all TCP connections.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-269

netstatr

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

netstatr

Syntax Description

To display the rate of change of netstat statistics, use the netstatr command in EXEC configuration mode.

netstatr line line netmon options, -h to get help.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The netstatr utility displays the rate of change, per second, of netstat statistics for a given period of time.

The average rate per second is displayed, regardless of the sample period. To view the list of options, enter netstatr -h .

Examples The following example shows how to display the netstart list of options:

ServiceEngine# netstatr -h

Usage: netstatr [-v] [<loop-time-in-seconds>] [<iterations>]

-v verbose mode

(default is 3 sec loop time, run forever)

Related Commands Command Description gulp Captures lossless gigabit packets and writes them to disk.

netmon ss tcpmon

Displays the transmit and receive activity on an interface.

Dumps socket statistics.

Searches all TCP connections.

2-270

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands network area

network area

To define the interfaces on which OSPF runs and the area ID for those interfaces, use the network area router configuration command. To disable OSPF routing for interfaces defined with the address wildcard-mask pair, use the no form of this command.

network ip_address wildcard_mask area area_id no network ip_address wildcard_mask area area_id

Syntax Description ip_address wildcard_mask area_id

IP address in the form of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

IP-address-type mask that includes “don’t care” bits.

Area that is to be associated with the OSPF address range. It can be specified as either a decimal value or as an IP address. If you intend to associate areas with IP subnets, you can specify a subnet address as the value of the area_id.

Note Any individual interface can only be attached to a single area. If the address ranges specified for different areas overlap, the software adopts the first area in the network command list and ignore the subsequent overlapping portions. In general, it is recommend that you configure address ranges that do not overlap to avoid inadvertent conflicts.

Command Defaults OSPF routing for interfaces is disabled by default.

Command Modes OSPF configuration (config-ospf) mode.

Usage Guidelines The ip_address and wildcard_mask arguments together allow you to define one or multiple interfaces to be associated with a specific OSPF area using a single command. Using the wildcard_mask argument allows you to define one or multiple interfaces to be associated with a specific OSPF area using a single command. If you intend to associate areas with IP subnets, you can specify a subnet address as the value of the area_id argument.

For OSPF to operate on the interface, the primary address of the interface must be covered by the network area command. If the network area command covers only the secondary address, it does not enable OSPF over that interface.

The Proximity Engine sequentially evaluates the ip_address wildcard_mask pair for each interface as follows:

1. The wildcard_mask is logically ORed with the interface IP address.

2. The wildcard_mask is logically ORed with the ip_address argument in the network command.

3. The software compares the two resulting values. If they match, OSPF is enabled on the associated interface and this interface is attached to the OSPF area specified.

There is no limit to the number of network area commands that can be used on the router.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-271

network area

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Note Any individual interface can only be attached to a single area. If the address ranges specified for different areas overlap, the software adopts the first area in the network command list and ignores the subsequent overlapping portions. In general, we recommend that you configure address ranges that do not overlap to avoid inadvertent conflicts.

When a more specific OSPF network range is removed, interfaces belonging to that network range are retained and remain active if, and only if, a less specific network range exists.

For example, consider the following configuration: router ospf

network 205.188.129.16 0.0.0.3 area 20

network 205.188.129.40 0.0.0.3 area 20

network 205.188.129.44 0.0.0.3 area 20

network 205.188.129.96 0.0.0.3 area 20

network 205.188.129.96 0.0.127.255 area 20

Enter the following: no network 205.188.129.40 0.0.0.3 area 20

Interfaces falling into the network range 205.188.129.40/0.0.0.3 still remains active because the superset, 205.188.128.0/0.0.127.255, exists for area 20. A more specific network statement causes interfaces belonging to that range to be removed from a different area only if a less specific network statement (superset) exists.

Consider a configuration such as the following: router ospf 1

network 205.188.128.0 0.0.127.255 area 20

If the following network statement is entered: network 205.188.129.96 0.0.0.3 area 40 the interfaces belonging to range 205.188.129.96/0.0.0.3 are removed from area 20 and moved to area

40. Network statements with identical ranges but different area IDs are considered as area changes. For example, the following network statements cause interfaces belonging to network range

205.188.129.40/0.0.0.3 to move from area 20 to area 40: network 205.188.129.40 0.0.0.3 area 20 network 205.188.129.40 0.0.0.3 area 40

Examples The following example shows how to initialize OSPF routing process. Area 0 enables OSPF.

ServiceRouter(config)# router ospf

ServiceRouter(config-ospf)# network 192.168.78.0 0.0.0.255 area 0

ServiceRouter(config-ospf)#

Related Commands Command router ospf

Description

Enables the OSPF routing process.

2-272

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands no (Global configuration)

no (Global configuration)

To undo a command in Global configuration mode or set its defaults, use the no form of a command in

Global configuration mode. no command

Note The commands you can use with a VDS-IS device (including the no form of each command) vary based on whether the device is configured as a CDSM, SE, or SR. See

Table 2-1

to identify the commands available for a specific device.

Syntax Description command Specifies the command type; see the

Usage Guidelines section for valid

values.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines Valid values for command are as follows: aaa access-lists acquirer asset authentication bandwidth banner bitrate cdsm clock cms device direct-server-return disk dns exec-timeout external-ip ftp help

Configures AAA

1

.

Configures access control list entries.

Configures acquisition parameters.

Configures the asset tag name string.

Configures the authentication.

Configures bandwidth controls.

Defines a login banner.

Configures the bit rate.

Configures the CDSM settings.

Configures the time-of-day clock.

Configures the CMS

2

.

Configures the device mode.

Configures direct-server-return.

Configures disk-related settings.

Configures the SE DNS cache.

Configures the EXEC timeout.

Configures up to eight external (NAT) IP addresses.

Configures FTP caching-related parameters.

Configures the assistance for the command-line interface.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-273

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands no (Global configuration) hostname http icap interface ip ip access-list kernel ldap logging network-filesystem ntp offline-operation pace port-channel primary-interface radius-server rtsp rule snmp-server sshd tcp telnet enable transaction-logs username wmt

Configures the system’s network name.

Configures HTTP-related parameters.

Configures the ICAP feature for the HTTP protocol.

Configures a Gigabit Ethernet interface.

Configures IP parameters.

Configures IP access lists.

Enables access to the kernel debugger.

Configures LDAP

3

parameters.

Configures the syslog

4

.

Configures the network file system server and client.

Configures the NTP

5

.

Configures the offline service operation.

Configures the Movie Streamer 7H90C0CHand WMT pacing bandwidth and bit rate.

Configures port channel global options.

Configures a primary interface.

Configures RADIUS server authentication.

Configures RTSP

6

-related parameters.

Configures the Rules Template.

Configures the SNMP server.

Configures the SSH

7

service.

Configures global TCP parameters.

Configures Telnet services.

Configures the transaction logging.

Establishes username authentication.

Configures WMT

8

parameters.

1.

AAA = authentication, authorization, and accounting

2.

CMS = Centralized Management System

3.

LDAP = Lightweight Directory Access Protocol

4.

syslog = system logging

5.

NTP = Network Time Protocol

6.

RTSP = Real-time Streaming Protocol

7.

SSH = Secure Shell

8.

WMT = Windows Media Technologies7H90C0CH

Use the no command to disable functions or negate a command. If you need to negate a specific command, such as the default gateway IP address, you must include the specific string in your command, such as no ip default-gateway ip-address .

2-274

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands no (interface configuration)

no (interface configuration)

To negate a Gigabit Ethernet or port channel command in interface configuration mode or set its defaults, use the no command in interface configuration mode.

no interface { GigabitEthernet slot/port | PortChannel { 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 } [ ip | address [ ip-address | netmask | secondary ] ] | Standby group_num }

Syntax Description GigabitEthernet slot / port

PortChannel

1

2

Standby group_num

Selects a Gigabit Ethernet interface to configure.

Slot and port number for the selected interface. The slot range is 0 to 2; the port range is 0 to 3. The slot number and port number are separated with a forward slash character (/).

Selects the EtherChannel of interfaces to be configured.

Sets the port channel interface number to 1.

Sets the port channel interface number to 2.

Sets the standby group for the interface.

Group number for the selected interface. The group number range is 1 to 4.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes Interface configuration (config-if) mode.

Related Commands Command Description interface Configures a Gigabit Ethernet or port channel interface.

show interface Displays the hardware interface information.

show running-config Displays the current running configuration information on the terminal.

show startup-config Displays the startup configuration.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-275

ntp

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

ntp

Syntax Description

To configure the Network Time Protocol (NTP) server and to allow the system clock to be synchronized by a time server, use the ntp command in Global configuration mode. To disable this function, use the no form of this command.

ntp server { ip_address | hostname } [ ip_addresses | hostnames ] no ntp server { ip_address | hostname } [ ip_addresses | hostnames ] server ip_address hostname ip_addresses hostnames

Sets the NTP server IP address.

NTP server IP address.

NTP server hostname.

(Optional) IP address of the time server providing the clock synchronization

(maximum of four).

(Optional) Hostname of the time server providing the clock synchronization

(maximum of four).

Command Defaults None

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines Use this command to synchronize the SE, SR or CDSM clock with the specified NTP server. The ntp server command enables NTP servers for timekeeping purposes and is the only way to synchronize the system clock with a time server.

When you synchronize the CDSM clock with an NTP server, there is a possibility of all devices registered with the CDSM being shown as offline and then reverted to online status. This situation can occur when synchronization with the NTP server sets the CDSM clock forward in time by an interval greater than at least two polling intervals or when the software clock on the CDSM is changed by a similar value using the clock command in EXEC configuration mode. The CDSM determines the status of devices in the VDS-IS network depending on when it was last contacted by the devices for a getUpdate request. If you set the CDSM clock ahead in time, you have added that amount of time to the period since the CDSM received the last getUpdate request. However, it is only a transient effect. Once the devices contact the CDSM for their next getUpdate request after the clock setting change, the CDSM GUI reports the status of all devices correctly.

Examples The following example shows how to configure the IP address of the time server providing the clock synchronization:

ServiceEngine(config)# ntp 172.16.22.44

The following example shows how to reset the time server providing the clock synchronization:

ServiceEngine(config)# no ntp 172.16.22.44

2-276

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Related Commands Command clock show clock show ntp status

Description

Sets or clears clock functions or updates the calendar.

Displays the system clock.

Displays the Network Time Protocol parameters.

ntp

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-277

ntpdate

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

ntpdate

Syntax Description

To set the software clock (time and date) using a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server, use the ntpdate command in EXEC configuration mode.

ntpdate { hostname | ip_address } hostname ip_address

NTP hostname.

NTP server IP address.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines Use NTP to find the current time of day and set the SE current time to match. The ntpdate command synchronizes the software clock with the hardware clock.

Examples The following example shows how to set the software clock of the SE using an NTP server:

ServiceEngine# ntpdate 10.11.23.40

Related Commands Command clock set show clock

Description

Sets the time and date.

Displays the system clock.

2-278

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

ping

ping

To send echo packets for diagnosing basic network connectivity on networks, use the ping command in

EXEC configuration mode.

On the CDSM and SE: ping { hostname | ip_address }

On the SR: ping { hostname | ip_address | srp { hostname | ip_address }}

Syntax Description hostname ip_address srp

Hostname of system to ping.

IP address of system to ping.

Pings the Service Routing Protocol.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines To use this command with the hostname argument, be sure that DNS functionality is configured on your

SE. To force the timeout of a nonresponsive host or to eliminate a loop cycle, press Ctrl-C .

Following are sample results of the ping command:

• Normal response—The normal response occurs in 1 to 10 seconds, depending on network traffic.

Destination does not respond—If the host does not respond, a no answer from host

message appears in 10 seconds.

Destination unreachable—The gateway for this destination indicates that the destination is unreachable.

• Network or host unreachable—The SE found no corresponding entry in the route table.

Examples The following example shows how to test the basic network connectivity with a host:

ServiceEngine# ping 172.19.131.189

PING 172.19.131.189 (172.19.131.189) from 10.1.1.21 : 56(84) bytes of data.

64 bytes from 172.19.131.189: icmp_seq=0 ttl=249 time=613 usec

64 bytes from 172.19.131.189: icmp_seq=1 ttl=249 time=485 usec

64 bytes from 172.19.131.189: icmp_seq=2 ttl=249 time=494 usec

64 bytes from 172.19.131.189: icmp_seq=3 ttl=249 time=510 usec

64 bytes from 172.19.131.189: icmp_seq=4 ttl=249 time=493 usec

--- 172.19.131.189 ping statistics ---

5 packets transmitted, 5 packets received, 0% packet loss round-trip min/avg/max/mdev = 0.485/0.519/0.613/0.047 ms

ServiceEngine#

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-279

ping srp

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

ping srp

To ping the Service Routing Protocol ring, use the ping command in EXEC configuration mode.

ping srp

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines In an ipv4 or ipv6 environment, the ping command uses the ipv4 or ipv6 address. The ping srp command uses The DHT key (64 bits hex-id).

In the example below, the node that owns the DHT key (node SR-205-5) responds to this ping. The TTL is 64, and the response time is 0.330585 ms.

Examples The following example shows how to test the basic network connectivity with a host:

ServiceRouter# ping srp

6aab6568d794a77bc20633b0cb3aef14d906e4aef00a3fa2a93973524337e40c

Ping response from SR-205-5:9000, ttl=64, time=0.330585 ms

id=6aab6568d794a77bc20633b0cb3aef14d906e4aef00a3fa2a93973524337e40c

Ping response from SR-205-5:9000, ttl=64, time=0.282069 ms

id=6aab6568d794a77bc20633b0cb3aef14d906e4aef00a3fa2a93973524337e40c

Ping response from SR-205-5:9000, ttl=64, time=0.278821 ms

id=6aab6568d794a77bc20633b0cb3aef14d906e4aef00a3fa2a93973524337e40c

Ping response from SR-205-5:9000, ttl=64, time=0.279144 ms

id=6aab6568d794a77bc20633b0cb3aef14d906e4aef00a3fa2a93973524337e40c

Ping response from SR-205-5:9000, ttl=64, time=0.283236 ms

id=6aab6568d794a77bc20633b0cb3aef14d906e4aef00a3fa2a93973524337e40c

ServiceRouter#

Related Commands Command traceroute srp

Description

Traces the route of the Service Routing Protocol ring.

2-280

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

ping6

To ping the IPv6 address, use the ping6 command in EXEC configuration mode. ping6 line ip_address

Syntax Description line ip_address

Destination Host or IP Address.

IP address of system to ping.

ping6

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Examples The following example shows how to ping the IPv6 address:

ServiceEngine# ping6 fec0::100/64

Related Commands Command ping

Description

Sends echo packets for diagnosing basic network connectivity on networks.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-281

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands port-channel

port-channel

To configure the port channel load balancing, use the port-channel command in Global configuration mode. To disable load balancing, use the no form of this command.

port-channel load-balance { dst-ip | dst-mac | dst-port | round-robin | src-dst-mac | src-dst-port

| src-port } no port-channel load-balance

Syntax Description load-balance dst-ip dst-mac dst-port round-robin src-dst-mac src-dst-port src-port

Configures the load balancing method.

Specifies the load balancing method using destination IP addresses.

Specifies the load balancing method using destination MAC addresses.

Specifies the load balancing method using destination Layer 4 port.

Specifies the load balancing method using round-robin sequential, cyclical resource allocation (each interface in the channel group).

Specifies the load balancing method using source and destination MAC address.

Specifies the load balancing method using source and destination port.

Specifies the load balancing method using source Layer 4 port.

Command Defaults Round-robin is the default load balancing method.

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines The port-channel load-balance command configures one of three load balancing algorithms and provides flexibility in choosing interfaces when an Ethernet frame is sent. The round-robin keyword allows evenly balanced usage of identical network interfaces in a channel group. Because this command takes effect globally, if two channel groups are configured, they must use the same load balancing.

The other balancing options give you the flexibility to choose specific interfaces (by IP address, MAC address, port) when sending an Ethernet frame. The source and destination options, while calculating the outgoing interface, take into account both the source and destination (MAC address or port).

Because the Internet Streamer VDS-IS software normally starts IP packets or Ethernet frames, it does not support hashing based on the source IP address and source MAC address. The round-robin keyword is the default load balancing algorithm to evenly distribute traffic among several identical network interfaces.

To remove a port channel, use the no port-channel interface PortChannel command.

Note Ingress traffic from NAS mounts is not distributed evenly over port channels. Separate interfaces can be used for NAS outside of the port-channel configuration to achieve better load balancing. Ingress traffic to the VDS-IS is determined by the switch, this applies to all application traffic over port channels.

2-282

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Note For load balancing, the round robin method alone is not supported with LACP.

port-channel

Examples The following example shows how to configure the round-robin load balancing method on an SE:

ServiceEngine(config)# port-channel load-balance round-robin

Related Commands Command interface

Description

Configures a Gigabit Ethernet or port-channel interface

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-283

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands primary-interface

primary-interface

To configure the primary interface for the VDS-IS network, use the primary-interface command in

Global configuration mode. Use the no form of the command to remove the configured primary interface.

primary-interface { GigabitEthernet 1-2 / port | PortChannel 1-2 | Standby group_num } no primary-interface { GigabitEthernet 1-2 / port | PortChannel 1-2 | Standby group_num }

Syntax Description GigabitEthernet

1-2/ port

PortChannel

1-2

Standby group_num

Selects a Gigabit Ethernet interface as the VDS-IS network primary interface.

Gigabit Ethernet slot numbers 1 or 2.

Port number of the Gigabit Ethernet interface.

Selects a port channel interface as the VDS-IS network primary interface.

Port channel number 1 or 2.

Selects a standby group as the VDS-IS network primary interface.

Standby group number.

Command Defaults The default primary interface is the first operational interface on which a link beat is detected. Interfaces with lower-number IDs are polled first (for example, GigabitEthernet 0/0 is checked before 1/0). Primary interface configuration is required for the proper functioning of the Centralized Management System

(CMS). After devices are registered to the CDSM, the CDSM uses the configured primary interface to communicated with the registered devices.

You cannot enable the VDS-IS network without specifying the primary interface. Also, you must have chosen the primary interface before you enable the CMS. The primary interface can be changed without disabling the VDS-IS network. The primary interface specifies the default route for an interface. To change the primary interface, choose a different interface as the primary interface.

Note Whenever the IP address of the primary interface is changed, the DNS server must be restarted.

You can select a standby interface as the primary interface (you can enter the primary-interface

Standby group_num command) to specify a standby group as the primary interface on an SE.

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines The primary-interface command in Global configuration mode allows the administrator to specify the primary interface for the VDS-IS network.

The primary interface can be changed without disabling the VDS-IS network. To change the primary interface, re-enter the command string and specify a different interface.

2-284

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands primary-interface

Note If you use the restore factory-default preserve basic-config command, the configuration for the primary interface is not preserved. On a device in a VDS-IS network, if you want to re-enable the VDS-IS network after using the restore factory-default preserve basic-config command , make sure to reconfigure the primary interface after the factory defaults are restored.

Examples The following example shows how to specify the Gigabit Ethernet slot 1 port 0 as the primary interface on an SE:

ServiceEngine(config)# primary-interface GigabitEthernet 1/0

The following example shows how to specify the Gigabit Ethernet slot 2 port 0 as the primary interface on an SE:

ServiceEngine(config)# primary-interface GigabitEthernet 2/0

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-285

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands proximity algorithm bgp

proximity algorithm bgp

To enable a Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) proximity algorithm option for the Proximity Engine, use the proximity algorithm bgp command in Global configuration mode.

To disable a BGP proximity algorithm option, use the no form of the command. proximity algorithm bgp { best-path | location-community [ strict ] | redirect } no proximity algorithm bgp { best-path | location-community [ strict ] | redirect }

Syntax Description best-path location-community strict redirect

Specifies the BGP Autonomous Systems (AS) path length-based proximity.

Specifies that the community-based proximity algorithm be used.

(Optional) Strict matching.

Specifies the BGP AS-based redirection.

Command Defaults By default, the BGP algorithms are turned off.

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines When BGP is configured as the routing protocol, the proximity algorithm bgp command enables a BGP proximity option for the Proximity Engine. The Proximity algorithm bgp commands are not effective unless BGP is configured first.

Best-Path

When the BGP routing protocol is configured the Proximity Engine learns routes from other AS, and therefore can rank proximity target addressees (PTAs) that originate in an external AS using not only the basic BGP proximity (which ranks the PTAs based on their next-hop), but also based on the AS path length of the PTAs. This capability is enabled by the proximity algorithm bgp best-path command. A

PTA that has a longer AS path length is less preferred. It should be noted that the Proximity Engines takes into account the AS path length of the PTAs only if the proximity source address (PSA) is originated in the same AS as the Proximity Engine, since the AS path length learnt by the Proximity

Engine is with reference to its own AS. If the PSA originates in an external AS, it is recommended that the proximity algorithm bgp redirect be enabled to redirect the request to a Proximity Engine in the same AS as the PSA if such a Proximity Engine exists.

Location Community

When the proximity algorithm bgp location-community command is enabled, additional location information is included in the proximity calculation to influence application-level traffic optimization in the network. Many service providers are already using BGP community values to identify prefixes originated from a given POP. Taking advantage of the community information can greatly improve the scalability and flexibility of the proximity calculation algorithm.

2-286

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands proximity algorithm bgp

BGP community-based proximity is used when community-based proximity option is enabled and the

PSA has a BGP community string that is configured in the location community command. PTAs that have the same BGP community string as the PSA are ranked as more preferred than PTAs that do not have the same BGP community string as the PSA. For the remaining PTAs that have different community strings, they are ranked by either IGP or BGP proximity.

Community-based proximity requires the use of the location community command to configure the

Proximity Engine community values. Each Proximity Engine must be configured with the community numbers that are used within the network to locate the prefix origination point.

When community values are configured, the Proximity Engine creates and maintains a sorted table of communities within BGP. Currently, location community configurations must be manually configured on each Proximity Engine.

Redirect

If the PSA, where the proximity request is initiated, is learned from another AS, the current Proximity

Engine does not have the best knowledge to handle the proximity request. If the proximity redirect option is enabled, the Proximity Engine sends back a Redirect response to the Service Router. The Redirect response contains the list of Proximity Engines that reside in the same AS as the PSA. The Service

Router then sends the proximity request to one of these Proximity Engines.

Configuring Proximity Algorithm BGP

Perform the following steps to configure Proximity Algorithm BGP:

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

Turn on BGP Best Path algorithm in the Proximity Engine.

ServiceRouter(config)# proximity engine enable

ServiceRouter(config)# proximity algorithm bgp best-path

Enable router bgp 1:

ServiceRouter(config)# router bgp 1

ServiceRouter(config)# neighbor 26.0.0.6 remote-as 1

Turn on EBGP in the routers.

Result Analysis

When PSA is 3.1.5.0 and PTA is 33.1.5.0, the returned proximity cost is 2164260884.

ServiceRouter# show ip rib route

3.1.5.0/24, 1 ucast next-hops, 0 mcast next-hops, attached

*via 3.1.5.3, GigabitEthernet 1/0, [0/0], 00:01:59, direct

26.0.0.0/8, 1 ucast next-hops, 0 mcast next-hops, attached

*via 26.0.0.2, GigabitEthernet 2/0, [0/0], 00:01:59, direct

33.1.5.0/24, 1 ucast next-hops, 0 mcast next-hops

*via 26.0.0.6, GigabitEthernet 2/0, [200/0], 00:00:29, bgp-1, internal, tag 2 extended route information: AS Hops 1, BGP PxEer AS 1

62.0.0.0/8, 1 ucast next-hops, 0 mcast next-hops

*via 26.0.0.6, GigabitEthernet 2/0, [115/20], 00:01:27, isis-p1, L1

The AS Path length can be calculated from the show ip route command:

AS Path length for PTA 33.1.5.0 - 1

The 31st community bit set to 1 since no location community match, AS Path length is 1(set the 24th bit to 1), the IGP cost is 20.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-287

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands proximity algorithm bgp

2147483648+ 16777216 + 20 = 2164260884

The proximity calculation rendered using the following formula: rating(PSA,PTA)= 2^31Cc comm_match(PSA,PTA) +2^24CBPAS_path_len(PTA)+

IGP_rating(PSA,PTA)

The result is given in 32 bits.

The 31st Location community is zero if the location community matches. It is effective only when the BGP location community algorithm is turned on.

The bits (24-30) denote the AS Best path distance. It is effective only on turning on the BGP redirect algorithm.

The the remaining 24 bits hold the IGP rating returned by the IGP daemons. The IGP daemons returns 32-bit values that are normalized to occupy the 24 bits.

Examples Proximity Algorithm Redirect

The following example shows how to use the proximity redirect option:

ServiceRouter(config)# proximity algorithm bgp redirect

First, each Proximity Engine must form a DHT ring.

ProximityEngine1(config)# router srp

ProximityEngine1(config-srp)# domain 100

ProximityEngine2(config)# router srp

ProximityEngine2(config-srp)# domain 100

ProximityEngine1(config-srp)# bootstrap 3.4.0.7

Configure both the Proximity Servers on the Service Router and enable proximity-based-routing:

ServiceRouter(config)# service-router proximity-based-routing proximity-server 3.4.0.7

ServiceRouter(config)# service-router proximity-based-routing proximity-server 3.1.14.17

ServiceRouter(config)# service-router proximity-based-routing enable

Next, enable BGP on both the Proximity Engines such that both are in different AS:

ProximityEngine1(config)# router bgp 1

ProximityEngine1(config-bgp)# neighbor 3.4.0.12 remote-as 1

ProximityEngine2(config)# router bgp 2

ProximityEngine2(config-bgp)# neighbor 3.1.14.12 remote-as 2

For Proximity Redirect to work efficiently, it is recommended that there are at least two Proximity

Servers, one each in a different autonomous system.

In the above example each Proximity Engine is connected with routers and routers advertise the routes to the respective Proximity Engines and the neighbor IP addresses are the corresponding neighbor router's directly connected interfaces:

ProximityEngine1# sh ip bgp all

BGP routing table information for address family IPv4 Unicast

BGP table version is 5, local router ID is 3.4.0.7

Status: s-suppressed, x-deleted, S-stale, d-dampened, h-history, *-valid, >-best

Path type: i-internal, e-external, c-confed, l-local, a-aggregate, r-redist

Origin codes: I - IGP, E - EGP, ? - incomplete

Network Next Hop Metric LocPrf Weight Path

2-288

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands proximity algorithm bgp

*>i3.1.14.0/24 3.4.0.12 0 100 0 2 I

*>i3.4.0.0/16 3.4.0.12 0 100 0 I

BGP routing table information for address family IPv4 Multicast

ProximityEngine2# sh ip bgp all

BGP routing table information for address family IPv4 Unicast

BGP table version is 5, local router ID is 3.4.0.8

Status: s-suppressed, x-deleted, S-stale, d-dampened, h-history, *-valid, >-best

Path type: i-internal, e-external, c-confed, l-local, a-aggregate, r-redist

Origin codes: I - IGP, E - EGP, ? - incomplete

Network Next Hop Metric LocPrf Weight Path

*>i3.1.14.0/24 3.1.14.12 0 100 0 I

*>i3.4.0.0/16 3.1.14.12 0 100 0 1 I

BGP routing table information for address family IPv4 Multicast

Next, it needs to be checked if the DHT Ring is formed appropriately:

ServiceRouter# show srp neighbor

Codes: T - local node, L - leafset, P - primary, S - secondary, B - backup

I - Intransitive, R - Replicate Set, D - delay, ND - New Delay

H - hold time, U - up time

Number of neighbors in the database: 1

RPL c152b683f000c6be3ff82214e4d8084d52a44dee85b29d67c49e60fbaf3e4737 via U6-CDE205-2 [3.1.14.17] 9000, D=0.223891 ms, ND=0.230440 ms

H=00:00:07, U=00:00:15

ProximityEngine2# show srp neighbor

Codes: T - local node, L - leafset, P - primary, S - secondary, B - backup

I - Intransitive, R - Replicate Set, D - delay, ND - New Delay

H - hold time, U - up time

Number of neighbors in the database: 1

RPL 97d35b9f3cb020799d9cbfec2adcca50e9644f2613f041648734459d29f88a0d via U6-CDE205-1 [3.4.0.7] 9000, D=0.229732 ms, ND=0.223568 ms

H=00:00:08, U=00:00:22

Where 3.4.0.7 is ProximityEngine1’s interface and 3.1.14.17 is ProximityEngine2’s interface and is stored in each other tables.

When a request arrives from the client machine, whose client IP belongs to the 3.4.0.0/16 network

(which happens to be from AS-1), say for example, 3.4.0.10, the SR looks up in the configured Proximity

Servers and selects the Proximity Server with the lowest IP address, which in this case happens to be

3.1.14.17.

The SR would send the SOAP request with the PSA 3.4.0.10 to ProximityEngine2 (3.1.14.17).

ProximityEngine2, would lookup the URIB table to find out if there is another Proximity Engine from the same AS. Since, in this case, there is ProximityEngine1 in AS-1 from where the request has emanated, it returns a Redirect message with ProximityEngine1’s IP address as the request end-point.

The SR redirects the SOAP request to the ProximityEngine1.

ProximityEngine1 would look up its URIB table and return the cost for the available PTAs.

The Service Router, upon receiving the cost from the ProximityEngine1, would choose the PTA with lowest cost and give the SE redirection to the client.

The client would now contact the SE and play the content.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-289

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands proximity algorithm bgp

Community-Based Proximity Algorithm Example

The following example shows how to use the proximity algorithm bgp command to enable the community-based proximity algorithm:

ServiceRouter(config)# proximity algorithm bgp location-community

ServiceRouter(config)# exit

ServiceRouter# show ip proximity algorithm

Proximity algorithm: bgp community

The following example shows how to configure community values. In this example, the first location community command configures the community value 100:10 and the second command configures community values from 100:100 to 100:200:

ServiceRouter(config)# router bgp 23

ServiceRouter(config-bgp)# location community 100:10

ServiceRouter(config-bgp)# location community 100:100-100:200

The following example shows how to enable the proximity redirect option:

ServiceRouter(config)# proximity algorithm bgp redirect

First, each Proximity Engine must form a DHT ring:

ServiceRouter(config)# router srp

ServiceRouter(config-srp)# domain 100

ServiceRouter(config-srp)# bootstrap 192.168.10.1

Each Proximity Engine must advertise its interface address to the BGP cloud by configuring IGP for

OSPF and IS-IS or configuring BGP with the neighbor.

The following example is for OSPF:

ServiceRouter(config)# router ospf

ServiceRouter(config-ospf)# network 192.168.10.0 255.255.255.0 area 0

The following example is for configuring BGP:

ServiceRouter(config)# router bgp

ServiceRouter(config-bgp)# neighbor 192.168.82.1 remote-as 23

The following examples shows how to configure the BGP AS path length-based proximity. This example is for the same AS configuration:

ServiceRouter(config)# proximity algorithm bgp best-path

ServiceRouter(config)# router bgp 23

ServiceRouter(config-bgp)# neighbor 192.168.82.1 remote-as 23

The following example is for a different AS configuration:

ServiceRouter(config)# proximity algorithm bgp best-path

ServiceRouter(config)# router bgp 10

ServiceRouter(config-bgp)# neighbor 192.168.82.1 remote-as 23

Proximity Algorith BGP Best-Path Example

The following example shows how to turn on the BGP Best-Path algorithm:

ProximityEngine(config)# proximity algorithm bgp best-path

ProximityEngine# show ip bgp 3.1.14.0

BGP routing table entry for 3.1.14.0/24, version 4

Paths: (1 available, best #1)

Flags: on xmit-list, is in urib, is best urib route

2-290

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands proximity algorithm bgp

Path type: internal, path is valid, is best path

AS-Path: 2 , path sourced external to AS

3.4.0.12 (metric 0) from 3.4.0.12 (3.4.0.12)

Origin IGP, MED 0, localpref 100, weight 0

Community: 1:1

Not advertised to any peer

The following is a sample of the service-router logs with respect to the cost returned by the Proximity

Engine:

02/08/2010 07:34:42.290(Local)(5792)TRCE:SRNetProxClient.cpp:86->

Target

Hostname => U6-WAE612-2

IpAddress => 3.4.0.14

Rating => 2147483648

02/08/2010 07:34:42.290(Local)(5792)TRCE:SRNetProxClient.cpp:86->

Target

Hostname => U6-WAE612-1

IpAddress => 3.1.14.7

Rating => 2164260864

In the previous example, since the PTA 3.1.14.7 has a higher cost, the PTA 3.4.0.17 gets a higher preference owing to the lower cost.

The following example shows how to verify proper connectivity between the two Proximity Engines:

ProximityEngine1# show srp neighbor

Codes: T - local node, L - leafset, P - primary, S - secondary, B - backup

I - Intransitive, R - Replicate Set, D - delay, ND - New Delay

H - hold time, U - up time

Number of neighbors in the database: 1

RPL c152b683f000c6be3ff82214e4d8084d52a44dee85b29d67c49e60fbaf3e4737 via U6-CDE205-2 [3.1.14.17] 9000, D=0.395056 ms, ND=0.378471 ms

H=00:00:09, U=00:38:37

ProximityEngine1# show srp database c9bc3e170457a6a08d8a218a15a00d8feb73e4295d06f7e014b6f66fee01c9e4: 793

Enter the same commands to check the SRP connection on the other Proximity engine:

ServiceRouter# show srp neighbor

Codes: T - local node, L - leafset, P - primary, S - secondary, B - backup

I - Intransitive, R - Replicate Set, D - delay, ND - New Delay

H - hold time, U - up time

Number of neighbors in the database: 1

RPL 97d35b9f3cb020799d9cbfec2adcca50e9644f2613f041648734459d29f88a0d via U6-CDE205-1 [3.4.0.7] 9000, D=0.495889 ms, ND=0.470399 ms

H=00:00:07, U=00:40:57

ProximityEngine2# show srp database c9bc3e170457a6a08d8a218a15a00d8feb73e4295d06f7e014b6f66fee01c9e4: 793

Related Commands Command show ip proximity algorithm

Description

Displays the proximity algorithm options currently in use by this Proximity

Engine.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-291

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands proximity engine enable

proximity engine enable

To enable the Proximity Engine, use the proximity engine enable command in Global configuration mode. To disable the Proximity Engine, use the no form of this command.

proximity engine enable no proximity engine enable

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines The Proximity Engine is a device mode which needs to be enabled on the Service Router in order to enable dynamic routing protocols OSPF/IS-IS/BGP. You can turn on the Proximity Engine functionality using the proximity engine enable command. Only after enabling the Proximity Engine, all the routing functionality is enabled and related commands are unlocked. Once the Proximity Engine is enabled, you can turn on either OSPF or IS-IS for IGP and/or BGP. But in the Proximity Engine device, we do not make use of the OSPF process-id, which we generally do on the router.

When disabling the Proximity Engine after issuing the no proximity engine enable command, you are asked to confirm this action because all Proximity Engine configurations are lost when you enter this command.

Examples The following example shows how to enable the Proximity Engine:

ServiceRouter# configure terminal

ServiceRouter(config)# proximity engine enable

The following example shows how to disable the Proximity Engine:

ServiceRouter# configure terminal

ServiceRouter(config)# no proximity engine enable

All Proximity Engine configuration will be lost! Proceed? [ no ] yes

ServiceRouter(config)#

The following example shows how to enable OSPF:

ServiceRouter# config

ServiceRouter (config)# proximity engine enable

Starting Proximity Engine ....

Proximity Engine Started.

ServiceRouter (config)# router ospf

ServiceRouter (config-ospf)# network 15.0.0.0 ?

A.B.C.D IP wildcard mask

ServiceRouter (config-ospf)# network 15.0.0.0 0.255.255.255 ?

area Configure area properties

ServiceRouter (config-ospf)# network 15.0.0.0 0.255.255.255 area 0 ServiceRouter#

ServiceRouter (config-ospf)#

Note OSPF process ID is used.

2-292

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands proximity engine enable

Enter the following commands on the router:

Router (config)# router ospf 1

Router (config-ospf)# network 15.0.0.0 0.255.255.255 area 0

Router (config-ospf)#

<Turned on OSPF debugging on Router>

*Jun 29 01:14:08.642: OSPF: Interface GigabitEthernet0/0 going Up *Jun 29 01:14:09.142:

OSPF: Build router LSA for area 0, router ID 2.2.2.2, seq 0x80000001, process 1 *Jun 29

... Output omitted

<2.2.2.2 is the Router-id of the Router>

Verify adjacency on the Proximity Engine by entering the following commands:

ServiceRouter# show ip ospf route

OSPF Process ID p1 context default, Routing Table

(D) denotes route is directly attached (R) denotes route is in

RIB

15.0.0.0/8 (intra)(D) area 0

via 15.0.0.1/GigabitEthernet 2/0*, cost 65535, adv router 3.1.5.2

ServiceRouter# show ip ospf database

OSPF Router with ID (3.1.5.2) (Process ID p1 context default)

Router Link States (Area 0)

Link ID ADV Router Age Seq# Checksum Link

Count

2.2.2.2 2.2.2.2 140 0x80000002 0xb04d 1

3.1.5.2 3.1.5.2 140 0x80000002 0x100d 1

Network Link States (Area 0)

Link ID ADV Router Age Seq# Checksum

15.0.0.1 3.1.5.2 140 0x80000001 0x2408

The following example shows how to enable BGP:

ServiceRouter# config

ServiceRouter(config)# proximity algorithm bgp location-community

!

ServiceRouter(config)# router bgp 1

ServiceRouter(config-bgp)# neighbor 5.45.1.101 remote-as 1 <-- configures a BGP peer in

Autonomous System (AS) 1. This peer advertises BGP routes to the PxE.

ServiceRouter(config-bgp)# location community 1:1 <-- configures 1:1 as a location-community used by BGP location-community proximity algorithm.

ServiceRouter(config-bgp)# exit

The following example shows how to enable IS-IS:

ServiceRouter# config

ServiceRouter(config)# router isis

ServiceRouter(config-isis)# net 49.0000.0000.0205.0002.00 <-- Configures the Network

Entity Title (NET).

ServiceRouter(config-isis)# interface GigabitEthernet 1/0 <-- PxE interface actively running IS-IS.

ServiceRouter(config-isis)# ip router isis

ServiceRouter(config-isis)# exit

ServiceRouter(config-isis)# interface GigabitEthernet 2/0 <-- PxE interface actively running IS-IS.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-293

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands proximity engine enable

ServiceRouter(config-isis)# ip router isis

ServiceRouter(config-isis)# exit

The following example shows how to enable SRP:

ServiceRouter# config

ServiceRouter(config)# router srp

ServiceRouter(config-srp)# bootstrap 172.20.168.89

<-- A boot-strap-node is an existing member of the DHT ring.

ServiceRouter(config-srp)# domain 1 <-- All SRP nodes have the same domain number to be in a DHT ring

ServiceRouter(config-srp)# exit

Related Commands Command service-router proximity-based-routing

Description

Configures proximity-based routing on the Service Router.

2-294

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

pwd

To view the present working directory, use the pwd command in EXEC configuration mode.

pwd pwd

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines Use this command to display the present working directory of the SE.

Examples The following example shows how to view the present working directory:

ServiceEngine# pwd

/local1

Related Commands Command cd dir lls ls

Description

Changes from one directory to another directory.

Displays a detailed list of files contained within the working directory, including names, sizes, and time created.

Provides detailed information about files and subdirectories stored in the present working directory, including size, date, time of creation, sysfs name, and long name of the file.

Lists the files or subdirectory names within a directory.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-295

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands radius-server

radius-server

To configure RADIUS authentication parameters, use the r adius-server command in Global configuration mode. To disable RADIUS authentication parameters, use the no form of this command.

radius-server { enable | host { hostname | host_ipaddr } [ auth-port port ] | key keyword | redirect

{ enable | message reply location url } | retransmit retries | timeout seconds } no radius-server { enable | host { hostname | host_ipaddr } | key | redirect { enable | message reply location url } | retransmit | timeout }

Syntax Description enable host hostname host_ipaddr auth-port port key keyword redirect enable message reply location url retransmit retries timeout seconds

Enables HTTP RADIUS authentication.

Specifies a RADIUS server.

Hostname of the RADIUS server.

IP address of the RADIUS server.

(Optional) Sets the UDP port for the RADIUS Authentication Server.

UDP port number (from 1 to 65535). The default is 1645.

Specifies the encryption key shared with the RADIUS server.

Text of the shared key (maximum of 15 characters).

Redirects the response if an authentication request fails.

Enables the redirect feature.

Replies with an authentication failure message.

Reply message text string (maximum of 24 characters).

Sets the HTML page location, for example, http://www.cisco.com

.

URL destination of authentication failure instructions.

Specifies the number of transmission attempts to an active server.

Number of transmission attempts for a transaction (from 1 to 3).

Time to wait for a RADIUS server to reply.

Wait time in seconds (from 1 to 20).

Command Defaults auth-port port : UDP port 1645 retransmit retries : 2 timeout seconds : 5

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines RADIUS is a client/server authentication and authorization access protocol used by an VDS-IS network device to authenticate users attempting to connect to a network device. The VDS-IS network device functions as a client, passing user information to one or more RADIUS servers. The VDS-IS network

2-296

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands radius-server device permits or denies network access to a user based on the response that it receives from one or more

RADIUS servers. RADIUS uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) for transport between the RADIUS client and server.

You can configure a RADIUS key on the client and server. If you configure a key on the client, it must be the same as the one configured on the RADIUS servers. The RADIUS clients and servers use the key to encrypt all RADIUS packets sent. If you do not configure a RADIUS key, packets are not encrypted.

The key itself is never sent over the network.

Note For more information about how the RADIUS protocol operates, see RFC 2138, Remote Authentication

Dial In User Service (RADIUS) .

RADIUS authentication usually occurs in these instances:

• Administrative login authentication—When an administrator first logs in to the SE to configure the

SE for monitoring, configuration, or troubleshooting purposes. For more information, see the

“Enabling and Disabling Administrative Login Authentication Through RADIUS” section on page 2-297

.

• HTTP request authentication—When an end user sends a service request that requires privileged access to content that is served by the SE. For more information, see the

“Configuring RADIUS

Authentication of HTTP Requests” section on page 2-298

.

RADIUS authentication is disabled by default. You can enable RADIUS authentication and other authentication methods at the same time. You can also specify which method to use first.

To configure RADIUS parameters, use the radius-server command in Global configuration mode. To disable RADIUS authentication parameters, use the no form of this command.

The redirect keyword of the radius-server command redirects an authentication response to a different

Authentication Server if an authentication request using the RADIUS server fails.

Note The following rule command is relevant to RADIUS authentication only if the redirect keyword has been configured.

To exclude domains from RADIUS authentication, use the rule no-auth domain command. RADIUS authentication takes place only if the site requested does not match the specified pattern.

Enabling and Disabling Administrative Login Authentication Through RADIUS

When configuring an SE to use RADIUS to authenticate and authorize administrative login requests, follow these guidelines:

By default, RADIUS authentication and authorization is disabled on an SE.

Before enabling RADIUS authentication on the SE, you must specify at least one RADIUS server for the SE to use.

You can enable RADIUS authentication and other authentication methods at the same time. You can specify which method to use first using the primary keyword. When local authentication is disabled, if you disable all other authentication methods, local authentication is re-enabled automatically.

You can use the CDSM GUI or the CLI to enable RADIUS authentication on an SE.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-297

radius-server

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Tip From the CDSM GUI, choose Devices > General Settings > Authentication . Use the displayed

Authentication Configuration window.

To use the SE CLI to enable RADIUS authentication on an SE, enable RADIUS authentication for normal login mode by entering the authentication login radius command in Global configuration mode as follows:

ServiceEngine(config)# authentication login radius enable [ primary ] [ secondary ]

Use the authentication configuration radius command in Global configuration mode to enable

RADIUS authorization as follows:

ServiceEngine(config)# authentication configuration radius enable [ primary] [secondary]

Note To disable RADIUS authentication and authorization on an SE, use the no radius-server enable command.

Configuring RADIUS Authentication of HTTP Requests

To configure RADIUS authentication for HTTP requests on an SE, configure the RADIUS server settings on the SE and enable RADIUS authentication for HTTP requests on the SE using the radius-server command in Global configuration mode.

Examples The following example shows how to enable the RADIUS client, specify a RADIUS server, specify the

RADIUS key, accept retransmit defaults, and excludes the domain name, mydomain.net, from RADIUS authentication. You can verify the configuration with the show radius-server and show rule all commands.

ServiceEngine(config)# radius-server enable

ServiceEngine(config)# radius-server host 172.16.90.121

ServiceEngine(config)# radius-server key myradiuskey

ServiceEngine(config)# rule action no-auth pattern-list 2

ServiceEngine(config)# rule pattern-list 2 domain mydomain.net

ServiceEngine# show radius-server

Login Authentication for Console/Telnet/Ftp/SSH Session: enabled

Configuration Authentication for Console/Telnet/Ftp/SSH Session: enabled (secondary)

Radius Configuration:

---------------------

Radius Authentication is on

Timeout = 5

Retransmit = 2

Key = ****

Radius Redirect is off

There is no URL to authentication failure instructions

Servers

-------

IP 172.16.90.121 Port = 1645

ServiceEngine# show rule all

Rules Template Configuration

----------------------------

Rule Processing Enabled rule no-auth domain mydomain.net

2-298

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

The following example disables RADIUS authentication on the SE:

ServiceEngine(config)# no radius-server enable

The following example shows how to force the SE to try RADIUS authentication first:

ServiceEngine(config)# authentication login radius enable primary radius-server

Related Commands Command debug authentication user rule show radius-server

Description

Debugs the user login against the system authentication.

Sets the rules by which the SE filters HTTP, HTTPS, and RTSP traffic.

Displays RADIUS information.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-299

rcp

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

rcp

Syntax Description

To enable the Remote Copy Program (RCP), use the rcp command in Global configuration mode. To disable RCP, use the no form of this command.

rcp enable no rcp enable enable Enables RCP services.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Examples The following example shows how to enable RCP:

ServiceEngine(config)# rcp enable

Related Commands Command show rcp

Description

Displays RCP information.

2-300

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

reload

reload

To halt and perform a cold restart on the SE, use the reload command in EXEC configuration mode.

reload [ force ]

Syntax Description force (Optional) Forces a reboot without further prompting.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines To reboot the SE, use the reload command.

If the current running configuration is different from the startup configuration and if the configuration changes are not saved to flash memory, you are prompted to save the current running configuration parameters to the startup configuration.

To save any file system contents to disk from memory before a restart, use the cache synchronize command.

Examples The following example shows how to reload the SE after you have saved the configuration changes.

ServiceEngine# reload

System configuration has been modified. Save? [ yes ] :yes

Proceed with reload? [ confirm ] yes

Shutting down all services, will timeout in 15 minutes.

reload in progress .....

The following example forces a reboot on the SE:

ServiceEngine# reload force

Related Commands Command cache synchronize write write erase

Description

Saves any file system contents to disk from memory before a restart.

Saves startup configurations.

Erases the startup configuration from NVRAM.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-301

rename

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

rename

Syntax Description

To rename a file on the SE, use the rename command in EXEC configuration mode.

rename old_filename new_filename old_filename new_filename

Original filename.

New filename.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines Use this command to rename any sysfs file without making a copy of the file.

Examples The following example renames a file named errlog.txt as old_errlog.txt:

ServiceEngine# rename errlog.txt old_errlog.txt

Related Commands Command cpfile

Description

Creates a copy of a file.

2-302

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

restore

restore

To restore the device to its manufactured default status, removing the user data from the disk and flash memory, use the restore command in EXEC configuration mode. This command erases all existing content on the device. restore factory-default [ preserve basic-config ]

Syntax Description factory-default preserve basic-config

Resets the device configuration and data to their manufactured default status.

(Optional) Preserves certain configurations and data on the device.

(Optional) Selects basic network configurations.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines Use this command to restore data on disk and in flash memory to the factory default, while preserving particular time stamp evaluation data. You need to enter this command from the root directory, or else the following error message is displayed:

ServiceEngine# restore factory-default

Need to cd to / before issuing this command

Command aborted.

SERVICEENGINE#

Be sure to back up the CDSM database and copy the backup file to a safe location that is separate from that of the CDSM, or change over from the primary to a standby CDSM before you use the restore factory-default command on your primary CDSM. The primary CDSM operation must be halted before proceeding with backup and restore commands.

Caution This command erases user-specified configuration information stored in the flash image and removes the data on the disk, the user-defined disk partitions, and the entire CDSM database. User-defined disk partitions that are removed include the sysfs and cdnfs partitions. The configuration being removed includes the starting configuration of the device.

By removing the CDSM database, all configuration records for the entire VDS-IS network are deleted.

If you do not have a valid backup file or a standby CDSM, you must use the cms deregister force command and reregister every SE and SR after you have reconfigured the CDSM, because all previously configured data is lost.

If you used your standby CDSM to store the database while you reconfigured the primary, you can simply register the former primary as a new standby CDSM.

If you created a backup file while you configured the primary CDSM, you can copy the backup file to this newly reconfigured CDSM and use the cms database restore command.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-303

restore

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Caution If you upgraded your software after you received your software recovery CD-ROM, using the CD-ROM software images may downgrade your system.

Cisco VDS-IS software consists of three basic components:

Disk-based software

Flash-based software

• Hardware platform cookie (stored in flash memory)

All these components must be correctly installed for Cisco VDS-IS software to work properly.

Examples The following two examples show the results of using the restore factory-default and restore factory-default preserve basic-config commands. Because configuration parameters and data are lost, prompts are given before initiating the restore operation to ensure that you want to proceed.

Note If you use the restore factory-default preserve basic-config command, the configuration for the primary interface is not preserved. If you want to re-enable the Cisco VDS-IS network after using the restore factory-default preserve basic-config command, reconfigure the primary interface after the factory defaults have been restored.

CDSM# restore factory-default

This command will wipe out all of data on the disks and wipe out CDS CLI configurations you have ever made.

If the box is in evaluation period of certain product, the evaluation process will not be affected though.

It is highly recommended that you stop all active services before this command is run.

Are you sure you want to go ahead? [ yes/no ]

CDSM# restore factory-default preserve basic-config

This command will wipe out all of data on the disks and all of CDS CLI configurations except basic network configurations for keeping the device online.

The to-be-preserved configurations are network interfaces, default gateway, domain name, name server and hostname.

If the box is in evaluation period of certain product, the evaluation process will not be affected.

It is highly recommended that you stop all active services before this command is run.

Are you sure you want to go ahead? [ yes/no ]

Note You can enter basic configuration parameters (such as the IP address, hostname, and name server) at this point or later through entries in the command-line interface.

The following example shows that entering the show disks command after the restore command verifies that the restore command has removed data from the partitioned file systems (sysfs and cdnfs):

ServiceEngine# show disks

SYSFS 0.0GB

0.0%

2-304

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands restore

CDNFS

FREE

0.0GB

29.9GB

0.0%

100.0%

Because flash memory configurations were removed after the restore command was used, the show startup-config command does not return any flash memory data. The show running-config command returns the default running configurations.

The show wmt command continues to display the same license evaluation periods as before the restore factory-default command was invoked, because the evaluation period is not affected by this restore command. For example, if there were 21 days remaining in the evaluation period before the restore factory-default command was used, there would continue to be 21 days remaining in the evaluation period.

Related Commands Command Description cms database backup Backs up the existing management database for the CDSM.

cms database restore Restores the database management tables using the backup local filename.

show disks Displays the names of the disks currently attached to the SE.

show running-config Displays the current running configuration information on the terminal.

show startup-config Displays the startup configuration.

show wmt Displays WMT bandwidth and proxy mode configuration.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-305

rmdir

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

rmdir

Syntax Description

To delete a directory, use the rmdir command in EXEC configuration mode.

rmdir directory directory Name of the directory that you want to delete.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines Use this command to remove any directory from the SE file system. The rmdir command removes only empty directories.

Examples The following example shows how to remove the oldfiles directory under /local1:

ServiceEngine# rmdir /local1/oldfiles

Related Commands Command lls ls mkdir

Description

Provides detailed information about files and subdirectories stored in the present working directory, including size, date, time of creation, sysfs name, and long name of the file.

Lists the files or subdirectory names within a directory.

Creates a new directory or subdirectory in the SE file system.

2-306

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands router bgp

router bgp

To configure a BGP routing process, use the router bgp command in Global configuration mode. To remove a BGP routing process, use the no form of this command. router bgp as_number no router bgp as_number

Syntax Description as_number Number of an Autonomous System (AS) that identifies the router to other BGP routers, and tags the routing information that is passed along.

Command Defaults No BGP routing process is configured.

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines This command is used to set up a distributed routing core that automatically guarantees the loop-free exchange of routing information between autonomous systems.

Enable the Proximity Engine by entering the proximity engine enable command before executing this command.

For the proximity function to work, one of the following is required:

• Enabled link-state protocol, such as OSPF or IS-IS for IGP proximity.

• Enabled policy routing protocol, such as BGP for best-path proximity, and one of the IGP (OSPF or

IS-IS) is required for next hop resolution.

Note All BGP routes must resolve to IGP next hops or directly connected routes.

Examples The following example shows how to configure a BGP process for autonomous system 23:

ServiceRouter(config)# router bgp 23

ServiceRouter(config-bgp)#

Related Commands Command location community

Description

Configures the community values that are associated with a Proximity

Engine.

log-neighbor-changes Enables logging of BGP neighbor resets.

neighbor Configures the BGP neighbors.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-307

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands router isis

router isis

To enable the IS-IS routing protocol and to specify an IS-IS process, use the router isis command in

Global configuration mode. To disable IS-IS routing, use the no form of this command. router isis no router isis

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Defaults IS-IS routing is disabled.

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines This command is used to enable routing for an area. An appropriate network entity title (NET) must be configured to specify the area address and the system ID of the router. Routing must be enabled on one or more interfaces before adjacencies can be established and dynamic routing is made possible.

Enable the Proximity Engine by entering the proximity engine enable command before executing this command.

Note It is not possible to configure IS-IS and OSPF simultaneously. If you are running OSPF and try to enter the router isis command, you receive the following warning message:

%Cannot configure both IS-IS and OSPF together. Please remove 'router ospf' first. (Error number: 1137)

If you want to configure IS-IS and you already have OSPF running, you must enter the no router ospf command first before entering the router isis command.

Examples The following example shows how to configure IS-IS for IP routing. In this example, system ID is set to

0001.0c11.1111.00 and area is set to ID 47.0004.004d.0001. IS-IS is configured to form adjacencies on

Ethernet interface 0 and serial interface 0. The IP prefix assigned to Ethernet interface 0 is advertised to other IS-IS routers.

ServiceRouter# show node-type

PROXIMITY_ENGINE

ServiceRouter# config t

ServiceRouter(config)# router isis

ServiceRouter(config-isis)# net 47.0004.004d.0001.0001.0c11.1111.00

ServiceRouter(config-isis)# interface GigabitEthernet 1/0

ServiceRouter(config-isis-if)# ip router isis

ServiceRouter(config-isis-if)# end

ServiceRouter#

2-308

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands router isis

Related Commands Command authentication

Description

Configures the authentication parameters.

authentication-check Enables the checking of received packets on the corresponding level.

authentication-type interface

Specifies the cleartext or MD5 authentication for the corresponding level.

Configures a Gigabit Ethernet or port channel interface. Provides access to interface configuration mode. is-type Configures a Proximity Engine to act as a Level 1 (intra-area) router, as both a Level 1 router and a Level 2 (intra-area) router, or as an inter-area router only.

log-adjacency-changes Configures the router to send a syslog message when an IS-IS neighbor goes up or down.

lsp-mtu net

Sets the maximum transmission unit MTU size of IS-IS LSPs.

Configures an IS-IS NET for a CLNS routing process.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-309

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands router ospf

router ospf

To enable the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing process, use the router ospf command in Global configuration mode. To terminate the OSPF process, use the no form of this command.

router ospf no router ospf

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Defaults This command is disabled by default.

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines For Proximity Engine, the fixed process ID “p1” is used internally. This allows only one instance of the

OSPF process, but it supports multiple areas. Routing must be enabled on one or more interfaces before adjacencies can be established and before dynamic routing is possible.

Enable the Proximity Engine by entering the proximity engine enable command before executing this command.

Note It is not possible to configure IS-IS and OSPF simultaneously. If you are running IS-IS and try to enter the router ospf command, you receive the following warning message:

%Cannot configure both IS-IS and OSPF together. Please remove 'router ospf' first. (Error number:

1137)

If you want to configure OSPF and you already have IS-IS running, you must enter the no router isis command first before entering the router ospf command.

Examples The following example shows how to configure an OSPF routing process:

ServiceRouter# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

ServiceRouter(config)# router ospf

ServiceRouter(config-ospf)# end

ServiceRouter#

2-310

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands router ospf

Related Commands Command area

Description

Configures the area.

authentication Configures the authentication parameters.

authentication-check Enables the checking of received packets on the corresponding level.

authentication-type Specifies the cleartext or MD5 authentication for the corresponding level.

interface Configures a Gigabit Ethernet or port channel interface. Provides access to interface configuration mode. log-adjacency-changes Configures the router to send a syslog message when an IS-IS neighbor goes up or down.

network area Defines the interfaces on which OSPF runs and defines the area ID for those interfaces.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-311

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands router srp

router srp

To enter SRP configuration mode, use the router srp command in Global configuration mode. To negate the SRP daemon and remove all SRP running configuration, use the no form of this command.

router srp no router srp

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines This command is used to enter SRP configuration mode, where a system administrator can configure different parameters of the SRP.

Enable the Proximity Engine by entering the proximity engine enable command before executing this command.

For SRP to run properly, it is necessary to configure the NTP server on the SR. Configure NTP as follows:

ServiceRouter(config)# ntp server 171.68.10.150

ServiceRouter(config)# end

ServiceRouter# sh ntp status ntp enabled server list: 2.8.1.2 171.68.10.150

remote refid st t when poll reach delay offset jitter

==============================================================================

2.8.1.2 0.0.0.0 16 u - 64 0 0.000 0.000 4000.00

*ntp-sj1.cisco.c ntp02-syd.cisco 2 u 63m 137m 177 1.625 -1.806 0.881

ServiceRouter#

Examples The following example shows the use of router srp :

ServiceRouter# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

ServiceRouter(config)# router srp

ServiceRouter(config-srp)#

Related Commands Command bootstrap-node domain flooding

Description

Configures a bootstrap node IP address.

Sets the domain ID for an SRP.

Configures the flooding threshold.

2-312

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

rtsp

rtsp

To configure the Real-Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP)-related parameters, use the rtsp command in

Global configuration mode. To disable individual options, use the no form of this command.

rtsp { advanced ip_address { bypass-gateway movie-streamer | max-initial-setup-delay time_delay | max-request-rate num } | ip-address ip_address } no rtsp { advanced ip_address { bypass-gateway movie-streamer | max-initial-setup-delay time_delay | max-request-rate num } | ip-address ip_address }

Syntax Description advanced ip_address bypass-gateway movie-streamer

Performs advanced configuration of the RTSP gateway.

The IP address of RTSP gateway.

Allows bypassing the RTSP gateway for RTSP requests.

Allows bypassing the RTSP gateway for Movie Streamer RTSP requests.

max-initial-setup-delay Specifies the maximum delay, in seconds, between the TCP accept and first

RTSP message from the client. The default is 10.

time_delay The RTSP advanced maximum initial setup delay, in seconds. The range is from 0 to 2147483647.

max-request-rate num ip-address

Specifies the maximum incoming requests allowed by the RTSP Gateway per second.

The maximum requests per second. The range is from 1 to 2147483647.

Configures the IP address for the RTSP gateway.

Command Defaults max-initial-setup-delay time_delay : 10 max-request-rate num : 40 requests

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines Real-Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP) is a standard Internet streaming control protocol (RFC 2326). It is an application-level protocol that controls the delivery of data with real-time properties, such as video and audio. Apple QuickTime, Real Networks, and the Cisco Streaming Engine use RTSP as the streaming control protocol.

Live Streaming with the Cisco Streaming Engine

The VDS-IS software supports live streaming content with many kinds of network topologies and deployment scenarios. This feature allows the integration of streaming content from Cisco IP/TV Servers and QuickTime live broadcast servers with the VDS-IS network. Support for broadcast of playlists is included (except for SEs at the network edge), allowing you to convert one or more disk files into a playlist and to send them out through simulated live streaming.

An RTSP source is a fully qualified RTSP URL that references an external streaming server, such as a parent SE, which provides the corresponding RTSP request point.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-313

rtsp

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

RTSP Gateway

The RTSP gateway is a process that runs on the SE. The RTSP gateway accepts an RTSP request and performs the initial RTSP handshake with RTSP-based clients (for example, Windows Media 9 players) on behalf of the back-end RTSP servers (for example, the WMT RTSP server) that are running on the SE.

For every RTSP request, the RTSP gateway examines the following properties of the request:

URL and its position in the Unified Name Space (UNS)

User agent

IP address of the final destination

Media type •

After the successful completion of uniformity checks, the RTSP gateway tunnels the request to the appropriate back-end RTSP server that is running on the SE. The RTSP gateway can tunnel the request to RealProxy, RealSubscriber, or the Cisco Streaming Engine on the SE, depending on the requested media type, the back-end RTSP servers that are currently enabled on the SE, and the media player that is requesting the content.

After the RTSP gateway tunnels the request to a particular back-end RTSP server that is running on the

SE and the back-end server and the client negotiate the UDP ports, the RTSP gateway continues with

RTSP message passing (SETUP). When the RTSP client issues a PLAY request, the streaming server starts streaming the data to the client over UDP.

Based on the properties of the incoming request, including user agent, final destination, and media file type, the RTSP gateway performs the following tasks with SEs:

• Forwards the incoming request to the appropriate back-end RTSP server that is running on the SE.

The incoming request goes to the WMT RTSP server if the client is a Windows Media 9 player. The

SE uses the IETF standard RTSP protocol and proprietary Microsoft extensions to serve the content to Windows Media 9 players.

Redirects the incoming request.

Rejects the incoming request.

If the SE is registered with a CDSM, the RTSP gateway also redirects the incoming requests to other content distributors (for example, RealSubscriber or Cisco Streaming Engine) that are configured on the

SE.

Network Address Translation (NAT) is designed for IP address simplification and conservation because it enables private IP internetworks that use nonregistered IP addresses to connect to the Internet. NAT operates on a router, usually connecting two networks together, and translates the private addresses in the internal network into legal addresses before packets are forwarded onto another network. As part of this functionality, NAT can be configured to advertise only one external address for the entire network.

This configuration provides additional security, effectively hiding the entire internal network from the world behind that address. NAT has the dual functionality of security and address conservation and is typically implemented in remote access environments.

Note If the SE is behind a NAT-enabled router, you must specify the IP address of the RTSP gateway that is running on the SE. By default, no IP address is specified.

Default RTSP Gateway Settings

The RTSP gateway is automatically enabled on the SE and cannot be disabled with a command.

Table 2-2 lists the default settings for the RTSP gateway.

2-314

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands rtsp

Table 2-2 Default Settings for the RTSP Gateway

RTSP Gateway Setting

IP address of RTSP gateway

Incoming RTSP port

Incoming RTSP request rate

Layer 4 switching

Maximum initial setup delay

Maximum request rate

Default Setting

Not specified

Port 554

40 requests per second

Not enabled

10 seconds

40 requests per second

By default, the RTSP gateway is always enabled on an SE and cannot be disabled by entering a CLI command. As

Table 2-2 shows, the RTSP gateway has a set of default settings. You only need to change

these default settings under the following conditions:

You want to configure the RTSP gateway to listen for incoming RTSP requests on a port other than the default port (port 554).

SE is behind a NAT-enabled router. In this case, you must specify the IP address of the RTSP gateway. By default, an IP address for the RTSP gateway is not specified.

Note A description of the RTSP is available as IETF RFC 2326.

Examples The following example shows how to set up the Movie Streamer RTSP bypass gateway:

ServiceEngine(config)# rtsp advanced bypass-gateway movie-streamer

The following example shows how to establish the maximum initial setup delay:

ServiceEngine(config)# rtsp advanced max-initial-setup-delay 15

The following example shows how to establish the maximum request rate:

ServiceEngine(config)# rtsp advanced max-request-rate 50

The following example shows how to assign the RTSP IP address:

ServiceEngine(config)# rtsp ip-address 10.74.61.1

Related Commands Command Description show rtsp Displays the RTSP configurations.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-315

rule

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

rule

Syntax Description

To set the rules by which the SE filters HTTP, HTTPS, and RTSP traffic, use the rule command in Global configuration mode. To disable individual options, use the no form of this command.

rule action { allow pattern-list list_num [ protocol { all | http | https | rtsp }] | block pattern-list list_num [ protocol { all | http | https | rtsp }] | generate-url-signature { include-client-src-ip

| key-id-owner key_id { key-id-number key_id_number } { pattern-list patterm_list_num }

[ protocol { all | http }]} | no-cache pattern-list list_num [ protocol { all | http | https }] | redirect url pattern-list list_num [ protocol { all | http | https | rtsp }] | refresh pattern-list list_num

[ protocol { all | http | https }] | replace pattern-list list_num [ protocol { all | http | https | rtsp }] | rewrite pattern-list list_num [ protocol { all | http | https | rtsp }] | use-icap-service service-name pattern-list list_num [ protocol { all | http | https }] | validate-url-signature pattern-list error-redirect-url url | exclude { all error-redirect-url url pattern-list num

[ protocol { all | http | rtmp | rtsp }] | client-ip error-redirect-url url pattern-list num

[ protocol { all | http | rtmp | rtsp }] | expiry-time error-redirect-url url pattern-list num

[ protocol { all | http | rtmp | rtsp }] | enable | pattern-list list_num { domain dn_regexp | group-type { and | or } | header-field { referer ref_regexp | src-ip s_ipaddress s_subnet | url-regex url_regexp | url-regsub url_regexp url_sub }}} no rule action { allow pattern-list list_num [ protocol { all | http | https | rtsp }] | block pattern-list list_num [ protocol { all | http | https | rtsp }] | generate-url-signature { include-client-src-ip

| key-id-owner key_id { key-id-number key_id_number } { pattern-list patterm_list_num }

[ protocol { all | http }]} | no-cache pattern-list list_num [ protocol { all | http | https }] | redirect url pattern-list list_num [ protocol { all | http | https | rtsp }] | refresh pattern-list list_num

[ protocol { all | http | https }] | replace pattern-list list_num [ protocol { all | http | https | rtsp }] | rewrite pattern-list list_num [ protocol { all | http | https | rtsp }] | use-icap-service service-name pattern-list list_num [ protocol { all | http | https }] | validate-url-signature pattern-list error-redirect-url url | exclude { all error-redirect-url url pattern-list num

[ protocol { all | http | rtmp | rtsp }] | client-ip error-redirect-url url pattern-list num

[ protocol { all | http | rtmp | rtsp }] | expiry-time error-redirect-url url pattern-list num

[ protocol { all | http | rtmp | rtsp }] | enable | pattern-list list_num { domain dn_regexp | group-type { and | or } | header-field { referer ref_regexp | src-ip s_ipaddress s_subnet | url-regex url_regexp | url-regsub url_regexp url_sub }}} action allow pattern-list list_num protocol all protocol_type enable

Describes the action that the rule is to take.

Allows the incoming request that matches the pattern list. This can be used in combination with block actions to allow selective types of requests. Allow does not carry any meaning as a standalone action.

Configures the pattern list.

Pattern list number. The range is from 1 to 512.

Specifies the protocol for which this rule is to be matched.

Matches this rule with all applicable protocols for this action.

Protocol types that support rule actions, namely, http , https , and rtsp .

Note The term http traffic is used to see requests over HTTP including HTTP, FTP over HTTP, and HTTPS over HTTP. The

Rules Template is not supported for FTP native requests.

Enables rules processing on the SE.

2-316

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands pattern_type allow http rtmp rtsp block generate-url-signature include-client-src-ip key-id-owner key_id key-id-number key_id_num pattern-list pattern_list_num no-cache redirect url refresh replace rewrite use-icap-service service_name validate-url-signature error-redirect-url exclude all client-ip domain-name expiry-time domain dn_regexp group-type and rule

Types of rule patterns that you can add to a pattern list.

Allows the incoming request that matches the pattern list. This can be used in combination with block actions to allow selective types of requests. Allow does not carry any meaning as a standalone action.

Matches this rule with HTTP.

Matches this rule with RTMP.

Matches this rule with RTSP.

Blocks this request and allows all others.

Specifies that the SE generates a signed URL that is included in the autogenerated ASX file when content routing is in use and the pattern matches.

Specifies the client IP to be included in the signed URL.

Specifies the owner of the key which ranges from 1 to 32. The key is a shared secret string.

Owner of the key.

Specifies the identification number of the key. The range is from 1 to

16.

Identification number of the key.

Specifies the number of the pattern list. The range is from 1 to 512.

Valid patterns are domain, url-regex, or dst-ip.

Specifies the number of the pattern list.

Does not cache the object.

Redirects the request to the rewritten URL.

Redirect URL.

Revalidates the object with the web server.

Replaces the text string in the object.

Rewrites the original request as a specified URL and fetches the rewritten URL on a cache miss.

Uses a specific ICAP server.

Service name used for handling a request through an ICAP server.

Validates a signed URL.

Specifies the error HTTP URL.

Note This keyword is only supported for HTTP URLs.

Specifies what field in the URL signature must be validated.

Specifies both client-ip and expiry time fields are excluded in validation.

Specifies that the client-ip field is excluded in validation.

Specifies that the domain-name is excluded in validation.

Specifies that the expire-time field is excluded in validation.

Specifies the regular expression to match the domain name.

Regular expression to be matched with the domain name.

Specifies whether the pattern list is an AND or OR type.

Specifies an AND pattern to the pattern list.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-317

rule or header-field referer ref_regexp request-line req_regexp user-agent ua_regexp src-ip s_ipaddress s_subnet url-regex url_regexp url-regsub url_sub

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Specifies an OR pattern to the pattern list.

Specifies the header field pattern of the request and substitute replacement pattern.

Specifies the referer request header.

Regular expression to be matched with the referer request header.

Specifies the request method line.

Regular expression to be matched with the request method line.

Specifies the user agent request header.

Regular expression to be matched with the User Agent request header.

Specifies the source IP address of the request.

Source IP address of the request.

Source IP subnet mask.

Specifies the regular expression to match a substring of the URL.

Regular expression to be matched with the URL string.

Sets the regular expression to match the URL and replacement pattern.

URL string replacement pattern .

Command Defaults The default is rule processing disabled.

The group-type pattern is OR by default.

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Usage Guidelines The Rules Template allows you to specify a set of rules, each clearly identified by an action and a pattern.

The Rules Template allows you to configure an SE to use specific rules to filter HTTP, HTTPS, and RTSP traffic. A common use of this feature is to configure an SE to block the spread of Internet worms and viruses within an organization by checking whether a requested web page matches the pattern of a known

Internet worm and if so then automatically blocking the request.

If you have enabled rules processing on an SE (enabled the Rules Template feature on the SE and configured rules for the SE), the SE checks each incoming client request to determine if a rule pattern matches the requested content. If a rule pattern matches the given request, the SE uses the specified action (policy) to handle this incoming traffic.

The SE can match incoming requests against the following:

Patterns in the IP address of the client requesting the content (source IP address), including the IP address, the network mask, and the port list

Patterns in the IP address of the origin web or media server (destination IP addresses), including the

IP address, the network mask, and the port list

Regular expression of the URL

Regular expression of the domain portion of the URL

MIME types of the web object that the client is requesting

Regular expressions symbolizing domain names

2-318

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

• Headers that are sent in the request, including the following:

User-agent of the request, which indicates which client software is issuing the request

Referer, which indicates the web page from which the browser jumped to this link

– Request line, which indicates the request line itself rule

Note The regsub attribute supports regular expressions, but only one substitution can be defined. Multiple substitutions are not supported. Also, only one url-regsub pattern list is supported. Multiple substitutions for the same pattern list are not supported.

You can apply the policies defined in the Rules Template to HTTP (including FTP over HTTP) and

HTTPS and to RTSP for streaming media objects. Policies that can be applied include the following:

Allowing a request to be completed

Blocking the request

Overriding the HTTP response header and caching the object

Caching the object depending on the HTTP response header

Bypassing authentication for the request

Replacing the text string

Not caching an object

Bypassing an upstream proxy for the request

Redirecting the request to a different URL

Revalidating the object with the origin server

Rewriting the URL

No URL filtering for the specified HTTP and HTTPS requests

Using a specific ICAP server

Using a specific upstream proxy

Using a specific server for the request

Note To enter a question mark (?) in a rule regular expression from the command-line interface, use the escape character followed by a question mark (?). Use of the escape sequence prevents the command-line interface from displaying context-sensitive help.

Supported Rule Actions per Protocol

For RTSP, the redirect rule actions are supported for RTSP requests from RealMedia players. These two rule actions are not supported for RTSP requests from Windows Media Players. For example, Windows

Media Services 9 (WMS 9) supports the block, rewrite, and allow rule actions for RTSP requests, but does not support the redirect rule actions for RTSP requests.

WMT supports all the rule action types—allow, block, no-cache, redirect, refresh, replace, rewrite, validate-url-signature, and generate-url-signature. RTMP and Movie Streamer only support allow, block, and validate-url-signature.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-319

rule

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Note If the rule action generate-url-signature command with the parameter include-client-src-ip key-id-owner 3 key-id-number 3 pattern-list 2 is entered, with and without protocol parameters, the

“rule entry is duplicate” message is displayed. If the protocol is not specified in that particular pattern list, all protocols are accepted.

This command removes the trailing “protocol all” when it displays in the running-config. All service rule-related commands have this functionality. Also, the rule action allow pattern-list 1 ? command does not have a help message indicating “protocol all” is the default value if it is omitted.

Supported Action and Pattern Combinations

Not all actions support all patterns for request matching because some patterns do not make sense for some actions.

Understanding Actions and Patterns

A rule is specified by an action and a pattern list. An action is performed on a request if this request matches the pattern list specified in the rule pattern-list command.

An action is something that the SE performs when processing a request; for instance, an action could be blocking the request, using an alternative proxy, and so forth.

A pattern list defines the limits of a request; for instance, a pattern list may specify that the source IP address falls in the subnet range 172.16.*.*.

Rules can be dynamically added, displayed, or deleted from the SE. The rules are preserved across reboots because they are written into persistent storage, such as NVRAM, using the appropriate CLI commands or the CDSM GUI. Only the system resources limit the number of rules that the SE can support. Because rules consume resources, the more rules that you define can greatly impact how the SE performs.

Note The number of actions is limited only by available resources. The maximum number of pattern lists is 512. The maximum number of patterns per action is 128. A single pattern list can contain up to 128 patterns of a particular pattern type.

Actions

The Rules Template supports the following types of actions:

• Allow —Allows incoming requests that match the pattern list.

This rule action can be used in combination with block actions to allow selective types of requests.

Allow does not carry any meaning as a standalone action.

Block —Blocks this request and allows all others.

No-cache —Does not cache this object.

Redirect —Redirects the original request to a specified URL. Redirect is relevant to the RADIUS server only if the RADIUS server has been configured for redirect .

Refresh —For a cache hit, forces an object freshness check with the server.

Replace —Replaces the text string in the object.

Rewrite —Rewrites the original request as a specified URL. The SE searches for the rewritten URL in the cache, and then on a cache miss, fetches the rewritten URL and returns the object transparently to the client. You should use a redirect rule instead of a rewrite rule because of possible

2-320

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands rule performance impacts. The reason for the performance impact is that, for a redirect rule, the SE sends a 302 (Found) message to the client with the new redirect URL. The client issues a separate request to the redirected URL. However, for a rewrite action, the original request URL is rewritten as the specified URL. The URL rewrite could change the domain name of the URL, which necessitates a Domain Name Server (DNS) lookup to find the destination IP address of the new rewritten server to which the request must be sent.

Use-icap-service —Uses a specified ICAP server.

Validate-url-signature —Validates a signed URL.

Actions can be applied to specific protocols or to a set of protocols. If no protocol is configured, then the specified action is taken for all the traffic that goes through the SE.

Execution Order of Rule Actions

The order in which the rule actions are executed is different between the Web Engine and the other protocol engines (Windows Media Streaming, Movie Streamer, and Flash Media Streaming).

Note For the Web Engine, the Service Rule file must be used if service rules are to be configured. This is done though the CDSM, not the CLI. For more information, see Appendix F “ Creating Service Rule Files ” of the Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.2.1 Software Configuration Guide .

Note Configuring Service Rules for Flash Media Streaming is no longer done through the CLI; it is done through the Authorization Server Rules plug-in. See the “ Configuring Service Rules ” section in the

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.2.1 Software Configuration Guide .

Note When configuring service rules, you must configure the same service rules on all SEs participating in a delivery service in order for the service rules to be fully implemented. The rule action must be common for all client requests because the SR may redirect a client request to any SE in a delivery service depending on threshold conditions.

Web Engine Rule Action Order

The order in which the rule actions are executed for the Web Engine is as follows:

1.

block or allow

Note The allow and block actions carry the same precedence. The order of execution depends on the order of configuration between allow and block actions. Other actions always take precedence over allow.

7.

8.

5.

6.

2.

3.

4.

redirect (before cache lookup) rewrite (before cache lookup) use-icap-service generate-url-signature validate-url-signature refresh (after cache lookup, in the case of cache hit) no-cache

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-321

rule

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

All Other Protocol Engine Rule Action Order

The order in which the rule actions are executed for the other protocol engines is the order in which they were configured, except for the validate-url-signature action. If the rule pattern associated with the validate-url-signature action is matched, regardless of the configuration order the rules, the validate-url-signature action is performed before any other action.

1.

validate-url-signature

2.

block or allow

Note The allow and block actions carry the same precedence. The order of execution depends on the order of configuration between allow and block actions. Other actions always take precedence over allow.

3.

4.

redirect (before cache lookup) rewrite (before cache lookup)

Patterns

The Rules Template supports the following pattern types:

• Domain —Matches the domain name in the URL or the Host header against a regular expression.

For example, .*ibm.* matches any domain name that contains the ibm substring. The \.foo\.com$ domain name matches any domain name that ends with the .foo.com substring.

Note In regular expression syntax, the dollar sign ($) metacharacter directs that a match is made only when the pattern is found at the end of a line.

• Group-type —Specifies whether the pattern list is an AND or OR type. The default is OR. Following are the four patterns of expected behavior:

– Pattern 1 rule pattern-list 22 group-type and rule pattern-list 22 url-regsub 10 airforce rule pattern-list 22 url-regsub wma wmv rule pattern-list 23 url-regsub 10 airforce

– rule pattern-list 23 url-regsub wma wmv

Pattern 2 rule pattern-list 22 group-type and rule pattern-list 22 url-regsub 10 airforce rule pattern-list 23 url-regsub wma wmv

– Pattern 3 rule pattern-list 22 group-type or rule pattern-list 22 url-regsub 10 airforce rule pattern-list 22 url-regsub wma wmv rule pattern-list 23 url-regsub 10 airforce rule pattern-list 23 url-regsub wma wmv

2-322

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

– Pattern 4 rule pattern-list 22 group-type or rule pattern-list 22 url-regsub 10 airforce rule pattern-list 23 url-regsub wma wmv rule

Note The rules are that when AND is specified for a pattern-list ALL the conditions satisfy. When

OR is specified, ANY of the condition are matched.

Src-ip —Matches the request’s source IP address and netmask. Specify an IP address and a netmask.

URL-regex —Matches the URL against a regular expression. The match is case insensitive. Specify a regular expression.

Header-field —Matches the header field pattern of the request.

Request header field patterns referer , request-line , and user-agent are supported for the actions block , redirect , and rewrite . The referer pattern is matched against the Referer header in the request, the request-line pattern is matched against the first line of the request, and the user-agent pattern is matched against the User-Agent header in the request.

• URL-regsub —Matches the URL against a regular expression to form a new URL per pattern substitution specification for the rewrite and redirect actions. The match is case insensitive. The valid substitution index range is from 1 to 9.

If an empty string is given as a replacement pattern, the Referer header is stripped. Stripping of the

Referer header occurs in the user-agent pattern.

Multiple patterns can be entered on the same pattern list. If any of them matches the incoming request, the corresponding action is taken.

Multiple patterns for the same pattern list must be entered on different lines.

Rules Template Processing Considerations

Actions and patterns have a predefined order of execution. A group of rules with the same action is always executed either before or after another group of rules with a different action. The block , rewrite , and redirect rule actions support the following additional patterns: request-line , referer , and user-agent regular expressions. The request-line regular expression matches the first line of the request.

The user-agent regular expression matches the User-Agent header value of the request. The referer regular expression matches the Referer header value of the request. The order is not affected by the order in which the rules are entered using CLI commands.

Allow and block carry the same precedence. The order of execution depends on the order of configuration between allow and block actions. Other actions always take precedence over allow .

Among rules of the same action, a predefined execution order exists among the rule patterns, which means that within a group of rules of the same action, one group of rules with the same pattern is always executed either before or after another group of rules with a different pattern.

Among all rules of the same action and of the same rules pattern, the rules are evaluated in a

Last-Entered-First-Examined fashion (the reverse of the order in which the rules were entered). This order is not affected by the order in which the rules are entered using CLI commands.

Most actions do not have any parameters.

Service Rules for URLs

There are three cases for service rules:

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-323

rule

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

If allow rules are configured, then it is an implicit deny.

For example, if all URL requests that match HTML are blocked, implicitly, all requests that match other URL requests are allowed.

If deny rules are configured then it is implicit allow.

If all URL requests that match WMV are allowed, implicitly, all request that match other URL requests are blocked.

If both allow and deny are configured, then it is an implicit allow.

If both of the above rules are configured, then HTML URL requests are blocked, and all other URL requests are allowed.

Examples The following example shows that the SE is configured to replace the internal.domain.com string in a request to the server named dummy:

ServiceEngine(config)# rule action rewrite header-field referer internal.domain.com dummy

The following example shows that if an empty string is given as a replacement pattern, then the referer header is stripped. This rule states that all requests, which have a referer header that indicates a corporate internal server in ABCBigCorp, strip the referer field so that the outside web server does not see the name of the corporate internal server.

ServiceEngine(config)# rule action rewrite header-field referer internal.abcbigcorp.com

“”

The following example shows that the rule pattern-list command is configured to add a pattern to an existing pattern list to perform an action to be defined on destination IP address 172.16.25.25 using the dst-ip pattern:

ServiceEngine# show rule pattern-list 10 all

Rules Template Configuration

----------------------------

Rule Processing Enabled

Pattern-Lists : rule pattern-list 11 dst-ip 172.16.25.25 255.255.255.0

rule pattern-list 11 domain foo.com

The following example shows that the rule action block command is configured and associated with an existing pattern list:

ServiceEngine(config)# rule action block pattern-list 10 protocol all

ServiceEngine# show rule action block

Rules Template Configuration

----------------------------

Rule Processing Enabled

Actions : rule action block pattern-list 10 protocol all

The following example shows that the rule action block command is configured and associated with an existing pattern list, which lists as its pattern the domain yahoo.com:

ServiceEngine(config)# rule pattern-list 10 domain yahoo.com

ServiceEngine# show rule pattern-list 10 all

Rules Template Configuration

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-324

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands rule

----------------------------

Rule Processing Enabled

Pattern-Lists : rule pattern-list 10 domain yahoo.com

ServiceEngine(config)# rule action block pattern-list 10 protocol all

In this example, the request (using HTTP) to yahoo.com was denied three times.

The following example shows that the rule action block command (action) blocks all patterns specified with the rule pattern-list 12 command:

ServiceEngine(config)# rule pattern-list 12 domain \.foo.com

ServiceEngine(config)# rule action block pattern-list 12

ServiceEngine(config)#

The following example prevents caching of requests that match a URL request that contains the

*cgi-bin* string:

ServiceEngine(config)# rule pattern-list 13 url-regex \.*cgi-bin.*

ServiceEngine(config)# rule action no-cache pattern-list 13

ServiceEngine(config)#

The actions that are to be taken by the rules are configured through the rule action commands.

Patterns that are to be matched to a particular pattern that you specify are configured through rule pattern-list commands.

The following example shows how patterns use AND by configuring patterns with the same pattern list number and applying that pattern list to an action:

ServiceEngine(config)# rule action block pattern-list 1

ServiceEngine(config)# rule pattern-list 1 url-regex yahoo

ServiceEngine(config)# rule pattern-list 1 dst-port 80

Other options of the rule command work similarly to the preceding examples.

The following example redirects a request for old-domain-name that has been changed to new-domain-name:

Cache(config)# rule action redirect http://old-domain-name/ pattern-list 1 protocol http

Cache(config)# rule pattern-list 1 url-regsub http://old-domain-name/ http://new-domain-name/

The following example redirects requests from an IETF site to a site that is locally mirrored:

Cache(config)# rule action redirect http://www.ietf.org/rfc/(.*) pattern-list 2 protocol http

The following example shows that if the request URL is http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc1111.txt, the SE rewrites the URL as http://wwwin-eng.cisco.com/RFC/RFC/rfc1111.txt and sends a 302 Temporary

Redirect response with the rewritten URL in the Location header to the client. The browser automatically starts a request to the rewritten URL.

Cache(config)# rule pattern-list 2 url-regsub http://www.ietf.org/rfc/(.*) http://wwwin-eng.cisco.com/RFC/RFC/\1

The following example redirects all requests for linux.org to a local server in India that is closer to where the SE is located:

Cache(config)# rule action redirect http://linux.org/(.*) pattern-list 3 protocol http

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-325

rule

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

The following example shows that two URLs are to be matched if the pattern is url-regsub . If the URLs that are given in the action configuration are invalid, a warning is displayed during the configuration of this rule. The action URL is taken when the header field patterns are configured.

Cache(config)# rule pattern-list 3 url-regsub http://linux.org/(.*) http://linux.org.in/\1

The following example bypasses requests with cisco.com as the domain from URL filtering:

ServiceEngine(config)# rule action no-url-filtering pattern-list 6 protocol all

ServiceEngine(config)# rule pattern-list 6 domain cisco.com

The following example covers both uppercase and lowercase expressions of MP4 files:

ServiceEngine(config)# rule pattern-list 2 url-regex http://(.*.)cdsis.com/(.*.)[mM]

[pP]4(.*)

Related Commands Command clear show rule

Description

Clears the HTTP object cache, the hardware interface, statistics, archive working transaction logs, and other settings.

Displays rules configuration information.

2-326

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

script

script

To execute a script provided by Cisco or check the script for errors, use the script command in EXEC configuration mode.

script { check | execute } file_name

Syntax Description check execute file_name

Checks the validity of the script.

Executes the script. The script file must be a sysfs file in the current directory.

Name of the script file.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The script command in EXEC configuration mode opens the script utility, which allows you to execute scripts supplied by Cisco or check errors in those scripts. The script utility can read standard terminal input from the user if the script you run requires inputs from the user.

Note The script utility is designed to run only in scripts supplied by Cisco. You cannot execute script files that lack Cisco signatures or that have been corrupted or modified.

Examples The following example shows how to check for errors in the script file foo.script:

ServiceEngine# script check foo.script

Script file foo.script is valid.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-327

service

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

service

To specify the type of service, use the service command in EXEC configuration mode.

On the CDSM: service { cms restart | service-monitor restart | snmpced restart}

On the SE: service { acquisition restart | authsvr restart | cms restart | content-manager restart | distribution restart | flash-media-streaming restart | ms restart | rtspg restart | service-monitor restart | snmpced restart | stream-scheduler restart | web-engine restart | wmt restart }

On the SR: service { cms restart | service-router restart | service-monitor restart | snmpced restart }

Syntax Description acquisition restart authsvr cms content-manager

Specifies Acquisition services.

Restarts the specified services.

Specifies Authsvr services.

Specifies CMS services.

Specifies Content Manager services.

distribution Specifies Distribution services.

flash-media-streaming Specifies Flash Media Streaming services.

ms rtspg service-monitor

Specifies Movie Streamer services.

Specifies RTSP Gateway services.

Specifies Service Monitor services.

service-router snmpced stream-scheduler web-engine wmt

Note The restart operation takes two minutes to complete.

Specifies Service Router services.

Specifies SNMP services.

Specifies Stream Scheduler services.

Specifies Web Engine services.

Specifies Windows Media services.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Examples The following example shows how to start acquisition service:

ServiceEngine# service acquisition restart

The service acquirer has been restarted successfully!

2-328

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

ServiceEngine# service

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-329

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands service-router

service-router

To configure service routing, use the service-router command in Global configuration mode. To disable last-resort routing, use the no form of this command.

On the SE: service-router { keepalive-interval num | service-monitor { augmentation-alarm enable | license-universal enable | number-of-samples { all num | cpu num | disk num | fms num | kmemory num | memory num | wmt num | nic num } | sample-period { all num | cpu num | disk num | fms num | kmemory num | memory num | movie-streamer num | nic num | wmt num } | threshold { augmentation num | burstcnt num | cpu num | disk num | faildisk num | fms num

| kmemory num | memory num | movie-streamer num | nic num | wmt num } | transaction-log enable | type { all | cpu | disk | fms | kmemory | memory | movie-streamer | nic | wmt }}} no service-router { keepalive-interval num | service-monitor { augmentation-alarm enable | license-universal enable | number-of-samples { all num | cpu num | disk num | fms num | kmemory num | memory num | wmt num | nic num } | sample-period { all num | cpu num | disk num | fms num | kmemory num | memory num | movie-streamer num | nic num | wmt num } | threshold { augmentation num | burstcnt num | cpu num | disk num | faildisk num | fms num

| kmemory num | memory num | movie-streamer num | nic num | wmt num } | transaction-log enable | type { all | cpu | disk | fms | kmemory | memory | movie-streamer | nic | wmt }}}

On the SR: service-router service-monitor { augmentation-alarm enable | number-of-samples { all num | cpu num | disk num | kmemory num | memory num } | sample-period { all num | cpu num | disk num | kmemory num | memory num } | threshold { augmentation num | cpu num | disk num | faildisk num | kmemory num | memory num } | type { all | cpu | disk | kmemory | memory }} no service-router service-monitor { augmentation-alarm enable | number-of-samples { all num

| cpu num | disk num | kmemory num | memory num } | sample-period { all num | cpu num | disk num | kmemory num | memory num } | threshold { augmentation num | cpu num | disk num | faildisk num | kmemory num | memory num } | type { all | cpu | disk | kmemory | memory }}

On the CDSM: service-router { access-policy enable | content-based-routing { enable | redundant num } | lastresort { domain name { allow all | alternate name port_num } | error-domain name error-file port_num | translator ip_address port_num } | location-based-routing { enable | location-cache timeout num } | proximity-based-routing { enable | proximity-cache timeout num | proximity-server ip_address password password } | redirect-burst-control { enable | rate num } | redirect-mode { dns-redirect { all | domain domain } | ip-redirect } | service-monitor { augmentation-alarm enable | number-of-samples { all num | cpu num | disk num | kmemory num | memory num }} | subscribe domain domain | threshold

{ augmentation num | cpu num | disk num | kmemory num | memory num | transaction-log enable }} no service-router { access-policy enable | content-based-routing { enable | redundant num } | lastresort { domain name { allow all | alternate name port_num } | error-domain name error-file port_num | translator ip_address port_num } | location-based-routing { enable | location-cache timeout num } | proximity-based-routing { enable | proximity-cache timeout num | proximity-server ip_address password password } | redirect-burst-control { enable |

2-330

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands service-router rate num } | redirect-mode { dns-redirect { all | domain domain } | ip-redirect } | service-monitor { augmentation-alarm enable | number-of-samples { all num | cpu num | disk num | kmemory num | memory num }} | subscribe domain domain | threshold

{ augmentation num | cpu num | disk num | kmemory num | memory num | transaction-log enable }}

Syntax Description keepalive-interval Specifies the SR keepalive interval in seconds.

keepalive_interval _num Number of seconds. The range is from 1 to 120.

service-monitor augmentation-alarm enable

Configures Service Monitor related parameters.

Alarm for checking the device level loads.

Enables the augmentation alarm.

license-universal enable number-of-samples all num

Universal license feature to clear all alarms for Protocol Engines.

Enables the universal license feature.

Counts the latest sampled values to be used when calculating average.

Sets to all monitor types.

Count of latest sampled values to be used when calculating average. The range is from 1 to 120.

Enables the monitor CPU load.

cpu disk fms kmemory memory movie-streamer wmt nic sample-period

Sets the disk monitor type.

Sets the FMS 1 monitor type.

Sets the monitor kernel memory type.

Sets the monitor memory type.

Monitors the Movie Streamer stream count.

Sets the WMT

2

monitor type.

num threshold augmentation

Sets the Network Interface Card monitor type.

Configures the time interval, in seconds, between two consecutive samples.

Time interval between two consecutive samples, in seconds. The range is from 1 to 60.

Configures threshold values.

Applies the Augmentation alarm threshold as a percentage of the device parameter threshold.

num burstcnt num faildisk num movie-streamer type access-policy enable enable

Configures the Augmentation threshold values in percentage (1 to 100).

Configures the Protocol Engine Burst License Control monitor type.

Protocol Engine Burst License Control threshold value.

Sets the disk failure monitor type.

Configures the Disk Failure Count threshold percentage (1-100). The default is 75 percent.

Sets the Movie Streamer monitor type.

Configures the type to be monitored.

Configures the service-router access-policy.

Enables the access-policy.

Enables the CDN Selector.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-331

service-router

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands content-based-routing enable redundant num lastresort domain name allow all alternate name error-domain name translator ip_address port port_num error-file port_num location-based-routing enable location-cache timeout

Configures content based routing.

Enables content based routing.

Specifies the number of redundant copies of the content.

Number of redundant copies of the content. The range is from 1 to 4.

Configures the lastresort domain.

Configures the domain.

Domain name.

Allows the client to be routed through an alternate domain or origin server.

Allows all requests.

Configures an alternate domain.

Alternate domain name.

Configures error domain.

Error domain name.

Configures the external translator IP address.

External translator IP address.

(Optional) Specifies the port number.

Port number (1-65535).

Configures error file name.

Error file name.

Configures location-based routing.

Enables location-based routing.

Configures the location cache.

Configures the location cache timeout.

num Location cache timeout in seconds (1 to 864000).

proximity-based-routing Configures proximity-based routing.

enable proximity-cache

Enables proximity-based routing.

Configures proximity cache.

timeout num proximity-server ip_address

Configures proximity cache timeout.

Proximity cache timeout, in seconds. The range is from 1 to 86400.

Configures proximity server IP address and port.

IP address of proximity server.

redirect-burst-control enable rate num redirect-mode

Configures the redirect burst control.

Enables redirect burst control.

Configures the redirect burst control rate (requests per second).

Redirect burst control rate. The range is from 1 to 100000.

Enables the redirect mode. The redirect mode is disabled by default.

2-332

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands dns-redirect Sets the redirect mode to DNS-based redirection.

service-router

Note The TTL for the DNS proxy requests is one second. A one-second

TTL ensures that the DNS proxy keeps sending requests to the

Request Routing Engine, which in turn causes the Request

Routing Engine to determine the best Service Engine at that point in time, and not to redirect the request to the same SE.

all domain domain ip-redirect service-monitor number-of-samples all num cpu disk kmemory memory faildisk sample-period subscribe domain domain threshold transaction-log enable type

1.

FMS = Flash Media Server

2.

WMT = Windows Media Technology

Enables the DNS-based redirection for all domains.

Enables the DNS-based redirection for a specific domain.

Name of the domain.

Sets the redirect mode to IP-based redirection.

Configures service monitor parameters.

Counts the latest sampled values to be used when calculating average.

Allows all monitor types.

Count of latest sampled values to be used when calculating average. The range is from 1 to 120.

Sets the CPU monitor type.

Sets the disk monitor type.

Sets the monitor kernel memory.

Sets the monitor memory.

Sets the disk failure monitor type.

Configures the time interval between two consecutive samples.

Configures the domains to which the service router should be subscribed.

Configures the domain.

Specifies the domain name.

Configures threshold values.

Configures Transaction logging for the Service Monitor.

Enables transaction logging for the Service Monitor.

Configures the type to be monitored.

Command Defaults keepalive-interval : 2 redundant copies : 1 dns-ttl : 60 burstcnt : 1 location cache timeout : 691200 seconds (8 days) content-based-routing : disabled proximity cache timeout : 1800 sample-period : 1

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-333

service-router nic sample-period : 3 number of samples : 2 faildisk : 75 percent augmentation-alarm : disabled transaction-logs : disabled port number: 80

Command Modes Global configuration (config) mode.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Usage Guidelines To configure last-resort routing, use the service-router command in Global configuration mode, where domain is the service routing domain name, and alternate is where to route requests.

Last-resort routing is applicable when load-based routing is enabled and all SEs have exceeded their thresholds or all SEs in the domain are offline. The SR can redirect requests to a configurable alternate domain when all SEs serving a client network region are overloaded.

Note If the last-resort domain is not configured and the SE thresholds are exceeded, requests are redirected to the origin server.

Augmentation Alarms

Augmentation alarms on the Service Monitor are soft alarms that send alerts before the threshold is reached. These alarms are applicable to all devices—Service Engines, Service Routers and CDSMs.

Augmentation thresholds apply to device and Protocol Engine parameters.

Note For system disks (disks that contain SYSTEM partitions), only when all system disks are bad is the disk failure augmentation and threshold alarms raised. The disk fail threshold does not apply to system disks.

The threshold only applies to CDNFS disks, which is also the case for the augmentation thresholds. This is because the system disks use RAID1. There is a separate alarm for bad RAID. With the RAID system, if the critical primary disk fails, the other mirrored disk (mirroring only occurs for SYSTEM partitions) seamlessly continues operation. However, if the disk drive that is marked bad is a critical disk drive (by definition this is a disk with a SYSTEM partition), the redundancy of the system disks for this device is affected.

As the show disk details command output reports, if disks have both SYSTEM and CDNFS partitions, they are treated as only system disks, which means they are not included in the accounting of the CDNFS disk calculation.

Location-Based Routing

The Geo-Location servers were introduced with the location-based routing method. Once you enable location-based routing, you must specify the Geo-Location servers.

The Authorization Service uses an XML file to allow or deny client requests based on the client's IP address or geographic location. The country, state, and city names in the Authorization XML file must match what is used by the Geo-Location server and the names are case sensitive.

2-334

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands service-router

Cross Domain Support

When a client requests the content from a portal and the content then makes a request to a different remote domain (or origin server), the request cannot be served unless the origin server or the remote domain has a crossdomain.xml that grants access to the original portal to continue with the streaming.

For example, a client request for abc.com/streaming.html (which has the content), makes a request for cds-origin.com/vod/sample.flv (which is a different domain), then the client must request a crossdomain.xml. The crossdomain.xml allows access to abc.com and can then stream sample.flv. If the cds-origin.com does not have crossdomain.xml, then the request is denied.

Note In the case of Flash, the request is made for crossdomain.xml. In the case of Silverlight the request is made for clientaccesspolicy.xml.

Instead of directly going to cds-origin.com, the request first comes to the Service Router. So when the request for crossdomain.xml comes to the Service Router, it is served to the client. This xml grants access to the portal for the file requested. So the client then sends the request for the file which is served.

Note For Silverlight the client access policy is requested only when web service calls are made. Depending on the client player, for both Silverlight and Flash applications, the clientaccesspolicy.xml and crossdomain.xml need to be provisioned on the origin server.

FLVPlaybackComponent does not currently crossdomain requests for video files. The crossdomain request is issued only when a query string is present. In such cases, the video gets downloaded but does not play.

The number of the HTTP Requests (normal) in Request Received ( show statistics service-router summary ) should increase.

Last-Resort Routing

Last-resort routing is not supported when dns-based-redirect is enabled.

Configuring the license-universal Command

Universal license is like a regular license but with higher BW and it applies to all PEs. When the user buys a universal license and configures this command, alarm data for all PEs is cleared. Thereafter monitoring of the PEs continues as usual for any future alarms. If universal license was already configured upon box reload (through saved configuration in the show run command), the existing licenses on the PEs is cleared and the PEs are monitored as usual for any future alarms.

The following information is cleared when you execute the service-router service-monitor license-universal enable command:

• Protocol Engine minor and major alarms

Note Alarm history commands continue to show all alarms as this is a different module.

Protocol Engine internal vectors

Protocol Engine alarm backup files in /tmp and /state

Burst Streaming License Control

Previously, the license limit was set to 500 Mbps and each protocol engine had a maximum number of sessions allowed. The base license limit is set to 200 sessions and 200 Mbps bandwidth.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-335

service-router

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

When the number of sessions or current bandwidth usage exceeds the configured license limit on the

Service Engine, the protocol engine raises an alarm and sends a threshold exceeded

notification to the

Service Router. Any new requests for that protocol engine are not routed to that Service Engine.

Note This feature only applies to the Windows Media Streaming engine, the Flash Media Streaming engine, and the Movie Streamer engine.

Configure Burst Count

The protocol engines can trigger multiple minor alarms for session and bandwidth exceeded threshold conditions. If multiple minor alarms are triggered for a protocol engine in a single day (24-hour interval), they are recorded as a single alarm.

The burst count, which indicates the number of days after which a major alarm is raised, is configurable.

On the Service Engine, use the service-router service-monitor threshold burstcnt command to configure the burst count. The default setting is one (1), which means all the minor alarms that occur in a single day (24-hour interval) are counted as one single alarm. If the service-router service-monitor threshold burstcnt command is set to two, all minor alarms that occur in two days (48-hour interval) are counted as a single alarm.

Configure Universal License

A universal license is similar to a regular license, except it has a higher bandwidth and applies to all protocol engines (except Web Engine). When a universal license is purchased and configured, the alarm data for all protocol engines are cleared. Thereafter, the monitoring of the protocol engines continues as usual for any future alarms.

On the Service Engine, use the service-router service-monitor license-universal enable command to enable the universal license. The service-router service-monitor license-universal command is disabled by default.

Disk Failure Count Threshold

When the number of failed disks exceeds this threshold, no further requests are sent to this device and an alarm is raised. The Disk Failure Count Threshold is only for the CDNFS disks. Disk threshold configuration is the overall percentage of CDNFS disk failures after which an alarm is raised.

Note When an alarm is received for a SYSTEM disk, it is immediately marked as a failed disk. It is not checked against the Disk Failure Count Threshold. The SR continues redirecting to the SE, unless all

SYSTEM disks on the SE are marked as failed disks

Domain Subscription

The service-router subscribe domain command allows us to specify domains to which the service router should be subscribed. By default the service-router takes all the domains specified in the CDSM.

Even if you configure only one domain subscription through this command, the SR takes the list of domains subscribed through the CLI to be the complete list.

URL Translator

Use the service-router lastresort domain domain translator ipaddress command to configure the IP address of the third party URL translator. If a translator configuration is not present for any domain, it falls back to the alternate domain configuration. A maximum of one translator can be configured per content origin.

2-336

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Service Router Transaction Log Fields

Table 2-3

describes the fields for the Service Router transaction log.

Table 2-3 Service Router Transaction Log Fields

Field c-ip user-agent date time url protocol server-picked status routing-method routed-path

Description

Source Internet Protocol (IP) address of the connected socket.

This may be the IP address of a proxy server or firewall.

Browser type used if the player was embedded in a browser. If the player was not embedded, this field refers to the user agent of the client that generated the log.

Date, in international date format, when a client is connected.

Time when the client is connected. The time format is either in

Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) or local time, depending on how the logging plug-in is configured.

URL requested by the client.

Protocol used to access the content.

Service Engine selected by the Service Router.

Status code.

Routing method chosen. The routing-method field has the following possible values:

Last-Resort

Network

Proximity

Zero-Network

• Geo-Location

Request URL to redirect the client to a different CDN.

service-router

Service Monitor Transaction Logs

Service Monitor transaction logs provide an additional tool for analyzing the health history of a device and the protocol engines.

The device and service health information are periodically logged on the device in transaction log files.

Transaction logs provide a useful mechanism to monitor and debug the system. The transaction log fields include both device and protocol engine information applicable to Service Engines and Service Routers that are useful for capacity monitoring. Additionally, when a device or protocol engine threshold is exceeded, detailed information is sent to a file (threshold_exceeded.log) to capture the processes that triggered the threshold alarm.

The Service Monitor transaction log filename has the following format: service_monitor_ <ipaddr>_yyyymmdd_hhmmss_<> , where:

• <ipaddr> represents the IP address of the SE, SR, or CDSM.

• yyyymmdd_hhmmss represents the date and time when the log was created.

For example, service_monitor_192.168.1.52_20110630_230001_00336 is the filename for the log file on the device with the IP address of 192.168.1.52 and a time stamp of June 30, 2011 at 3:36 AM.

The Service Monitor transaction log file is located in the /local1/logs/service_monitor directory.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-337

service-router

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

An entry to the Service Monitor transaction log is made every two seconds.

Note The following rules apply to Service Monitor transaction logs:

A transaction log value is only logged if the Service Monitor is enabled for that component or protocol engine on the device. For example, if CPU monitoring is not enabled, the transaction log value “–” is displayed.

If Service Monitor is enabled for a protocol engine, but the protocol engine is not enabled, the value is not displayed in the log file.

If a log field can have more than one value, the values are delimited by the pipe (|) character.

If a value can have sub-values, the sub-values are delimited by the carrot (^) character.

Some of the fields display aggregate values. If the statistics are cleared using the clear statistics command, the value after clearing the statistics may be less than the previous values, or may be zero

(0).

Table 2-4

Field date time cpu_avg mem_avg kernel_mem_avg disk_avg disk_fail_count_ threshold per_disk_load

Table 2-4 describes the fields for the Service Monitor transaction log on an SE.

SE Service Monitor Transaction Log Fields

Sample Output Description

2011-06-30 Date of log.

22:52:02

21

Time of log.

Moving average value in percentage of

CPU usage.

Corresponding CLI Command

– show service-router service-monitor

Device status—CPU—Average load

44

11

Moving average value in percentage of memory usage.

show service-router service-monitor

Device status—Mem—Average used memory

Moving average value in percentage of kernel memory.

show service-router service-monitor

Device status—KMEM—Average kernel memory

2

Y disk03-01^2| disk04-02^5

Moving average value in percentage of disk usage.

Boolean value to indicate if disk fail count threshold has been reached.

show service-router service-monitor

Device status—Disk—Average load show service-router service-monitor

Device status—Device

Status—Disk—Status

Current load per disk, as a percentage.

The sample output indicates that disk03–partition01 has a 2 percent load and disk04–partition02 have a 5 percent load.

2-338

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands service-router

Table 2-4 SE Service Monitor Transaction Log Fields (continued)

Field bandwidth_avg file_desc_count tcp_server_connections

Sample Output Description

Port_Channel_

1^2^4|

Port_Channel_

2^0^0

Moving average bandwidth used, as a percentage, of bandwidth in and bandwidth out per interface. The sample output indicates that port channel 1 has an average bandwidth of

2 percent for receiving and 4 percent for transmitting, and port channel 2 average bandwidth usage is 0.

1023

35

Corresponding CLI Command show service-router service-monitor

Device status—NIC—Average BW

In/ Average BW Out

Total count of file descriptors open on the device. File descriptors are internal data structures maintained by the Linux kernel for each open file.

Number of TCP server connections open.

– show statistics tcp

TCP Statistics—Server connection openings tcp_client_connections 24 processes_count dataserver_cpu_ percentage ms_rtsp_sessions_ count ms_rtp_sessions_count

1 ms_threshold_exceeded – ms_augment_threshold_

Exceeded ms_stopped fms_threshold_ exceeded fms_augment_threshold_ exceeded

42

N

N

Number of TCP client connections open.

Total Movie Streamer RTSP session count (aggregate value).

Total Movie Streamer RTP session count (aggregate value).

Boolean value to indicate if threshold is exceeded.

Boolean value to indicate if Flash

Media Streaming augmentation alarm threshold has been exceeded.

show statistics tcp

TCP Statistics—Client connection openings show processes Number of processes running on the device.

Percentage of the CPU used for the dataserver process.

Boolean value to indicate if the Movie

Streamer threshold has been exceeded.

Boolean value to indicate if Movie

Streamer augmentation alarm threshold has been exceeded.

Boolean value to indicate if the Movie

Streamer protocol engine has stopped.

– show service-router service-monitor

Services status—MS—Threshold

– show service-router service-monitor

Services status—MS—Stopped show statistics movie-streamer all

Total RTSP sessions show statistics movie-streamer all

Total RTP connections show service-router service-monitor

Services status—FMS—Threshold

– fms_stopped fms_connections_count

N

2

Boolean value to indicate if Flash

Media Streaming has stopped.

Total Flash Media Streaming connection count (aggregate value).

show service-router service-monitor

Services status—FMS—Stopped show statistics flash-media-streaming

Connections—Total

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-339

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands service-router

Table 2-4 SE Service Monitor Transaction Log Fields (continued)

Field web_ engine_ threshold_exceeded web_ engine_augment_ threshold_exceeded web_ engine_stopped web_engine_cpu_ percentage web_engine_mem (bytes) 3500 web_engine_get_ requests web_engine_sessions

Sample Output Description

Y Boolean value to indicate if the Web

Engine threshold has been exceeded.

Y

N

Boolean value to indicate if Web

Engine augmentation alarm threshold has been exceeded.

Boolean value to indicate if Web

Engine has stopped.

3

250

5

Percentage of the CPU used by the Web

Engine.

Memory (in bytes) used by the Web

Engine.

Count of get requests received by the

Web Engine (Aggregate value)

Count of HTTP connections.

Corresponding CLI Command show service-router service-monitor

Services status—Web—Threshold

– show service-router service-monitor

Services status—Web—Stopped

– show web-engine health

Total memory usage show statistics web-engine detail

HTTP Request Type Statistics—Get requests show statistics web-engine detail

Web-Engine Detail Statistics—Total

HTTP Connection + Active Session web_engine_upstream_ connections wmt_threshold_ exceeded wmt_augment

_threshold_exceeded wmt_stopped wmt_ml_cpu_percentage wmt_ml_mem (bytes) wmt_core_cpu_ percentage

21 wmt_core_mem (bytes) 32456 wmt_unicast_sessions wmt_remote_sessions

2

N

N

Y

21

32456

22

24

Count of HTTP connections to upstream SE or origin server.

Boolean value to indicate if Windows

Media Streaming threshold has been exceeded.

Boolean value to indicate if the

Windows Media Streaming augmentation alarm threshold has been exceeded.

Boolean value to indicate if Windows

Media Streaming has stopped.

– show statistics web-engine detail

Web-Engine Detail Statistics—Total

HTTP Connection show service-router service-monitor

Services status—WMT—Threshold show service-router service-monitor

Services status—WMT—Stopped

– Percentage of the CPU used by the

WMT_ML process.

Memory (in bytes) used by WMT_ML process

– Percentage of the CPU used by the

WMT_Core process.

Memory (in bytes) used by the

WMT_Core process.

Number of current concurrent unicast client sessions.

Number of current concurrent remote server sessions.

– show statistics wmt usage

Concurrent Unicast Client

Sessions—Current show statistics wmt usage

Concurrent Remote Server Sessions

2-340

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands service-router

Table 2-4

Field wmt_live_requests wmt_vod_requests wmt_http_requests wmt_rtsp_requests rtspg_tps uns_mem (bytes)

SE Service Monitor Transaction Log Fields (continued) uns_cpu_percentage

Sample Output

21

22

11

8

12

3

3500

Description

Total count of Windows Media

Streaming live requests (Aggregate value).

Total count of Windows Media

Streaming VOD requests (Aggregate value).

Total count of Windows Media

Streaming HTTP requests (Aggregate value).

Corresponding CLI Command show statistics wmt requests

By Type of Content—Live content show statistics wmt requests

By Type of Content—On-Demand

Content show statistics wmt requests

By Transport Protocol—HTTP

Total count of Windows Media

Streaming RTSP requests (Aggregate value).

Current RTSP Gateway transactions per second (TPS).

show statistics wmt requests

By Transport

Protocol—RTSPT/RTSPU

Percentage of CPU used by the Unified

Namespace (UNS) process.

Memory used by the UNS process.

Table 2-5

Field date time cpu_avg mem_avg kernel_mem_avg disk_avg disk_fail_count_ threshold file_desc_count

Table 2-5

describes the fields for the Service Monitor transaction log on a SR.

SR Service Monitor Transaction Log Fields

Sample Output Description

2011-06-30 Date of log.

22:52:02

21

Time of log.

Moving average value in percentage of

CPU usage.

Corresponding CLI Command

– show service-router service-monitor

Device status —CPU—Average load

44

11

Moving average value in percentage of memory usage.

show service-router service-monitor

Device status —Mem—Average used memory

Moving average value in percentage of kernel memory.

show service-router service-monitor

Device status—KMEM—Average kernel memory

2

Y

1023

Moving average value in percentage of disk usage.

Boolean value to indicate if disk fail count threshold has been reached.

show service-router service-monitor

Device status—Disk—Average load show service-router service-monitor

Device status—Device

Status—Disk—Status

Total count of file descriptors open on the device. File descriptors are internal data structures maintained by the Linux kernel for each open file.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-341

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands service-router

Table 2-5 SR Service Monitor Transaction Log Fields (continued)

Field dataserver_cpu_ percentage sr_cpu_percentage sr_mem (bytes)

Sample Output Description tcp_server_connections 35 tcp_client_connections processes_count requests_received http_normal_requests_ received http_asx_requests_ received rtsp_requests_received rtmp_requests_received dns_requests_received

24

42

1

12

750000

34

5

5

5

5

6

Number of TCP server connections open.

Number of TCP client connections open.

Corresponding CLI Command show statistics tcp

TCP Statistics—Server connection openings show statistics tcp

TCP Statistics—Client connection openings show processes Number of processes running on the device.

Percentage of the CPU used for the dataserver process.

Cpu percentage used by SR.

Memory (in bytes) used by SR.

– show processes memory and search for service_router

Total count of requests received by SR

(aggregate value) show statistics service-router summary

Requests Received

Total count of normal HTTP requests received by SR (aggregate value).

Total count of ASX HTTP requests received by SR (aggregate value).

show statistics service-router summary

HTTP Requests (normal) show statistics service-router summary -

HTTP Requests (ASX)

Total count of RTSP requests received by SR (aggregate value).

Total count of RTMP requests received by SR (aggregate value).

Total count of DNS requests received by SR (aggregate value).

show statistics service-router summary

RTSP Requests show statistics service-router summary

RTMP Requests show statistics service-router dns

Total DNS queries

Examples The following example shows how to configure the keepalive interval:

ServiceRouter(config)# service-router keepalive-interval 2

The following example shows how to configure the service monitor type:

ServiceRouter(config)# service-router service-monitor type all

Augmentation Alarms

The augmentation alarms threshold is a percentage, that applies to the CPU, memory, kernel memory, disk, disk fail count, NIC, and protocol engine usages. By default it is set to 80 percent.

As an example of an augmentation alarm, if the threshold configured for CPU usage is 80 percent, and the augmentation threshold is set to 80 percent, then the augmentation alarm for CPU usage is raised when the CPU usage crosses 64 percent.

2-342

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands service-router

If “A” represents the Service Monitor threshold configured, and “B” represents the augmentation threshold configured, then the threshold for raising an augmentation alarm = (A * B) / 100 percent.

The threshold value range is 1–100. The following command shows how to set the augmentation alarms threshold to 70 percent:

ServiceRouter(config)# service router service-monitor threshold augmentation 70

The following command shows how to reset the augmentation alarm threshold to the default:

ServiceRouter(config)# no service router service-monitor threshold augmentation 70

The show service-router service monitor command displays the augmentation alarm threshold configuration.

The show alarms command displays the alarms output.

The show alarms history detail command displays the history details.

The show alarms detail command displays the alarms details.

The show alarms detail support command displays the support information.

Cross Domain Support

The following example shows how to enable crossdomain support:

ServiceEngine(config)# service-router access-policy enable

The following example shows how to disable crossdomain support:

ServiceEngine(config)# no service-router access-policy enable

The following example shows how to configure Proximity Engine cache on an SR:

ServiceRouter(config)# proximity engine enable

Starting Proximity Engine....

Proximity Engine Started.

ServiceRouter(config)# service-router proximity-based-routing proximity-server 127.0.0.1

ServiceRouter(config)# service-router proximity-based-routing proximity-cache timeout 600

ServiceRouter(config)# service-router proximity-based-routing enable

Please ensure you have purchased License for this advanced feature

ServiceRouter(config)# end

The following example shows how to enable DNS-based redirection with the cdsfms.com domain as the domain used to redirect all client requests to:

ServiceRouter(config)# service-router redirect-mode dns-redirect domain cdsfms.com

The following example shows how to display information about the redirect mode by entering the show service-router redirect-mode command:

ServiceRouter# show service-router redirect-mode ip-redirect is enabled dns-redirect domain fms.cds.com

dns-redirect domain cds.com

dns-redirect domain abc.com

dns-redirect domain cdsfms.com

The following example shows how to subscribe the SR to a domain named test3.com:

ServiceRouter(config)# service-router subscribe domain test3.com

ServiceRouter(config)#

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-343

service-router

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

The following example shows how to configure the failed disk threshold to 40 percent:

ServiceEngine(config)# service-router service-monitor threshold faildisk 40

U2-205-2(config)# end

U2-205-2# show running-config | include threshold service-router service-monitor threshold faildisk 40

ServiceEngine#

To display the statistics, use the show statistics service-router summary command and the show statistics se sename command. The new output for the DNS-Based Redirection feature is highlighted in boldface type in the examples below. In addition to these two show commands, there is also the show statistics service-router dns command, which displays the same output as before:

ServiceRouter# show statistics service-router summary

----- SR Summary Statistics -----

Requests Received : 2

HTTP Requests (normal) : 0

HTTP Requests (ASX) : 0

RTSP Requests : 0

RTMP Requests : 0

DNS Requests : 2

Requests Served : 0

HTTP Requests Served : 0

Requests Redirected : 1

HTTP 302 Redirects : 0

ASX Redirects : 0

RTSP redirects : 0

RTMP redirects : 0

DNS redirects : 1

Requests Overflowed : 1

HTTP 302 Redirects : 0

ASX Redirects : 0

RTSP redirects : 0

RTMP redirects : 0

DNS redirects : 1

Requests Not Redirected : 0

No SE Covering Client : 0

Unknown Content Origin : 0

Route Table Locked : 0

“Stale SE” Requests : 0

ServiceRouter# show statistics service-router se temp2

----- Statistics Of SE: temp2 -----

IP Address : 2.225.2.59

Aliveness : up

HTTP 302 Redirects : 0

ASX Redirects : 0

RTSP Redirects : 0

RTMP Redirects : 0

DNS Redirects : 1

Number Of Keepalives : 85261

The following example shows how to enable the Service Monitor transaction logging:

ServiceEngine(config)# transaction-logs enable

ServiceEngine(config)# service-router service-monitor transaction-log enable

2-344

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands service-router

The following example shows how to configure the URL translator:

ServiceRouter(config)# service-router last-resort domain cds.com translator 171.XX.XX.XXX

ServiceRouter(config)# service-router last-resort domain cdsis.com translator

171.XX.XX.XXX port 8080

ServiceRouter#

The following example shows how to verify the current last resort configuration details:

ServiceRouter# show service-router last-resort

Domain cds.com translator 171.XX.XX.XXX

Domain cdsis.com translator 171.XX.XX.XXX port 8080

Related Commands Command show service-router

Description

Displays the Service Router configuration.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-345

setup

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

setup

To configure basic configuration settings (general settings, device network settings, and disk configuration) on the SE and a set of commonly used caching services, use the setup command in EXEC configuration mode. You can also use the setup command in EXEC configuration mode to complete basic configuration after upgrading.

setup

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Examples The following example shows the part of the output when you enter the setup command in EXEC configuration mode on an SE running the VDS-IS software:

ServiceEngine# setup

Here is the current profile of this device

CDN device : Yes

Do you want to change this (y/n) [ n ] :

Press the ESC key at any time to quit this session

2-346

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show aaa

show aaa

To display the accounting, authentication, and authorization configuration, use the show aaa command in EXEC configuration mode.

show aaa { commands [ accounting | authorization ] | enable [ authentication ] | exec [ accounting

| authorization ] | login [ authentication ] | system [ accounting | authorization ]}

Syntax Description commands accounting authorization enable authentication exec login system

Configures exec (shell) commands.

(Optional) Displays the Accounting configuration.

(Optional) Displays the Authorization configuration.

Configures enable.

(Optional) Displays Authentication configuration.

Configures starting an exec (shell).

Configures the user’s login to the system.

Configures system events.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines

Table 2-6

describes the fields shown in the show aaa commands command display.

Table 2-6 show aaa commands Field Descriptions

Field

Configuration commands

Authorization

Commands on console Line

Authorization

Exec commands

Authorization:

Normal Users

Exec commands

Authorization: Super

Users

Tacacs+

Description

Authorization through Tacacs+ for configuration mode commands is enabled or disabled.

Authorization through TACACS+ for all commands issued from console line is enabled or disabled.

Authorization through Tacacs+ for exec (shell) commands issued by normal users is enabled or disabled.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-347

show aaa

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-6 show aaa commands Field Descriptions (continued)

Field

Exec Commands

Accounting: Normal

Users

Tacacs+

Description

Authorization through Tacacs+ for exec (shell) commands issued by super users is enabled or disabled.

Exec Commands

Accounting: Super

Users

Tacacs+ Accounting through Tacacs+ for exec (shell) commands issued by normal users is enabled or disabled.

Table 2-7 describes the fields shown in the

show aaa enable command display.

Table 2-7 show aaa enable Field Descriptions

Field

Enable

Authentication: All

Users

Enable

Description

Radius

Tacacs+

Authentication through local configured Enable password for enable is enabled or disabled.

Authentication through Radius for enable is enabled or disabled.

Authentication through Tacacs+ for enable is enabled or disabled.

Table 2-8 describes the fields shown in the

show aaa exec command display.

Table 2-8 show aaa exec Field Descriptions

Field

Starting exec

Authorization:

Local

Radius

Tacacs+

Exec events

Accounting

Tacacs+

Description

Authorization through local for starting exec is enabled or disabled.

Authorization through Radius for starting exec is enabled or disabled.

Authorization through Tacacs+ for starting exec is enabled or disabled.

Accounting through Tacacs+ for exec event is enabled or disabled.

Table 2-9 describes the fields shown in the

show aaa login command display.

2-348

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show aaa

Table 2-9 show aaa login Field Descriptions

Field

Login Authentication

Local

Radius

Tacacs+

Description

Authentication through local configured user password for login is enabled or disabled.

Authentication through Radius for login is enabled or disabled.

Authentication through Tacacs+ for login is enabled or disabled.

Table 2-10

describes the fields shown in the show aaa system command display.

Table 2-10 show aaa system Field Descriptions

Field

System events

Accounting

Tacacs+

Description

Accounting through Tacacs+ for system event is enabled or disabled.

Related Commands Command aaa show aaa show statistics aaa

Description

Configures accounting, authentication and authorization methods.

Displays the accounting, authentication and authorization configuration.

Displays accounting, authentication and authorization statistics.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-349

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show access-lists 300

show access-lists 300

To display the access control list (ACL) configuration, use the show access-lists 300 command in EXEC configuration mode.

show access-lists 300

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords .

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines

Table 2-11 describes the fields shown in the

show access-lists 300 display.

Table 2-11 show access-lists Field Descriptions

Field

Access Control List is enabled

Groupname and username-based List

Description

Configuration status of the access control list.

Lists the group name-based access control lists.

Related Commands Command access-lists

Description

Configures access control list entries.

2-350

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show acquirer

show acquirer

To display the acquirer information and progress of content acquisition for a specified channel number or name, use the show acquirer command in EXEC configuration mode.

show acquirer [ delivery-service { delivery-service-id delivery_service_id | delivery-service-name delivery_service_name } | progress { delivery-service-id delivery_service_id | delivery-service-name delivery_service_name } | proxy authentication ]

Syntax Description delivery-service delivery-service-id

(Optional) Displays acquirer information for the delivery service.

Displays the ID for the delivery service.

delivery_service_id Delivery service ID.

delivery-service-name Displays the name for the delivery service.

delivery_service_name Delivery service name.

progress (Optional) Displays the acquisition progress for the specified channel.

proxy authentication

(Optional) Displays the proxy information for the acquirer.

(Optional) Displays the proxy authentication details for the acquirer.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The show acquirer progress command displays information for all channels for which the SE is the

Content Acquirer. It displays the number of acquired objects in relation to the total number of objects for both a single item or crawler jobs. When an acquisition is in progress, it displays the number of data bytes currently being downloaded in relation to the total size of the object and its URL. The show acquirer progress command also displays information about the authentication that allows the acquirer to access content through a transparent or nontransparent proxy server.

The show acquirer proxy authentication command displays the proxy authentication configuration for the acquirer if you have enabled content acquisition through a proxy server and proxy authentication is configured. Use the acquirer proxy authentication outgoing command in Global configuration mode to configure authentication when you enable content acquisition through a proxy server. You must first configure the proxy host and the port using the http proxy outgoing host command in Global configuration mode.

When you enable content acquisition through a proxy server, you can provide the proxy configuration and proxy authentication information in the manifest file. If the proxy and proxy authentication are configured in the manifest file, the show acquirer proxy authentication command does not display any proxy details.

The show acquirer progress command in EXEC configuration mode displays the progress of the acquirer for a specified channel. If a specific channel is not mentioned, the display shows the progress for all the channels for which the SE is the root.

Table 2-12

describes the fields shown in the show acquirer progress display.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-351

show acquirer

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-12 show acquirer progress Field Descriptions

Field

Channel-id

Channel-Name

Acquired Single

Items

Description

Numerical identifier for the channel.

Name for the channel.

Total number of single items completed out of all the single items specified in the manifest. For example, 200/301 shows that all 200 items out of a total of

301 items have been acquired.

Acquired Crawl Items Total number of links with crawling completed out of the total crawlable items for each crawling task specified in the manifest, along with the starting URL.

Download Size

(Bytes)

Current URL fetched by the acquirer for the channel, if applicable, along with the file size details.

The following example shows the output from the show acquirer proxy authentication command when there are no proxies configured using the acquirer proxy authentication command in Global configuration mode:

ServiceEngine# show acquirer proxy authentication

No proxy authentication information configured

The following example shows the output from the show acquirer proxy authentication command after configuring the proxy using the acquirer proxy authentication command in Global configuration mode:

ServiceEngine# show acquirer proxy authentication acquirer proxy authentication outgoing 172.28.225.29 8080 admin password **** My-Domain basic-auth-disable acquirer proxy authentication transparent admin password **** My-Domain basic-auth-disable

Related Commands Command acquirer (Global configuration) http show statistics acquirer

Description

Provides authentication when the acquirer obtains content through a proxy server.

Configures HTTP-related parameters.

Displays SE acquirer channel statistics.

2-352

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show alarms

show alarms

To display information on various types of alarms, their status, and history, use the show alarms command in EXEC configuration mode.

show alarms {critical [detail [support]] | detail [support] | history [ start_num [ end_num [detail

[support] | detail [support]]] | critical [ start_num [ end_num [detail [support]] | detail

[support]]]| detail [support] | major [ start_num [ end_num [detail [support]] | detail

[support]]] | minor [ start_num [ end_num [detail [support]]]| detail [support]]] | major

[detail [support]] | minor [detail [support]] | status}

Syntax Description critical detail support history start_num end_num major minor status

(Optional) Displays critical alarm information.

(Optional) Displays detailed information for each alarm.

(Optional) Displays additional information about each alarm.

(Optional) Displays information about the history of various alarms.

(Optional) Alarm number that appears first in the alarm history (1 to 100).

(Optional) Alarm number that appears last in the alarm history (1 to 100).

(Optional) Displays information about major alarms.

(Optional) Displays information about minor alarms.

(Optional) Displays the status of various alarms and alarm overload settings.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The Node Health Manager enables VDS-IS applications to raise alarms to draw attention to error or significant conditions. The Node Health Manager, which is the data repository for such alarms, aggregates the health and alarm information for the applications, services (for example, the cache service), and resources (for example, disk drives) that are being monitored on the SE. For example, the

Node Health Manager gives you a mechanism to determine if a monitored application (for example, the

HTTP proxy caching service) is alive on the SE. These alarms are referred to as VDS-IS software alarms.

The VDS-IS software uses SNMP to report error conditions by generating SNMP traps. In the VDS-IS software, the following SE applications can generate a VDS-IS software alarm:

Node Health Manager (alarm overload condition and Node Manager aliveness)

Node Manager for service failures (aliveness of monitored applications)

• System Monitor (sysmon) for disk failures

The three levels of alarms in the VDS-IS software are as follows:

Critical—Alarms that affect the existing traffic through the SE and are considered fatal (the SE cannot recover and continue to process traffic).

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-353

show alarms

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

• Major—Alarms that indicate a major service (for example, the cache service) has been damaged or lost. Urgent action is necessary to restore this service. However, other node components are fully functional and the existing service should be minimally impacted.

• Minor—Alarms that indicate that a condition that will not affect a service has occurred, but corrective action is required to prevent a serious fault from occurring.

You can configure alarms using the snmp-server enable traps alarm command in Global configuration mode.

Use the show alarms critical command in EXEC configuration mode to display the current critical alarms being generated by the VDS-IS software applications. Use the show alarms critical detail command in EXEC configuration mode to display additional details for each of the critical alarms being generated. Use the show alarms critical detail support command in EXEC configuration mode to display an explanation about the condition that triggered the alarm and how you can find out the cause of the problem. Similarly, you can use the show alarms major and show alarms minor command in

EXEC configuration modes to display the details of major and minor alarms.

Use the show alarms history command in EXEC configuration mode to display a history of alarms that have been raised and cleared by the VDS-IS software on the SE. The VDS-IS software retains the last

100 alarm raise and clear events only.

Use the show alarm status command in EXEC configuration mode to display the status of current alarms and the SE’s alarm overload status and alarm overload configuration.

Note The maximum concurrent sessions limit for the Web Engine is based on the CDE; for the CDE220-2M0 and CDE220-2S6 the maximum is 30,000 and for the CDE205 the maximum is 20,000.

Note Hardware based Fan/Temperature/Power Supply/Hard drive alarms are first introduced in this version for CDE280, other platform does not have these alarms. For more information, see Alarms and Error

Messages Guide .

Brstcnt Threshold Alarm

When the number of sessions or current bandwidth usage exceeds the configured license limit on the

Service Engine, the protocol engine raises an alarm and sends a threshold exceeded

notification to the

Service Router. Any new requests for that protocol engine are not routed to that Service Engine.

Note This feature only applies to the Windows Media Streaming engine, the Flash Media Streaming engine, and the Movie Streamer engine.

Table 2-13 describes the fields shown in the

show alarms history display.

Table 2-13 show alarms history Field Descriptions

Field

Op

Sev

Alarm ID

Description

Operation status of the alarm. Values are R—Raised or C—Cleared.

Severity of the alarm. Values are Cr—Critical, Ma—Major, or Mi—Minor.

Type of event that caused the alarm.

2-354

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show alarms

Table 2-13 show alarms history Field Descriptions (continued)

Field Description

Module/Submodule Software module affected.

Instance Object that this alarm event is associated with. For example, for an alarm event with the Alarm ID disk_failed, the instance would be the name of the disk that failed. The Instance field does not have pre-defined values and is application specific.

Table 2-14

describes the fields shown in the show alarms status display.

Table 2-14 show alarms status Field Descriptions

Field

Critical Alarms

Major Alarms

Minor Alarms

Critical License Alarms

Description

Number of critical alarms.

Number of major alarms.

Number of minor alarms.

Number of critical license alarms.

Major License Alarms

Minor License Alarms

Overall Alarm Status

Device is NOT in alarm overload state.

Number of major license alarms.

Number of minor license alarms.

Aggregate status of alarms.

Status of the device alarm overload state.

Device enters alarm overload state

@ 999 alarms/sec.

Device exits alarm overload state @

99 alarms/sec.

Overload detection is enabled.

Threshold number of alarms per second at which the device enters the alarm overload state.

Threshold number of alarms per second at which the device exits the alarm overload state.

Status of whether overload detection is enabled on the device.

Related Commands Command alarm snmp-server enable traps

Description

Configure alarms.

Enables the SE to send SNMP traps.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-355

show arp

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

show arp

To display the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) table, use the show arp command in EXEC configuration mode.

show arp

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The show arp command displays the Internet-to-Ethernet address translation tables of the ARP. Without flags, the current ARP entry for the hostname is displayed.

Table 2-15 describes the fields shown in the

show arp display.

Table 2-15 show arp Field Descriptions

Field

Protocol

Address

Flags

Hardware Addr

Type

Interface

Description

Type of protocol.

Ethernet address of the hostname.

Current ARP flag status.

Hardware Ethernet address given as six hexadecimal bytes separated by colons.

Type of wide area network.

Type of Ethernet interface.

2-356

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show authentication

show authentication

To display the authentication configuration, use the show authentication command in EXEC configuration mode.

show authentication user

Syntax Description user Displays the authentication configuration for the user login to the system.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Related Commands Command aaa clear

Description

Specifies accounting, authentication and authorization methods.

Clears the HTTP object cache, the hardware interface, statistics, archive working transaction logs, and other settings.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-357

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show authsvr

show authsvr

To display the status of the Authorization server, use the show authsvr command in EXEC configuration mode.

show authsvr [ unknown-server | location-server ]

Syntax Description unknown-server location-server

(Optional) Shows the allow and deny rule for unknown configured servers or domains.

(Optional) Shows the Location server configuration. It includes both primary and secondary geo location server information.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Examples The following example shows how to display the status of the Authorization server:

ServiceEngine# show authsvr

Authserver is Enabled

The following example shows the status of the Location server:

ServiceEngine# show authsvr location-server

Primary geo location server 4.0.1.3 7000

Secondary geo location server 171.71.50.140 7000

Related Commands Command authsvr

Description

Enables and configures the Authorization server.

2-358

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show bandwidth

show bandwidth

To display the bandwidth allocated to a particular device, use the show bandwidth command in EXEC configuration mode.

show bandwidth [ flash-media-streaming | movie-streamer | wmt ]

Syntax Description flash-media-streaming (Optional) Displays the Flash Media Streaming bandwidth settings.

movie-streamer (Optional) Displays the Movie Streamer bandwidth settings.

wmt (Optional) Displays Windows Media Technology (WMT) bandwidth settings.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines

Table 2-16

describes the fields shown in the show bandwidth display.

Table 2-16 show bandwidth Field Descriptions

Field

Module

Bandwidth Kbps

Start Time

End Time

Description

Types of application servers for which bandwidth allocation is displayed:

• wmt incoming is for incoming WMT streaming content requests from end users.

wmt outgoing is for outgoing WMT media from SEs.

• movie-streamer incoming is for incoming Movie Streamer content requests from end users.

movie-streamer outgoing is for outgoing Movie Streamer media from SEs.

• flash-media-streaming is for Flash Media Streaming.

Maximum amount of bandwidth that you want allowed in kbps

1 for a particular period of time. Incoming and outgoing bandwidth enforced is 8000000 kbps.

Time of the day for the bandwidth rate setting to begin, using a

24-hour clock in local time on the SE (hh:mm).

Time of the day for the bandwidth rate setting to end, using a

24-hour clock in local time on the SE (hh:mm).

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-359

show bandwidth

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-16 show bandwidth Field Descriptions (continued)

Field

Default Bandwidth Kbps

Max Bandwidth Kbps

Description

Amount of default bandwidth (in kbps). The default bandwidth is the amount of bandwidth associated with each content service type when there is no scheduled bandwidth.

Maximum bandwidth (in kbps) permitted by the system license.

This bandwidth specifies the upper limit of allowable bandwidth.

1.

kbps = kilobits per second

Related Commands Command bandwidth (Global configuration)

Description

Sets an allowable bandwidth usage limit and its duration for Cisco

Streaming Engine WMT streaming media.

2-360

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show banner

show banner

To display information on various types of banners, use the show banner command in EXEC configuration mode.

show banner

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines

Table 2-17

describes the fields shown in the show banner display.

Table 2-17 show banner Field Descriptions

Field

Banner is enabled.

Description

Configuration status of the banner feature.

MOTD banner is: abc Displays the configured message of the day.

Login banner is: acb Displays the configured login banner.

Exec banner is: abc Displays the configured EXEC banner.

Related Commands Command banner

Description

Configures the EXEC, login, and message-of-the-day (MOTD) banners.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-361

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show bitrate

show bitrate

To display the bit rate allocated to a particular device, use the show bitrate command in EXEC configuration mode.

show bitrate [ movie-streamer | wmt ]

Syntax Description movie-streamer wmt

(Optional) Displays the Movie Streamer bit rate settings.

(Optional) Displays Windows Media Technology (WMT) bit rate settings.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines

Table 2-18 describes the fields shown in the

show bitrate display.

Table 2-18 show bitrate Field Descriptions

Field

Module

Default Bitrate Kbps

Configured Bitrate Kbps

Description

Types of application servers for which the bit rate is displayed:

• wmt outgoing is the maximum bit rate per WMT stream that can be served by the SE.

• wmt incoming is the maximum bit rate per WMT stream that can be received by the SE.

movie-streamer outgoing is the maximum bit rate per streamer that can be served by the SE.

• movie-streamer incoming is the maximum bit rate per streamer that can be received by the SE.

Bit rate associated with the application servers when the bit rate has not been configured on the SE.

Bit rate configured on the SE in kilobits per second.

Related Commands Command bitrate

Description

Configures the maximum pacing bit rate for large files for the Movie

Streamer and separately configures WMT bit-rate settings.

2-362

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show cache

show cache

To display a list of cached contents, use the show cache command in EXEC configuration mode.

show cache { content num | deletion [ status [ all [|[ begin line | count [ begin line | exclude line

| include line ] | exclude line | include line ] ] | transaction-id transaction-id ] | transactions

] [ | [ begin line | count [ begin line | exclude line | include line ] | exclude line | include line

] ] | list path | |[ begin line | count [ begin line | exclude line | include line ] | exclude line | include line ] }

Syntax Description content num deletion status

| all begin line count exclude include transaction-id transaction-id transactions list path

Displays a list of cached contents in order of decreasing priority.

(Optional) Number of cached contents to be displayed. The range is from 1 to 1000.

Display cache deletion details

Display the status of content deletion transaction(s)

Display all of the status of pending/ongoing content deletion transactions

Output modifiers

Begin with the line that matches regular expression

Line count of the output

Exclude lines that match

Include lines that match

Display the content deletion status by transaction-id

The content deletion transaction-id

Display list of pending/ongoing content deletion transactions IDs

Display list of cached contents by wildcard pathname

The cache content pathname with wildcard to be displayed.

Command Defaults Number of cached contents is 100.

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The show cache command allows users to check the cached content in an SE.

Use the show cache content command to display cache contents, such as priority, size, and URL, and to verify that content has been cached under the correct storage URL. The show cache content command also displays the eviction protection information. For relative contents such as WMT and MS, it only displays the parent URL information.

Note The show cache content command does not display priority (popularity), to see popularity use the show content-mgr content cache command or view the Content Manager transaction log entries.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-363

show cache

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Note When executing the show cache content url url command on prepositioned content, the output shows as “prepositioned.” However, when executing the show cache content url url command on hybrid content, it shows as “cached” instead of “prepositioned.” To correct this, use the detail option.

Examples The following example shows how to display the cached contents:

ServiceEngine# show cache content 1000

Max-cached-entries is set as 20000000

Number of cal cached assets: 3913

Eviction protection is disabled.

Cache eviction-preferred-size configured is large

------------------------------------------------

Size URL

------------------------------------------------

200000 http://7.6.200.3/B480-Sep18-TEST1/62/file-0-7372

200000 http://7.6.200.3/B480-Sep18-TEST1/62/file-0-6461

200000 http://7.6.200.3/B480-Sep18-TEST1/99/file-0-9701

200000 http://7.6.200.3/B480-Sep18-TEST1/99/file-0-4429

200000 http://7.6.200.3/B480-Sep18-TEST1/99/file-0-8867

200000 http://7.6.200.3/B480-Sep18-TEST1/67/file-0-3360

200000 http://7.6.200.3/B480-Sep18-TEST1/927/file-0-4481

200000 http://7.6.200.3/B480-Sep18-TEST1/927/file-0-5002

200000 http://7.6.200.3/B480-Sep18-TEST1/44/file-0-4454

200000 http://7.6.200.3/B480-Sep18-TEST1/105/file-0-4643

200000 http://7.6.200.3/B480-Sep18-TEST1/291/file-0-544

<Output truncated>

Related Commands Command cache

Description

Configures the cached content maximum entries in the VDS-IS.

2-364

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show cache-router

show cache-router

To Display cache-router information for various Protocol Engines, use the show cache-route command in EXEC configuration mode.

show cache-router { routes { dss-engine url | fms-engine url | web-engine url | wmt-engine url | upstream-status }

Syntax Description routes dss-engine url fms-engine web-engine wmt-engine upstream-status

Displays the cache-route information for various PEs.

Displays all RTSP protocol-related cache route information.

URL string.

Displays all Flash Media-related cache route information.

Displays all HTTP protocol-related cache route information.

Displays all Windows Media-related cache route information.

Displays Liveness information of upstream.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines This command can only be run on an SE to see the route taken by the appropriate Protocol Engine through the CDN (from the current SE where this command is executed) to retrieve the asset for a given

URL.

The sh cache-router routes command route calculation is agnostic of whether or not the URL is valid.

When a new SE is added to a delivery service, the get_cache_route does not vie the path, the command dumps the cached output and does not perform a liveness query. You must first enter the show cache router upstream status command and then the commands in the following example:

Examples The following examples show the cache route information:

ServiceEngine# sh cache-router routes web-engine http://7.25.0.7/index.html

The route: [ 7.25.0.15/7.25.0.13/ ] will be used to cache the asset for

URL=http://7.25.0.7/index.html

ServiceEngine# sh cache-router routes web-engine http://7.25.0.7/index.html

The route: [ 7.25.0.13/ ] will be used to cache the asset for

URL=http://7.25.0.7/index.html

ServiceEngine# sh cache-router routes web-engine http://7.25.0.7/index.html

The route: [ (null) ] will be used to cache the asset for URL=http://7.25.0.7/index.html

ServiceEngine# sh cache-router routes web-engine http://ccp-ccp-images.gslb.bdn.lab.xcal.tv/image1

The route: [ 69.241.50.154/69.252.83.150/69.241.118.14/ ] will be used to cache the asset for URL=http://ccp-ccp-images.gslb.bdn.lab.xcal.tv/image1.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-365

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show capability

show capability

To display the capabilities of the Cap-X profile ID, use the show capability command in EXEC configuration mode.

show capability profile ID profile_id

Syntax Description profile ID profile_id

Displays information for the Cap-X profile.

Profile ID number. The range is from 1 to 65535.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Related Commands Command capability

Description

Modifies the capability configuration.

2-366

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show cdn-select

show cdn-select

To display the status of the CDN Selector, use the show cdn-select command in EXEC configuration mode.

show cdn-select

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Related Commands Command cdn-select geo-location-server show statistics cdn-select

Description

Enables the CDN Selector for third-party service selection.

Redirects requests to different CDNs based on the geographic location of the client.

Displays the statistics for the CDN Selector.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-367

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show cdnfs

show cdnfs

To display VDS-IS network file system (CDNFS) information, use the show cdnfs command in EXEC configuration mode.

show cdnfs { usage | volumes }

Syntax Description usage volumes

Displays Content Delivery Network (CDN) current usage.

Displays CDNFS volumes.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines If there are any clear cache all commands in progress, the show cdnfs usage command displays the progress. If any disks are marked for not creation, then the disk is listed here and the reason is provided.

Table 2-19 describes the fields shown in the

show cdnfs volumes display.

Table 2-19 show cdnfs volumes Field Descriptions

Field cdnfs 00–04 nnnnnnKB

Description

VDS-IS network file system and disk number.

Size of the volume in kilobytes.

Table 2-20 describes the fields shown in the

show cdnfs usage display.

Table 2-20 show cdnfs usage Field Descriptions

Field

Total number of CDNFS entries

Total space

Total bytes available

Description

Shows the total number of CDNFS entries.

Shows the total disk space.

Shows the available disk space.

Total cache size

Total cached entries

Shows the total cache size

Shows the total cache and preposition entries.

Cache-content mgr status Shows the current status of whether or not the Content Manager is cachable.

2-368

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Examples The following example shows how to display the CDNFS usage on an SE:

ServiceEngine# show cdnfs usage

Total number of CDNFS entries : 13437532

Total space : 5037.9 GB

Total bytes available : 2425.6 GB

Total cache size : 2521.4 GB

Total cached entries : 13436995

Cache-content mgr status : Cacheable

Units: 1KB = 1024B; 1MB = 1024KB; 1GB = 1024MB

The following example shows how to display the CDNFS volumes:

ServiceEngine# show cdnfs volumes cdnfs 00: /disk00-06 444200480KB cdnfs 01: /disk01-06 444200480KB cdnfs 02: /disk03-01 488246296KB cdnfs 03: /disk04-01 488247316KB cdnfs 04: /disk05-01 488246296KB cdnfs 05: /disk06-01 488244924KB cdnfs 06: /disk07-01 488244924KB cdnfs 07: /disk09-01 488244924KB cdnfs 08: /disk10-01 488244924KB cdnfs 09: /disk11-01 488246296KB cdnfs 10: /disk08-01 488377368KB show cdnfs

Related Commands Command cdnfs disk (EXEC) show disks show statistics cdnfs

Description

Manages the VDS-IS network file system (cdnfs).

Configures disks and allocates disk space for devices that are using the

VDS-IS software.

Displays the names of the disks currently attached to the SE.

Displays SE VDS-IS network file system (cdnfs) statistics.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-369

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show clock

show clock

To display the system clock, use the show clock command in EXEC configuration mode.

show clock [ detail | standard-timezones { all | details timezone | regions | zones region_name }]

Syntax Description detail (Optional) Displays detailed information; indicates the Network Timing

Protocol (NTP) clock source and the current summer time setting (if any).

standard-timezones (Optional) Displays information about the standard time zones.

all Displays all the standard time zones (approximately 1500 time zones). Each time zone is listed on a separate line.

details timezone regions

Displays detailed information for the specified time zone.

Name of the time zone.

Displays the region name of all the standard time zones. All 1500 time zones are organized into directories by region.

zones region_name

Displays the name of every time zone that is within the specified region.

Name of the region.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The VDS-IS has several predefined standard time zones. Some of these time zones have built-in summertime information while others do not. For example, if you are in an eastern region of the United

States (US), you must use the US/Eastern time zone that includes summertime information and adjusts the clock automatically every April and October. There are about 1500 standard time zone names.

The clock summertime command is disabled when a standard time zone is configured. You can only configure summertime if the time zone is not a standard time zone (if the time zone is a customized zone).

In addition, CLI commands exist to enable you to display a list of all the standard time zones. The show clock standard-timezones all command in EXEC configuration mode enables you to browse through all standard time zones and choose from these predefined time zones. You can choose a customized name that does not conflict with the predefined names of the standard time zones. Most predefined names of the standard time zones have two components, a region name and a zone name. You can list time zones by several criteria, such as regions and zones.

Table 2-21 describes the field in the

show clock display.

Table 2-21 show clock Field Description

Field

Local time

Description

Day of the week, month, date, time (hh:mm:ss), and year in local time relative to the UTC offset.

2-370

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show clock

Table 2-22

describes the fields shown in the show clock detail display.

Table 2-22 show clock detail Field Descriptions

Field

Local time

UTC time

Epoch

UTC offset

Description

Local time relative to UTC.

Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) date and time.

Number of seconds since Jan. 1, 1970.

UTC offset, in seconds, hours, and minutes.

The following example shows an excerpt of the output from the show clock standard-timezones all command in EXEC configuration mode. As the following example shows all the standard time zones

(approximately 1500 time zones) are listed. Each time zone is listed on a separate line.

ServiceEngine # show clock standard-timezones all

Africa/Abidjan

Africa/Accra

Africa/Addis_Ababa

Africa/Algiers

Africa/Asmera

Africa/Bamako

Africa/Bangui

Africa/Banjul

Africa/Bissau

Africa/Blantyre

Africa/Brazzaville

Africa/Bujumbura

Africa/Casablanca

Africa/Ceuta

Africa/Conakry

.

.

Africa/Dakar

Africa/Dar_es_Salaam

Africa/Djibouti

.

The following example shows an excerpt of the output from the show clock standard-timezones region command in EXEC configuration mode. As the example shows, all first level time zone names or directories are listed. All 1500 time zones are organized into directories by region.

ServiceEngine # show clock standard-timezones regions

Africa/

America/

Antarctica/

Arctic/

Asia/

Atlantic/

Australia/

.

.

Brazil/

CET

.

The following example shows an excerpt of the output from the show clock standard-timezones zones command in EXEC configuration mode. As the following example shows, this command lists the name of every time zone that is within the specified region (for example, the US region).

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-371

show clock

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

ServiceEngine# show clock standard-timezones zones US

Alaska

Aleutian

Arizona

Central

East-Indiana

Eastern

Hawaii

Indiana-Starke

Michigan

Mountain

Pacific

Samoa

The following example shows an excerpt of the output from the show clock standard-timezones details command in EXEC configuration mode. This command shows details about the specified time zone (for example, the US/Eastern time zone). The command output also includes the standard offset from the

Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).

ServiceEngine # show clock standard-timezones details US/Eastern

US/Eastern is standard timezone.

Getting offset information (may take a while)...

Standard offset from GMT is -300 minutes (-5 hour(s)).

It has built-in summertime.

Summer offset from GMT is -240 minutes. (-4 hour(s)).

Related Commands Command clock (EXEC) clock (Global configuration

Description

Sets or clears clock functions or updates the calendar.

Sets the summer daylight saving time and time zone for display purposes.

2-372

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show cms

show cms

To display the Centralized Management System (CMS)-embedded database content and maintenance status and other information, use the show cms command in EXEC configuration mode.

show cms { database { content { dump filename | text | xml } | maintenance [ detail ]} | info | processes }

Syntax Description database content dump filename text xml maintenance detail info processes

Displays embedded database maintenance information.

Writes the database content to a file.

Dumps all database content to a text file.

Name of the file to be saved under local1 directory.

Writes the database content to a file in text format.

Writes the database content to a file in XML format.

Shows the current database maintenance status.

(Optional) Displays database maintenance details and errors.

Displays CMS application information.

Displays CMS application processes.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines

Table 2-23

describes the fields shown in the CDSM show cms info display.

Table 2-23 show cms Field Descriptions for the CDSM

Field

CDN information

Model

Node Id

Device Mode

Current CDSM role

Description

Model name of the device.

Unique identifier given to the device by the CDSM at registration, which is used to manage the device.

Configured mode of device used during registration.

Role of the current CDSM: Primary or Standby.

CMS services information

Service cms_httpd is running

Service cms_cdsm is running

Status of the cms_httpd management service (running or not running).

This field is specific to the CDSM only.

Status of the cms_cdsm management service (running or not running).

This field is specific to the CDSM only.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-373

show cms

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-24 describes the fields shown in the SE

show cms info display.

Table 2-24 show cms Field Descriptions for the SE

Field

CDN information

Model

Node Id

Device Mode

Current CDSM address

Description

Model name of the device.

Unique identifier given to the device by the CDSM at registration, which is used to manage the device.

Configured mode of device used during registration.

Address of the CDSM as currently configured in the cdsm ip command in

Global configuration mode. This address may differ from the registered address if a standby CDSM is managing the device instead of the primary

CDSM with which the device is registered.

Registered with CDSM

Status

Address of the CDSM with which the device is registered.

Connection status of the device to the CDSM. This field may contain one of three values: Online, Offline, or Pending.

Time of last config-sync Time when the device management service last contacted the CDSM for updates.

The following example writes the database content to a file in text format:

CDSM# show cms database content text

Database content can be found in /local1/cms-db-12-12-2002-17:06:08:070.txt.

The following example writes the database content to a file in XML format:

CDSM# show cms database content xml

Database content can be found in /local1/cms-db-12-12-2002-17:07:11:629.xml.

The following example shows the output of the show cms database maintenance detail on an SE:

ServiceEngine# show cms database maintenance detail

Database maintenance is not running.

Regular database maintenance is enabled.

Regular database maintenance schedule is set on Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat at 02:00

Full database maintenance is enabled.

Full database maintenance schedule is set on Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat at 04:00

Disk usage for STATE partition: Total: 1523564K, Available: 1443940K, Use: 6%

DATABASE VACUUMING DETAILS AND ERRORS

-------------------------------------

Database Vacuuming never performed or it did not complete due to error.

Latest Vacuuming status :No Error

Last Vacuum Error : No Error

Last Reindex Time : Thu Jul 15 02:02:49 2004

Latest Reindexing status :No Error

Last Reindex Error: No Error

ServiceEngine#

Related Commands Command cms (EXEC) cms (global)

Description

Configures the CMS-embedded database parameters.

Schedules maintenance and enables the CMS on a given node.

2-374

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show content

show content

To display all content entries in the VDS-IS, use the show content command in EXEC configuration mode. show content { all [ brief | foreground ] | diskpath [ brief | detail ] | last-folder-url [ brief ] | url url

[ brief | detail | tmpfs ]}

Syntax Description all name brief foreground diskpath detail tmpfs last-folder-url url url

Displays all cached content into a file.

Output file to log cache content query results.

(Optional) Indicates that this brief display mode should be used.

(Optional) Indicates that this command should be run in the foreground.

Displays cached content objects with the original diskpath.

(Optional) Indicates that the detail display mode should be used.

Display the content cached in tmpfs.

Displays all content with relative diskpath from the given url without a filename.

Displays the cached content object with original URL.

The original URL for cache content object query.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines This command allows users to check the cached or prepositioned content in an SE. Through this command, users can view content attributes such as status and file size.

Note For the value of the symlink output field to be correct for the Flash Media Streaming engine, you must configure the play server as HTTP by using the Manifest file.

The show content all command scans through the entire disk and transfers the information to the file specified by the user. This command runs in the background unless the foreground option is specified.

The show content url command displays cached content and Web Engine metadata attributes, and it helps debug header validation issues. It also displays additional information including start, end time,

UNS, and relative content information. If the input URL is parent, then it shows the child disk path. The

Authorization field is only applicable for preposition content and this field is moved to the show content url detail output.

When executing the show content url command with live URL, it displays as preposition content. This is because the object stored on CDNFS is either cache content or preposition content.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-375

show content

Examples

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

The following command shows how to display cached content and Web Engine attributes for a URL:

ServiceEngine# show content url http://172.XX.XX.XXX/diff.new detail

CAL content object attributes:

URL: http://we-os.cds.com/vod/pinball.wmv

Status is 3 (Servable)

Content is Complete

File size is 0 Bytes

Playable by WebEngine WMT

Linked to

[rtsp://http-we-os.cds.com-s6kmyz359zgyulqfiavhgw/vod/pinball.wmv]

Content is PREPOSITIONED

Start Time : Not present

End Time : Not present

Internal path to data file

[/disk00-06/p/we-os.cds.com/1d/a1/1da1394af838bbcb45af78fd5681abeb/pinball.w

mv]

Protocol Engine Metadata:

Authorization is Not Required

uns_attr_symlink : http-we-os.cds.com-s6kmyz359zgyulqfiavhgw/vod/pinball.wmv

UNS_NV_CALC_N_CACHED : PREPOSITIONED

cdn_uns_id : Rm+7u02g2S8PsuaCfnOKAQ..

content-type : video/x-ms-wmv

etag : "9601c7-cc3d0-11016c00"

file_duration : 25

ignore_query_string : 1

last-modified : Wed, 06 Oct 2010 22:12:00 GMT

server : Apache/2.2.3 (Red Hat)

The following example shows how to display the RTSP URL in the VDS-IS:

ServiceEngine# show content url rtsp://www.cht.com/CHT_2M.wmv

CAL content object attributes:

URL: rtsp://www.cht.com/CHT_2M.wmv

Status is 2 (Servable)

File size is 16 Bytes

Playable by WMT

Authorization is Not Required

Content is CACHED with priority 0.574964

The following example shows how to display all content entries in the VDS-IS:

ServiceEngine# show content all name background

Command running in background...

ServiceEngine# USER INFO: Your 'show content all' command finished

The following example shows how to display cached content objects with the original diskpath.

ServiceEngine# show content diskpath

/disk02-01/c/171.71.51.234/66/66/6666cd76f96956469e7be39d750cc7d9/1mbs.wmv.hdr

CAL content object attributes:

URL: rtsp://171.XX.XX.XXX/1mbs.wmv.hdr

Status is 3 (Servable)

Content is Incomplete

File size is 4096 Bytes

Playable by WMT

Authorization is Not Required

Content is CACHED with priority 0.303707

2-376

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show content

The following example shows how to display all the contents matching to that last-folder-url with the brief option:

ServiceEngine# show content last-folder-url http://172.XX.XX.XXX/vod/types brief

Protocol will be ignored with last-folder-url.

-----------------------------------------------------------------

Type URL Size(K) Status

-----------------------------------------------------------------

C http://172.XX.XX.XXX/vod/types/sample_s 81 Servable

orenson.mov

C http://172.XX.XX.XXX/vod/types/sample_1 912 Servable

00kbit.mp4

C http://172.XX.XX.XXX/vod/types/brodeo.m 3745 Servable

p3

The following example shows how to display all the contents matching to that last-folder-url without the brief option:

ServiceEngine# show content last-folder-url http://172.XX.XX.XXX/vod/types

Protocol will be ignored with last-folder-url.

CAL content object attributes:

URL: http://172.XX.XX.XXX/vod/types/sample_sorenson.mov

Status is 3 (Servable)

Content is Complete

File size is 82395 Bytes

Playable by WebEngine

Content is CACHED

CAL content object attributes:

URL: http://172.XX.XX.XXX/vod/types/sample_100kbit.mp4

Status is 3 (Servable)

Content is Complete

File size is 933456 Bytes

Playable by WebEngine

Content is CACHED

CAL content object attributes:

URL: http://172.XX.XX.XXX/vod/types/brodeo.mp3

Status is 3 (Servable)

Content is Complete

File size is 3834862 Bytes

Playable by WebEngine

Content is CACHED

The following command shows how to display cached content and Web Engine attributes for a URL:

SE# sh content url http://10.74.61.69/content/files2/test/file-2m/file-2m_0 tmpfs

CAL content object attributes:

URL: http://10.74.61.69/content/files2/test/file-2m/file-2m_0

Status is 3 (Servable)

Content is Complete

File size is 2097152 Bytes

Playable by WebEngine

Content is CACHED

Internal path to data file

[/tmpfs/10.74.61.69/01/5d/015d0505f4221628e2c5d4928016918c/file-2m_0]

Web Engine attributes:

Expiry date: Wed, 18 Dec 2013 10:42:55 GMT

Date: Wed, 18 Dec 2013 10:12:55 GMT

Last modified time: Wed, 18 Dec 2013 10:12:53 GMT

Request time: Wed, 18 Dec 2013 10:12:55 GMT

Content-length: 2097152

ETag: "5c0018-200000-4edcc49c31810"

Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8

Cache-Control: max-age=3

IsErrorResponse: NO

HTTP Status Code: 200

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-377

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show content-mgr

show content-mgr

To display all content management information in the VDS-IS, use the show content-mgr command in

EXEC configuration mode. show content-mgr {content {all {all-disk-volumes output-file filename | disk-volume output-file filename } | cache {all-disk-volumes output-file filename | disk-volume output-file filename

| prepos {all-disk-volumes output-file filename | disk-volume output-file filename }}} | disk-info | eviction-list size num {all-disk-volumes output-file filename | disk-volume output-file filename }| eviction-protection output-file filename | health-info | rollback}

Syntax Description content all all-disk-volumes output-file filename cache disk-volume prepos disk-info eviction-list size eviction-protection health-info rollback

Dumps Content Manager objects with priority, url, or disk path.

Dumps cached and prepositioned contents.

Dumps all disks.

Specifies the output filename to write to.

The output file name to write to.

Dump cached contents.

Specifies the disks to be dumped.

Dump prepositioned contents.

Displays disk information.

Dumps the list of contents which is evicted first.

Specifies the eviction size (in MB).

Dumps eviction protection table.

Displays health information.

Displays content-mgr rollback status.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The show content-mgr content all command dumps all the contents to the specified output file. This process goes through the entire Content Manager data structure to collect file information, and then writes it into the file specified by the user. When the Content Manager begins to dump the records, it states the number of records it prepares to write and how many are actually written in the ~/errorlog/ content_manager.current file.

The following example shows a dump with no object being deleted:

03/18/2011 23:32:34.945(Local)(9633)LOG :ContentMgr.cpp:968-> Scheduled prepositioned entries[1] for dump

03/18/2011 23:32:34.945(Local)(9633)LOG :CMgrDumpStore.cpp:75-> Starting dump, entries[1]

03/18/2011 23:32:34.946(Local)(9633)LOG :CMgrDumpStore.cpp:97-> Dump finished.

The following example shows a dump with objects being deleted:

2-378

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show content-mgr

14:03/18/2011 23:36:20.195(Local)(9633)LOG :ContentMgr.cpp:951-> Scheduled cached entries[81931] for dump

14:03/18/2011 23:36:20.195(Local)(9633)LOG :CMgrDumpStore.cpp:75-> Starting dump, entries[81931]

14:03/18/2011 23:36:23.764(Local)(9633)LOG :CMgrDumpStore.cpp:97-> Dump finished. Entries removed during dump[41931]. These will not show up in the output file.

The show content-mgr disk-info command prints disk and asset information for the Content Manager monitors.

Examples The following example shows how to display all the Content Manager disk information in an output file:

ServiceEngine# show content-mgr content all all-disk-volumes output-file dumps

#type-tail dumps

#ContentType Priority URL DiskPath cached-content 6 http://5.3.3.10/a_1/file_10005542

/disk00-06/c/5.3.3.10/5f/37/5f37c0748805ddf6e58a63853b3677af/file_10005542.http

prepos-content 0 http://172.22.67.108/vod/FootballHD.flv

/disk08-01/p/172.22.67.108/1d/a1/1da1394af838bbcb45af78fd5681abeb/FootballHD.flv

prepos-content 0

://172.22.67.108/manifest-Channel_5683.xml-FNtiIA2L9GVRqiFKzK-h3w

/disk04-01/p/172.22.67.108/66/66/6666cd76f96956469e7be39d750cc7d9/_7279f4d

49c9963f509d8ad2cd772fdf6 prepos-content 0

://http-172.22.67.108-89xld465l9xq3fuq2dgi5w/vod/abc.html

/disk06-01/p/http-172.22.67.108-89xld465l9xq3fuq2dgi5w/1d/a1/1da1394af838bbcb45af7

8fd5681abeb/abc.html

The following example shows how to display the Content Manager disk information:

ServiceEngine# show content-mgr disk-info

Mount point : /disk00-01

Bucket Number Assigned to Disk : 0

File system : CDNFS

Total space : 423.6 GB

Free space : 415.1 GB

Disk Eviction low watermark : 381.3 GB

Disk Eviction high watermark : 394.0 GB

Writable : Yes

Usable : Yes

Preposition Asset Count : 0

Cache Asset Count : 0

Preposition Asset Size : 0 B

Cache Asset Size : 0 B

The following example shows how to display the Content Manager health information:

ServiceEngine# show content-mgr health-info

Deletion Task Count : 0

Deletion Store Size

disk00-06 : 0 B

disk01-06 : 0 B

disk02-01 : 0 B

Protection Table Size : 0 B

Snapshot In Progress : No

Eviction In Progress : No

Slow scan In Progress : No

Sanity In Progress : No

Clear Cache All In Progress : No

Dump In Progress : No

Priority Queue Asset Count : 0

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-379

show content-mgr

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

HitCount Decay Half Life (days): 14

Disk Bucket Alarm Threshold(%): 30

------------------------ Printing All Asset Info ------------------------

Mount Point : disk00-06

Preposition Asset Count : 4

Cache Asset Count : 0

Preposition Asset Size : 104 B

Cache Asset Size : 0 B

Mount Point : disk01-06

Preposition Asset Count : 8

Cache Asset Count : 0

Preposition Asset Size : 312 B

Cache Asset Size : 0 B

Mount Point : disk02-01

Preposition Asset Count : 2

Cache Asset Count : 0

Preposition Asset Size : 52 B

Cache Asset Size : 0 B

Memory pool statistics : [ Used][ Free][ Max Used]

Cached File Nodes : [ 0][ 0][ 0]

Cached Child Nodes : [ 0][ 0][ 0]

Cached Dir Nodes : [ 1][ 818][ 1]

Prepos File Nodes : [ 14][ 220738][ 15]

Prepos Child Nodes : [ 48][ 262096][ 49]

Prepos Dir Nodes : [ 35][ 784][ 35]

------------------------ Printing Process Status ------------------------

CPU Usage Percent : 0.00

Threads Count : 33

Virtual Memory Size : 189.6 MB

Resident Memory Size : 33.4 MB

------------------------ Printing Delivery Services ------------------------

Delivery Service Id : 1450

Origin FQDN : 172.22.67.227

Routing Domain Name : vodplay1.com

Delivery Service Id : 1272

Origin FQDN : 1.2.3.5

Routing Domain Name : livewmtplay.com

Delivery Service Id : 1262

Origin FQDN : 171.71.51.234

Routing Domain Name : wmtplay.com

Delivery Service Id : 1260

Origin FQDN : 172.22.67.108

Routing Domain Name : vodplay.com

Related Commands Command contentmgr

Description

Configures the Content Manager.

2-380

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show content-mgr

Command content-mgr disk-info force-reset show statistics content-mgr

Description

Forces the Content Manager to reset the disk share memory information.

Displays the Content Manager statistics.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-381

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show content-origin

show content-origin

To display information about the Network-attached Storage (NAS) mount, use the show content-origin command in user EXEC configuration mode. show content-origin request-fqdn domain

Syntax Description request-fqdn domain

Configures the request FQDN.

Domain of the request FQDN.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes User EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines

Table 2-24 describes the fields shown in the

show content-origin display.

Table 2-25 show content-origin Field Descriptions

Field

FQDN

Protocol

SharePoint

MountPoint

Status

MaxRetry

RetryCount

Description

Fully Qualified Domain Name of the content origin.

Protocol used.

SharePoint IP address.

MountPoint type.

Indicates if it succeeded or failed.

Maximum number of retries allowed.

Actual number of retries.

The following syslog messages are displayed if the NAS mount fails:

Cds Origin Manager writes syslog messages when NAS mount fails. Below are some sample syslog messages:

Apr 28 04:25:26 nas-se CdsOriginMgr: %SE-CdsOriginMgr-3-802100: Failed to mount NFS vod/0 for NAS share 14.1.2.12:/ifs/data

Examples The following example shows how to display the content origin information:

ServiceEngine# show content-origin

FQDN: www.cisco.com

Protocol: CIFS

SharePoint: 171.XX.XX.X:/wmroot

MountPoint: WMS

Status: Success

Protocol: NFS

SharePoint: 171.XX.XX.XXX:/usr/local/apache2/htdocs/WMT

2-382

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

MountPoint: WMT

Status: Failed

MaxRetry: 10

RetryCount: 17

Protocol: NFS

SharePoint: 171.XX.XX.XXX:/usr/local/apache2/htdocs/Zeri

MountPoint: ZERI

Status: Failed

MaxRetry: 10

RetryCount: 17

ServiceEngine#

Related Commands Command content-origin

Description

Supports multiple origin servers within a content origin.

show content-origin

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-383

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show debugging

show debugging

To display the state of each debugging option, use the show debugging user command in user EXEC configuration mode. show debugging [ ip { bgp | ospf | proximity | rib } | isis | srp | svc { desci | registry} ]

Syntax Description ip bgp ospf proximity rib isis srp svc desci registry

(Optional) Displays the debug options for IP.

Displays the debugging flags that have been set for BGP.

Displays the debug options for OSPF processes that are enabled.

Displays the debug options that are enabled for the proximity process.

Displays the debug options that are enabled for the rib process.

(Optional) Displays the debug options that are enabled for the IS-IS process.

(Optional) This command displays the debug flags that are turned on for the

SRP.

(Optional)

Descriptor Interpreter Library.

Service Registration Daemon.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes User EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The show debugging ip bgp command is used to display the debugging flags that have been set for BGP.

The show debugging ip ospf command is used to display debug options for OSPF processes that are enabled.

The show debugging ip rib command is used to display debug options for rib processes that are enabled.

The show debugging isis command is used to display debug options for IS-IS processes that are enabled.

The show debugging srp command is used to displays the debug flags that are turned on for the SRP.

Examples The following is sample output from the show debugging ip bgp command:

ServiceRouter# debug ip bgp keepalives

ServiceRouter# show debugging ip bgp

BGP keepalives debug is on

ServiceRouter# debug ip bgp all

ServiceRouter# show debugging ip bgp

BGP events debug is on

BGP internal debug is on

BGP RIB debug is on

BGP BRIB debug is on

BGP updates debug is on

2-384

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show debugging

BGP keepalives debug is on

BGP packets debug is on

BGP IO debug is on

BGP list debug is on

BGP dampening debug is on

ServiceRouter#

The following is sample output from the show debugging ip ospf command:

ServiceRouter# show debugging ip ospf

All OSPF debug is on

Adjacency events debug is on

OSPF LSDB changes debug is on

OSPF LSDB timers debug is on

OSPF related events debug is on

LSA flooding debug is on

ServiceRouter#

The following is sample output from the show debugging isis command.

ServiceRouter# show debugging isis

SRP error debug is on

SRP api debug is on

SRP multicast debug is on

SRP session debug is on

SRP srhp packet debug is on

SRP replica debug is on

SRP packet asiii debug is on

SRP function debug is on

SRP replay is on

ServiceRouter#

The following example shows the use of show srp debug command:

ServiceRouter# show debugging srp

SRP packet debug is on

SRP error debug is on

SRP database debug is on

SRP api debug is on

SRP host debug is on

SRP multicast packet debug is on

SRP session debug is on

SRP srhp packet debug is on

SRP replica debug is on

SRP sync debug is on

SRP configuration debug is on

SRP ippc debug is on

SRP packet ascii debug is on

SRP function debug is on

ServiceRouter#

In the following example, the debug icp client command coupled with the show debugging command shows that Internet Cache Protocol (ICP) debugging is enabled:

ServiceEngine# debug icp client

ServiceEngine# show debugging

Debug icp (client) is on

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-385

show debugging

Related Commands Command debug undebug

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Description

Monitors and records caching application functions.

Disables debugging functions.

2-386

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show debugging srp

show debugging srp

To display the debug flags that are turned on for SRP, use the show debugging srp command in privileged EXEC mode. show debugging srp

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default None

Command Modes Privileged EXEC configuration mode.

Examples The following example shows the use of show debugging srp :

ServiceRouter# show debugging srp

SRP packet debug is on

SRP error debug is on

SRP database debug is on

SRP api debug is on

SRP host debug is on

SRP multicast packet debug is on

SRP session debug is on

SRP srhp packet debug is on

SRP replica debug is on

SRP sync debug is on

SRP configuration debug is on

SRP ippc debug is on

SRP packet ascii debug is on

SRP function debug is on

ServiceRouter#

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-387

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show device-mode

show device-mode

To display the configured or current mode of a device, use the show device-mode command in EXEC configuration mode.

show device-mode { configured | current }

Syntax Description configured current

Displays the configured device mode.

Displays the current device mode.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines If the configured and current device modes differ, a reload is required for the configured device mode to take effect.

Examples The configured device mode field in the show device-mode configured display shows the device mode that has been configured, but has not yet taken effect. The current device mode field in the show device-mode current command display shows the current mode in which the VDS-IS device is operating.

The following example shows how to use the show device-mode command to show the device mode when you change the device from an SE to an SR using the device mode command:

Acmehost# show device-mode current

Current device mode: service-engine

Acmehost# show device-mode configured

Configured device mode: service-engine

Acmehost(config)# device mode service-router

The new configuration will take effect after a reload

Acmehost(config)# exit

Acmehost# show device-mode current

Current device mode: service-engine

Note: The configured and current device modes differ, a reload is required for the configured device mode to take effect.

Acmehost# show device-mode configured

Configured device mode: service-router

Note: The configured and current device modes differ, a reload is required for the configured device mode to take effect.

Acmehost# write memory

Acmehost# reload force

...reload...

Acmehost# show running-config device mode service-router

!

2-388

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands hostname Acmehost

..

Acmehost# show device-mode configured

Configured device mode: service-router

Acmehost# show device-mode current

Current device mode: service-router

Related Commands Command device show device-mode

Description

Configures the mode of operation on a device as a CDSM, SE or SR.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-389

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show direct-server-return

show direct-server-return

To display the Direct Server return information, use the show direct-server-return command in EXEC configuration mode.

show direct-server-return

Syntax Description This command has no keywords or arguments.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Examples The following example shows how to display the Direct Server return information:

ServiceEngine# show direct-server-return direct-server-return vip 11.11.11.11

Related Commands Command direct-server-return

Description

Enables a VIP for direct server return.

2-390

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show disks

show disks

To view information about your disks, use the show disks command in EXEC configuration mode.

show disks [ current | details | error-handling [ details ] | health diskname | raid-state |

SMART-info [ details ]]

Syntax Description current details error-handling details health diskname raid-state

SMART-info details

(Optional) Displays currently effective configurations.

(Optional) Displays currently effective configurations with more details.

(Optional) Displays the disk error-handling statistics.

(Optional) Displays the detail disk and sector errors.

(Optional) Displays the hard drive health.

(Optional) Displays the health of a specific disk.

(Optional) Displays the volume and progress information for the RAID disks.

(Optional) Displays hard drive diagnostic information and information about impending disk failures.

(Optional) Displays SMART disk monitoring info with more details.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The show disks command displays the names of the disks currently attached to the SE.

Table 2-26

describes the fields shown in the show disks details display.

Table 2-26 show disks details Field Descriptions

Field disk00 disk01

System use

Free

Description

Availability of the disk: Present, Not present or Not responding,

Not used, or (*).

Note Disk drives that are currently marked as bad are shown as

“Not used” in the output. Future bad disk drives (drives that are not used after the next time that the SE is reloaded) are shown with an asterisk (*).

Disk identification number and type.

Disk size in megabytes and gigabytes.

Same type of information is shown for each disk.

Amount of disk space being used for system use.

Amount of unused disk space available.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-391

I/O e show disks

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

The show disks error-handling command displays the current level of disk and sector-related errors.

Table 2-27 describes the fields shown in the

show disks error-handling details display.

Table 2-27 show disks error-handling details Field Descriptions

Field

Disk errors since last boot

Disk total bad sectors

Total errors

Diskname Sector LBA

I/O errors

Description

Number of disk errors since the device was last rebooted.

Total number of bad sector errors.

Total number of bad sector and disk errors.

Each bad sector's Logical Block Address (LBA).

Number of I/O errors.

Proactively Monitoring Disk Health with SMART

The ability to proactively monitor the health of disks with Self Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting

Technology (SMART) was added. SMART provides you with hard drive diagnostic information and information about impending disk failures.

SMART is supported by most disk vendors and is a standard method used to determine the health of a disk. SMART has several read-only attributes (for example, the power-on hours attribute, the load and unload count attribute) that provide the VDS-IS software with information about the operating and environmental conditions that may indicate an impending disk failure.

To display more detailed information, enter the show disks SMART-info details command in EXEC configuration mode. The output from the show disks SMART-info and the show disks SMART-info details commands differ based on the disk vendor and the type of drive technology (Integrated Drive

Electronics [IDE], Small Computer Systems Interface [SCSI], and Serial Advanced Technology

Attachment [SATA] disk drives).

Even though SMART attributes are vendor dependent, there is a common way of interpreting most

SMART attributes. Each SMART attribute has a normalized current value and a threshold value. When the current value exceeds the threshold value, the disk is considered as failed. The VDS-IS software monitors the SMART attributes and reports any impending failure through syslog messages, SNMP traps, and alarms.

The output from the show tech-support command in EXEC configuration mode also includes SMART information.

Table 2-28 describes some typical fields in the

show disks SMART-info display.

Table 2-28 show disks SMART-info Field Descriptions

Field disk00—disk05

Device Model

Serial Number

Device type

Transport protocol

Local time is

Description

Shows information for disk drives.

Vendor number and version number of the disk.

Serial number for the disk.

Type of device.

Physical layer connector information, for example: Parallel SCSI

(SPI-4).

Day of the week, month, date, time (hh:mm:ss), year, clock standard.

2-392

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-28 show disks SMART-info Field Descriptions (continued)

Field

Device supports SMART and

SMART is Enabled

Description

Status of SMART support: Enabled or Disabled.

Temperature Warning Enabled Temperature warning status: Enabled or Disabled.

SMART Health Status: Health status of the disk: OK or Failed.

show disks

Examples The following example displays output for two disks experiencing sector errors:

ServiceEngine# show disks error-handling

Disk errors since last boot: disk05 total bad sectors = 1, total errors = 2 disk10 total bad sectors = 3, total errors = 9

If the details option is given, then each bad sector’s Logical Block Address (LBA) displays along with its corresponding I/O error count:

ServiceEngine# show disks error-handling details

Disk errors since last boot:

disk05 total bad sectors = 1, total errors = 2

# diskname Sector (LBA) I/O errors:

disk05 3000005 2 disk10 total bad sectors = 3, total errors = 9

# diskname Sector (LBA) I/O errors:

disk10 16000 3

disk10 170001 4

disk10 180001 2

Total errors (since system boot) across all disks = 11

Note For additional disk health statistics, execute the show disks smart-info or show alarms commands.

SMART support is vendor dependent; each disk vendor has a different set of supported SMART attributes. The following example shows the output from the show disks SMART-info command in

EXEC configuration mode that was entered on two different SEs (Service Engine A and Service

Engine B). These two SEs contain hard disks that were manufactured by different vendors.

ServiceEngine# show disks SMART-info

=== disk00 === smartctl version 5.38 [ i686-spcdn-linux-gnu ] Copyright (C) 2002-8 Bruce Allen

Home page is http://smartmontools.sourceforge.net/

=== START OF INFORMATION SECTION ===

Device Model: ST3500320NS

Serial Number: 5QM19RKR

Firmware Version: SN04

User Capacity: 500,107,862,016 bytes

Device is: Not in smartctl database [ for details use: -P showall ]

ATA Version is: 6

ATA Standard is: ATA/ATAPI-6 T13 1410D revision 2

Local Time is: Thu May 21 14:09:19 2009 UTC

SMART support is: Available - device has SMART capability.

SMART support is: Enabled

=== START OF READ SMART DATA SECTION ===

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-393

show disks

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

SMART overall-health self-assessment test result: PASSED

RUNNING: /usr/sbin/smartctl /dev/sda -H -i

=== disk01 === smartctl version 5.38 [ i686-spcdn-linux-gnu ] Copyright (C) 2002-8 Bruce Allen

Home page is http://smartmontools.sourceforge.net/

=== START OF INFORMATION SECTION ===

Device Model: ST3500320NS

Serial Number: 5QM19B0B

Firmware Version: SN04

User Capacity: 500,107,862,016 bytes

Device is: Not in smartctl database [ for details use: -P showall ]

ATA Version is: 6

ATA Standard is: ATA/ATAPI-6 T13 1410D revision 2

Local Time is: Thu May 21 14:09:19 2009 UTC

SMART support is: Available - device has SMART capability.

SMART support is: Enabled

=== START OF READ SMART DATA SECTION ===

SMART overall-health self-assessment test result: PASSED

RUNNING: /usr/sbin/smartctl /dev/sdb -H -i

=== disk02 === smartctl version 5.38 [ i686-spcdn-linux-gnu ] Copyright (C) 2002-8 Bruce Allen

Home page is http://smartmontools.sourceforge.net/

=== START OF INFORMATION SECTION ===

Device Model: ST3500320NS

Serial Number: 5QM19SK9

Firmware Version: SN04

User Capacity: 500,107,862,016 bytes

Device is: Not in smartctl database [ for details use: -P showall ]

ATA Version is: 6

ATA Standard is: ATA/ATAPI-6 T13 1410D revision 2

Local Time is: Thu May 21 14:09:19 2009 UTC

SMART support is: Available - device has SMART capability.

SMART support is: Enabled

=== START OF READ SMART DATA SECTION ===

SMART overall-health self-assessment test result: PASSED

RUNNING: /usr/sbin/smartctl /dev/sdc -H -i

The following example shows the output from the show dis raid-state command, which shows all the disk partitions on a CDE:

ServiceEngine# # show disks raid-state

SYSTEM : RAID-1

Status: Normal

Partitions: disk00/05 disk02/05

SYSTEM: RAID-1

Status: Normal

Partitions: disk00/01 disk02/01

SYSTEM: RAID-1

Status: Normal

Partitions: disk00/02 disk02/02

SYSTEM: RAID-1

Status: Normal

Partitions: disk00/04 disk02/04

2-394

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Related Commands Command disk (EXEC) show disks

Description

Configures disks and allocates disk space for devices using VDS-IS software.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-395

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show distribution

show distribution

To display the distribution information for a specified delivery service and to probe a remote SE for the liveness of its associated delivery service, use the show distribution command in EXEC configuration mode.

show distribution [ delivery-services { delivery-service-id delivery_service_num | delivery-service-name delivery_service_name } | forwarder-list { delivery-service-id delivery_service_num | delivery-service-name delivery_service_name } | detail | location

{ forwarder-load-weight | live-load-weight | location-leader-preference }

{ delivery-service-id delivery_service_num | delivery-service-name delivery_service_name } | mcast-data-receiver { channels | cloud detail } | mcast-data-sender { channels | cloud detail }

| object-status object_url | processes | remote ip_address { metadata-sender

{ delivery-service-id delivery_service_num [ start-generation-id gen_id end-generation-id gen_id ] | {delivery-service-name delivery_service_name [ start-generation-id gen_id end-generation-id gen_id ]} | unicast-sender { delivery-service-id delivery_service_num

{ cdn-url cdn_url | probe | relative-cdn-url cdn_url }} | delivery-service-name delivery_service_name { cdn-url cdn_url | probe | relative-cdn-url cdn_url }} | traceroute

{ forwarder-next-hop delivery-service-id delivery_service_num { max-hop maxhop_num | trace-till-good | trace-till-root }} | unicast-sender delivery-service-id delivery_service_num

{ cdn-url cdn_url | probe | relative-cdn-url cdn_url } { max-hop maxhop_num | trace-till-good

| trace-till-root }}]

Syntax Description delivery-services delivery-service-id

(Optional) Displays information about the specified delivery service.

(Optional) Specifies the delivery service ID.

delivery_service_num Delivery service number (64-bit number).

delivery-service-name (Optional) Specifies the delivery service name.

delivery_service_name Delivery service name.

detail (Optional) Displays the forwarder lists for all delivery services subscribed to by the SE.

forwarder-list location forwarder-load- weight

(Optional) Displays the forwarder lists for all delivery services subscribed to by the SE.

(Optional) Displays delivery service routing-related parameters for the SEs in the location (specified by the delivery service ID).

Displays the forwarder load weight value of the SEs in the location

(specified by the delivery service ID). For more information, see the

“Forwarder Probability” section on page 2-398

.

live-load-weight location-leaderpreference

Displays the live load weight value of the SEs in the location (specified by the delivery service ID). For more information, see the

“Live Splitting

Probability” section on page 2-400 .

Displays the location leader preference value of the SEs in the location

(specified by the delivery service ID). For more information, see the

“Location Leader Preference” section on page 2-399 .

mcast-data-receiver channels cloud detail

Display Multicast Data Receiver information.

(Optional) Displays the list of channels assigned.

(Optional) Displays the cloud configuration.

(Optional) Displays detailed cloud configuration.

2-396

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show distribution mcast-data-sender object-status object_url processes remote ip_address metadata-sender start-generation-id gen_id end-generation-id gen_id unicast-sender cdn-url cdn_url probe relative-cdn-url traceroute forwarder-next-hop

Displays Multicast Data Sender information.

(Optional) Displays information on the status of a prepositioned object.

URL of the prepositioned object.

(Optional) Displays information on distribution processes.

(Optional) Displays delivery service information about a remote SE.

IP address of the remote SE.

Displays the metadata from a remote SE.

(Optional) Specifies the beginning database value of the current version of the multicast cloud.

Beginning database value.

Specifies the ending database value of the current version of the multicast cloud.

Ending database value.

Displays the unicast data from a remote SE.

Checks the object on a remote SE using the specified URL.

VDS-IS network URL used to check the object on a remote SE.

Probes the remote unicast sender.

Checks the object on a remote SE using the specified URL.

Displays the traceroute for the delivery service routing status.

Displays the next forwarder in the path for the SE. delivery-service-id

Note This keyword lets you display the forwarding SEs to the Content

Acquirer in a manner similar to the traceroute command.

Specifies the delivery service ID with which the unicast sender is associated.

delivery_service_num Delivery service number of the delivery service with which the unicast sender is associated.

max-hop maxhop_num trace-till-good trace-till-root

Displays the maximum number of hops needed to reach the unicast sender.

Maximum number of hops. The range is from 1 to 1024.

Allows the device to trace the route of an object until the object is found.

Allows the device to trace the route of an object until the device reaches the

Content Acquirer.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines Note This command is only available on Cisco VDS-IS Release 3.1.1.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-397

show distribution

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Use the show distribution remote ip_address metadata-sender delivery-service-id delivery_service_num [ start-generation-id gen_id end-generation-id gen_id ] command option to retrieve the metadata from a remote SE assigned to a specified delivery service ID. The start and end generation IDs specify the beginning and ending database values representing the current version of the multicast cloud stored in the local database.

Note Generation IDs must be greater than zero. Also, you must specify both the start and the end generation

IDs, or neither ID.

The show distribution remote ip_address unicast-sender delivery-service-id delivery_service_num relative cdn-url cdn_url command shows the status of the relative VDS-IS network URL of an object at a remote SE assigned to a specified delivery service ID. A relative VDS-IS network URL is one that lacks the prefix of the protocol and hostname. For example, the relative VDS-IS network URL for http://www.mycompany.com/abc.def.html is abc.def.html.

Use the show distribution remote ip_address unicast-sender delivery-service-id delivery_service_num probe command to probe a remote SE for the liveness of the delivery service to which it is assigned.

The show distribution object-status object_url command can be used to display the properties of a prepositioned object.

You can view the location leader preference and forwarder weight for the SE using the show distribution command. However, you can configure the location leader preference and forwarder weight only using the CDSM GUI for each SE. Default values are assumed if you do not manually configure them.

The show distribution location forwarder-load-weight command displays the probability of SEs assigned to the delivery service within the location being selected as a forwarder. The show distribution location location-leader-preference command displays the location leader preference value of SEs that are assigned to the delivery service within the location.

Use the show distribution delivery-services command to view the forwarder for the SEs. If a receiver

SE is unable to find its forwarder SE, one of the following reasons is displayed in the Status/Reason column of the output of the show distribution delivery-services command:

LLMT—Home SE cannot find the forwarder because the home SE has a limit on the forwarder lookup level.

FAIL—Home SE cannot find the forwarder because there is a failed SE along the path within the specified forwarder lookup level.

NGWT—Home SE cannot find the forwarder because there is an SE with a negative forwarder-load-weight along the path within the specified forwarder lookup level.

Use the show distribution mcast-data-sender and show distribution mcast-data-receiver commands to see a list of assigned channels and cloud configuration for the Multicast data senders and receivers that were added to the Multicast cloud using the multicast command.

Forwarder Probability

When an SE (location leader) selects its forwarder from an upstream location, it uses the forwarderLoad_weight value configured for each SE in its upstream location. The weight value of each

SE corresponds to the probability of the SE being selected as the forwarder.

2-398

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show distribution

Each SE generates a unique random number. When an SE needs to select an inter-location forwarder, it views all the SEs in one remote location as a collection, with the size corresponding to their weight. It uses the generated random number to select an SE as a forwarder. SEs with a higher weight are more likely to be selected as forwarders.

Note The forwarderLoad_weight value represents a probabilistic value. When a large number of children SEs select a forwarder from a location, the load on the forwarder represents the weight.

The load on the forwarder is the replication load per delivery service on the SE because all SEs subscribed to the delivery service select a forwarder to balance the load. However, as the number of SEs assigned to different delivery services might differ, a forwarder might receive requests for content from

SEs in other delivery services, which increases the load. Therefore, it is possible that the total load (of replicating content) on the forwarder does not reflect the weight but depends on the number of SEs assigned to a delivery service.

For each SE, you can specify the probability of each SE acting as a forwarder to SEs from downstream locations using the CDSM GUI. You can also specify whether certain SEs should never serve as a forwarder to downstream SEs. The specification is delivery service independent.

If you choose not to configure settings using the Location Leader and Forwarder Settings for SE window, the delivery service routing algorithm uses the random number method to generate one permutation of the SE ID ordered list.

Location Leader Preference

For intra-location (list of SEs in an SE’s own location) forwarder selection, the delivery service routing algorithm first creates an ordered list of the SEs based on their location leader preference in a descending order. Next, the delivery service routing algorithm selects the first SE in the ordered list as the location leader.

When multiple SEs have the same location leader_preference , the delivery service routing algorithm guarantees that all the SEs assigned to each delivery service in the location still generate the same ordered list, which avoids routing loops. A routing loop is a deadlock situation in which the forwarder selection among multiple SEs within the loop prevents the SEs from receiving the content from upstream locations. For example, SE1 uses SE2 as the forwarder and SE2 uses SE1 as the forwarder for the same delivery service.

However, for two different delivery services, the ordered list could be different (when multiple SEs have the same location leader probability value) even if the subscribed SEs are the same. When multiple SEs have the highest location leader_preference , although each SE has an equal chance of acting as the location leader (for different delivery services), only one SE always acts as the location leader for one particular delivery service. If you configure all the SEs in your network to have the same location leader_preference value, then each SE has an equal chance of acting as a location leader. When each SE has an equal probability of being selected as the location leader for any particular delivery service, only one particular SE is always selected as the location leader.

Note If there are two SEs in the same location (SE1, SE2) and both of them are assigned to two delivery services (CH1, CH2), and if you want SE1 to be the location leader for CH1 and SE2 to be the location leader for CH2, you cannot configure them using location leader_preference and forwarderLoad_weight .

In a location, you can specify the probability for each SE acting as the location leader. The specification is delivery service independent.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-399

show distribution

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

The following limitations are associated with specifying a location leader preference:

When multiple SEs are configured with the same location leader_preference value and assigned to a delivery service, they have an equal probability of being selected as the location leader. In such a case, you do not have a control mechanism to decide which SE should be selected as the location leader.

Only the order among the SEs with the highest preference is randomized to determine the location leader preference and not other SEs with the same preference value. It is possible that if the SE(s) with the highest preference failed and there are several other SEs with the second highest preference value, they are not balanced across the different delivery services. The same SE is the location leader for all delivery services.

• If an SE with a high location leader_preference is assigned to many delivery services, it is possible that the SE can be selected as the location leader for all these delivery services.

Live Splitting Probability

Similar to the delivery service routing application used for content replication that assigns weight and priority to SEs to tune location leader and forwarder selections, you can specify a configuration parameter liveSplit_load_weight for each SE. This parameter represents the relative probability that an

SE is likely to receive live stream splitting traffic as compared to other SEs. The specification is delivery service independent. If you do not configure liveSplit_load_weight , the algorithm should work as it currently does.

A weighted load balancing scheme splits the live stream load on the SEs according to the liveSplit_load_weight value because SEs of different types have an equal probability of being selected as the splitting SE on the location path.

The liveSplit_load_weight is used when the delivery service routing generates the ordered list of SEs for each location. The SEs are ordered in a way that the higher the weight, the greater probability that the

SEs are being ordered at the beginning of the list.

The weight represents a relative value. The liveSplit_load_weight assigned to one SE is compared against the weights of other SEs in the same location.

The weight is a probabilistic value. For one particular URL, all SEs generate the same ordered list for a location.

It is possible that an SE with a lower weight is being ordered at the beginning while an SE with a higher weight is being ordered at the end of the list. The weighted load balancing is useful only when there are multiple live stream URLs.

The liveSplit_load_weight parameter applies both within the home location and upstream locations. This setting is different from the distribution settings where locationLeader-priority controls how you choose

SEs from the home location, while forwarderLoad-weight controls how you choose SEs from upstream locations.

Examples The following example shows the status of the object at a remote SE with the IP address 172.16.2.160 and delivery service ID 631. The URL of the content object specified in the command must not be the complete source URL. Instead, it must be the relative VDS-IS network URL of the object.

ServiceEngine# show distribution remote 172.16.2.160 unicast-sender delivery-service-id

631 relative-cdn-url 101files/100.txt

Forwarder-Name : AD-SE08

Forwarder-ID : 140

Forwarder IP : 2.43.10.70

Forwarder Location : default-location

2-400

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show distribution

Relative CDN URL : 101files/100.txt

Actual Size : 58

Size Transferred : 58

Resource-ID : roVe2aMzp+YhmbhGUfMPpQ

Content-ID : 7LC5xOlMp4YvkBJlHaQucQ

Last Modified Time : 10:52:38 Jan 04 2005

The following example retrieves the metadata from a remote SE with the IP address 172.16.2.160 assigned to delivery service ID 4999:

ServiceEngine# show distribution remote 172.16.2.160 metadata-sender delivery-service-id

4999

Getting meta data for delivery service(4999) from genid -1 to 2

Connecting to 2.43.10.101

Remote SE replied with the following headers:

Action : Processing metadata records

Latest Gen id is : 2

Have more records to process : No

Is metadata still in full reload: No add-size: 2, del-size: 0

Add Logs: 1 to 2

add # 1: UBsSUMwbTdJzzpqDvxSdYg.., basic_auth/public.html

add # 2: NJyVL9CZwpnyCfw+Is26yw.., index.txt

The following example probes the remote SE with the IP address 172.16.2.160 for the liveness of its assigned delivery service ID 153:

ServiceEngine# show distribution remote 172.16.2.160 unicast-sender delivery-service-id

153 probe

Probe Successful

The following example shows the beginning database value of the current version of the multicast cloud at a remote SE with the IP address 10.43.10.101 and delivery service ID 4999:

ServiceEngine# show distribution remote 10.43.10.101 metadata-sender delivery-service-id

4999 start-generation-id 0 end-generation-id 5

Getting meta data for delivery service(4999) from genid -1 to 5

Connecting to 10.43.10.101

Remote SE replied with the following headers:

Action : Processing metadata records

Latest Gen id is : 2

Have more records to process : No

Is metadata still in full reload: No add-size: 2, del-size: 0

Add Logs: 1 to 2

add # 1: UBsSUMwbTdJzzpqDvxSdYg.., basic_auth/public.html

add # 2: NJyVL9CZwpnyCfw+Is26yw.., index.txt

Note When start and end generation IDs are not specified in the show distribution remote command, the current maximum generation ID of –100 is the start generation ID. The end generation ID is equal to the sum of the start generation ID and 100.

The following example shows the list of forwarders in the path toward the Content Acquirer:

ServiceEngine# show distribution remote traceroute forwarder-next-hop delivery-service-id

4999 trace-till-root

Hop NextHop_SEId NextHop_SEName NextHop_SEIp GenID Status/Reason

--- ------------ -------------- ------------ ----- -------------

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-401

show distribution

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

1 5884 AD-SE07 192.168.1.69 1 REGULAR

2 6035 AD-SE13 2.43.10.101 1 LOC-LEAD

3 5683 AD-SE12 2.43.10.100 1 LOC-LEAD

4 6026 gnadaraj-507 2.43.27.2 1 LOC-LEAD

5 5638 devi-507 2.43.27.36 1 LOC-LEAD (Reached RootSE)

The following example shows output from the show distribution object-status command:

ServiceEngine# show distribution object-status http://www.cisco.com/index.txt

========== Website Information ==========

Name : cisco-crawl

Origin Server FQDN : www.cisco.com

Request Routed FQDN : N/A

Content UNS Reference # : 1

========== delivery services Information ==========

*** delivery service 4999 (name = headercheck) ***

Object Replication

------------------

Replication : Done

File State : Ready for distribution

Multicast for delivery service : Not Enabled

Replication Lock : Received by Unicast-Receiver/Acquirer

Reference Count : 1

Total Size : 2208640

Transfered Size : 2208640

MD5 of MD5 : zwhJagyCmRAE4UmTwc0EtA..

Source Url : http://liqq-linux.cisco.com/index.txt

Source Last Modified Time : Sun Jul 11 03:23:33 2004

Object Properties

-----------------

Redirect To Origin : Yes

Requires Authentation : No

Alternative URL :

Serve Start Time : N/A

Serve End Time : N/A

Play servers : HTTP HTTPS

Content Metadata : None

Content uns_id : yhzR3VZ96MDz5FVHwmGD+A..

Content gen-id : 5638:1108022220:1

========== CDNFS Information ==========

Internal File Name :

/disk00-04/d/http-liqq-linux.cisco.com-azk2lrqzsytweswexham5w/32/326cf0278da48aac82d796cb1

19b1caa.0.data.txt

Actual File Size : 2208640 bytes

MD5 of MD5 (Re-calculated): zwhJagyCmRAE4UmTwc0EtA..

Content metadata : None

Metadata match with : delivery service 4999

Number of Source-urls : 1

Source-url to CDN-object mapping:

Source-url : http://liqq-linux.cisco.com/index.txt

Used by CDN object : ---- Yes ----

Internal File Name :

/disk00-04/d/http-liqq-linux.cisco.com-azk2lrqzsytweswexham5w/32/326cf0278da48aac82d796cb1

19b1caa.0.data.txt

2-402

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show distribution

Actual File Size : 2208640 bytes

========== CDNFS lookup output ==========

CDNFS File Attributes:

Status 3 (Ready)

File Size 2208640 Bytes

Start Time null

End Time null

Allowed Playback via HTTP HTTPS

Last-modified Time Sun Jul 11 03:23:33 2004

cdn_uns_id yhzR3VZ96MDz5FVHwmGD+A..

last-modified Sun, 11 Jul 2004 03:23:33 GMT

Internal path to data file:

/disk00-04/d/http-liqq-linux.cisco.com-azk2lrqzsytweswexham5w/32/326cf0278da48aac82d796cb1

19b1caa.0.data.txt

The following example shows the mcast-data-sender information:

SE-5# show distribution mcast-data-sender

Multicast enabled

Currently a Primary Multicast Sender for Cloud : shekharMC [412]

Primary Sender Details

-----------------------

Multicast Sender State : PRIMARY_ACTIVE(1)

Current Send State : OK to Send

Current MOUT BW (kbps) : 100000

Fixed Carousel : Disabled

Multicast Checkpoint Transfer : Enabled

Current Default Per Delivery service data rate(kbps) :100000

The show distribution delivery-services output and the show distribution forwarder-list output display additional delivery service routing information. The newly added Status/Reason field displays whether the SE is a location leader and the reason for not having a forwarder SE.

The following example shows the delivery service distribution information:

ServiceEngine# show distribution delivery-services

Delivery Service Name ID Priority Root Forwarder Status/Reason

------------ -- -------- ---- --------- ------------- ----------

00-AD 527 500 No Rack89-SE-11 REGULAR N/A

01-AD 586 500 Yes N/A N/A

00-Live 588 500 Yes N/A LIVE

N/A

N/A

LOC-LEAD: This SE is the location leader for this delivery service

REGULAR: This SE is not the location leader for this delivery service

LLMT: This SE cannot find forwarder because this SE has limit on

the forwarder lookup level

FAIL: This SE cannot find forwarder because there is failed SE along

the path within specified forwarder lookup level

NGWT: This SE cannot find forwarder because there is SE with negative

forwarder-load-weight along the path within the specified

forwarder lookup level

LIVE: The specified delivery service is live delivery service, forwarder not applicable

*: MetaData forwarder and Unicast forwarder are different

The following example provides Origin server failover information for delivery service ID 373:

ServiceEngine# show distribution delivery-service delivery-service-name delivery

Delivery Service Configuration

---------------------

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-403

show distribution

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Delivery Service ID : 239

Delivery Service Name : delivery

Content Origin Name : 3M-Prepos-Test

Content Origin fqdn : www.threemprepos.com

Content Origin Origin FQDN : 72.0.110.38

Delivery Service Priority : 750

Configured Distribution Type : Multicast/Unicast

Content Acquirer Information

-------------------

ID of Configured Content Acquirer : 283

Name of Configured Content Acquirer : SE-3

IP of Configured Content Acquirer : 8.8.8.103

ID of Effective Content Acquirer : 283

Current content-Acquirer-uid : 1381954721

This SE's Role : Not a Content Acquirer

This SE in Full Reload : No

Content Acquirer Failover/Fallback Information

---------------------------------------

Content Acquirer Failover/Fallback Interval: 20 Mins

Origin Server Failover Information

--------------------

Origin Server Failover Status : Off

Metadata Information

--------------------

Metadata-Forwarder ID : 283

Metadata-Forwarder Name : SE-3

Metadata-Forwarder Primary IP : 8.8.8.103

Metadata-Forwarder NAT IP/Port : N/A

Address to Poll Metadata-Forwarder : Primary IP

Metadata-Forwarder Status : LOC-LEAD

Last gen-id Switch : 350469 Secs ago

Current low-water-marker : 1

Current max-gen-id : 4202

Current max-del-gen-id : 0

Last poll : 92 Secs ago

Next poll : 28 Secs from now

Idle poll interval : 120 Secs

Poll interval multiplier : 1

Unicast Information

-------------------

Ucast-Forwarder ID : 283

Ucast-Forwarder Name : SE-3

Ucast-Forwarder Primary IP : 8.8.8.103

Ucast-Forwarder NAT IP/Port : N/A

Address to Poll Ucast-Forwarder : Primary IP

Ucast-Forwarder Status : LOC-LEAD

Delivery service level unicast option for this SE

Ucast Receiver of this SE : Enabled for this delivery service

Ucast Sender of this SE : Enabled for this delivery service

Multicast Information

---------------------

Multicast Cloud Information

Mcast Receiving : No

Mcast Sending : Yes

Delivery service level multicast option for this SE

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-404

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Mcast Receiver of this SE : Enabled for this delivery service

Mcast Sender of this SE : Enabled for this delivery service

Mcast sender data rate : 10000 Kbps

Fec value of this delivery service : 16

Carousel value of this delivery service : 4

QoS Configuration

-----------------

MetaData QoS (effective system config) : 0 (Not Enabled)

Multiccast QoS : 56 [0X 38]

Progress Information

--------------------

Number of jobs completed : 1056

Has incomplete jobs : No show distribution

LOC-LEAD: This SE is the location leader for this delivery service

REGULAR: This SE is not the location leader for this delivery service

LLMT: This SE cannot find forwarder because this SE has limit on

the forwarder lookup level

FAIL: This SE cannot find forwarder because there is failed SE along

the path within specified forwarder lookup level

NGWT: This SE cannot find forwarder because there is SE with negative

forwarder-load-weight along the path within the specified

forwarder lookup level

LIVE: The specified delivery service is live delivery service,

forwarder not applicable

*: MetaData forwarder and Unicast forwarder are different

Note The “Working Server of WebEngine” makes sense only on Content Acquirer. It will always keep empty on those Service Engine which are not Content Acquirer.

The following example provides delivery service distribution information for delivery service ID 527:

ServiceEngine# show distribution delivery-services delivery-service-id 239

Delivery Service Configuration

---------------------

Delivery Service ID : 239

Delivery Service Name : delivery

Content Origin Name : 3M-Prepos-Test

Content Origin fqdn : www.threemprepos.com

Content Origin Origin FQDN : 72.0.110.38

Delivery Service Priority : 750

Configured Distribution Type : Multicast/Unicast

Content Acquirer Information

-------------------

ID of Configured Content Acquirer : 283

Name of Configured Content Acquirer : SE-3

IP of Configured Content Acquirer : 8.8.8.103

ID of Effective Content Acquirer : 283

Current content-Acquirer-uid : 1381954721

This SE's Role : Not a Content Acquirer

This SE in Full Reload : No

Content Acquirer Failover/Fallback Information

---------------------------------------

Content Acquirer Failover/Fallback Interval: 20 Mins

Origin Server Failover Information

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-405

show distribution

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

--------------------

Origin Server Failover Status : Off

Metadata Information

--------------------

Metadata-Forwarder ID : 283

Metadata-Forwarder Name : SE-3

Metadata-Forwarder Primary IP : 8.8.8.103

Metadata-Forwarder NAT IP/Port : N/A

Address to Poll Metadata-Forwarder : Primary IP

Metadata-Forwarder Status : LOC-LEAD

Last gen-id Switch : 350374 Secs ago

Current low-water-marker : 1

Current max-gen-id : 4202

Current max-del-gen-id : 0

Last poll : 117 Secs ago

Next poll : 3 Secs from now

Idle poll interval : 120 Secs

Poll interval multiplier : 1

Unicast Information

-------------------

Ucast-Forwarder ID : 283

Ucast-Forwarder Name : SE-3

Ucast-Forwarder Primary IP : 8.8.8.103

Ucast-Forwarder NAT IP/Port : N/A

Address to Poll Ucast-Forwarder : Primary IP

Ucast-Forwarder Status : LOC-LEAD

Delivery service level unicast option for this SE

Ucast Receiver of this SE : Enabled for this delivery service

Ucast Sender of this SE : Enabled for this delivery service

Multicast Information

---------------------

Multicast Cloud Information

Mcast Receiving : No

Mcast Sending : Yes

Delivery service level multicast option for this SE

Mcast Receiver of this SE : Enabled for this delivery service

Mcast Sender of this SE : Enabled for this delivery service

Mcast sender data rate : 10000 Kbps

Fec value of this delivery service : 16

Carousel value of this delivery service : 4

QoS Configuration

-----------------

MetaData QoS (effective system config) : 0 (Not Enabled)

Multiccast QoS : 56 [0X 38]

Progress Information

--------------------

Number of jobs completed : 1056

Has incomplete jobs : No

LOC-LEAD: This SE is the location leader for this delivery service

REGULAR: This SE is not the location leader for this delivery service

LLMT: This SE cannot find forwarder because this SE has limit on

the forwarder lookup level

FAIL: This SE cannot find forwarder because there is failed SE along

the path within specified forwarder lookup level

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-406

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show distribution

NGWT: This SE cannot find forwarder because there is SE with negative

forwarder-load-weight along the path within the specified

forwarder lookup level

LIVE: The specified delivery service is live delivery service,

forwarder not applicable

*: MetaData forwarder and Unicast forwarder are different

Note The Has Unfinished Job line is only available if the SE is not a Content Acquirer. It is only available on a receiver SE.

The following example provides the forwarder list information for delivery service ID 6290:

ServiceEngine# show distribution forwarder-list delivery-service-id 6290 detail

************************** delivery service 6290 ***************************Topology

Information:

Delivery Service : ( 6290) akot1

Content Origin : ( 6289) ako

Home SE : ( 6162) W14-CDE205-1

Home Location : ( 6189) W14-CDE205-1-location

Content Acquirer : ( 6181) W14-612-1

Root Location : ( 6182) W14-612-1-location

======================= Forwarder Result Start ========================

Latest information for unicast Meta-Data reception

and for unicast Data reception.

USABLE Forwarder:

SE ID : ( 6181) W14-612-1

SE Location : ( 6182) W14-612-1-location

SE IP address : 114.0.92.11 SE Fowarder Level : 2

SE attributes : resides in root location

is the Content Acquirer for the Delivery Service

SE state : USABLE

applies until Thu Jul 8 05:42:43 2010

Result Status :

Am Location Leader : Yes

POLLABLE Forwarder:

None.

----------------------------------------------------------------------

Location Path:

List of locations from Home-Location to Root-Location

Number of locations : 3

( 6189) W14-CDE205-1-location

( 6068) L1

( 6182) W14-612-1-location

------------------------------------------------------------------

List of Delivery-Service-subscribed locations from Home-Location to Root-Location

Number of locations : 3

( 6189) W14-CDE205-1-location

( 6068) L1

( 6182) W14-612-1-location

----------------------------------------------------------------------

Forwarder Lists:

Location W14-CDE205-1-location(6189) REACHABLE.

Showing Forwarder list for

Location : ( 6189) W14-CDE205-1-location

Number of forwarders in location : 1

----------------------------------------

Configured Forwarder SE List:

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-407

show distribution

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

<EMPTY>

Non-configured Forwarder SE List:

<EMPTY>

------------------------------------------------------------------

Location L1(6068) REACHABLE.

Showing Forwarder list for

Location : ( 6068) L1

Number of forwarders in location : 0

----------------------------------------

Configured Forwarder SE List:

<EMPTY>

Non-configured Forwarder SE List:

<EMPTY>

------------------------------------------------------------------

Location W14-612-1-location(6182) REACHABLE.

Showing Forwarder list for

Location : ( 6182) W14-612-1-location

Number of forwarders in location : 1

----------------------------------------

Configured Forwarder SE List:

SE ID ( 6181) W14-612-1 IP 114.0.92.11 state USABLE (Content Origin)

Non-configured Forwarder SE List:

<EMPTY>

Related Commands Command clear

Description

Clears the HTTP object cache, the hardware interface, statistics, archive working transaction logs, and other settings.

distribution Reschedules and refreshes content redistribution for a specified delivery service ID or name show statistics distribution Displays the statistics of the content distribution components.

2-408

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show flash

show flash

To display the flash memory version and usage information, use the show flash command in EXEC configuration mode.

show flash

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines If a new software image has been installed and is waiting to be run after a reboot, the show flash command displays this information and the version of VDS-IS software that runs on the device after reload.

Note If you update the VDS-IS software on an SE, the new version displays in the show flash command output, but it says, “Pending software change will occur on next bootup.” You must reboot the device for the software update to take effect.

Examples The following example shows how to display the flash information:

ServiceEngine# show flash

CDS software version (disk-based code): CDS-2.4.0-b328

System image on flash:

Version: 2.4.0.328

System flash directory:

System image: 274 sectors

Bootloader, rescue image, and other reserved areas: 59 sectors

512 sectors total, 179 sectors free.

Table 2-29

describes the fields shown in the show flash display.

Table 2-29 show flash Field Descriptions

Field

VDS-IS software version (disk-based code)

System image on flash:

Version

Description

VDS-IS software version and build number that is running on the device.

Version and build number of the software that is stored in flash memory.

System flash directory:

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-409

show flash

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-29 show flash Field Descriptions

Field

System image

Bootloader, rescue image, and other reserved areas

XX sectors total, XX sectors free

Description

Number of sectors used by the system image.

Number of sectors used by the bootloader, rescue image, and other reserved areas.

Total number of sectors. Number of free sectors.

Related Commands Command Description show version Displays the version information about the software.

2-410

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show flash-media-streaming

show flash-media-streaming

To display the Flash Media Streaming information, use the show flash-media-streaming command in

EXEC configuration mode.

On the SE: show flash-media-streaming [ logging name | stream-status {dvrcast [all name ] | live [all name ]}

]

On the SR: show flash-media-streaming

Note show flash-media-streaming is not supported in release 3.2.3

Syntax Description logging name stream-status dvrcast all live

(Optional) Sets the Tar Flash Media Streaming transaction logs to

/local/local1/filename.tar.gz.

(Optional) Filename.

(Optional) Displays the Flash Media Streaming stream status.

Displays dvrcast stream status.

(Optional) Dumps detail statistics into /local/local1/filename.

(Optional) Displays the live stream status.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines When you execute the show flash-media-streaming stream-status live command and the Forwarder is a Content Origin server running Linux, the show command does not show statistics for the Content

Origin server.

Examples The following example shows how to display the Flash Media Streaming information:

ServiceEngine# show flash-media-streaming

Flash Media Streaming is enabled.

Max. Allowed concurrent sessions are 40000.

Rollover threshold are 1000

Flash Media Streaming Monitoring is enabled.

Admin list allow: 172.25.137.200

Configured max bandwidth is 40000000 kbps.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-411

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show flash-media-streaming

Related Commands Command Description flash-media-streaming Enables and configures Flash Media Streaming.

show statistics flash-media-streaming

Displays the statistics for Flash Media Streaming.

2-412

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

show ftp

show ftp

To display the caching configuration of the File Transfer Protocol (FTP), use the show ftp command in

EXEC configuration mode.

show ftp

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Examples The following example shows how to display the caching configuration of FTP:

ServiceEngine# show ftp

FTP heuristic age-multipliers: directory-listing 30% file 60%

Maximum Time To Live in days : directory-listing 3 file 7

Minimum Time To Live in minutes: 60

No objects are revalidated on every request.

Serve-IMS without revalidation if...

Directory listing object is less than 50% of max age

File object is less than 80% of max age

Incoming Proxy-Mode:

Servicing Proxy mode FTP connections on ports: 22 23 88 66 48 488 449 90

Outgoing Proxy-Mode:

Not using outgoing proxy mode.

Maximum size of a cacheable object is unlimited.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-413

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show hardware

show hardware

To display the system hardware status, use the show hardware command in EXEC configuration mode.

show hardware [all | core | cpuinfo | dmi [all | baseboard | bios | cache | chassis | connector | memory | processor | slot | system] |health | mapping {disk [all | diskname ] | interface [all |

GigabitEthernet slot/port_num | TenGigabitEthernet slot/port_num ]} | meminfo | pci

[details [verbose] | drivers | ids | tree]]

Syntax Description all core cpuinfo dmi all baseboard bios cache chassis connector memory processor slot system mapping disk all diskname interface all

GigabitEthernet slot/port_num

TenGigabitEthernet meminfo pci details verbose drivers ids tree

(Optional) Displays all hardware class information.

(Optional) Displays core hardware information.

(Optional) Displays CPU information.

(Optional) Displays DMI

1

.

(Optional) Displays all DMI information.

(Optional) Displays motherboard information.

(Optional) Displays BIOS information.

(Optional) Displays processor cache information.

(Optional) Displays chassis information.

(Optional) Displays connector information.

(Optional) Displays physical memory information.

(Optional) Displays processor information.

(Optional) Displays PCI slot information.

(Optional) Displays system information.

(Optional) Shows mapping between Cisco and Linux hardware names.

Maps Cisco disk name to Linux device name.

Display all disk mappings.

Name of the disk (disk00).

Maps Cisco interface name to Linux device name.

Displays all interface information.

Selects a 1G ethernet interface.

Slot and port number for the selected interface. The slot range is from 1 to

14; the port range is from 0 to 0. The slot number and port number are separated with a forward slash character (/).

Selects a 10G ethernet interface.

(Optional) Displays RAM information.

(Optional) Displays PCI information.

(Optional) Show output with PCI addresses and names.

(Optional) Show verbose output with PCI addresses and names.

(Optional) Identify driver names and availability.

(Optional) Show PCI vendor and device codes.

(Optional) Show a tree-like diagram containing all buses, bridges and devices.

1.

Desktop Management Interface

2-414

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Command Defaults None show hardware

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The output of the show hardware command in EXEC configuration mode displays all core or Desktop

Management Interface (DMI) information. The DMI output can also be filtered by optional keywords.

Table 2-30

describes the fields shown in the show hardware display.

Table 2-30 show hardware Field Descriptions

Field

Compiled hour:minute:second month day year by cnbuild

Description

Compile information for the software build.

System was restarted on day of week month day hour:minute:second year

Date and time that the system was last restarted.

The system has been up for X hours,

X minutes, X seconds

Length of time the system has been running since the last reboot.

CPU 0 is

Total X CPU

CPU manufacturer information.

Number of CPUs on the device.

XXXX Mbytes of Physical memory Number of megabytes of physical memory on the device.

X CD ROM drive Number of CD-ROM drives on the device.

Number of console interfaces on the device.

X Console interface

Cookie info

SerialNumber

SerialNumber (raw)

TestDate

Serial number of the device.

Serial number of the device as an ASCII value.

Date that the device was tested.

ModelNum (text)

ModelNum (raw)

Hardware model of the device.

Internal model number (ASCII value) that corresponds to the

ExtModel number.

HWVersion

PartNumber

BoardRevision

ChipRev

VendID

CookieVer

Chksum

List of all disk drives

Physical disk information

Number of the current hardware version.

Not implemented.

Number of revisions for the current system board.

Number of revisions for the current chipset.

Vendor ID of the cookie.

Version number of the cookie.

Checksum of the cookie showing whether the cookie is valid.

Lists the disks by number.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-415

show hardware

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-30

Field disk00 disk01

Mounted filesystems

Device

Type

Size

Mount point show hardware Field Descriptions (continued)

Description

Availability of the disk: Present, Not present or Not responding, or Not used (*).

Disk identification number and type.

Disk size in megabytes and gigabytes.

Same type of information is shown for each disk.

Path to the partition on the disk.

Type of the file system. Values include PHYS-FS, SYSFS, or cdnfs.

Total size of the file system in megabytes and gigabytes.

Mount point for the file system. For example, the mount point for SYSFS is /local/local1.

Amount of disk space being used for system use.

Amount of unused disk space available.

System use

Free

Memory Information

MemTotal

MemFree

Buffers

Cached

SwapCached

Active

Inactive

Active(anon)

Inactive(anon)

Active(file)

Inactive(file)

Unevictable

Mlocked

SwapTotal

SwapFree

Dirty

Writeback

AnonPages

Mapped

Shmem

Slab

SReclaimable

2-416

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-30 show hardware Field Descriptions (continued)

Description Field

SUnreclaim

KernelStack

PageTables

NFS_Unstable

Bounce

WritebackTmp

CommitLimit

Committed_AS

VmallocTotal

VmallocUsed

VmallocChunk

DirectMap4k

DirectMap2M

PCI Information

Examples show hardware

The following example shows how to display the core hardware information:

ServiceEngine# show hardware core

Content Delivery System Software (CDS)

Copyright (c) 1999-2011 by Cisco Systems, Inc.

Content Delivery System Software Release 2.6.0 (build b460 Aug 28 2011)

Version: cde220-2g2-DEVELOPMENT[vcn-build1:/auto/v cn-u1/cdsis_release_builds/cdsis_2.6.0-b460/spcdn]

Compiled 05:55:01 Aug 28 2011 by ipvbuild

Compile Time Options: KQ SS

System was restarted on Mon Aug 29 11:56:58 2011.

The system has been up for 1 day, 5 hours, 5 minut es, 2 seconds.

CPU 0 is GenuineIntel Intel(R) Xeon(R) CPU

L5410 @ 2.33GHz (rev 23) running at 2333MHz.

CPU 1 is GenuineIntel Intel(R) Xeon(R) CPU

L5410 @ 2.33GHz (rev 23) running at 2333MHz.

CPU 2 is GenuineIntel Intel(R) Xeon(R) CPU

L5410 @ 2.33GHz (rev 23) running at 2333MHz.

CPU 3 is GenuineIntel Intel(R) Xeon(R) CPU

L5410 @ 2.33GHz (rev 23) running at 2333MHz.

CPU 4 is GenuineIntel Intel(R) Xeon(R) CPU

L5410 @ 2.33GHz (rev 23) running at 2333MHz.

CPU 5 is GenuineIntel Intel(R) Xeon(R) CPU

L5410 @ 2.33GHz (rev 23) running at 2333MHz.

CPU 6 is GenuineIntel Intel(R) Xeon(R) CPU

L5410 @ 2.33GHz (rev 23) running at 2333MHz.

CPU 7 is GenuineIntel Intel(R) Xeon(R) CPU

L5410 @ 2.33GHz (rev 23) running at 2333MHz.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-417

show hardware

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Total 8 CPUs.

16000 Mbytes of Physical memory.

10 GigabitEthernet interfaces

1 Console interface

2 USB interfaces [Not supported in this version of

software]

Cookie info:

Base PID: CDE220-2G2 VID: 00

SerialNumber: 99999999999

Model Type:

SerialNumber (raw): 57 57 57 57 57 57 57 57 57

57 57

TestDate: 12-19-2002

ExtModel: CDE220-2G2

ModelNum (raw): 55 0 0 0 1

HWVersion: 1

PartNumber: 53 54 55 56 57

BoardRevision: 1

ChipRev: 1

VendID: 0

CookieVer: 2

Chksum: 0xfb9e

List of all disk drives: disk00: Normal (h02 c00 i00 l00 - m ptsas) 476940MB(465.8GB)

disk00/01: SYSTEM 5120MB( 5.0GB) mounted internally

disk00/02: SYSTEM 3072MB( 3.0GB) mounted internally

disk00/04: SYSTEM 2048MB( 2.0GB) mounted internally

disk00/05: SYSFS 32768MB( 32.0GB) mounted at /local1

disk00/06: CDNFS 433917MB(423.7GB) mounted internally disk01: Normal (h02 c00 i01 l00 - m ptsas) 476940MB(465.8GB)

disk01/01: SYSTEM 5120MB( 5.0GB) mounted internally

disk01/02: SYSTEM 3072MB( 3.0GB) mounted internally

disk01/04: SYSTEM 2048MB( 2.0GB) mounted internally

disk01/05: SYSFS 32768MB( 32.0GB) mounted at /local1

<Output truncated>

The following example shows how to display the DMI information:

ServiceEngine# show hardware dmi

--------------------- DMI Information -------------

# dmidecode 2.9

SMBIOS 2.5 present.

70 structures occupying 2793 bytes.

Table at 0xCFF66000.

Handle 0x0000, DMI type 0, 24 bytes

BIOS Information

Vendor: Phoenix Technologies LTD

Version: 1.2a

Release Date: 04/09/2009

Address: 0xE3DD0

2-418

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Runtime Size: 115248 bytes

ROM Size: 2048 kB

Characteristics:

PCI is supported

PNP is supported

BIOS is upgradeable

BIOS shadowing is allowed

ESCD support is available

Boot from CD is supported

ServiceEngine#

The following example shows how to display the disk mapping information:

Note Starting with Release 4.0, the bay number is supported in UCSC-C220-M3S,

UCSC-C220-M3L, UCSC-C240-M3S platforms.

ServiceEngine# show hardware mapping disk all disk00 sda bay03 disk01 sdb bay02 show hardware

Related Commands Command show version

Description

Displays version information about the SE software.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-419

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show hosts

show hosts

To view the hosts on your SE, use the show hosts command in EXEC configuration mode.

show hosts

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Examples The show hosts command lists the name servers and their corresponding IP addresses. It also lists the hostnames, their corresponding IP addresses, and their corresponding aliases (if applicable) in a host table summary.

Table 2-31 describes the fields shown in the

show hosts display.

Table 2-31 show hosts Field Descriptions

Field

Domain names

Name Server(s)

Host Table hostname inet address aliases

Description

Domain names used by the device to resolve the IP address.

IP address of the DNS

1

name server or servers.

FQDN

2

(that is, hostname and domain) of the current device.

IP address of the current host device.

Name configured for the current device based on the command in Global configuration mode. host

1.

DNS = Domain Name Server

2.

FQDN = fully qualified domain name

2-420

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show interface

show interface

To display the hardware interface information, use the show interface command in EXEC configuration mode.

show interface {all | GigabitEthernet slot/port | PortChannel {[1 | 2 | 3 | 4 ] [lacp]} | standby group_num | TenGigabitEthernet slot/port }

Syntax Description all

GigabitEthernet slot / port

PortChannel

1 lacp

2 standby group_num

TenGigabitEthernet slot / port

Displays information for all interfaces.

Displays information for the Gigabit Ethernet device.

Slot and port number for the selected interface. The range is from 1 to 14.

The slot number and port number are separated with a forward slash character (/).

Displays information for the Ethernet channel of the device.

Sets the Ethernet channel interface number to 1.

(Optional) Displays the LACP port channel status.

Sets the Ethernet channel interface number to 2.

Displays information for the standby group for the interface.

Group number for the selected interface. The group number range is 1 to 4.

Displays information for the Ten Gigabit Ethernet device.

Slot and port number for the selected interface. The range is from 1 to 14.

The slot number and port number are separated with a forward slash character (/).

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines

Table 2-32

describes the fields shown in the show interface GigabitEthernet display.

Table 2-32 show interface GigabitEthernet Field Descriptions

Field

Type

Ethernet address

Maximum Transfer Unit Size

Metric

Packets Received

Description

Type of interface. Always Ethernet.

Layer 2 MAC address.

Current configured MTU value.

Metric setting for the interface. The default is 1. The routing metric is used by the routing protocol to determine the most favorable route. Metrics are counted as additional hops to the destination network or host; the higher the metric value, the less favorable the route.

Total number of packets received by this interface.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-421

show interface

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-32

Input Packets Overruns

Input Packets Frames

Packet Sent

Output Errors

Output Packets Dropped

Output Packets Overruns

Output Packets Carrier

Output Queue Length

Collisions

Flags

Mode show interface GigabitEthernet Field Descriptions (continued)

Field

Input Errors

Input Packets Dropped

Description

Number of incoming errors on this interface.

Number of incoming packets that were dropped on this interface.

Number of incoming packet overrun errors.

Number of incoming packet frame errors.

Total number of packets sent from this interface.

Number of outgoing packet errors.

Number of outgoing packets that were dropped by this interface.

Number of outgoing packet overrun errors.

Number of outgoing packet carrier errors.

Output queue length in bytes.

Number of packet collisions at this interface.

Interface status indicators. Values include Up, Broadcast,

Running, and Multicast.

Setting, transmission mode, and transmission for this interface.

Table 2-33 describes the fields shown in the

show interface PortChannel display.

Table 2-33 show interface PortChannel Field Descriptions

Field

Description

Type

Ethernet address

Internet Address

Broadcast Address

Netmask

IPv6

Maximum Transfer Unit Size

Metric

Packets Received

Input Errors

Input Packets Dropped

Description

Description of the device, as configured by using the description keyword of the interface command in Global configuration mode.

Type of interface. Always Ethernet.

Layer 2 MAC address.

Internet IP address configured for this interface.

Broadcast address configured for this interface.

Netmask configured for this interface.

IPv6 address of the interface.

Current configured MTU value.

Metric setting for the interface. The default is 1. The routing metric is used by the routing protocol. Higher metrics have the effect of making a route less favorable; metrics are counted as addition hops to the destination network or host.

Total number of packets received by this interface.

Number of incoming errors on this interface.

Number of incoming packets that were dropped on this interface.

2-422

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show interface

Table 2-33 show interface PortChannel Field Descriptions (continued)

Field

Input Packets Overruns

Input Packets Frames

Packet Sent

Output Errors

Output Packets Dropped

Description

Number of incoming packet overrun errors.

Number of incoming packet frame errors.

Total number of packets sent from this interface.

Number of outgoing packet errors.

Number of outgoing packets that were dropped by this interface.

Output Packets Overruns

Output Packets Carrier

Output Queue Length

Collisions

Flags Interface status indicators. Values include Up, Broadcast,

Running, and Multicast.

Interface PortChannel 1 (8 physical interface(s)

Protocol

Mode

Indicates if the LACP is turned on or off.

Port channel load balancing method (dst-ip, dst-mix-ip-port, dst-port, round-robin, src-dst-ip, src-dst-mac, src-dst-mixed-ip-port, src-dst-port, src-mixed-ip-port, src-port)

Port ID

Admin-State

Number of outgoing packet overrun errors.

Number of outgoing packet carrier errors.

Output queue length in bytes.

Number of packet collisions at this interface.

Link-State

LACP-State

Aggregate ID

Interface name.

Interface admin state. This is the interface state that the user configured from the command line. For example, if the user configured “no shut” on the interface, the admin state is up.

Interface physical status. Indicates if the link is up or down.

Provides a better detection for the link status through LACP protocol. It tells the upper layer if the physical link is up or down.

When LACP is turned on, the interface on the same port channel is grouped into the same aggregate ID.

Table 2-34

describes the fields shown in the show interface standby display.

Table 2-34 show interface standby Field Descriptions

Field

Standby Group

Description

IP address, netmask

Description

Number that identifies the standby group.

Description of the device, as configured by using the description keyword of the interface command in Global configuration mode.

IP address and netmask of the standby group.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-423

show interface

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands

Table 2-34 show interface standby Field Descriptions (continued)

Field

Member interfaces

Active interface

Description

Member interfaces of the standby group. Shows which physical interfaces are part of the standby group. Shows the interface definition, such as GigabitEthernet 1/0.

Interfaces that are currently active in the standby group.

Table 2-35 describes the fields shown in the

show interface TenGigabitEthernet display.

Table 2-35 show interface TenGigabitEthernet Field Descriptions

Field

Type

Ethernet address

Internet address

Broadcast address

Netmask

IPv6 address

Maximum Transfer Unit Size

Metric

Packets Received

Input Errors

Input Packets Dropped

Input Packets Overruns

Input Packets Frames

Packet Sent

Output Errors

Output Packets Dropped

Output Packets Overruns

Output Packets Carrier

Output Queue Length

Collisions

Interrupts

Flags

Description

Type of interface. Always Ethernet.

Layer 2 MAC address.

Internet IP address configured for this interface.

Broadcast address configured for this interface.

Netmask configured for this interface.

IPv6 address of the interface.

Current configured MTU value.

Metric setting for the interface. The default is 1. The routing metric is used by the routing protocol to determine the most favorable route. Metrics are counted as additional hops to the destination network or host; the higher the metric value, the less favorable the route.

Total number of packets received by this interface.

Number of incoming errors on this interface.

Number of incoming packets that were dropped on this interface.

Number of incoming packet overrun errors.

Number of incoming packet frame errors.

Total number of packets sent from this interface.

Number of outgoing packet errors.

Number of outgoing packets that were dropped by this interface.

Number of outgoing packet overrun errors.

Number of outgoing packet carrier errors.

Output queue length in bytes.

Number of packet collisions at this interface.

Number of interrupts on this interface.

Interface status indicators. Values include Up, Broadcast,

Running, and Multicast.

2-424

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show interface

Related Commands Command interface

Description

Configures a Gigabit Ethernet or port channel interface.

lacp Turns on LACP.

show lacp Displays LACP information.

show running-config Displays the current running configuration information on the terminal.

show startup-config Displays the startup configuration.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-425

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show inventory

show inventory

To display the system inventory information, use the show inventory command in EXEC configuration mode.

show inventory

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The show inventory command allows you to view the unique device identifier information (UDI) for an

SE. Typically, Cisco SEs contain the following three identification items that make up the UDI:

Product ID (PID)

Version ID (VID)

• Serial number (SN)

This identity information is stored in the SE nonvolatile memory. Each SE has a unique device identifier

(UDI). The UDI shows PID, VID and SN.

The UDI is electronically accessed by the product operating system or network management application to enable identification of unique hardware devices. The data integrity of the UDI is vital to customers.

The UDI that is programmed into the SE’s nonvolatile memory is equivalent to the UDI that is printed on the product label and on the carton label. This UDI is also equivalent to the UDI that can be viewed through any electronic means and in all customer-facing systems and tools. Currently, there is only CLI access to the UDI; there is no SNMP access to the UDI information.

On newer SE models, you can use the show inventory command in EXEC configuration mode to display the SE’s UDI. On older SE models, use the show tech-support command in EXEC configuration mode to display the SE’s UDI.

Examples The following example shows the inventory information for one of the newer SE models (SE-565):

ServiceEngine# show inventory

PID: SE-565-K9 VID: 0 SN: serial_number

In the preceding example, serial number is the serial number of the SE. The version ID is displayed as

“0” because the version number is not available.

Table 2-36 describes the fields shown in the

show inventory display.

2-426

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show inventory

Table 2-36

Field

PID

VID

SN show inventory Field Descriptions

Description

Product ID number of the device.

Version ID number of the device. Displays as 0 if the version number is not available.

Serial number of the device.

The following example shows that you must use the show tech-support command in EXEC configuration mode to display the inventory information on an older SE model:

ServiceEngine# show inventory

Please look at 'sh tech-support' for information!

ServiceEngine# show tech-support

Related Commands Command show tech-support

Description

Displays system information necessary for Cisco Technical Support to assist you with your SE.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-427

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show ip access-list

show ip access-list

To display the access lists that are defined and applied to specific interfaces or applications, use the show ip access-list command in EXEC configuration mode.

show ip access-list [ acl_name | acl_num ]

Syntax Description acl_name acl_num

(Optional) Information for a specific access list, using an alphanumeric identifier up to 30 characters, beginning with a letter.

(Optional) Information for a specific access list, using a numeric identifier

(0 to 99 for standard access lists and 100 to 199 for extended access lists).

Command Defaults Displays information about all defined access lists.

Command Modes EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines Use the show ip access-list command in EXEC configuration mode to display the access lists that have been defined on the current system. Unless you identify a specific access list by name or number, the system displays information about all the defined access lists, including the following sections:

• Available space for new lists and conditions

Defined access lists

References by interface and application

Examples The following example shows sample output from the show ip access-list command:

ServiceEngine# show ip access-list

Space available:

47 access lists

492 access list conditions

Standard IP access list 1

1 permit 10.1.1.2

2 deny 10.1.2.1

(implicit deny any: 2 matches)

total invocations: 2

Extended IP access list 100

1 permit tcp host 10.1.1.1 any

2 permit tcp host 10.1.1.2 any

3 permit tcp host 10.1.1.3 any

(implicit fragment permit: 0 matches)

(implicit deny ip any any: 0 matches)

total invocations: 0

Standard IP access list test

1 permit 1.1.1.1 (10 matches)

2 permit 1.1.1.3

3 permit 1.1.1.2

(implicit deny: 2 matches)

total invocations: 12

2-428

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show ip access-list

Interface access list references:

GigabitEthernet 0/0 inbound 100

Application access list references:

tftp_server standard 1

UDP ports: 69

The following example shows sample output from the show ip access-list command for the access list named test:

ServiceEngine# show ip access-list test

Standard IP access list test

1 permit 1.1.1.1 (10 matches)

2 permit 1.1.1.3

3 permit 1.1.1.2

(implicit deny: 2 matches)

total invocations: 12

Note The system displays the number of packets that have matched a condition statement only if the number is greater than zero.

Related Commands Command clear ip access-list

Description

Clears the HTTP object cache, the hardware interface, statistics, archive working transaction logs, and other settings.

Creates and modifies access lists for controlling access to interfaces or applications.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-429

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show ip bgp

show ip bgp

To display the contents of a particular host in the BGP routing table, use the show ip bgp user command in user EXEC configuration mode.

show ip bgp { ip_address | all | community { community } | ipv4 unicast | memory | neighbors

[ neigh id ] | nexthop-database | summary | prefix/prefix_length }

Syntax Description ip_address all community community ipv4 unicast memory neighbors nexthop-database summary prefix prefix_length

(Optional) IP address entered to filter the output to display only a particular host in the BGP routing table.

(Optional) Displays all address families.

(Optional) Displays BGP Communities.

(Optional) Specifies the BGP Communities.

(Optional) Displays BGP information for Ipv4 address family.

(Optional) Displays BGP information for unicast address family.

(Optional) Displays Memory usage information.

(Optional) Displays Neighbors information.

(Optional) Displays nexthop database.

(Optional) Displays Summarized information of all BGP neighbors.

(Optional) Prefix entered to filter the output to display only a particular network in the BGP routing table.

(Optional) Specifies the prefix length.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes User EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines This command requires a Proximity Engine license.

Examples To display information about an entry in the BGP routing table (for example, 42.1.1.0/24), use the show ip bgp 42.1.1.0/24 command. To locate information by IP address (for example, 42.1.1.1), use the show ip bgp 42.1.1.1 command.

ServiceRouter# show ip bgp 42.1.1.0/24

BGP routing table entry for 42.1.1.0/24, version 12

Paths: (1 available, best # 1)

Flags: on xmit-list, is in urib, is best urib route

Path type: internal, path is valid, is best path

AS-Path: NONE, path sourced internal to AS

192.168.86.3 (metric 0) from 192.168.86.3 (192.168.86.3)

Origin incomplete, MED 0, localpref 100, weight 0

2-430

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show ip bgp

Not advertised to any peer

ServiceRouter# show ip bgp 42.1.1.1

BGP routing table entry for 42.1.1.0/24, version 12

Paths: (1 available, best # 1)

Flags: on xmit-list, is in urib, is best urib route

Path type: internal, path is valid, is best path

AS-Path: NONE, path sourced internal to AS

192.168.86.3 (metric 0) from 192.168.86.3 (192.168.86.3)

Origin incomplete, MED 0, localpref 100, weight 0

Not advertised to any peer

ServiceRouter#

The following sample output shows the display when the advertised community and the configured location community matches:

ServiceRouter# sh ip bgp 1.1.1.1

BGP routing table entry for 1.1.1.1/32, version 4

Paths: (1 available, best # 1)

Flags: on xmit-list, is in urib, is best urib route

Path type: internal, path is valid, is best path

AS-Path: NONE, path sourced internal to AS

48.0.0.8 (metric 0) from 48.0.0.8 (1.1.1.1)

Origin IGP, MED 0, localpref 100, weight 0

Community: 1:1(location specific)

The following sample output shows the display when the community is not advertised to any peer:

ServiceRouter# sh ip bgp 33.1.5.0

BGP routing table entry for 33.1.5.0/24, version 4

Paths: (1 available, best #1)

Flags: on xmit-list, is in urib, is best urib route

Path type: internal, path is valid, is best path

AS-Path: 2 , path sourced external to AS

62.0.0.2 (metric 20) from 26.0.0.6 (10.1.1.1)

Origin IGP, MED 0, localpref 100, weight 0

Community: 5:5(location specific)

Related Commands Command clear ip bgp router bgp

Description

Clears entries in the BGP route table.

Configures a BGP routing process.

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-431

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show ip bgp all

show ip bgp all

To display the contents of the BGP routing table, use the show ip bgp user command in user EXEC configuration mode. show ip bgp { ip_address | prefix / prefix_length | all }

Syntax Description ip_address prefix prefix_length all

(Optional) IP address entered to filter the output to display only a particular host in the BGP routing table.

(Optional) Prefix entered to filter the output to display only a particular network in the BGP routing table.

(Optional) Specifies the prefix length.

(Optional) Displays all BGP routes received by the Proximity Engine.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes User EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines This command requires a Proximity Engine license.

Examples The following example is sample output from the show ip bgp command. The output shows the contents of the BGP routing table:

ServiceRouter# show ip bgp all

BGP table version is 810399, local router ID is 172.20.168.47

Status: s-suppressed, x-deleted, S-stale, d-dampened, h-history,*-valid, >-best

Path type: i-internal, e-external, c-confed, l-local, a-aggregate, r-redist

Origin codes: I - IGP, E - EGP, ? - incomplete

Network Next Hop Metric LocPrf Weight Path

*>i5.5.5.5/32 192.168.86.3 20 100 0 ?

*>i12.1.1.1/32 192.168.86.3 20 100 0 ?

*>i13.1.1.1/32 192.168.86.3 20 100 0 ?

*>i14.1.1.1/32 192.168.86.3 20 100 0 ?

*>i22.22.22.22/32 192.168.86.3 20 100 0 ?

*>i40.1.1.0/24 192.168.86.3 0 100 0 ?

*>i41.1.1.0/24 192.168.86.3 0 100 0 ?

*>i42.1.1.0/24 192.168.86.3 0 100 0 ?

*>i43.1.1.0/24 192.168.86.3 0 100 0 ?

*>i45.1.1.0/24 192.168.86.3 0 100 0 ?

-- More --

Related Commands Command clear ip bgp all router bgp

Description

Clears all BGP neighbors.

Configures a BGP routing process.

2-432

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show ip bgp community

show ip bgp community

To display BGP routes that match a specified BGP community string, use the show ip bgp community user EXEC command. show ip bgp community community_string

Syntax Description community_string Community string for which to display BGP routes.

Command Defaults None

Command Modes User EXEC configuration mode.

Usage Guidelines The show ip bgp community command is used to display BGP route information for a specified community string. To determine whether a community string exists in the BGP table, use the show ip bgp summary command. This command requires a Proximity Engine license.

The show ip bgp community command displays the origin AS and community values. Since the community list may be long, the output is limited to 80 columns. Other community unrelated fields longer display in this command; use the show ip bgp all command to display these fields.

Examples In the following example, show ip bgp summary output can be used to determine that a community string 100:50 exists in the BGP table. The show ip bgp community command displays BGP route information for the community string 100:50. In this example, no route information is present for the community string 100:50:

ServiceRouter# show ip bgp summary

BGP router identifier 1.100.8.92, local AS number 23

BGP table version is 2, IPv4 Unicast config peers 2, capable peers 0

0 network entries and 0 paths using 0 bytes of memory

BGP attribute entries [ 0/0 ] , BGP AS path entries [ 0/0 ]

BGP community entries [ 0/0 ] , BGP clusterlist entries [ 0/0 ]

BGP Location Communities: 100:50-100:100

Neighbor V AS MsgRcvd MsgSent TblVer InQ OutQ Up/Down State/PfxRcd

192.168.82.1 4 23 0 0 0 0 0 4d10h Idle

192.168.82.10 4 100 0 0 0 0 0 4d10h Idle

ServiceRouter# show ip bgp community 100:50

BGP table version is 2, local router ID is 1.100.8.92

Status: s-suppressed, x-deleted, S-stale, d-dampened, h-history, *-valid, >-best

Path type: i-internal, e-external, c-confed, l-local, a-aggregate, r-redist

Origin codes: I - IGP, E - EGP, ? - incomplete

Network Next Hop Metric LocPrf Weight Path

ServiceRouter#

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

2-433

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show ip bgp community

The following example shows the output for the show ip bgp community command:

ServiceRouter# show ip bgp community sh ip bgp community

BGP table version is 32, local router ID is 1.100.9.206

Status: s-suppressed, x-deleted, S-stale, d-dampened, h-history, *-valid, >-best

Path type: i-internal, e-external, c-confed, l-local, a-aggregate, r-redist

Community: @ - source, # - target

Network Next Hop Origin AS Community List

*>e2.4.1.0/24 192.168.82.2 33

*>e3.1.4.0/24 192.168.82.2 23 @23:999

*>e5.5.5.5/32 192.168.82.2 23 @23:999

*>e12.1.1.0/24 192.168.82.1 23

*>e12.1.1.1/32 192.168.82.2 23 @23:100 @#44:100

*>e13.1.1.0/24 192.168.82.1 23

*>e13.1.1.1/32 192.168.82.2 23 @#44:100

*>e14.1.1.1/32 192.168.82.2 23 @#44:100

*>e40.1.1.0/24 192.168.82.2 23 @23:999

*>e41.1.1.0/24 192.168.82.2 23 @23:999

*>e42.1.1.0/24 192.168.82.2 33

*>e43.1.1.0/24 192.168.82.2 33

*>e44.1.1.0/24 192.168.82.2 33

*>e45.1.1.0/24 192.168.82.2 33

*>e46.1.1.0/24 192.168.82.2 33

*>e50.1.1.0/24 192.168.82.2 23 @23:999

*>e51.1.1.0/24 192.168.82.2 23 @23:999

*>e52.1.1.0/24 192.168.82.2 33

*>e53.1.1.0/24 192.168.82.2 33

*>e54.1.1.0/24 192.168.82.2 33

*>e55.1.1.0/24 192.168.82.2 33

*>e62.1.1.1/32 192.168.82.2 23 @23:999

*>e62.62.62.0/24 192.168.82.2 23 @23:999

*>e108.0.32.0/24 192.168.82.2 33

*>e171.70.0.0/16 192.168.82.2 33

*>e171.71.0.0/16 192.168.82.2 33

*>e172.20.0.0/16 192.168.82.2 33

*>e192.168.81.0/24 192.168.82.2 23

*>e203.0.0.205/32 192.168.82.2 23 @23:999

ServiceRouter#

Related Commands Command location community router bgp

Description

BGP location-specific community configuration.

Configures a BGP routing process.

2-434

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer 4.3.1 Command Reference Guide

Cisco Videoscape Distribution Suite, Internet Streamer Software Commands show ip bgp ipv4 unicast